DS 2000 Hardware and Software
This system uses fixed slot software. During installation, you can plug DSTU PCBs only into slots
CN1 and CN2. You can plug an ASTU PCB only into slot CN2 (in place of the second DSTU
PCB). Install ATRU PCBs only into slots CN3 and CN4. Refer to your Hardware Manual for
additional information.
DS2000
Software Manual
Part No. 80000SWG02
Issue 1-0, October 1999
010000/101499
This manual has been developed by Nitsuko America. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel, and
should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving
this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:
Nitsuko America, Telecom Division
4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484
Attention: Manager, Technical Publications
http://www.nitsuko.com
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation
with respect to, any of the Equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice and Nitsuko America has no
obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, Nitsuko America also reserves the right, without
prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this
manual is complete or accurate in all respects and Nitsuko America shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event
shall Nitsuko America be liable for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual. This
document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document
may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of Nitsuko America.
© 1999 by Nitsuko America. All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
telemanuals.com
Chapter 1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Initial System Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Charts and Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2-OPX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alternate Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Attendant Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Attendant Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Fault Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Ring Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Barge In (Intrusion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Call Coverage Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Call Forwarding Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Call Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Call Waiting / Camp-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Caller ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Central Office Calls, Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Central Office Calls, Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Check Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Computer Telephony Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Data Communications Interface (DCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Dial Number Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Dial Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Direct Inward Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Direct Inward Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Direct Station Selection (DSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Direct Trunk Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Do Not Disturb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
E911 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Equal Access Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Extended Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Extension Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
DS2000 Software Manual
Table of Contents ◆ i
telemanuals.com
External Alerting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Flexible Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Forced Trunk Disconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Group Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Group Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Headset Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Interactive Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Key Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Line Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Meet-Me Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Microphone Mute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Monitor / Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Multiple Directory Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Music On Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Names for Extensions and Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Night Service / Night Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Off-Hook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
PBX/Centrex Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Prime Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Privacy Release Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Private Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Pulse to Tone Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Repeat Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Reverse Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Ring Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Ringdown Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Save Number Dialed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Selectable Display Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Split (Alternate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Station Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Station Message Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
ii ◆ Table of Contents
DS2000 Software Manual
telemanuals.com
Station Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
System Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
System Programming Backup and Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
System Programming List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
System Programming Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
System Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
System Timers, Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
System Timers, Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Toll Restriction Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Traffic Management Report (TMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Trunk Group Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Trunk Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Voice Announce Unit (VAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Voice Prompting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Volume Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Year 2000 Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
DS2000 Software Manual
Table of Contents ◆ iii
telemanuals.com
Chapter 2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Introduction to Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Before You Start Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
0100 - Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
0101 - Class of Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
0200 - Tenant Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
0201 - Tenant Option Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
0300 - System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
0301 - System Options (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
0302 - System Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
0400 - Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
0401 - System Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
0402 - Trunk Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
0403 - Station Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
0404 - Analog Station Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
0500 - System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
0501 - Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
0506 - ACI/CPU Analog Port Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
0507 - DCI Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
0510 - ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
0600 - Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
0601 - Toll Restriction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
0700 - Analog Communications Interface (ACI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
0701 - Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
0800 - Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
0801 - Selectable Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
1000 - Trunk Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
1001 - Trunk Port Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
1002 - Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
1003 - Trunk Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
1004 - Loop Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
1100 - Speed Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
1500 - Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
1501 - Extension Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
1700 - Key Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
1702 - Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
1703 - DSS Key Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
1800 - Extension Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
1801 - Extension Port Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
1805 - Ring Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
1806 - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
1807 - Extension Options (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
iv ◆ Table of Contents
DS2000 Software Manual
9800 - System Utilities, Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
9801 - Copy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
9901 - Reset Station Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
9902 - Reset Trunk Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
9903 - System and PCB Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
9904 - Side Tone Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
9905 - Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
9906 - Database Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
9907 - Database Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
9999 - System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
DS2000 Software Manual
Table of Contents ◆ v
vi ◆ Table of Contents
DS2000 Software Manual
Introduction
Chapter 1
Features
Introduction
Introduction
Before Reading This Section
This section provides detailed information on the system’s features. If you don’t know what the various features are, review the Table of Contents for this section and the manual’s Index. After
reviewing, turn back to this section for the specifics.
Using This Section
The features in this section are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This section subdivides each
feature definition into headings as follows:
Description
Read Description to get an overview of the feature. Along with the feature’s description are the
Conditions and Default Setting. Conditions provides the feature’s operational limits (if any).
Default Setting outlines how the feature works with the default (factory installed) Programming
List. When initially installed, the system uses the default setting. For specific default settings on
each program, refer to the chart at the end of this manual.
In each feature description there are two icons which provide additional essential information about
the feature:
This is Feature Benefit icon. Read this text to find out how the feature can help co-worker’s become
more productive and streamline company-wide communications.
This is the Software History icon. Since Nitsuko America is constantly enhancing your system, all
options may not be available in all software levels. Read this text to find out the specifics.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 1
Introduction
Programming Guide
The Programming Guide is an easy-to-use chart that guides you step-by-step through programming
the feature. If you’re not sure how to set up a feature, start first with the Programming Guide.
Programming List
Programming List explains the system Programming List that lets you customize the feature. Some
features require Programming List; others don’t. If you decide to customize a feature, use Section 2
to enter the change into the system.
Other Related Features
Read this part to learn how the feature interacts with other features.
Feature Operation
This part provides you with instructions on how to use each feature. These instructions are also provided in the DS2000 Feature Handbook (P/N 80000MFH**). Also see the DS2000 Multibutton
Telephone Quick Reference Guide (P/N 80000MBG**).
2 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Introduction
System Configuration
The total number of components you can install and connect to your system depends on power supply capacity and the System Load Factor. Use the table below and the following steps to calculate
the System Load Factor.
Notes for 4-Slot Cabinets with Fixed Slot Software
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If your 4-slot cabinet uses fixed slot software, you can plug DSTU PCBs only into slots CN1
and CN2.
You can plug an ASTU PCB only into slot CN2 (in place of the second DSTU PCB).
Install ATRU PCBs only into slots CN3 and CN4.
System Load Factor in fixed slot systems is only an issue if you have DSS Consoles and 2OPX Modules installed.
The Release Notes that came with your system indicate if it uses fixed slot software.
Check your system’s Hardware Manual for more installation details.
Maximum configuration for 4-slot cabinets with fixed slot software is 16 trunks and 32
extensions.
Notes for 4-Slot and 8-Slot Cabinets with Universal Slot Software
•
•
•
•
A 4-slot cabinet with universal slot software cannot connect more than 40 extensions,
regardless of System Load Factor.
A 4-slot cabinet with universal slot software cannot connect more than 24 trunks, regardless
of System Load Factor.
An 8-slot cabinet with universal slot software cannot connect more than 96 extensions,
regardless of System Load Factor.
An 8-slot cabinet with universal slot software cannot connect more than 48 trunks, regardless of System Load Factor.
To check your system configuration:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicate the quantity for each item installed in the Qty column.
For each item, multiply the Qty times the Load Factor and enter the value in the Total Load
column.
Add all the values in the Total Load column and enter the value in row 1.
Determine the System Load Factor capacity of the power supplies installed in your system
and enter the total in row 2.
A 4-Slot Cabinet can have only 1 power supply. An 8-Slot Cabinet can have up to 3
power supplies. You cannot have more than two 16DSTU PCBs per power supply.
Compare the entry in row 2 to your entry in row 1. Row 1 must always be equal to or less
than the entry in row 2.
Do not operate your system if the System Load Factor total
(row 1) exceeds the allowable value (row 2).
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 3
Introduction
System Load Factor Calculations
Item
Load Factor
16DSTU PCB
16
4ASTU PCB
8
8ASTU PCB
12
110-Button DSS Console
2
24-Button DSS Console
1
2-OPX Module
3
Qty
Total Load
1. Total load for this configuration:
2. If you have one power supply installed, enter 48.
If you have two power supplies installed, enter 80.
If you have three power supplies installed, enter 112.
(2 16DSTU PCBs maximum per power supply)
Typical 4-Slot Cabinet Universal Slot Software Configurations
The following configurations do not apply to fixed slot software. Refer to the Release Notes that
came with your system to find out if you have fixed slot software.
●
16 x 32 (16 trunks and 32 digital extensions)
Recommended for sites with no Voice Mail and high trunk usage.
●
24 x 16 (24 trunks and 16 digital extensions)
Recommended for sites with no Voice Mail and very high trunk usage.
●
8 x 16 x 16 (8 trunks, 16 digital extensions and 16 analog extensions)
Recommended for sites with Voice Mail, normal trunk usage and high analog extension
usage.
●
16 x 8 x 8 (16 trunks, 8 digital extensions and 8 analog extensions)
Recommended for sites with Voice Mail, high trunk usage and high analog extension usage.
●
8 x 32 x 8 (8 trunks, 32 digital extensions and eight analog extensions)
Recommended for sites with Voice Mail, normal to low trunk usage and low analog extension
usage.
4 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
telemanuals.com
Introduction
User-Programmable Features
Extension users may be able to customize certain features. These are the User-Programmable Features and include:
●
Call Coverage Key Ringing
●
Group Call Pickup Key Ringing
●
Line Key Ringing
●
Intercom Voice Announce Mode
●
Speed Dial
Table 1: User-Programmable Features
For this feature
Dial this code
When you are
Call Coverage
# + R C (72) + Press Call
Coverage key repeatedly to
select ringing mode
Setting the ringing mode for
your extension’s Call Coverage
keys
Group Call Pickup
# + R G (74) + Press Group
Setting the ringing mode for
your extension’s Group Call
Pickup keys
Call Pickup key repeatedly
to select ringing mode
Line Keys
# + R L (75) + Press Line
Key repeatedly to select
ringing mode
Intercom
Speed Dial
DS2000 Software Manual
Setting the ringing mode for
your extension’s line keys
# + I V (48)
Enabling voice-announce for
your incoming Intercom calls
# + I R (47)
Enabling ringing for your
incoming Intercom calls
ICM + ## + 200-299
Programming System Speed
Dial numbers
ICM + ## + 701-720
Programming Personal Speed
Dial numbers
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 5
telemanuals.com
Initial System Startup
Initial System Startup
Initial Startup Programming
Initial Startup Programming (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Enter the programming mode.
•
•
From any display telephone:
Press ICM + #*#* + Password + HOLD.
The default system passwords are:
Installer (level 3) = 372000
System Administrator 2 (level 2) = 9999
System Administrator 3 (level 1) = 0000
Step 2: Assign the correct circuit type to your installed trunks.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416),
enter the correct circuit type for each installed
trunk:
00 = Uninstalled
51 = Loop start DTMF
52 = Loop start DP
Step 3: Assign the correct circuit type to your installed extensions.
•
In Program 1801 - Extension Circuit Type
(page 449), enter the correct circuit type for each
installed extension:
00 = Uninstalled
01 = 22-Button Standard
02 = 22-Button Display
06 = 34-Button Display
09 = 34-Button Super Display
15 = Analog station
21 = 2OPX
Step 4: By default, each extension has full access to each trunk. Do you want to change
this assignment?
•
If yes
•
6 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
For each extension in Program 1803 - Extension
Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign the
access options for each trunk. The options are:
0 = No access
1 = Incoming only
2 = Outgoing only
3 = Full access
Use Program 9801 - Copy Command (page 472),
to simplify your programming.
DS2000 Software Manual
telemanuals.com
Initial System Startup
Initial Startup Programming (Page 2 of 2)
•
If no
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), make no changes from the
default assignments.
Step 5: By default, each extension rings for every incoming trunk call. Do you want to
change this assignment?
•
If yes
•
•
For each extension in Program 1805 - Ring
Assignments (page 466), assign ringing for each
trunk. The options are:
1 = Lamp only (day and night)
2 = Ringing day and night
3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day
4 = Delay ring day and night
Use Program 9801 - Copy Command (page 472),
to simplify your programming.
The system attendant (extension 300) can put
these trunks in the night mode by pressing their
preassigned Night Key (key 11).
•
For each extension in Program 1805 - Ring
Assignments (page 466), make no changes from
the default assignments.
•
Turn to Voice Mail on page 340 and review the
required Voice Mail programming.
•
Go to the next step.
If no
Step 6: Does your system have Voice Mail?
If yes
If no
Step 7: Do you want to change the default system passwords?
•
In Program 9905 - Password (page 478), change
the passwords from their default settings.
•
In Program 9905 - Password (page 478), do not
change the passwords from their default settings.
If yes
If no
Step 8: Do you want to return the system to its factory installed (default) programming?
•
In Program 9999 - System Initialization
(page 482), reinstate the factory installed programming. This erases all your programming
and returns the system to its initial default settings.
•
In Program 9999 - System Initialization
(page 482), do not reinstate the factory installed
programming.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 7
Charts and Illustrations
Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Dial Codes (by Number)
For this feature
Dial this code
When you are
Call Forwarding
*30
Canceling Call Forwarding
at an extension
*32 + Extension or 0 (for
Enabling Call Forwarding
Busy/No Answer
operator)
*34 + Extension or 0 (for
operator)
*36 + Extension or 0 (for
operator)
Selectable Display
Messaging
8 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
*38 + Message (600-615)
Also use Function Key
Enabling Call Forwarding
All Calls
Enabling Call Forwarding
No Answer
Enabling a Selectable Display Message
DS2000 Software Manual
Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: System Number Plan/Capacities (Page 1 of 2)
4-Slot System
8-Slot System
System Options
•
Classes of Service
1-15
•
Conference
•
Extension Hunting (ACD/UCD) Master
Numbers
•
Extension Hunting Groups
8 (1-8)
•
Group Call Pickup Groups
8 (1-8, 0 = unassigned)
•
Privacy Release Groups
•
Speed Dial, Personal
20 bins at each extension (701-720)
See Speed Dial (page 263) for additional information on
Speed Dial capacities.
•
Speed Dial. System
10 (20-29), 100 (200-299), 1000 (2000-2999)
See Speed Dial (page 263) for additional information on
Speed Dial capacities.
•
Tenant Groups
•
Timeslots
•
Toll Restriction Levels
32 simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences
system-wide)
8 simultaneous Conferences maximum
8 parties maximum in any one Conference
8
16 (1-16, 0 = unassigned)
1
Non-blocking
7 (1-7, 0 = no restriction)
Trunks
•
Direct Trunk Access Codes
•
Line Dial Up Codes
•
Ring Groups
•
Trunk Group Access Codes
90-98
•
Trunk Groups
9 (0-8)
DS2000 Software Manual
401-416 (fixed slot)
401-424 (u-slot)
401-448
#901-#916 (fixed slot)
#901-#924 (u-slot)
#901-#948
8 (1-8)
0 = No assignment
Ring Group master numbers can be 100-299, 332-400, or
417-899. They cannot be in the extension (300-331) or trunk
(401-416) number range. By default, the systems uses codes
beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/trunk
group access.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 9
Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: System Number Plan/Capacities (Page 2 of 2)
•
Trunk Ports
4-Slot System
8-Slot System
16 (1-16) (fixed slot)
24 (1-24) (u-slot)
48 (1-48)
Extensions
•
Attendant (Operator) Access Number
•
Attendants
•
DSS Consoles
•
Telephone Extension Numbers
•
Telephone Port Numbers
•
Total Number of Station Devices
•
Voice Mail and UCD Hunting Master
Numbers
•
Voice Mail Ports
0 (single operator)
01-04 (multiple operators)
4
System software provides 4 unique DSS Console configurations. The System Load Factor limits the total number that
you can install.
32 (300-331) (fixed slot)
40 (300-339) (u-slot)
96 (300-395)
32 (1-32) (fixed slot)
40 (1-40) (u-slot)
96 (1-96)
32 (fixed slot) (may be limited by load factor)
40 (u-slot) (may be limited
by load factor)
96 (may be limited by load
factor)
1
UCD Hunting group master numbers can be 100-299, 332400, or 417-899. They cannot be in the extension (300-331) or
trunk (401-416) number range. By default, the systems uses
codes beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/
trunk group access.
Limited by available analog ports.
Paging and Park
•
Page Relays
One set on CPRU that close when External Page is active
•
Page Zones
7 zones (1-7) and All Call (0)
All Call and zone 1 broadcast on the CPRU External Page
port
•
Park Orbits
10 (60-69)
Orbits 68 and 69 have extended (5 min.) timers
Passwords
•
System Administrator 1 (Level 1)
0000
•
System Administrator 2 (Level 2)
9999
•
Installer (Level 3)
10 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
372000
DS2000 Software Manual
Charts and Illustrations
80000 - 21
CLEAR
BIN 1
BIN 2
BIN 3
BIN 4
BIN 5
CHECK
BIN 6
BIN 7
BIN 8
BIN 9
BIN 10
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
LINE 6
LINE 8
FIXED
LOOP 0
FIXED
LOOP 0
AUTO
TIMER
ALL
PAGE
MW
ICM
FLASH
DND
DIAL
MIC
LND
SPK
LINE 7
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
8
9
7
OPER
0
VOL
CONF
HOLD
Figure 1: 22-Button Display Telephone
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 11
Charts and Illustrations
80000 - 22
CLEAR
CHECK
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
LINE 6
LINE 7
LINE 8
FIXED
LOOP 0
FIXED
LOOP 0
AUTO
TIMER
ALL
PAGE
MW
ICM
FLASH
DND
DIAL
MIC
LND
SPKR
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
OPER
0
VOL
CONF
HOLD
Figure 2: 22-Button Standard Telephone
12 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Charts and Illustrations
80000 - 10
CLEAR
BIN 1
BIN 2
BIN 3
BIN 4
BIN 5
CHECK
BIN 6
BIN 7
BIN 8
BIN 9
BIN 10
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
LINE 6
LINE 7
LINE 8
FIXED
LOOP 0
FIXED
LOOP 0
AUTO
TIMER
ALL
PAGE
These keys are
undefined
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
OPER
MW
ICM
FLASH
DND
DIAL
MIC
LND
SPK
0
VOL
CONF
HOLD
Figure 3: 34-Button Display Telephone
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 13
Charts and Illustrations
80000 - 23
CHECK
LINE 1
LINE 7
CLEAR
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
LINE 6
LINE 8
FIXED
LOOP 0
FIXED
LOOP 0
AUTO
TIMER
ALL
PAGE
These keys are
undefined
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
OPER
MW
ICM
FLASH
DND
DIAL
MIC
LND
SPKR
0
VOL
CONF
HOLD
Figure 4: 34-Button Super Display Telephone
14 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Charts and Illustrations
80000 - 25
300
312
301
313
302
314
303
315
304
316
305
317
306
318
307
319
308
320
309
321
310
322
311
323
Figure 5: 24-Button DSS Console
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 15
Charts and Illustrations
80000 - 24
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
LINE 6
LINE 7
LINE 8
200
201
LINE 9
LINE 10 LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13 LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
PG 0
PG 1
PK 0
PK 1
These keys are
undefined
Figure 6: 110-Button DSS Console
16 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
2-OPX Module
2-OPX Module
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00
DS2000 Software Manual
Available. See see Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions on
page 207.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 17
Account Codes
Account Codes
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
18 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display
Description
The Alphanumeric Display messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers
and customize features.
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The 22- and 34-Button Display Telephones have a two-line, 20-character per line alphanumeric display. The first line displays the date and time (while idle) and feature status messages. The second
line displays the Soft Key definitions.
The 34-Button Super Display Telephone has an eight-line, 20-character per line alphanumeric display. The first line displays the data and time (while idle) and feature status messages, just like the
22- and 34-Button Display Telephones. Lines 2-8 are the comprehensive Super Display Telephone
soft key definitions.
●
To learn more about the display telephones, see 22-Button Display Telephone on page 11, see
34-Button Display Telephone on page 13 and see 34-Button Super Display Telephone on
page 14.
●
To learn more about the Soft Keys, see Soft Keys on page 261.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled for all display telephones.
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Soft Keys (page 261)
The interactive Soft keys provide users with intuitive access to the telephone’s features.
Volume Controls (page 353)
While a feature is active, pressing VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ adjusts the volume of the active feature.
Feature Operation
Refer to the individual features for feature operation.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 19
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
20 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Alternate Attendant
Alternate Attendant
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 21
Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant Call Queuing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Attendant Call Queuing helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the
overflow destination for unanswered calls.
An unlimited number of callers can queue for the attendant. The callers hear ringback while they
wait for the attendant to answer — not busy tone. If you have the attendant as the overflow destination for Direct Inward Lines, for example, unanswered DILs will “stack up” at the attendant until
they are answered
Operator Call Key
The last programmable key on an attendant telephone is permanently assigned as an Operator Call
Key. When the operator has Intercom calls waiting to be answered, the calls queue under this key.
The key winks (on) when calls are queued.
The Operator Call Key is a permanent assignment for all extensions assigned as operators. You cannot change this assignment. Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable feature.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Assign system attendants.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
The Operator Call Key activates off-hook signaling.
Ringing Line Preference (page 251)
Ringing Line Preference will not answer a call ringing the Operator Call Key.
Voice Mail (page 340)
● TRF transfers to the attendant from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant flash the Operator Call key and the Ring Indicator lamp. The call does not flash a line/loop key. (Note that
Ringing Line Preference will not pick up a call ringing the attendant’s Call Queue key.)
● UTRF transfers to the attendant from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant flash the
trunk’s line/loop key and the Ring Indicator lamp.
22 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Attendant Call Queuing
Feature Operation
To answer a call flashing the Operator Call Key:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Press the flashing Operator Call Key.
This places your outside call on Hold and answers the waiting call.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 23
Attendant Position
Attendant Position
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The attendant is the system’s call processing focal point.
The attendant is the focal point for call procesing within the system. The system can have up to four
attendants. In addition to the features of a standard keyset, the attendant also has the following
unique capabilities (refer to the respective feature for details):
●
Attendant Call Queuing (page 22)
Incoming Intercom calls from co-workers queue for the attendant. The callers never hear busy
tone.
●
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
The attendant can break into another extension user’s established call. This option is enabled
in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1).
●
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
Direct Trunk Access lets the attendant user dial a code to access an individual trunk. This
option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1).
●
Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 137)
In an emergency, the attendant can release (disconnect) another user’s active trunk call. This
option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1).
●
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
An attendant with a Night key can put the system in the night mode. This option is enabled in
the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1).
●
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service (page 242)
The attendant can remove problem trunks from service —then return them to service once the
problem is corrected. This option is enabled because the attendant has Direct Trunk Access
enabled in their Class of Service (COS 1).
●
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
The attendant can Camp On (queue) for a busy trunk. This option is enabled in the attendant’s
Class of Service (COS 1).
The attendant should use a 34-Button Display or 34-Button Super Display Telephone. In addition,
most attendants should find a 24-Button or 110-Button Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
helpful when processing calls.
Conditions
Ringing Line Preference will not pick up a call ringing the attendant’s Call Queue key.
Default Setting
The system has one operator assigned to extension 300.
24 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Attendant Position
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Attendant
Position
Step 1: Install a 34-Button Display or 34-Button Super Display telephone for the attendant.
•
A 24-Button or 110-Button DSS Console will
also help the attendant process calls more quickly.
Step 2: Should the system have more than one attendant?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If No
•
•
In Program 0301 - Number of Operators
(page 370), enter 2-4.
In Program 0301 - Operator 1 Extension
(page 370), Program 0301 - Operator 2 Extension (page 370), Program 0301 - Operator 3
Extension (page 370), and Program 0301 - Operator 4 Extension (page 370), assign the operator
extensions.
In Program 1802 - Extension’s Operator
(page 457), assign an operator to each extension.
In Program 0301 - Number of Operators
(page 370), enter1.
In Program 0301 - Operator 1 Extension
(page 370), assign the system operator’s extension (normally 300).
In Program 1802 - Extension’s Operator
(page 457), assign each extension to the operator
(normally 300).
Step 3: While busy on a call, should the attendant be audibly notified of incoming calls?
•
Program 1802 - Off-Hook Signaling for CO Calls
(page 456), at the attendant’s extension enter 1 for
Call Waiting beeps, 2 for off-hook ringing.
•
Program 1802 - Off-Hook Signaling for CO Calls
(page 456), enter 0 for the attendant’s extension.
If yes
If No
Step 4: Should the first digit an extension user dials to reach an operator be 0 (e.g., 0 for
single operator systems, 01-04 for multiple operator systems)?
•
In Program 0501 - Digit 0 Options (page 392), be
sure this option is left at its default setting (Function Type = 1 and Expected Digits = 2).
•
In Program 0501 - Digit 0 Options (page 392),
exchange the digit 0 settings with the new digit.
•
Do not change the Expected Digits entry for the
digit 0.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 25
Attendant Position
Programming List
Note: Designating an extension as an operator in Program 0301 automatically assigns Class of Service 01
to that extension. If you change your operator setup and make an operator a “normal” extension, be
sure to go back and manually reassign a new Class of Service (2-15) to that extension. Note that the
attendant’s Class of Service options are fully customizable.
Program 0301 - Number of Operators (page 370)
Specify the number of operators in the system (1-4).
Program 0301 - Operator 1 Extension (page 370)
Assign the 1st operator’s extension number. Be sure you have entered the correct number in
the Number of Operators option above.
Program 0301 - Operator 2 Extension (page 370)
Assign the 2nd operator’s extension number. Be sure you have entered the correct number in
the Number of Operators option above.
Program 0301 - Operator 3 Extension (page 370)
Assign the 3rd operator’s extension number. Be sure you have entered the correct number in
the Number of Operators option above.
Program 0301 - Operator 4 Extension (page 370)
Assign the 4th operator’s extension number. Be sure you have entered the correct number in
the Number of Operators option above.
Program 0501 - Digit 0 Options (page 392)
Assign the digit(s) the system will use for operator access (normally 0 and 01-04). Do not
change the Expected Digits entry for the digit 0.
Program 1802 - Extension’s Operator (page 457)
Assign the extension’s operator (300-331). This is the co-worker the extension user reaches
when they dial 0.
Program 1802 - Off-Hook Signaling for CO Calls (page 456)
To have the system audibly alert the operator when trunk calls are waiting, assign an extension’s Off-Hook Signaling options for trunk calls (0 = no Off-Hook Signaling, 1 = Call Wait
beeps over speaker, 2 = Off hook ringing.
Other Related Features
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Barge In on an attendant.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Camp On to an attendant.
Callback (page 54)
Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot leave a Callback for an attendant.
Class of Service (page 73)
By default, the system assigns Class of Service 1 to the attendant. This provides the attendant
with Alternate Attendant, Barge In, Call Forwarding Off Premise, Direct Trunk Access,
Forced Trunk Disconnect, Night Service, and Trunk Queuing (Camp On) capability.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
The attendant can have Do Not Disturb. In addition, pressing DND at the attendant activates
the night mode for any trunks directly terminated to the attendant.
Group Ring (page 144)
System operators will not ring for Ring Group calls.
Intercom (page 165)
Designate each extension’s operator.
Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 192)
Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Monitor an attendant.
26 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Attendant Position
Privacy (page 226)
Since the attendant is never busy for Intercom calls, the attendant always has Privacy enabled.
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service (page 242)
Normally, the attendant should be able to remove extensions and trunks from service.
Voice Mail (page 340)
● TRF transfers to the attendant from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant flash the Operator Call key and the Ring Indicator lamp. The call does not flash a line/loop key. (Note that
Ringing Line Preference will not pick up a call ringing the attendant’s Call Queue key.)
● UTRF transfers to the attendant from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant flash the
trunk’s line/loop key and the Ring Indicator lamp.
Feature Operation
To call the attendant:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
Dial 0.
Two beeps.
ICM and SPK on.
This calls the attendant assigned to your extension. If your system has multiple attendants, you can reach them by dialing 01-04.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 27
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available. Also see Extension Hunting on page 121.
28 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Automatic Fault Reporting
Automatic Fault Reporting
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 29
Automatic Handsfree
Automatic Handsfree
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Automatic Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to answer a call or
use a feature.
Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing a key
— without lifting the handset or pressing SPK first. If enabled, the system provides Automatic
Handsfree for:
●
Call Coverage Keys
●
Central Office Calls (line and loop calls)
●
Group Call Pickup keys
●
Hotline Keys
●
Intercom (ICM key)
●
Last Number Redial (LND key)
●
Paging keys
●
Park keys
●
Personal Speed Dial bin keys
●
Personal and System Speed Dial keys
The system always provides Automatic Handsfree for:
●
Dial Number Preview
●
Directory Dialing
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
30 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Automatic Handsfree
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Automatic
Handsfree
Step 1: IShould an extension be able to use Automatic Handsfree?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Automatic Handsfree
(page 367), enter Y to enable Automatic Handsfree system wide.
In Program 1802 - Automatic Handsfree
(page 456), enter Y to enable Automatic Handsfree for the extension.
In Program 1802 - Automatic Handsfree
(page 456), enter N to enable Automatic Handsfree for the extension.
Step 2: Do you want to disable Automatic Handsfree for all extensions system-wide?
•
In Program 0201 - Automatic Handsfree
(page 367), enter Y to enable Automatic Handsfree for all extensions system-wide.
•
In Program 0201 - Automatic Handsfree
(page 367), enter N to disable Automatic Handsfree for all extensions system-wide.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0201 - Automatic Handsfree (page 367)
Enter Y to enable Automatic Handsfree system-wide.
Program 1802 - Automatic Handsfree (page 456)
Enter Y to enable Automatic Handsfree.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 31
Automatic Handsfree
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without
first lifting the handset or pressing SPK. Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a
line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPK.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback (page 150)
Process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset).
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
While in the headset mode, Automatic Handsfree simplifies answering trunk calls.
Line Keys (page 176)
Automatic Handsfree allows the keyset user to answer a call ringing a line key without lifting
the handset; they just press the line key instead.
Loop Keys (page 179)
Automatic Handsfree allows the keyset user to answer a call ringing a loop key without lifting
the handset; they just press the loop key instead.
Feature Operation
If enabled, Automatic Handsfree operation is automatic when you press the key.
32 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Automatic Ring Down
Automatic Ring Down
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available. See Ringdown Extension on page 249.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 33
Automatic Route Selection
Automatic Route Selection
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
34 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Background Music
Background Music
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Broadcast music through the telephone speaker for a more pleasing work environment.
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in keysets. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the extension is idle. Incoming calls and
Paging announcements temporarily override (turn off) Background Music.
Background Music requires a customer-provided music source. You connect the Background Music
music source to pins 3 and 6 in the CPU’s 8-pin mod jack. Using the DS2000 installation cable,
these pins punch down as 3 and 4. The music source you use for Background Music must be compatible with the following specifications:
Table 4: Music Source Specifications
Input Impedance
10K Ohms
Relative Input Level
+18 dBr (+/- dBr) at 1.0 kHz
Note:
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the America Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television
broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Background Music feature of telecommunications systems. Nitsuko America hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled system-wide and at each extension.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up
Background Music
Step 1: Should Background Music be enabled system-wide?
•
If yes
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0201 - Background Music (page 368),
enter Y to enable Backgorund Music systemwide.
Connect the music source to the CPRU music terminals.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 35
Background Music
Step-by-step guide for setting up
Background Music
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Background Music (page 368),
enter N to disable Backgorund Music systemwide.
Step 2: Once enabled system-wide, should individual extension have Background Music?
•
In Program 1802 - BGM (page 457), enter Y to
enable Backgorund Music for the extension.
•
In Program 1802 - BGM (page 457), enter N to
disable Backgorund Music for the extension.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0201 - Background Music (page 368)
Enter Y for this option to enable Background Music system-wide.
Program 1802 - BGM (page 457)
Enter Y to enable Background Music at the extension.
Other Related Features
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
DND does not affect the operation of Background Music.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
Background Music plays in the headset when the extension is in the headset mode.
Music On Hold (page 195)
Background Music and Music on Hold share the same music source.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
Background Music is not available to On- and Off-Premise extensions.
Feature Operation
To turn Background Music on and off:
1.
2.
Do not lift handset or press SPK.
Press HOLD.
36 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Barge In (Intrusion)
Barge In (Intrusion)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
In an emergency, use Barge In to get through to a co-worker right away.
Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call. This sets
up a three-way conversation between the intruding extension and the two parties on the initial call.
The user can Barge In on an Intercom call or a trunk call.
!! CAUTION !!
Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature may be interpreted as an
invasion of privacy.
Conditions
Barge-In uses a system Conference circuit. See Conference on page 79 for more.
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Barge In
Step 1: Should an extension be able to Barge In on a co-worker’s call?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Barge-In (Intrusion)
(page 362), enter Y to enable Barge In in the
extension’s Class of Service.
In Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363), enter N to
disable Privacy in the extension’s Class of Service.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 0101 - Barge-In (Intrusion)
(page 362), enter N to disable Barge In in the
extension’s Class of Service.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 37
Barge In (Intrusion)
Programming List
Program 0101 - Barge-In (Intrusion) (page 362)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to allow the extension to Barge In on another extension.
Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter N to disable Privacy for the extension.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Barge In on an attendant.
Conference (page 79)
An extension user can Barge In on a Conference.
Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 137)
As an alternative to Barging In, disconnect the trunk instead.
Privacy (page 226)
Privacy blocks Barge In attempts.
Feature Operation
To Barge-In on a call:
1.
Call busy extension.
OR
Press line key for busy trunk.
OR
Press ICM and dial 401 for busy trunk (i.e., using Direct Trunk Access).
OR
Press ICM and dial #901 for busy trunk (i.e., using Line Dial-up).
OR
Press ICM and dial Trunk Group access code (e.g., 9).
Busy tone.
N/A
2.
Dial 4.
Two beeps.
N/A
3.
Join the conversation in progress.
38 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Battery Backup
Battery Backup
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The CPU PCB provides temporary backup of system memory and the time and date.
In the event of commercial AC power failure, the battery on the CPU PCB provides short-term
backup of system memory and the system time and date (Real Time Clock). This battery will hold
memory and time and date for up to 10-14 days. When commercial AC power is restored, the system restarts with all programming and the time and date intact.
Additional Battery Backup capability can be provided by a customer-supplied Uninterruptable
Power Supply (UPS). The length of the time the UPS will power the system when power fails
depends on the capacity of the UPS unit. Consult with the UPS manufacturer for the specifics.
When sizing a UPS unit, keep in mind that a fully-loaded 4-slot cabinet requires 165 VA. Refer to
the Hardware Manual for additional details.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
None
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
When commercial AC power fails, the CPU battery does not back up the status of the following:
●
Call Forwarding
●
Call Waiting / Camp On
●
Do Not Disturb
●
Message Waiting
●
Microphone Mute
●
Trunk Queuing
System Programming Backup and Restore (page 287)
You can use PC Card P/N 85880 or P/N 80050-V**.** (with system software preloaded) to
back up and restore your site data.
Time and Date (page 312)
The battery on the CPU PCB backs up the CPU Real Time Clock for 10-14 days.
Feature Operation
If properly installed, Battery Backup is automatic during AC power failures and brownouts.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 39
Call Coverage Keys
Call Coverage Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Call Coverage keys allow an extension user to cover a co-worker’s calls from their own telephone.
A keyset can have Call Coverage Keys for a co-worker’s extensions, Ring Group master numbers
and UCD group master numbers. The Call Coverage Key lights when the co-worker’s extension is
busy, flashes slowly when the co-worker has an incoming call, and flashes fast when the co-worker
is in Do Not Disturb. The Call Coverage Key can ring immediately when a call comes into the covered extension, ring after a delay or not ring at all. In addition, the keyset user can press the Call
Coverage Key to intercept their co-worker’s incoming call. They can also go off hook and press the
Call Coverage key to call the covered extension. An extension can have as many Call Coverage
Keys as they have available Programmable keys on their telephone.
Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The covered extension is:
Off
Idle or not installed
On
Busy
Flashing slowly
Ringing
Flashing fast
In Do Not Disturb
Call Coverage Keys will intercept the following types of calls:
●
Key Ring Calls
●
Ringing Intercom calls
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Call Coverage Keys assigned.
40 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Coverage Keys
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call
Coverage Keys
Step 1: Should the Call Coverage key have Immediate Ring, No Ring or Delayed Ring?
•
Immediate Ring
•
•
No Ring
•
•
Delay Ring
•
•
For keysets, in Program 1701 - Call Coverage
Immediate Ring (page 437), enter code 06 + the
covered extension, Ring Group master number or
UCD Group master number to assign an Immediate Ring Call Coverage Key.
For DSS Consoles, in Program 1704 - Call Coverage Immediate Ring (page 445), enter code 06
+ the covered extension, Ring Group master number or UCD Group master number to assign an
Immediate Ring Call Coverage Key.
For keysets, in Program 1701 - Call Coverage No
Ring (page 437), enter code 07 + the covered
extension, Ring Group master number or UCD
Group master number to assign a No Ring (lamp
only) Call Coverage Key.
For DSS Consoles, in Program 1704 - Call Coverage No Ring (page 445), enter code 07 + the
covered extension, Ring Group master number or
UCD Group master number to assign a No Ring
(lamp only) Call Coverage Key.
For keysets, in Program 1701 - Call Coverage
Delay Ring (page 437), enter 08 + the covered
extension, Ring Group master number or UCD
Group master number to assign a Delay Ring Call
Coverage Key.
For DSS Consoles, in Program 1704 - Call Coverage Delay Ring (page 445), enter 08 + the covered extension, Ring Group master number or
UCD Group master number to assign a Delay
Ring Call Coverage Key.
In Program 0403 - Call Coverage Delay
(page 387), enter the interval after which a Delay
Ring Call Coverage Key begins to ring.
Programming List
Program 0403 - Call Coverage Delay (page 387)
For extensions with Delayed Ringing Call Coverage keys, set how long a call flashes the key
at an extension before it starts to ring.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 41
Call Coverage Keys
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Call Coverage Key (code 06 = immediate
ring key, code 07 = no ring key, code 08 = delay ring key). The option is 300-331 (covered
extension number).
Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment (page 444)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Call Coverage Key (code 06 = immediate
ring key, code 07 = no ring key, code 08 = delay ring key). The option is 300-331 (covered
extension number).
Other Related Features
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
DSS Consoles can have Call Coverage keys.
Hotline (page 160)
Hotline keys provide many of the features available with Call Coverage keys.
Intercom (page 165)
A user can press a Call Coverage Key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers.
Key Ring (page 170)
Call Coverage will pick up Key Ring calls.
Transfer (page 324)
An extension user can Transfer a call to the covered extension by pressing the Call Co verage key.
Voice Over (page 350)
After calling a co-worker by pressing their Call Coverage key, and extension user can dial 9 to
leave a Voice Over (if enabled in programming).
Feature Operation
To answer a call ringing or flashing a Call Coverage Key:
(Optional) Ringing.
Slowly flashing Call Coverage Key.
1.
Press flashing Call Coverage Key.
To place a call from an idle Call Coverage Key to the covered extension:
1.
Press Call Coverage Key.
Two beeps.
Call Coverage Key lights green.
2.
Speak with co-worker at the covered extension.
42 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area.
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their call to another extension. The types of
Call Forwarding are:
●
Call Forwarding when Not Answered
Calls ringing the extension forward when not answered.
●
Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered
Calls ringing the extension forward when not answered, and all calls forward while the extension is busy.
●
Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls to the extension forward immediately.
Extension user’s can chain Call Forwards. For example, extension 301 can forward all calls immediately to 304, which in turn can forward all calls immediately to extension 302. Any co-worker
calling 301 or 304 goes to 302 instead. If extension 302 is Call Forwarded to Voice Mail, callers to
301 or 304 go directly to 302’s mailbox.
Conditions
A system reset or power failure cancels Call Forwarding.
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call
Forwarding
Step 1: Should an extension be able to forward their calls to a co-worker?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Internal Call Forwarding
(page 362), enter Y to enable Call Forwarding.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 0101 - Internal Call Forwarding
(page 362), enter N to disable Call Forwarding.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 43
Call Forwarding
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call
Forwarding
Step 2: When a user enables Ring No Answer forwarding, does an unanswered call ring the
forwarding destination after the correct interval?
•
In Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer
(page 386), leave at the current setting.
•
In Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer
(page 386), change the entry to meet the site’s
requirements.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0101 - Internal Call Forwarding (page 362)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to enable internal Call Forwarding.
Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer (page 386)
For Call Forwarding Ring No Answer, set how long a forwarded call rings an unanswered
extension before routing to the forwarding destination.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
Call Forwarding will not reroute a call ringing a Call Coverage Key.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
Call Forwarding will reroute Direct Inward Lines.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
Call Forwarding considers an extension in DND as busy. In addition, an extension can have
both DND and Call Forwarding enabled at the same time.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
If a member of a Circular or Terminal Hunting group forwards their calls, hunting will follow
Call Forwarding. If a member of a UCD Hunting group forwards their calls, calls to the extension follow forwarding but calls to the UCD master number do not.
Extended Ringing (page 119)
With Extended Ringing enabled, RNA call forwarding rings an extension for the Number of
Extended Rings before routing the forwarded destination.
Group Ring (page 144)
Call Forwarding will not reroute Group Ring calls.
Intercom (page 165)
Call Forwarding when Busy and Call Forwarding when Busy/Not Answered will not reroute
voice-announced Intercom calls. It will reroute only ringing Intercom calls.
Key Ring (page 170)
Call Forwarding will not reroute Key Ring calls.
Line Keys (page 176)
Call Forwarding will not reroute calls ringing line keys.
Loop Keys (page 179)
Call Forwarding will not reroute a call ringing a loop key (unless the call is a DIL).
44 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Forwarding
Message Waiting (page 187)
● An extension user cannot leave a Message Waiting at an co-worker that has Call Forwarding Immediate (*34) enabled. Pressing MW automatically leaves a message at the forwarding destination instead.
● An extension user cannot leave a Message Waiting at a busy co-worker that has Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer (*32) enabled. Pressing MW will automatically leave a message at the forwarding destination instead.
Selectable Display Messaging (page 256)
Enabling or canceling Call Forwarding cancels an extension’s Selectable Display Messaging.
Transfer (page 324)
Call Forwarding will reroute transferred calls.
Feature Operation
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
Dial *3.
Dial tone stops.
ICM and SPK on.
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Dial Call Forwarding type:
0 = Cancel your extension’s Call Forwarding
2 = Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer
4 = Call Forwarding Immediate
6 = Call Forwarding No Answer
7 = Personal Answering Machine Emulation (see Voice Mail on page 340 for more).
Dial destination extension (or 0 for your operator).
OR
Dial Voice Mail master number.
OR
Press Voice Mail key.
Dial tone.
ICM, DND and SPK on.
Press SPK to hang up.
Dial tone off.
ICM and SPK off. DND on.
Once you forward, only the user at the forwarding destination can place an intercom
call to you.
You can forward your phone to another destination without first canceling Call Forwarding. For example, you can dial *34 + 0 to immediately forward to the operator, then
later on dial *34 + 700 to immediately forward to Voice Mail.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 45
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
46 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Forwarding Cancel
Call Forwarding Cancel
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 47
Call Timer
Call Timer
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Call Timer helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone.
Call Timer lets a keyset user with a Call Timer key time their trunk calls on the telephone display.
There are two types of Call Timer keys:
●
Manual Call Timer
The Manual Call Timer key works like a stopwatch. Pressing the key turns on the timer, while
pressing the key a second time resets and turns off the timer. With a Manual Call Timer key,
the timer will not start automatically. For example, if an extension user presses the Manual
Call Timer key and calls three clients, the display will show the total elapsed time for all three
calls. The user can also press the Manual Call Timer key to time events anytime while their
phone is idle.
●
Automatic Call Timer
The Automatic Call Timer key will automatically start the Call Timer for each new trunk call,
without the user having to press the key. The Automatic Call Timer can also work like a Manual Call Timer key: push to turn on, then push a second time to reset and turn off. There is no
need to have a Manual and Automatic Call Timer key on the same phone.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Call Timer keys assigned.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call Timer
Step 1: Should extension have a Manual Call Timer key?
•
In Program 1701 - Call Timer Key (page 438),
assign a Manual Call Timer key (code 16 + 1).
Make sure you do not also have an Automatic
Call Timer key assigned (code 16 + 2).
•
In Program 1701 - Call Timer Key (page 438),
make sure the extension does not have a Manual
Call Timer key assigned (code 16 + 1).
If yes
If no
48 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Timer
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call Timer
Step 2: Should extension have an Automatic Call Timer key?
•
In Program 1701 - Call Timer Key (page 438),
assign an Automatic Call Timer key (code 16 +
2). Make sure you do not also have a Manual Call
Timer key assigned (code 16 + 1).
•
In Program 1701 - Call Timer Key (page 438),
make sure the extension does not have an Automatic Call Timer key assigned (code 16 + 2).
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1701 - Call Timer Key (page 438)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Call Timer key (code 16). The options are
manual (1) and automatic (2).
Other Related Features
Hold (page 156)
A user’s Call Timer starts when they pick up a call from Hold. If they place the call on Hold
and another user picks it up, the timer restarts for the new user.
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Call Timer shows the time a user has been on a trunk call.
Station Message Detail Recording (page 277)
The SMDR report also keeps track of the time on a call.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 49
Call Timer
Feature Operation
To time your trunk call if you have an Automatic Call Timer key:
1.
Place or answer trunk call.
2.
The Call Timer starts automatically.
Conversation with caller.
Automatic Call Timer key on.
Timer in first line of display.
You can press the Automatic Call Timer key once to turn the timer off. Press the key a
second time to restart the timer.
You can also press CHECK + the timer key to restart the timer.
To time your call if you have a Manual Call Timer key:
1.
2.
You can also use your Manual Call timer key as a stop watch while your phone is idle.
Place or answer Intercom or trunk call.
Press Manual Call Timer key.
Conversation with caller.
Manual Call Timer key on.
Timer in first line of display.
You can press the Manual Call Timer key once to turn the timer off. Press the key a second time to restart the timer.
You can also press CHECK + the timer key to restart the timer.
50 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Waiting / Camp-On
Call Waiting / Camp-On
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets
callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten.
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without
hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the first waiting call. The beeps periodically repeat while the call waits. The call goes
through when the extension becomes free.
If an extension has more than one caller waiting, they queue on a first-in/first-out basis (FIFO). The
extension will not hear Camp-On beeps for additional waiting calls.
Conditions
●
A system reset or power failure cancels all Camp-Ons system wide.
●
While busy on a call, Camp-On tones occur only for the first incoming call and do not repeat.
Default Setting
Call Waiting tones enabled.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call Waiting
/ Camp-On
Step 1: Should extension be able to Camp On to a busy co-worker?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Extension
(page 362), enter Y in each Class of Service that
should allow users to Camp-On to a busy extension.
In Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363), be sure
Privacy is disabled at the destination extension
(N).
In Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Extension
(page 362), enter N in each Class of Service that
should prevent users from Camping-on to a busy
extension. Entering N automatically converts an
extension’s Camp On to Callback.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 51
Call Waiting / Camp-On
Step-by-step guide for setting up Call Waiting
/ Camp-On
Step 2: When an extension Camps-On to a co-worker, should the co-worker hear Camp-On
tones?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Call Waiting (Camp-On) Tone
(page 367), enter Y to enable Camp-On tones system-wide.
InProgram 0403 - Call Waiting Tone Interval
(page 387), set the interval between Camp-On
tones.
In Program 0201 - Call Waiting (Camp-On) Tone
(page 367), enter N to disable Camp-On tones
system-wide.
Programming List
Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Extension (page 362)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to allow the extension to Camp-On to a busy coworker. Enter N to prevent the extension from Camping-On to a busy co-worker. Entering N
also automatically converts an extension’s Camp On to Callback.
Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363)
An extension with Privacy enabled (Y) will block Camp On / Call Waiting.
Program 0201 - Call Waiting (Camp-On) Tone (page 367)
Enter Y to enable Camp-On tones system-wide. Enter N to disable Camp-On Tones systemwide.
Program 0403 - Call Waiting Tone Interval (page 387)
Set the interval between Camp-On tones.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
An extension user cannot Camp-On to the attendant because the attendant’s extension is never
busy.
Callback (page 54)
If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp-On to a
Callback.
Direct Inward Line (page 88),
DILs to a busy extension automatically send Camp-On tones.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
An extension cannot Camp-On to a busy co-worker that is also in Do Not Disturb.
Key Ring (page 170)
A Key Ring call will not send Camp-On beeps to a busy extension that normally rings for that
call.
Intercom (page 165)
A user can Camp-On after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.
Privacy (page 226)
Privacy blocks Camp-On / Call Waiting.
52 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Call Waiting / Camp-On
Split (Alternate) (page 272)
Camp-On lets an extension user know that a call is waiting to be answered. The user can Split
between the waiting call and their current call.
Transfer (page 324)
An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension.
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
Trunk Queuing lets an extension user Camp-On to a busy trunk.
Volume Controls (page 353)
The extension user cannot adjust the volume of incoming Camp On tone.
Feature Operation
To Camp-On to a busy extension:
1.
Call busy extension.
Busy tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
Dial 2; do not hang up.
Busy tone stops.
ICM and SPK on.
If you hang up, the system converts your Camp-On to a Callback.
3.
When your co-worker hangs up their initial call:
Ringback. Camp-On rings your co-worker’s phone also.
ICM and SPK on.
4.
Speak to your co-worker when they answer their Camp-On ring.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 53
Callback
Callback
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
With Callback, a user does not have to repeatedly call a busy extension back, hoping to find it idle.
When an extension user calls a busy co-worker, they can leave a Callback request for a return call.
The system services Callback requests as follows:
●
Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.
Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.
●
When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
●
Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B.
If caller A doesn’t answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
●
As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
An extension user can leave a Callback at many extensions simultaneously. The system processes
the Callbacks as the extensions become free. In addition, many extensions can leave a Callback at
the same extension. The system processes these Callbacks on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis.
If an extension user leaves a Callback request and then fails to answer within four rings, the system
cancels the Callback.
Conditions
A system reset or power failure cancels all Callbacks system-wide.
Default Setting
Callback enabled.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Callback
Step 1: Should extension be able to leave a Callback for a busy co-worker?
•
In Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Extension
(page 362), enter Y in each Class of Service that
should allow users to leave a Callback at a busy
extension.
•
In Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Extension
(page 362), enter N in each Class of Service that
should prevent users from leaving a Callback at a
busy extension.
If yes
If no
54 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Callback
Step-by-step guide for setting up Callback
Step 2: When an extension leaves a Callback for a co-worker, should the co-worker hear
Camp-On tones?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Call Waiting (Camp-On) Tone
(page 367), enter Y to enable Camp-On tones system-wide.
InProgram 0403 - Call Waiting Tone Interval
(page 387), set the interval between Camp-On
tones.
In Program 0201 - Call Waiting (Camp-On) Tone
(page 367), enter N to disable Camp-On tones
system-wide.
Programming List
Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Extension (page 362)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to allow the extension to leave a Callback for a
busy co-worker. Enter N to prevent the extension from leaving a Callback for a busy coworker.
Program 0201 - Call Waiting (Camp-On) Tone (page 367)
Enter Y to enable Camp-On tones system-wide. Enter N to disable Camp-On Tones systemwide.
Program 0403 - Call Waiting Tone Interval (page 387)
Set the interval between Camp-On tones.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
An extension user cannot leave a Callback for the attendant because the attendant’s extension
is never busy.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
If an extension user starts to leave a Callback request but doesn’t hang up, the system CampsOn instead.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
An extension cannot leave a Callback for a busy co-worker that is also in Do Not Disturb.
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
An extension user can queue for a busy trunk and then hang up to turn the queue into a trunk
Callback.
Feature Operation
To place a Callback:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Call busy extension.
Busy tone.
ICM and SPK on.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 55
Callback
2.
Dial 2 and hang up.
Busy tone stops.
ICM and SPK off.
Stay on the line without hanging up if you want to Camp-On instead.
3.
When the busy co-worker becomes free:
Intercom ring.
ICM and SPK off.
4.
Lift handset to answer.
Two beeps.
ICM on.
5.
Speak to your co-worker when call goes through.
56 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Caller ID
Caller ID
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not Available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 57
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Answering
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The system allows trunk calls to ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions.
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunk) calls to meet the exact site requirements.
Answering Priority
When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the
following order:
1. Line key (from lowest to highest)
2. Fixed Loop Key (from lowest to highest)
3. Switched Loop Key (from lowest to highest)
4. ICM Key
Overflow
Refer to Overflow for Key Ring Calls on page 170 for details on the overflow options.
Conditions
●
The system provides analog trunk CO service via ATRU PCBs. ATRU PCBs can connect to
either loop start or ground start trunks (depending on circuit type programming). Refer to the
Hardware Manual for additional details on installing ATRU PCBs and connecting trunks.
●
Per FCC regulations, do not set 1001- Trunk Transmit Gain on page 417 higher than 0 dB.
Default Setting
Trunks 1-8 ring extensions on line keys 1-8.
58 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Answering (Page 1 of 3)
Step 1: Check to be sure each trunk’s circuit type and loop length setting matches the connected trunk circuit.
•
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416),
enter the correct circuit type for each trunk (51 =
loop start DTMF, 52 = loop start DP).
In Program 1001 - Loop Length (page 420), use
this option to compensate for a trunk’s loop
length. Use the short option (1) only when the
system is very close to the central office or behind
a PBX. Use the long option (2) for normal installations.
Step 2: Review System Timers, Trunks on page 300 for compatibility with the connected telco or
PBX/Centrex.
Step 3: Set the trunk access options at each extension for each trunk.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 0 to prevent both incoming and outgoing access on the trunk.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 1 to allow incoming
access only.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 2 to allow outgoing
access only.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 3 to allow full access
(both incoming and outgoing).
No access
Incoming
Outgoing
Full
Step 4: Set the ringing options at each extension for each trunk.
•
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignment (page 466),
enter 1 for each trunk that should lamp only (day
and night).
•
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignment (page 466),
enter 2 for each trunk that should ring during the
day and at night.
•
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignment (page 466),
enter 3 for each trunk that should ring at night and
lamp only during the day.
Lamp only
Ring
Night Ring
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 59
Central Office Calls, Answering
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Answering (Page 2 of 3)
•
Delay Ring
•
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignment (page 466),
enter 4 for each trunk that should delay ring during the day and at night.
InProgram 0401 - Trunk Delay Ring (page 376),
enter the interval after which a delay ring trunk
will change from flashing to ringing.
Step 5: Should extension have line keys for answering trunk calls?
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), assign
programmable keys as line keys (code 03). The
options are 01-16 (trunks 1-16).
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), make
sure no keys are assigned as line keys (code 03).
In Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key
(page 436), or in Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key
(page 436), assign a loop key to any extension
without line keys. This allows the extension to
answer trunk calls.
If yes
If no
•
Step 6: Should DSS Console have line keys for answering trunk calls?
•
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), assign
programmable keys as line keys (code 03). The
options are 01-16 (trunks 1-16).
•
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), make
sure no keys are assigned as line keys (code 03).
If yes
If no
Step 7: While on a trunk call, is a user’s conversation transmitted to the caller at a confortable level?
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Transmit Gain
(page 417), leave this option at its current setting.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Transmit Gain
(page 417), increase or decrease the trunk transmit gain for the optimum transmission level for
the connected telco or PBX.
If yes
If no
Step 8: While on a trunk call, is the conversation received by the user at a comfortable
level?
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Receive Gain
(page 419), leave this option at its current setting.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Receive Gain
(page 419), increase or decrease the trunk receive
gain for the optimum reception level for the connected telco or PBX.
If yes
If no
60 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Central Office Calls, Answering
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Answering (Page 3 of 3)
Step 9: Does the system properly detect ringing trunks?
•
In Program 0402 - Minimum Ring Detection
Timer (page 380), leave this option at its current
setting.
•
In Program 0402 - Minimum Ring Detection
Timer (page 380), set the ring detect threshold for
compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
If yes
If no
Step 10: Do trunks inadvertantly disconnect while users are on a call?
•
In Program 0402 - Loop Current Detection Time
(page 382), set the loop disconnect interval for
compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
•
In Program 0402 - Loop Current Detection Time
(page 382), leave this option at its current setting.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0401 - Trunk Delay Ring (page 376)
Set how long the system flashes a line key before ringing an extension that has the Delayed
Ringing option enabled.
Program 0402 - Minimum Ring Detection Timer (page 380)
Set the threshold for ring detection. If the ring signal is longer than this interval, the system
interprets the signal as valid ringing. If the signal is equal to or shorter than this interval, the
system ignores the ringing.
Program 0402 - Loop Current Detection Time (page 382)
Set the loop disconnect interval for trunk calls. If the system detects a loop current interruption longer than this interval it assumes the telco has disconnected the trunk. It then returns the
trunk trunk to idle.
Program 0402 - Ringing Signal End Detect Timer (page 383)
If the ringing signal on a trunk call is interrupted for longer than this interval, the system
assumes ringing has stopped and terminates the call. If this interval is set to short, valid ringing will be inadvertantly cut off. If too long, the system will leave the call set up even after
ringing has stopped.
Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416)
Set the trunk’s circuit type for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX. The options are
51 (loop start DTMF), 52 (loop start DP), 53 (ground start DTMF) or 54 (ground start DP).
Program 1001 - Trunk Transmit Gain (page 417)
Set the trunk’s transmit gain to compensate for the transmit gain characteristics of the connected telco or PBX.
Program 1001 - Trunk Receive Gain (page 419)
Set the trunk’s receive gain to compensate for the receive gain characteristics of the connected
telco or PBX.
Program 1001 - Loop Length (page 420)
Use this option to compensate for a trunk’s loop length. Use the short option (1) only when
the system is very close to the central office or behind a PBX. Use the long option (2) for normal installations.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 61
telemanuals.com
Central Office Calls, Answering
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a line key (code 03). The options are 01-16
(trunks 1-16).
Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key (page 436)
Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key (page 436)
In order to answer trunk calls, extensions without line keys should have loop keys.
Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444)
Assign a programmable key on a DSS Console as a line key (code 03). The options are 01-16
(trunks 1-16).
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night).
Other Related Features
Call Timer (page 48)
The Call Timer helps a user keep track of the time they spend on the phone.
Dial Tone Detection (page 86)
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
A DIL rings an extension directly.
Line Keys (page 176)
Line keys simplify answering trunk calls.
Loop Keys (page 179)
In order to answer trunk calls, extensions without line keys should have loop keys.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
Night Service determines how outside calls ring at night.
System Timers, Trunks (page 300)
Always review the system’s trunk timers for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/
Centrex.
Feature Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:
Trunk ring.
Line or loop key flashing red for key ring call.
Line key flashing green for DIL.
1.
Lift handset.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you have Automatic Handsfree, you can press the line or loop key without first lifting
the handset.
2.
Press flashing line or loop key.
Conversation with caller.
Line or loop key on.
62 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
telemanuals.com
Central Office Calls, Placing
Central Office Calls, Placing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Customize the call placing options to meet the site requirements and each individual’s needs.
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. A
user can place a call by:
●
Pressing a Line Key
Any keyset can have line keys for one-touch access to specific trunks. See Line Keys on
page 176 for more.
●
Pressing a Loop Key
Loop Keys provide a user with one-touch access to the assigned Loop Group. Loop Groups
can consist of one or more Trunk Groups. See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
●
Using Line Dial-Up
With Line Dial-Up, a user can select a specific trunk by pressing ICM and dialing the Line
Dial-Up code (#9) followed by the trunk number (1-16).
●
Using Direct Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access allows a user to access a trunk by pressing ICM and dialing the trunk’s
extension number (e.g., 401 for trunk 1, 402 for trunk 2. etc.).See Direct Trunk Access on
page 106 for more.
●
Dialing a Trunk Group Access Code
User’s can also place trunk calls by pressing ICM and dialing a Trunk Group Access Code (9098). See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
●
Trunk Group Routing
If the system has Trunk Group Routing enabled, user’s get the first available trunk when the
press ICM and dial 9. See Trunk Group Routing on page 329 for more.
Conditions
●
Systems using Trunk Groups or Trunk Group Access should use the hybrid FCC registration
number (i.e., the number that ends in MF-E). Look at the label on the bottom of your equipment cabinet for more information.
●
Per FCC regulations, do not set 1001- Trunk Transmit Gain on page 417 higher than 0 dB.
Default Setting
Keys 1-8 are line keys, keys 9 and 10 are Fixed Loop keys for trunk group 0, key 11 is an Auto
Timer key and key 12 is an All Call Page key. (The last key on an attendant telephone is automatically an Operator Call key.)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 63
telemanuals.com
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Placing (Page 1 of 4)
Step 1: Check to be sure each trunk’s circuit type and loop length setting matches the connected trunk circuit.
•
•
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416),
enter the correct circuit type for each trunk (51 =
loop start DTMF, 52 = loop start DP).
In Program 0402 - Codec Digitizing Method
(page 382), be sure to always set this option to 0
(µ-law companding enabled). Do not set this
option to 1.
In Program 1001 - Loop Length (page 420), use
this option to compensate for a trunk’s loop
length. Use the short option (1) only when the
system is very close to the central office or behind
a PBX. Use the long option (2) for normal installations.
Step 2: Review System Timers, Trunks on page 300 for compatibility with the connected telco or
PBX/Centrex.
Step 3: Are connected trunks DTMF or Dial Pulse (DP)?
•
DTMF
•
•
DP
•
•
In Program 0402 - Manual DTMF Tone On
(page 381), set the DTMF on duration for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
Program 0402 - Manual DTMF Tone Off
(page 381), se the DTMF off duration for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
In Program 0402 - DP Make Timer (page 380),
set the DP make (on) interval for compatibility
with the connected telco or PBX.
In Program 0402 - DP Break Timer (page 380),
set the DP break (off) interval for compatibility
with the connected telco or PBX.
In Program 0402 - DP Interdigit Timer
(page 380), set the DP interdigit (time between
digits) interval for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
Step 4: For Direct Trunk Access, should trunk extension numbers be left at their default setting (e.g., 401-416).
•
If yes
64 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
(page 396), leave the trunk extension numbers at
their default settings (401-416).
DS2000 Software Manual
Central Office Calls, Placing
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Placing (Page 2 of 4)
•
If no
In Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
(page 396), change the trunk extension numbers
to meet the site requirements (e.g., 501-516).
Step 5: Should trunk names be left at their default setting (Trunk 1, Trunk 2 etc.).
•
In Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
(page 396), leave the trunk names at their default
setting.
•
In Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
(page 396), change the trunk names to meet the
site requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 6: Set the trunk access options at each extension for each trunk.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 0 to prevent both incoming and outgoing access on the trunk.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 1 to allow incoming
access only.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 2 to allow outgoing
access only.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 3 to allow full access
(both incoming and outgoing).
No access
Incoming
Outgoing
Full
Step 7: Should extension have line keys for placing trunk calls?
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), assign
programmable keys as line keys (code 03). The
options are 01-16 (trunks 1-16).
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), make
sure no keys are assigned as line keys (code 03).
In Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key
(page 436), or in Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key
(page 436), assign a loop key to any extension
without line keys. This allows the extension to
answer trunk calls.
If yes
If no
•
Step 8: Should DSS Console have line keys for placing trunk calls?
•
If yes
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), assign
programmable keys as line keys (code 03). The
options are 01-16 (trunks 1-16).
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 65
Central Office Calls, Placing
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Placing (Page 3 of 4)
•
If no
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), make
sure no keys are assigned as line keys (code 03).
Step 9: Should extension user have single digit (dial 9) access to outside calls?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
•
In Program 0501 - Single Digit Access
(page 395), enter Y.
In Program 1802 - Station’s Dial 9 Group
(page 456), assign the Trunk Group (0-8) the station will select after the user dials 9.
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
assign trunks to Trunk Groups.
In Program 0501 - Single Digit Access
(page 395), enter N. Users dial 9 followed by the
Trunk Group number (0-8).
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
assign trunks to Trunk Groups (0-8).
Step 10: Should extension have Line Dial-up capability (i.e., the ability to dial #901-#916).
•
In Program 1802 - Line Dial Up (page 456),
Enter Y.
•
In Program 1802 - Line Dial Up (page 456), enter
N.
If yes
If no
Step 11: While on a trunk call, is a user’s conversation transmitted to the caller at a confortable level?
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Transmit Gain
(page 417), leave this option at its current setting.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Transmit Gain
(page 417), increase or decrease the trunk transmit gain for the optimum transmission level for
the connected telco or PBX.
If yes
If no
Step 12: While on a trunk call, is the conversation received by the user at a confortable
level?
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Receive Gain
(page 419), leave this option at its current setting.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Receive Gain
(page 419), increase or decrease the trunk receive
gain for the optimum reception level for the connected telco or PBX.
If yes
If no
66 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Central Office Calls, Placing
Step-by-step guide for setting up Central
Office Calls, Placing (Page 4 of 4)
Step 13: Do trunks inadvertantly disconnect while users are on a call?
•
In Program 0402 - Loop Current Detection Time
(page 382), set the loop disconnect interval for
compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
•
In Program 0402 - Loop Current Detection Time
(page 382), leave this option at its current setting.
If yes
If no
Step 14: Do users ever experience call colissions (i.e., connect to an incoming call while
placing an outgoing call)?
•
In Program 0402 - Force Idle (Trunk Guard Time)
(page 379), lengthen the trunk guard time.
•
In Program 0402 - Force Idle (Trunk Guard Time)
(page 379), leave the trunk guard time at its current setting.
If yes
If no
Step 15: If the system encounters a defective trunk while placing a call, does it wait the
proper interval before automatically cycling to the next trunk?
•
In Program 0402 - Line Response (page 378),
leave this interval at its current setting.
•
In Program 0402 - Line Response (page 378), set
the Line Response interval to meet the site’s
requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 16: Should 4 be the first digit in the Direct Trunk Access code?
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
leave the parameters for digit 4 at their default
settings.
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
set up another digit (in place of 4) that meets the
site’s requirements.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0402 - Line Response (page 378)
When the system fails to detect loop current on a trunk, it will wait this interval before marking the trunk as defective. Be sure the value you enter is compatible with the local telco.
Program 0402 - Force Idle (Trunk Guard Time) (page 379)
Set the guard time for trunks. When the system disconnects a trunk (e.g., after a user hang up),
the system keeps the line idle until this timer expires. The Trunk Guard Time helps prevent
call collisions.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 67
Central Office Calls, Placing
Program 0402 - DP Make Timer (page 380)
Set the duration of the Dial Pulse Make signal (i.e., relay closed). This is the “on” time in a
Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatability with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Keep in mind that there are three components of a Dial Pulse digit: Make interval, Break
interval and Interdigit interval.
Program 0402 - DP Break Timer (page 380)
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial Pulse Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is the
“off” time in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatability with the connected telco or
PBX/Centrex.
Program 0402 - DP Interdigit Timer (page 380)
Set the duration of the Dial Pulse Interdigit signal (i.e., relay open time between each digit).
Set this timer for compatability with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Program 0402 - Manual DTMF Tone On (page 381)
Set the duration of DTMF digits for trunk calls manually dialed by an extension user. This is
required because the system buffers the digits the user dials. Set this timer for compatibility
with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Program 0402 - Manual DTMF Tone Off (page 381)
Set the duration of the interval between DTMF digits for trunk calls manually dialed by an
extension user. This is required because the system buffers the digits the user dials. Set this
timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Program 0402 - Loop Current Detection Time (page 382)
Set the loop disconnect interval for trunk calls. If the system detects a loop current interruption longer than this interval it assumes the telco has disconnected the trunk. It then returns the
trunk trunk to idle.
Program 0402 - Codec Digitizing Method (page 382)
Be sure this option is always set to 0 (µ-law companding enabled). Do not set this option to
1 (A-law companding enabled).
Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392)
Review this option when if you want to change the digits user’s dial for Direct Trunk Access
(normally 4 followed by the trunk number).
Program 0501 - Single Digit Access (page 395)
Use this option to enable or disable single digit access. If enabled (Y), users can dial 9 to
select their assigned dial 9 Trunk Group. If disabled, users must dial 9 followed by the Trunk
Group number (0-8 for Trunk Groups 0-8).
Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers (page 396)
Assign extension numbers and names to trunk ports.
Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416)
Set the trunk’s circuit type for compatiblity with the connected telco or PBX. The options are
51 (loop start DTMF), 52 (loop start DP), 53 (ground start DTMF) or 54 (ground start DP).
Program 1001 - Trunk Transmit Gain (page 417)
Set the trunk’s transmit gain (0-60) to compensate for the transmit gain characteristics of the
connected telco or PBX.
Program 1001 - Trunk Receive Gain (page 419)
Set the trunk’s receive gain (0-60) to compensate for the receive gain characteristics of the
connected telco or PBX.
Program 1001 - Loop Length (page 420)
Use this option to compensate for a trunk’s loop length. Use the short option (1) only when
the system is very close to the central office or behind a PBX. Use the long option (2) for normal installations.
Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424)
Assign trunk Trunk Groups (0-8).
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on a extension as a line key (code 03). The options are 01-16
(trunks 1-16).
Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444)
Assign a programmable key on a DSS Console as a line key (code 03). The options are 01-16
(trunks 1-16).
68 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Central Office Calls, Placing
Program 1802 - Line Dial Up (page 456)
Enter Y to allow an extension to access lines 1-16 by dialing trunk access codes #901-#916.
Program 1802 - Station’s Dial 9 Group (page 456)
Assign the trunk group (0-8) a user accesses when they dial 9 for an outside line or press a
switched loop key. This option does not apply to systems with ARS installed.
Program 1802 - Key Access to Outbound Lines (page 457)
Enter Y to enable an extension user to press a Programmable Function Key to access and outside line.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Program 1804 - Trunk Group Access (page 464)
For each extension, enter Y to allow or N to prevent outgoing trunk group access. The system
always allows incoming trunk group access.
Other Related Features
Automatic Handsfree (page 30)
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without
first lifting the handset or pressing SPK. Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a
line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPK.
Call Timer (page 48)
The Call Timer helps a user keep track of the time they spend on the phone.
Dial Number Preview (page 84)
Dial Number Preview allows an extension user to review a number before the system dials it
out.
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
Direct Trunk Access allows an extension user to seize an individual trunk and place a call
without restriction.
Dial Tone Detection (page 86)
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Equal Access Compatibility (page 118)
The system is compatible with Equal Access numbers (e.g., 10-10-321).
Last Number Redial (page 174)
Easily redial the last number dialed.
Line Keys (page 176)
Line Keys give a user one-touch access to specific trunks.
Loop Keys (page 179)
An extension user may also be able to press a Loop Key to place an outside call.
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
Save a number you dialed, then easily redial it later on.
Speed Dial (page 263)
You can store outside numbers in Speed Dial bins for quick access to frequently called numbers.
System Timers, Trunks (page 300)
Always review the system’s trunk timers for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/
Centrex.
Trunk Group Routing (page 329)
With Trunk Group Routing enabled, an extension user can dial 9 to place a trunk call.
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
An extension user can queue for a busy trunk, or queue and hang up to leave a callback for a
busy trunk.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 69
Central Office Calls, Placing
Feature Operation
To place a call over a specific trunk using a line key:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press line key.
Trunk dial tone.
Line key on.
You may also be able to press a Loop Key. See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
Dial outside number.
3.
To place a call over a specific trunk (using Line Dial-up or Direct Trunk Access):
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
3.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
If you hear busy tone, you may be able to dial 2 to queue for the busy trunk. See Trunk
(Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback on page 332 for more.
For Line dial-up: Dial #9 followed by the trunk number (e.g., #901 for trunk 1).
OR
For Direct Trunk Access: Dial 4 plus the trunk number (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Trunk dial tone, followed by digits outdialing on the trunk.
ICM on.
4.
Dial outside number.
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
3.
4.
Dial trunk group code (90-98).
Trunk dial tone.
Line key on.
If you hear dial tone as soon as you dial 9, your system has Trunk Group Routing
enabled. SeeTrunk Group Routing on page 329 for more.
Dial outside number.
70 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Check Key
Check Key
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Quickly check keyset and DSS Console Programmable Function Key assignments.
A display telephone user can use the CHECK key to check keyset and DSS Console Programmable
Function Key assignments and Personal Speed Dial bin names.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Programmable Function Keys (page 235)
Check Programmable Function Key assignments.
Speed Dial (page 263)
Check Personal Speed Dial bin assignments.
Feature Operation
To check a Programmable Function Key assignment:
1.
Press CHECK
N/A
SPK flashes fast.
2.
3.
DS2000 Software Manual
Press the Programmable Function Key
The key assignment displays.
Press another key or SPK to exit the check mode.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 71
Check Key
To check a Personal Speed Dial bin name:
1.
Press CHECK
N/A
SPK flashes fast.
2.
3.
Press the Personal Speed Dial Key.
The programmed Personal Speed Dial name displays.
Press another key or SPK to exit the check mode.
72 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Class of Service
Class of Service
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Customize features and dialing options for extensions.
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options for extensions. The system allows
any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service.
The table below shows each Service Option. Refer to the individual features referenced in the table
for more.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
You should normally assign the attendant Class of Service 1.
All other extensions are normally Class of Service 2.
Table 5: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Off-Premise Call Forward
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Off-Premise Call Forwarding.
• See Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on
page 46 for more.
OFF PREM FWRD?
N
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Barge In on a co-worker.
• See Barge In (Intrusion) on page 37 for
more.
BREAK-IN?
Camp-On to Busy
Extension
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy extension.
• See Call Waiting / Camp-On on page 51
for more.
CAMP-ON BUSY EXT?
Internal Call Forwarding
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Internal Call Forwarding.
• See Alternate Attendant on page 21 for
more.
• See Call Forwarding on page 43 for
more.
CALL FORWARDING?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to access System Speed Dial.
• See System Speed Dial on page 263 for
more.
SYS SPDL ACCESS?
Barge-In (Intrusion)
System Speed Dial
Access
DS2000 Software Manual
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 73
Class of Service
Table 5: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Entries
Default
Use this option to enable or disable
Extended Ringing at the extension.
• See Extended Ringing on page 119 for
more.
EXTENDED RING?
N
Privacy
Use this option to enable or disable Privacy
at the extension.
• See Privacy on page 226 for more.
PRIVACY?
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Trunk (Line) Queuing
Priority
Use this option to enable or disable Trunk
(Line) Queuing Priority at the extension. If
more than one extension with Priority is
queued on a busy trunk, the system services
the Priority extensions on a first-queued,
first-served basis.
• See Trunk Queuing Priority on page 332
for more.
LINE Q PRIORITY?
N
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
• See Forced Trunk Disconnect on
page 137 for more.
FORCE
DISCONNECT?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy trunk.
• See Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback on page 332 for more.
CAMP ON TO LINES?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make an All Call Paging
announcement.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ALL CALL?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 1.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 1?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 2.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 2?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 3.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 3?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 4.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 4?
Extended Ring
Camp-On to Busy Line
Initiate All Call Page
Access Page Zone 1
Access Page Zone 2
Access Page Zone 3
Access Page Zone 4
Description
74 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
Y = Enabled
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
DS2000 Software Manual
Class of Service
Table 5: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Access Page Zone 5
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 5.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 5?
Y
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 6.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 6?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 7.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 7?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Silent Monitor.
• See Monitor / Silent Monitor on
page 192 for more.
SILENT MONITOR?
Use this option to enable or disable Flash for
single line telephones. This option only
applies to single line telephones.
• See Flash on page 132 for more.
FLASH FOR SLT?
Access Page Zone 6
Access Page Zone 7
Silent Monitor
Flash for Single Line
Sets
ACD Supervisor
Single Ring for Single
Line Sets
View System Alarms
Automatic Hold
Activate Night Mode
DS2000 Software Manual
•
•
This option is currently not implemented.
Use this option to enable or disable single ring for single line telephones. This
option only apples to single line telephones. See Central Office Calls,
Answering on page 58 for more.
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to view the system alarms.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to enable or diable Automatic Hold at an extension.
• See Hold on page 156 for more.
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to activate Night Service.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
ACD SUPERVISOR?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
SINGLE RING?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
VIEW SYS ALARMS?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
AUTO HOLD?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
ACTIVATE NITES?
Y = Enable
N = Disable
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 75
Class of Service
Table 5: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Direct Trunk Access
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Direct Trunk Access.
Note that enabling Direct Trunk Access
allows the user to bypass Toll Restriction.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
DIRECT TRK ACCES?
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Remote Call Forwarding /
Alternate Attendant
Soft Keys
Conversation Record
•
Y = Enable
N = Disable
REMOTE FWRD?
This option is currently not implemented.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Use this option to enable or disable a display
set’s Interactive Soft Keys.
• See See Interactive Soft Keys on
page 163 for more.
SOFTKEYS
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to record conversations into
their Voice Mail mailbox. If enabled, the
user can press either their Conversation
Record key or RECORD soft key to initiate
recording.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
RECORD CONV
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Class of
Service
Step 1: Make a unique Class of Service (1-15) for each set of feature/dialing options the site
requires.
•
In Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
(page 362), set up the options for each Class of
Service. The system has 15 Classes of Service (115).
Step 2: Assign Class of Service to extensions.
•
76 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions. Many extensions can share the same
Class of Service. Normally, only the attendant has
Class of Service 1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Class of Service
Programming List
Program 0101 - Class of Service Options (page 362)
Set Class of Service options for extensions, OPX trunk and tie lines.
Program 1001 - Trunk Class of Service Assignment (page 420)
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to OPX trunks and tie lines.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extension’s.
Other Related Features
Refer to the Class of Service chart above.
Attendant Position (page 24)
By default, the system assigns Class of Service 1 to the attendant. This provides the attendant
with Alternate Attendant, Barge In, Call Forwarding Off Premise, Direct Trunk Access,
Forced Trunk Disconnect, Night Service, and Trunk Queuing (Camp On) capability.
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 77
Computer Telephony Integration
Computer Telephony Integration
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
78 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Conference
Conference
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
A user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office.
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation.
The following table shows the system’s Conference capacities:
Description
Capacity
Conference circuits
32
Maximum simultaneous users in Conference
(total of all Conferences system-wide)
32
Maximum simultaneous conferences
8
Maximum parties in any one Conference
(trunks and/or extensions)
8
The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Conference enabled.
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
An extension can join a Conference with a trunk to which they normally cannot access.
Other Related Features
The following features also allow different types of multiple party calls:
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
An extension user can Barge In on a Conference.
Group Listen (page 142)
Meet-Me Conference (page 184)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 79
Conference
Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 192)
An extension user cannot Monitor a Conference.
Privacy Release Groups (page 228)
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference (page 307)
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
After hearing off-hook signals, an extension user can Conference their active call with the
waiting call.
Reverse Voice Over (page 245)
An extension user cannot add an incoming Reverse Voice Over call to a Conference.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension user cannot Voice Over to a co-worker busy on a Conference call.
Feature Operation
To establish a Conference:
1.
Establish Intercom or trunk call.
Conversation with caller.
ICM, Line Key or Loop Key on.
2.
Press CONF.
3.
4.
5.
Intercom dial tone.
If a trunk call: ICM on and Line/Loop Key flashing.
If an Intercom call: ICM on.
Your caller hears Music On Hold (if installed) while they wait for you to set up the
Conference.
Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Place or answer trunk call
OR
Retrieve call from Park Orbit.
Press CONF to set up the Conference.
Conversation with your conferenced callers.
If a trunk call: ICM on and Line/Loop Key on.
If an Intercom call: ICM on.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s Conference limit.
Repeat steps 2-4 to add additional parties to your Conference.
You can optionally place the Conference on hold. Your callers hear Music on Hold (if
installed) while waiting on Hold. Press CONF to reinstate the Conference.
To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:
1.
Hang up.
The remaining parties can continue their conversation uninterrupted. If you were in
Conference with two trunks, this may set up a tandem call. Refer to Tandem Trunking /
Unsupervised Conference on page 307 for more.
80 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 81
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Delayed Ringing helps co-workers cover each other’s unanswered calls.
Delayed Ringing allows a trunk to start ringing a preset interval after the call starts flashing a line
key. This is helpful for co-workers that cover each other’s calls.For example, a secretary can have
Delayed Ringing for the trunks that ring the boss’s telephone. If the boss doesn’t answer after the
Delayed Ringing interval, the call will start ringing the secretary’s extension.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Trunks 1-8 immediately ring on line keys 1-8.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Delayed
Ringing
Step 1: Should a trunk have delayed ringing on its assigned line key?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
enable option 4 for each trunk that should have
Delayed Ringing.
In Program 0401 - Trunk Delay Ring (page 376),
set the Delay Ring interval to meet the site
requirements.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
select one of the other ring options for each trunk
(1 = lamp only day and night, 2 = ringing day and
night, 3 = night ring only).
Programming List
Program 0401 - Trunk Delay Ring (page 376)
Set how long the system waits before ringing an extension that has the Delayed Ringing
option enabled.
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
For the selected trunk, set the ring assignment to 4 to enable Delayed Ringing. The other
options are: 1 (lamp only day and night), 2 (ringing day and night) and 3 (night ring only,
lamp during the day).
82 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Delayed Ringing
Other Related Features
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
Delayed Ringing is also available for Call Coverage Keys.
Private Line (page 231)
Consider having Delayed Ringing for Private Lines. Users with Delayed Ringing will ring for
the Private Line only if it is not answered.
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 83
Dial Number Preview
Dial Number Preview
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Dial Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Dialing Number Preview lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials
it out.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Dial Number Preview allows an extension user to review a number before the system dials it
out.
Feature Operation
To dial using Dial Number Preview:
1.
Do not lift the handset, press SPK or press ICM.
2.
Dial *.
N/A
Your display shows: DIAL PREVIEW
3.
Dial the number you want to call.
N/A
Your display shows the digits dialed, with a cursor (-) after the last digit.
4.
Press line key.
Dial tone on the selected trunk, then your digits dialing out.
Line key on (green).
84 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Dial Number Preview
To correct the displayed digits before dialing them out:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ until the cursor replaces the digit you want to change.
VOL ▲ moves the cursor to the left. VOL ▼ moves the cursor to the right.
Dial the digit that you want to replace the cursor.
Press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ to place the cursor over any other digits you want to edit.
OR
Press VOL ▼ until the entire number displays to the left of the cursor.
The system will only dial the digits to the left of the cursor.
Press a line key to have the system automatically dial the displayed number.
Dial Number Preview Editing Example
To replace 2049265410 with 2039265400:
DS2000 Software Manual
Step 1: Dial * followed by 2049265410. You see:
2049265410-
Step 1: Press Vol ▲ until you see:
20-9265410
Step 2:
Dial 3. You see:
203-265410
Step 3:
Press VOL ▼ until you see:
20392654-0
Step 4:
Dial 0. You see:
203926540-
Step 5:
Press Vol ▲ until the entire number displays to
the left of the cursor.
2039265400-
Step 6:
Press line key to dial number.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 85
Dial Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
86 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct Inward Dialing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 87
Direct Inward Line
Direct Inward Line
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
A DIL lets an employee know which calls are just for them.
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension directly. Since DILs only ring one
extension, employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can
have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL’s
phone number, the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring
other extensions.
Assigning a DIL to an extension automatically provides immediate ringing and incoming access for
the trunk, with no additional programming required.
The extension to which the trunk is terminated controls the night mode of the trunk. For example, if
extension 301 has trunk 1 assigned as a DIL, the user can press DND to switch trunk 1 to its night
routing destination. Switching trunk 1 to night mode at extension 304 has no affect on the night
mode of the system. This flexibility could allow a service dispatcher with several DILs to independently send trunks to their night destinations without affecting the night mode of the entire system.
A DIL can ring:
●
Extension numbers (including the attendant’s extension)
●
Ring Group master numbers
●
UCD Group master numbers (including the Voice Mail master number)
Overflow for Direct Inward Lines
If unanswered, DILs calls can route to a programmed overflow destination. The overflow destination can be an extension, Ring Group, UCD Group or Voice Mail (i.e., DIL destination’s mailbox).
You can set up separate DIL overflow destinations for the day mode and at night. If unanswered at
the overflow destination, the call diverts to Key Ring.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No DILs assigned.
88 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Inward Line
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Direct
Inward Line (Page 1 of 3)
Step 1: Check to be sure each trunk’s circuit type matches the connected trunk circuit.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416),
enter the correct circuit type for each trunk (51 =
loop start DTMF, 52 = loop start DP).
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), assign the DIL day mode termination.
The destination can be an extension, UCD Group
master number, Ring Group master number or
Voice Mail master number.
Step 2: Assign the DIL day mode destination.
Step 3: Do you want an unanswered DIL to overflow during the day mode?
•
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the
Day (page 426), enter Y.
•
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the
Day (page 426), enter N.
If yes
If no
Step 4: Assign the DIL day overflow destination.
•
In Program 1003 - Day Overflow Destination
(page 426), assign the DIL day mode termination.
The destination can be an extension, UCD Group
master number, Ring Group master number,
Voice Mail master number or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).
Step 5: Assign the DILnight mode destination.
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night)
(page 426), assign the DIL night mode termination. The destination can be an extension, UCD
Group master number, Ring Group master number or Voice Mail master number. (An extension
puts their DIL in the night mode by pressing
DND.)
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 89
Direct Inward Line
Step-by-step guide for setting up Direct
Inward Line (Page 2 of 3)
Step 6: Do you want an unanswered DIL to overflow during the night mode?
•
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night
(page 427), enter Y.
•
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night
(page 427), enter N.
If yes
If no
Step 7: Assign the DIL night overflow destination.
•
In Program 1003 - Night Overflow Destination
(page 427), assign the DIL night mode termination. The destination can be an extension, UCD
Group master number, Ring Group master number, Voice Mail master number or Key Ring (by
pressing CLEAR).
Step 8: Does extension have a line key for their DIL?
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), no programming changes are required.
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), make
sure the DIL has a line key assigned (code 03).
DILs can optionally ring Loop Keys (codes 01
and 02).
If yes
If no
Step 9: Do you want to put the DIL on a DSS Console key?
•
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), make
sure the DIL has a DSS Console line key assigned
(code 03).
•
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), make
sure the DIL does not have a DSS Console line
key assigned (code 03).
If yes
If no
Step 10: If DIL is unanswered, does call divert to its overflow destination (If programmed) or
Key Ring (if no overflow exists) after the proper interval?
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
leave the DIL No Answer time at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
change the DIL No Answer time to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
90 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Inward Line
Step-by-step guide for setting up Direct
Inward Line (Page 3 of 3)
Step 11: If DIL is unanswered at the overflow destination, does call divert to Key Ring after
the proper interval.
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
leave the Transfer Recall time at its current setting.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
make sure you have extensions assigned to Key
Ring.
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
change the Transfer Recall time to meet the site
requirements.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
make sure you have extensions assigned to Key
Ring.
Step 12: If DIL is terminated to Voice Mail, set up a Night key that controls the night mode
status of the DIL.
•
•
In Program 1701 - Night Key (page 438), set up a
Night key for the Voice Mail master number
(code 18 + Voice Mail master number)
OR
In Program 1704 - Night Key (page 446), set up a
Night key for the Voice Mail master number
(code 18 + Voice Mail master number).
Programming List
Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376)
If DIL Overflow is set up, this interval determines how long a DIL rings its destination before
ringing its programmed overflow destination. If DIL Overflow is not set up, this interval determines how long a DIL rings is destination before diverting to Key Ring.
Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375)
This interval sets how long a call will ring the day or night overflow destination before diverting to key ring.
Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416)
Set the trunk’s circuit type for compatiblity with the connected telco or PBX. The options are
51 (loop start DTMF), 52 (loop start DP), 53 (ground start DTMF) or 54 (ground start DP).
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day) (page 426)
Set the day termination (answering point) for the DIL. The DIL rings the answering point
directly. The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, Ring Group master
number or Voice Mail master number.
Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the Day (page 426)
Enter Y to enable DIL overflow during the day mode. (Entering N for this option has the same
affect as entering Y followed by Key Ring in the following option.)
Program 1003 - Day Overflow Destination (page 426)
Set the overflow destination for day mode calls. The overflow destination can be an extension,
UCD Group master number, Ring Group master number, Voice Mail master number or Key
Ring (by pressing CLEAR).
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 91
Direct Inward Line
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night) (page 426)
Set the night termination (answering point) for the DIL. The DIL rings the answering point
directly. The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, Ring Group master
number or Voice Mail master number.
Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night (page 427)
Enable Y to enable DIL overflow during the night mode. (Entering N for this option has the
same affect as entering Y followed by Key Ring in the following option.)
Program 1003 - Night Overflow Destination (page 427)
Set the overflow destination for night mode calls.The destination can be an extension, UCD
Group master number, Ring Group master number or Voice Mail master number.
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
Make sure the extension has a line key (code 03) for the DIL.
Program 1701 - Night Key (page 438)
If the DIL is terminated to a Voice Mail master number, a Night Key key (code 18 + the Voice
Mail master number) controls the night mode of the DIL.
Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444)
The extension can optionally have a line key (code 03) for their DIL on a DSS Console.
Program 1704 - Night Key (page 446)
If the DIL is terminated to a Voice Mail master number, a Night Key key (code 18 + the Voice
Mail master number) controls the night mode of the DIL.
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Make sure you have extensions assigned to Key Ring.
Other Related Features
Call Forwarding (page 43)
Call Forwarding will reroute an extension’s DILs.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
A DIL to a busy extension will send Camp-On tones (if the extension is programmed to normally receive Camp-On tones).
Central Office Calls, Answering (page 58)
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Refer to these features to set additional parameters for trunks (such as transmit gain, receive
gain and sidetone level). In addition, extension users can place calls on DILs, just like other
trunks (depending on programming).
Delayed Ringing (page 82)
DILs automatically override Delayed Ringing.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
Enabling Do Not Disturb at an extension puts that extension’s DILs into Night Mode.
Extended Ringing (page 119)
With Extended Ringing enabled, DIL trunks ring for the Number of Extended Rings before
routing to the overflow destination.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
DILs to a Circular or Terminal Hunting group member initiate hunting. In addition, DILs to a
UCD master number ring the UCD group directly.
Group Ring (page 144)
A DIL can ring a Ring Group master number.
Key Ring (page 170)
An unanswered DIL diverts to all extensions with Key Ring for the trunk.
Line Keys (page 176)
Loop Keys (page 179)
When you assign a trunk as a DIL, it continues to flash its previously programmed line/loop
key assignments. It will not, however, ring those phones.
Names for Extensions and Trunks (page 198)
Programming names for DILs makes it easier to identify incoming callers.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
92 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Inward Line
The extension to which the DIL is terminated controls the night mode of the DIL by pressing
their DND key.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
A DIL ringing a busy extension can automatically initiate Off-Hook Signaling.
Prime Line Preference (page 223)
If an extension’s Prime Line is another extension’s DIL, lifting the handset will answer the
call even though it does not ring the phone.
Voice Mail (page 340)
● The Voice Mail Automated Attendant will answer a DIL terminated to the Voice Mail Master Number.
●
If a DIL is terminated to the Voice Mail master number, a System Mode key (code 18 +
the Voice Mail number) controls the night mode status of the DIL.
Feature Operation
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
Ringing.
DIL’s line key flashing (green).
1.
Lift handset.
Conversation with caller.
DIL’s line key on (green).
To place your DIL into Night Mode
1.
Press DND.
N/A
DND flashes.
This also enables Do Not Disturb at the extension.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 93
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
94 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Quickly place and Transfer calls to co-workers, without having to look up or dial extension numbers.
Programmable Function Keys automatically become Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys when the
user press ICM. Direct Station Selection provides an extension user with one-button Intercom
access and Transfer to co-workers. Each DSS key also provides a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the
assigned co-worker.
When the DSS/BLF key is:
The covered extension is:
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Flashing fast
In Do Not Disturb
Conditions
DSS keys do not pick up ringing calls.
Default Setting
Not assigned.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Direct
Station Selection (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension have DSS capability on their programmable keys?
•
In Program 1802 - Busy Lamp Field (page 456),
enter Y.
•
In Program 1802 - Busy Lamp Field (page 456),
enter N.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension have preprogrammed DSS keys?
•
If yes
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment
(page 443), program the extension’s DSS assignments.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 95
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Step-by-step guide for setting up Direct
Station Selection (Page 2 of 2)
•
If no
In Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment
(page 443), leave the extension’s DSS keys unassigned.
Programming List
Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment (page 443)
Program the extension’s DSS assignments.
Program 1802 - Busy Lamp Field (page 456)
Enter Y to enable DSS capability for an extension’s programmable keys.
Other Related Features
Intercom (page 165)
A user can press a DSS key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers.
Speed Dial (page 263)
The Personal Speed Dial Keys also provide one-button access to extensions.
Transfer (page 324)
You can press your DSS key to Transfer a call instead of dialing a co-worker’s extension number.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension can Voice Over after using Direct Station Selection to call a co-worker.
Feature Operation
To place a call to a co-worker using a DSS key:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM .
Intercom dial tone.
DSS keys show status of covered co-workers (off = idle, on = busy or ringing,
flashing fast = in Do Not Disturb).
3.
Press DSS key for co-worker you want to call.
Two beeps or ringing.
N/A
To Transfer a call to a co-worker using a DSS key:
1.
Place or answer trunk call.
Conversation with caller.
Line or Loop Key on (green).
2.
Press ICM .
Intercom dial tone.
DSS keys show status of covered co-workers (off = idle, on = busy or ringing,
flashing fast = in Do Not Disturb).
96 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
3.
Press DSS key for co-worker.
Two beeps or ringing.
N/A
4.
Hang up to have the Transfer go through unscreened.
OR
Wait for the called party to answer if you want them to screen the Transfer.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 97
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
DSS Consoles provide one-touch access to extensions, trunks and system features.
The DSS Console gives a 34-Button Display or 34-Button Super Display user a Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks, and selected system features. This saves time
for users that do a lot of call processing (such as operators or dispatchers. There are two DSS Consoles types: the 24-Button (P/N 80556) and the 110 Button (P/N 80555).
Figure 7: 24-Button and 110-Button DSS Consoles
Every extension can have a DSS Console. However, the system provides four unique DSS configurations (called blocks). If the system has more than four DSS Consoles installed, they will have to
share configurations. You cannot connect multiple DSS Consoles to the same keyset. DSS Consoles
do not use a station port and do not require their own power supply.
You can assign DSS Console keys to the following functions:
•
ACD Log On (future)
•
Message Center
•
Speed Dial, Personal
•
Call Coverage (immediate, delayed or no ring)
•
Multiple Directory Numbers (future)
•
Reverse Voice Over
•
Data (future)
•
Night Key
•
Split
•
Group Pickup (immediate, delayed or no ring)
•
Page Zones
•
Speed Dial, System
•
Hotline
•
Park Orbit
•
Trunks (line keys)
•
ICM Directory
•
Save
•
Voice Mail Record
98 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Conditions
●
You cannot connect a DSS Console to a 22-button telephone.
●
You must consider the System Load Factor when installing DSS Consoles. See System Configuration on page 3 for more.
Default Setting
DSS Console Default Assignments
These keys:
Have this function:
24-Button DSS Console
1-24
Hotlines to extensions 300-323
110-Button DSS Console
1-32
Hotlines to extensions 300-331
33-48
Lines 1-16
49-59
System Speed Dial bins 200-209
59-78
Personal Speed Dial bins 700719
79, 80
Page zones 0 (All Call) and 1.
81-82
System Park Orbits 0 and 1.
83-110
Unassigned
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up DSS
Consoles
Step 1: Does the extension have a DSS Console connected?
•
In Program 1801 - DSS Type (page 450), enter 1
if the extension has a 24-button console connected. Enter 2 if the extension has a 110-button
console connected.
•
In Program 1801 - DSS Type (page 450), enter 0
if the extension does not have a DSS Console
connected.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 99
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Step-by-step guide for setting up DSS
Consoles
Step 2: Should the DSS Console have unique programming, not available on any other DSS
Console?
•
In Program 1801 - DSS Block Number
(page 450), be sure to choose a block (1-4) that is
not assigned to any other extension in the system.
•
In Program 1801 - DSS Block Number
(page 450), assign the same block to extensions
that should share DSS Console programming.
If yes
If no
Step 3: Do you want to change the DSS Console assignments from their default settings?
•
In Program 1704 - 1704 - DSS Console Key
Assignment (page 444), customize the key assignments to meet the application requirements.
•
In Program 1704 - 1704 - DSS Console Key
Assignment (page 444), leave the DSS Console
assignments at their default settings.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment (page 444)
Assign the keys for the system’s DSS Consoles.
Program 1801 - DSS Type (page 450)
Specify the type of DSS Console plugged into the telephone (1 = 24-button, 2 - 110-button, 0
= unassigned).
Program 1801 - DSS Block Number (page 450)
Use this option to assign a DSS block to the console.
The following table shows the DSS Console key options (assigned in Program 1704):
Table 6: Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment (Page 1 of 2)
Option
Description
Key Code
Undefined
Use this option to designate a key as undefined
(no function).
00
Line Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a line key.
03 + nn (trunk
number)
Park Orbit Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Park Orbit key.
04 + n (Park Orbit
0-9)
Hotline Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Hotline key.
05 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediately ringing Call Coverage Key.
06 + nnn (extension
number)
100 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Table 6: Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment (Page 2 of 2)
Option
Description
Key Code
Call Coverage No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
07 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
08 + nnn (extension
number)
Group Pickup
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediately ringing Group Call Pickup
key.
09 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-16)
Group Pickup No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Group Call Pickup
key.
10 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-16)
Group Pickup
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a delay ring Group Call Pickup key.
11 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-16)
Page Zone Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Page Zone key.
13 + n (Page Zone 17, 0 for All Call)
System Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a System Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to specific System Speed Dial bin.
14 + nnn (System
Speed Dial bin, normally 200-299)
Personal Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Personal Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin.
15 + nnn (701-720)
Voice Mail
Record Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Voice Mail Record key.
17
Night Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Night key.
18 + CLEAR
Data Key
This option is currently not used.
Split Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Split key.
20
ICM Directory
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an Intercom Directory Dialing key.
21
This option is currently not used.
22
Reverse Voice
Over Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Reverse Voice Over key.
23
Message Center
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Message Center key.
24 + nnn (extension
number)
Save Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Save Number Dialed key.
25
ACD Log On Key
DS2000 Software Manual
19 + nnn (extension
number)
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 101
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Other Related Features
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
DSS Consoles can have Call Coverage keys.
Directory Dialing (page 110)
Assign a Directory Dialing key on a DSS Console.
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
DSS Consoles can have Group Call Pickup keys.
Hotline (page 160)
DSS Consoles can have Hotline keys.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
A DSS Console with a Night key can put the system in the night mode.
Paging (page 214)
DSS Consoles can have Page zone keys.
Park (page 218)
DSS Consoles can have Park keys.
Reverse Voice Over (page 245)
A DSS Console can have a Reverse Voice Over key.
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
A DSS Console can have a Save key.
Speed Dial (page 263)
The DSS Console Personal Speed Dial bins are the same as the extension to which the console
is attached. This means that DSS Consoles that share the same block number still have unique
Personal Speed Dial.
Voice Mail (page 340)
A DSS Console can have Voice Mail Record and Message Center keys.
Feature Operation
To use your DSS Console trunk (line) key:
1.
Press the DSS Console trunk key.
DSS Console Trunk Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The assigned trunk is:
Off
Idle or not installed
On
Busy
Flashing fast
Ringing
To use your DSS Console Park key:
1.
Press DSS Console Park key to Park or retrieve call.
DSS Console Park Key Busy Lamp Indications
102 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
When the key is:
The assigned orbit is:
Off
Idle
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
DSS Console Park Key Busy Lamp Indications
On
Holding a call that has been parked
by a co-worker
Wink On
Holding a call that you parked
To use your DSS Console Hotline key:
1.
Press key to call Hotline partner.
DSS Console Hotline Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The Hotline partner is:
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Fast Flash
In Do Not Disturb
To use your DSS Console Call Coverage key:
You can set up the Call Coverage key for immediate ring, delayed ring , or no ring.
1.
Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call.
DSS Console Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The covered extension is:
Off
Idle
On
Busy
Fast Flash
In DND
Slow Flash
Ringing
To use your DSS Console Group Call Pickup key:
You can set up the Group Call Pickup key for immediate ring, delayed ring , or no ring.
1.
Press key to answer call ringing Pickup Group.
DSS Console Group Call Pickup Key Busy Lamp Indications
DS2000 Software Manual
When the key is:
The Pickup Group:
Off
Does not have a call ringing
Slow Flash
Has a call ringing
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 103
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
To use your DSS Console Page Zone key:
1.
Press key to Page into assigned zone.
DSS Console Group Call Pickup Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The assigned zone is:
On
Busy
Off
Idle
To use your DSS Console System Speed dial key:
1.
Press key to dialed stored number.
System Speed Dial keys provide no BLF.
To use your DSS Console Personal Speed dial key:
1.
Press key to dialed stored number.
Personal Speed Dial keys provide no BLF.
To use your DSS Console Conversation Record key:
1.
You must have Voice Mail installed to use this key. A voice prompt and a periodic beep
will remind you that your calls are being recorded.
Press key to record conversation in mailbox.
DSS Console Conversation Record Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
Recording is:
On
Being set up
Off
Off
Fast Flash
On
To use your DSS Console Night key:
1.
Press key to put the system in the night mode.
DSS Console Night Key Busy Lamp Indications
104 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
When the key is:
The system is:
On
In the night mode
Off
In the day mode
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
To use your DSS Console ICM Directory key:
1.
Press key to access Intercom Directory Dialing.
DSS Console ICM Directory Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
ICM Directory Dialing is:
On
Active
Off
Inactive
To use your DSS Console Reverse Voice Over key:
1.
While on a handset call, press key to place Private Intercom call to covered extension.
DSS Console Reverse Voice Over Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
Assigned extension is:
On
Busy or ringing
Off
Idle
Fast Flash
In Do Not Disturb
To use your DSS Console Message Center key:
1.
Press key to see how many messages are waiting in the Message Center.
OR
Press SPK + key to call Message Center mailbox.
DSS Console Message Center Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
There are:
Off
No messages waiting in the Message
Center mailbox
Fast Flash
Messages waiting in the Message
Center mailbox
To use your DSS Console Save key:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
While on a call, press key to Save the number you just dialed.
OR
While idle, press key to redial a previously saved number.
Save keys provide no BLF.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 105
Direct Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Priority users can access trunks directly. Direct Trunk Access also lets maintenance personnel
access and test individual trunks.
Direct Trunk Access lets an extension user access (seize) an individual trunk. After seizing the
trunk, the user can dial any outside telephone number without restriction. An extension’s Class of
Service allows or denies Direct Trunk Access. Direct Trunk Access is normally only provided for
attendants, priority users and maintenance personnel.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Direct
Trunk Access
Step 1: Should extension have Direct Trunk Access capability?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
•
In Program 0101 - Direct Trunk Access
(page 364), enter Y.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), no entries are required. Direct
Trunk Access automatically provides access.
In Program 0101 - Direct Trunk Access
(page 364), enter N.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
Step 2: Does the default Direct Trunk Access code (4) meet the site requirements?
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
do not change the digit 4 from its default assignment.
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
reassign digits to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
106 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Direct Trunk Access
Programming List
Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392)
Change the digit that user’s dial for Direct Trunk Access if 4 does not meet the site requirements.
Program 0101 - Direct Trunk Access (page 364)
Enter Y to enable an extension to use Direct Trunk Access. Note that enabling Direct Trunk
Access allows the user to bypass Toll Restriction.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
Direct Trunk Access overrides an extension’s access assignments. A extension can directly
access a trunk for which they normally do not have access.
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Refer to this feature for other methods of placing trunk calls.
Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 137)
An extension user with Direct Trunk Access can use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service (page 242)
An extension user with Direct Trunk Access can remove trunks from service.
Toll Restriction (page 314)
Direct Trunk Access does not bypass Toll Restriction.
Feature Operation
To place a call over a specific trunk using Direct Trunk Access:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
3.
4.
Dial 4 plus the trunk number (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Trunk dial tone, followed by digits outdialing on the trunk.
ICM on.
If you hear busy tone, you may be able to dial 2 to queue for the busy trunk. See Trunk
(Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback on page 332 for more.
Dial outside number.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 107
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Directed Call Pickup allows co-worker’s to answer each other’s calls.
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. With
Directed Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up:
●
Trunk (Key Ring) calls ringing an extension
●
Direct Inward Lines
●
Transferred trunk calls
●
Ringing Intercom calls.
●
Recalls (e.g., Hold recall)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
Directed Call Pickup can intercept a call on a trunk to which it normally does not have access.
Other Related Features
Door Box (page 116)
Directed Call Pickup cannot intercept a Door Box call ringing an extension.
Hold (page 156)
Directed Call Pickup can pick up Hold recalls.
Park (page 218)
Personal Park allows an extension user to pick up a call parked at a co-worker’s extension.
The following features also let co-workers cover each other’s calls:
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
Hotline (page 160)
108 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Directed Call Pickup
Feature Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-worker’s extension:
Call ringing co-worker’s extension.
N/A.
1.
2.
Lift handset.
Dial * *.
3.
Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.
Conversation with intercepted caller.
N/A.
To intercept a call ringing an attendant, dial the attendant’s extension number (e.g.,
300). Do not dial 0 or 01-04.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 109
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Directory Dialing available.
Allows users to place Intercom or Speed Dial calls from a displayed list of names.
Directory Dialing allows a display keyset user to select a co-worker or outside call from a list of
names, rather than dialing the phone number. There are three types of directory Dialing:
●
C – System (Company-Wide) Speed Dial names.
●
I – Intercom names (including extension, Ring Group and UCD Group names).
●
P – Personal Speed Dial names.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Directory Dialing always enabled, but no Intercom or Speed Dial names are stored.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Directory
Dialing (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Do extension users have adequate time to enter their Directory Dialing options?
•
In Program 0401 - Intercom Inter-digit
(page 375), leave this option at its currently
assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - Intercom Inter-digit
(page 375), change the Interdigit Interval to meet
the site requirements. Keep in mind that this
affects all Intercom dialing (in addition to Directory Dialing).
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension have one-touch access to Intercom Directory Dialing?
•
If yes
•
110 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
To put an ICM Directory key on a keyset:
In Program 1701 - ICM Directory Key
(page 438), assign an Intercom Directory Dialing
key (code 21).
To put an ICM Directory key on a DSS Console:
In Program 1704 - ICM Directory Key
(page 447), assign an Intercom Directory Dialing
key (code 21).
DS2000 Software Manual
Directory Dialing
Step-by-step guide for setting up Directory
Dialing (Page 2 of 2)
•
If no
In Program 1701 - ICM Directory Key
(page 438), and in Program 1704 - ICM Directory Key (page 447), do not assign an Intercom
Directory Dialing key (code 21).
Programming List
Program 0401 - Intercom Inter-digit (page 375)
If an extension user initiates Directory Dialing but doesn’t make an entry within this interval,
the system automatically cancels Directory Dialing.
Program 1701 - ICM Directory Key (page 438)
Assign an Intercom Directory Dialing key to a keyset (code 21).
Program 1704 - ICM Directory Key (page 447)
Assign an Intercom Directory Dialing key to a DSS Console (code 21).
Other Related Features
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
Assign a Directory Dialing key on a DSS Console.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
Intercom Directory Dialing will show UCD Group names.
Group Ring (page 144)
Intercom Directory dialing will show Ring Group names.
Intercom (page 165)
Directory Dialing is a convenient alternative to manually dialing Intercom numbers.
Names for Extensions and Trunks (page 198)
Set up the names for extensions and trunks.
Speed Dial (page 263)
Set up Speed Dial names.
Feature Operation
To place a call using Directory Dialing:
1.
1.
2.
Do not lift handset or press SPK.
Dial 3.
Dial the type of Directory Dialing from the table below:
Pressing this key:
DS2000 Software Manual
Selects Directory Dialing for:
2
C
System (Company-Wide) Speed Dial names.
4
I
Intercom names.
7
P
Personal Speed Dial names.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 111
Directory Dialing
N/A
SPK on.
3.
To scroll alphabetically through the selected directory, press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼. To call
the displayed name, just press DIAL.
Dial the first letter of the desired name.
For example, dial 4 if the first letter in the name begins with G, H or I. The display
N/A
For the example above (i.e., when you dial 4), the display shows:
1 = G, 2 = H, 3 = I
4.
5.
6.
Look at your phone’s display and dial the digit for the letter/number you want to call.
In the example above, if the name begins with G, dial 1. If the name begins with H, dial
2. If the name begins with I, dial 3.
The first name/number that begins with your selection displays. If you see UNLISTED
NAME, there is no name stored for your selection.
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through all the names/numbers that begin with the letter/number you selected.
OR
Skip to the next step if the displayed name/number is the one you want to call.
Press DIAL to have the system dial your call.
To exit Directory Dialing at any time.
1.
Press SPK.
112 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 113
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and
announcements.
Do Not Disturb (DND) blocks incoming calls, Off-Hook Signaling and Paging announcements. An
extension user can activate DND anytime while on a call or while their phone is idle. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys. The user may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
Conditions
A system reset or power failure cancels DND.
Default Setting
Do Not Disturb enabled.
Programming Guide
If no
Step-by-step guide for setting up Do Not
Disturb
Step 1: Should an extension be allowed to enable Do Not Disturb?
•
In Program 1802 - Do Not Disturb (page 455),
enter Y to enable Do Not Disturb.
•
In Program 1802 - Do Not Disturb (page 455),
enter N to disable Do Not Disturb.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1802 - Do Not Disturb (page 455)
Enter Y to enable Do Not Disturb at the extension.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
The attendant can have Do Not Disturb. In addition, pressing DND at the attendant actives the
night mode for any trunks directly terminated to the attendant.
114 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Do Not Disturb
Background Music (page 35)
DND does not affect the operation of Background Music.
Call Forwarding (page 43)
Call Forwarding considers an extension in DND as busy. In addition, an extension can have
both DND and Call Forwarding enabled at the same time.
Call Forwarding Cancel (page 47)
Canceling Call Forwarding system-wide also cancels DND.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
An extension cannot Camp-On to a busy co-worker that is in Do Not Disturb.
Callback (page 54)
An extension cannot leave a Callback for a busy co-worker that is in Do Not Disturb.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
The attendant presses DND to put the system in the night mode.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
Placing an agent in DND temporarily removes it from the UCD group.
Hotline (page 160)
An extension user can press their Hotline key twice to override their Hotline partner’s DND.
Message Waiting (page 187)
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting at an extension in Do Not Disturb.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
A DIL destination activates the night mode for the DIL when they press DND.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
On- and Off-Premise extensions cannot use DND.
Paging (page 214)
DND blocks Paging announcements.
Reverse Voice Over (page 245)
DND does not block Reverse Voice Over.
Feature Operation
To activate DND at your extension:
You can activate DND anytime while idle or on a call.
1.
Press DND.
N/A
DND flashes fast.
To cancel Do Not Disturb:
N/A
DND flashes fast.
1.
Press DND.
N/A
DND goes out.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 115
Door Box
Door Box
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
116 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
E911 Compatibility
E911 Compatibility
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 117
Equal Access Compatibility
Equal Access Compatibility
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 See Toll Restriction on page 314.
118 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Extended Ringing
Extended Ringing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Lets calls ring longer that usual to assist co-workers that can’t readily get to their phones.
Extended Ringing forces an unanswered call to ring a telephone an extended number of times
before rerouting. This helps users that cannot get to their phones quickly to pick up calls (such as a
warehouse worker). Extended Ringing is available with the following features:
●
Call Forwarding
A call rings an extension with RNA call forwarding enabled for an extended period before
routing the the forwarded destination.
●
Direct Inward Line
DILs ring for an extended period before routing the the overflow destination.
●
Transfer
Transferred trunks ring for an extended period before recalling the transferring extension.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Extended
Ringing
Step 1: Should extension have Extended Ringing capability?
•
In Program 0101 - Extended Ring (page 363),
enter Y to enable Extended Ringing.
•
In Program 0101 - Extended Ring (page 363),
enter N to disable Extended Ringing.
If yes
If no
Step 2: When Extended Ringing is enabled, does the extension ring an adequate number of
times before the call reroutes?
•
If yes
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0403 - Number of Extended Rings
(page 387), leave the entry at its current setting.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 119
Extended Ringing
Step-by-step guide for setting up Extended
Ringing
•
If no
In Program 0403 - Number of Extended Rings
(page 387), enter a new Extended Ringing value
that meets the site’s requirements.
Programming List
Program 0101 - Extended Ring (page 363)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to enable Extended Ringing.
Program 0403 - Number of Extended Rings (page 387)
Set the duration of the Extended Ringing.
Other Related Features
Call Forwarding (page 43)
With Extended Ringing enabled, RNA call forwarding rings an extension for the Number of
Extended Rings before routing to the forwarded destination.
Key Ring (page 170)
With Extended Ringing, a call rings longer at its destination before diverting to Key Ring.
Transfer (page 324)
With Extended Ringing enabled, transferred trunks ring the destination extension for the
Number of Extended Rings before recalling the transferring extension.
Feature Operation
None
120 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Extension Hunting
Extension Hunting
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Automatically route calls to co-workers that work closely together.
Extension Hunting routes calls to a predefined group of hunt group member extensions. A call rings
in sequence through the hunt group until answered at a member extension. Extension Hunting is
helpful, for example, for a group of co-workers that share responsibility for answering calls. Each
call cycles through the group until an available member picks it up.
There are three types of Extension Hunting:
●
Circular Hunting
●
Terminal Hunting
●
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Hunting
Circular Hunting
A Circular Hunting group consists of a group of extensions programmed into a Circular Hunting
list. A call unanswered at a member extension rings the next extension in the programmed list. If
unanswered, the call will continue to cycle through the hunt group. Depending on the hunt type (see
below), Circular Hunting will occur for transferred trunk calls, DILs to a hunt group member, and
ringing Intercom calls. Hunting does not occur for Key Ring and Ring Group calls.
There are four types of Circular Hunting:
●
Ring No Answer Trunk (Option 1)
Hunting will occur for unanswered trunk calls. Hunting will not occur for unanswered ringing
Intercom calls or while the member extension is busy.
●
Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk (Option 2)
Hunting will occur for unanswered trunk calls and for trunk calls to the member extension
while it is busy. Hunting will not occur for ringing Intercom calls.
●
Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Option 3)
Hunting will occur for unanswered trunk and ringing Intercom calls, and for trunk and ringing
Intercom calls to the member extension while it is busy.
●
Busy Trunk (Option 4)
Hunting will occur for trunk calls to the member extension while it is busy. Hunting will not
occur for unanswered trunk and ringing Intercom calls.
Circular Hunting Notes:
●
If a call cycles through the entire Circular Hunting group and remains unanswered, it follows
normal recall/routing programming. For example, a transferred call will recall the transferring
extension and, if still unanswered, go to Key Ring.
●
For type 3 hunting, an Intercom call will stop hunting when it voice-announces. Extension
Hunting follows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing setup at each extension.
●
Placing an extension in DND temporarily removes it from the Circular Hunting group.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 121
telemanuals.com
Extension Hunting
Terminal Hunting
A Terminal Hunting group consists of a group of extensions programmed into a Terminal Hunting
list. A call unanswered at a member extension rings the next extension in the programmed list. The
call will cycle through the group once, until it reaches the last extension in the list. Unlike Circular
Hunting, the call will not cycle back to the top of the hunt list. Depending on the hunt type (see
below), Terminal Hunting will occur for transferred trunk calls, DILs to a hunt group member, and
ringing Intercom calls. Hunting does not occur for Key Ring and Ring Group calls.
Just like Circular Hunting, there are four types of Terminal Hunting:
●
Ring No Answer Trunk (Option 1)
Hunting will occur for unanswered trunk calls. Hunting will not occur for unanswered ringing
Intercom calls or while the member extension is busy.
●
Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk (Option 2)
Hunting will occur for unanswered trunk calls and for trunk calls to the member extension
while it is busy. Hunting will not occur for ringing Intercom calls.
●
Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Option 3)
Hunting will occur for unanswered trunk and ringing Intercom calls, and for trunk and ringing
Intercom calls to the member extension while it is busy.
●
Busy Trunk (Option 4)
Hunting will occur for trunk calls to the member extension while it is busy. Hunting will not
occur for unanswered trunk and ringing Intercom calls.
Terminal Hunting Notes:
●
If a call cycles through the entire Terminal Hunting group and remains unanswered, it follows
normal recall/routing programming. For example, a transferred call will recall the transferring
extension and, if still unanswered, go to Key Ring.
●
Placing an extension in DND temporarily removes it from the Terminal Hunting group.
●
For type 3 hunting, an Intercom call will stop hunting when it voice-announces. Extension
Hunting follows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing setup at each extension.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Hunting
Like Circular and Terminal Hunting, a UCD Hunting group also consists of a group of extensions
programmed into a hunt list. The system routes calls into a UCD group according to the frequency
of use of the member extensions. The first extension rung is the member that has been idle the longest. The last extension rung is the member that has been idle the shortest.
Each member of the group is additionally associated with a UCD Master Extension Number. To
active UCD hunting, an incoming call must route to the UCD master number. This is done by placing an Intercom call to the master number, transferring a call to the master number or setting up a
DIL to the master number. When all members of the UCD Hunting group are busy, the call can
route to the programmed UCD Overflow destination.
UCD Hunting Notes:
●
Unanswered transferred calls and DILs continue to cycle through the UCD group as long as
an agent is available.
●
Placing an extension in Do Not Disturb temporarily removes it from the UCD group.
●
Intercom calls to the UCD master number always ring the agent extensions.
●
If a UCD Group is set to overflow to Voice Mail, overflow will divert to the Voice Mail Automated Attendant.
Conditions
None
122 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Extension Hunting
Default Setting
Hunting not set up.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Circular
Hunting
Step 1: Assign the hunt type to each extension in the Circular Hunting group.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469), enter
the hunt type for each extension in the hunt
group:
1 = Ring No Answer Trunk
2 = Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk
3 = Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls
4 = Busy Trunk
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Destination (page 470),
set up the circular hunt routing. Each extension
should route to the next in the group. In addition,
the last extension should route back to the first.
Step 2: Set up the hunt destination routing.
Step 3: Do calls ring each hunt group member for the correct interval (i.e., neither too long
nor too short) before routing to the next extension in the group?
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
change the Transfer Recall interval to meet the
site requirements. (This setting also determines
how long a trunk call waits at a busy member
extension before routing.)
If yes
If no
Step 4: Does a DIL to a hunt group member ring for the correct interval (i.e., neither too
long nor too short) before routing to the next extension in the group?
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
change the DIL No Answer interval to meet the
site requirements.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 123
telemanuals.com
Extension Hunting
Step-by-step guide for setting up Terminal
Hunting (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Assign the hunt type to each extension (except for the last) in the Terminal Hunting
group.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469), enter
the hunt type for each extension in the hunt
group:
1 = Ring No Answer Trunk
2 = Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk
3 = Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls
4 = Busy Trunk
Step 2: Make sure the last extension in the Terminal Hunting group has hunting undefined.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469), press
CLEAR for the last extension in the Terminal
Hunting group.
Step 3: Set up the hunt destination routing (except for the last extension in the group).
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Destination (page 470),
set up the terminal hunt routing. Each extension
should route to the next in the group (except for
the last — see below).
Step 4: Make sure the last extension in the Terminal Hunting group has no hunt destination.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Destination (page 470),
press CLEAR for the last extension in Terminal
Hunting group.
Step 5: Do calls ring each hunt group member for the correct interval (i.e., neither too long
nor too short) before routing to the next extension in the group?
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
change the Transfer Recall interval to meet the
site requirements. (This setting also determines
how long a trunk call waits at a busy member
extension before routing.)
If yes
If no
124 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Extension Hunting
Step-by-step guide for setting up Terminal
Hunting (Page 2 of 2)
Step 6: Does a DIL to a hunt group member ring for the correct interval (i.e., neither too
long nor too short) before routing to the next extension in the group?
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
change the DIL No Answer interval to meet the
site requirements.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 125
Extension Hunting
Step-by-step guide for setting up UCD
Hunting (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Set up the UCD Hunting group master number.
•
•
In Program 0510 - Hunt Group Master Number
(page 402), assign the UCD Hunting group master number.
UCD Hunting group master numbers can be 100299, 332-400, or 417-899. They cannot be in the
extension (300-331) or trunk (401-416) number
range. By default, the systems uses codes beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/
trunk group access.
Step 2: When all extensions in the UCD group are busy, should calls to the UCD group overflow to an alternate destination?
•
In Program 0510 - Overflow Destination
(page 402), enter the UCD overflow destination.
The destination can be an extension, Ring Group
master number or another UCD Hunting group
master number.
Step 3: Assign hunt type 05 to each member of the UCD group.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469), make
sure each extension in the UCD group has hunt
type 05.
Step 4: Make sure each extension in the hunt group has the same master number assignment.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Master Number
(page 470), make sure each extension in the same
UCD group has the same master number. Refer to
Program 0510 - Hunt Group Master Number
(page 402) when setting up master numbers.
Step 5: When all UCD group members are busy, do calls queue for the correct interval (i.e.,
neither too long nor too short) before routing to the overflow destination?
•
In Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow
(page 377), leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow
(page 377), change the ACD/UCD Overflow
interval to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
126 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Extension Hunting
Step-by-step guide for setting up UCD
Hunting (Page 2 of 2)
Step 6: Do calls ring each idle hunt group member for the correct interval (i.e., neither too
long nor too short) before routing to the next extension in the group?
•
In Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer
(page 386), leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer
(page 386), change the Call Forward Ring No
Answer interval to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 7: Does a DIL to the UCD master ring an idle group member for the correct interval
(i.e., neither too long nor too short) before routing to the next extension in the
group?
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
leave the entry at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
change the DIL No Answer interval to meet the
site requirements.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Circular Hunting
Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375)
Set how long a trunk call waits at a busy member extension. This interval also sets how long a
call rings each member extension as it cycles through the group.
Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376)
Set how long a DIL rings its destination member extension before cycling through the group.
Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer (page 386)
Set how long a call rings an idle UCD Hunting group member before cycling to the next
extension in the group.
Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469)
Enter the same hunt type for all extensions in the Circular Hunting group. The available hunt
types are: 1 (Ring No Answer Trunk), 2 (Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk), 3 (Busy/Ring No
Answer All Calls), and 4 (Busy Trunk)
Program 1807 - Hunt Destination (page 470)
For each extension, enter the next extension in the hunt group. Be sure the last extension
points back to the first extension.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 127
Extension Hunting
Refer to the table below for a Circular Hunting programming example.
Circular Hunting Programming (for 301, 303 and 304)
1807: Hunt Type
Enter the same Hunt Type for all three extensions:
1 = Ring No Answer Trunk
2 = Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk
3 = Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls
4 = Busy Trunk
1807: Hunt Destination
301
303
303
304
304
301
(This causes hunting to loop back to 301)
0401: Transfer Recall Time
This timer sets how long a trunk call waits at a busy member
extension. It also sets how long a call rings each member
extension as it cycles through the group.
0401: DIL No Answer Time
This timer sets how long a DIL rings its destination member
extension before cycling through the group.
Terminal Hunting
Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375)
Set how long a trunk call waits at a busy member extension. This interval also sets how long a
call rings each member extension as it cycles through the group.
Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376)
Set how long a DIL rings its destination member extension before cycling through the group.
Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469)
Enter the same hunt type for all extensions in the Terminal Hunting group, except for the last
extension. The last extension should have hunting undefined (by pressing CLEAR).The available hunt types are: 1 (Ring No Answer Trunk), 2 (Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk), 3 (Busy/
Ring No Answer All Calls), and 4 (Busy Trunk)
Program 1807 - Hunt Destination (page 470)
For each extension except for the last extension, enter the next extension in the hunt group.
Be sure the destination for the last extension is undefined (by pressing CLEAR).
Refer to the table below for a Terminal Hunting programming example.
Terminal Hunting Programming (for 301 and 303)
1807: Hunt Type
Enter the same Hunt Type for all three extensions:
1 = Ring No Answer Trunk
2 = Busy/Ring No Answer Trunk
3 = Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls
4 = Busy Trunk
(Make sure hunting is not defined at 304.)
1807: Hunt Destination
128 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
301
303
303
304
304
Press CLEAR to undefine entry.
(Hunting stops at 304.)
DS2000 Software Manual
Extension Hunting
Terminal Hunting Programming (for 301 and 303)
0401: Transfer Recall Time
This timer sets how long a trunk call waits at a busy member
extension. It also sets how long a call rings each member
extension as it cycles through the group.
0401: DIL No Answer Time
This timer sets how long a DIL rings its destination member
extension before cycling through the group.
UCD Hunting
Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow (page 377)
This timer sets when UCD overflow occurs. When all UCD agents are busy, a queued call
rings for this interval and then overflows to the destination set in Program 0510 - Overflow
Destination (page 402).
Program 0510 - Hunt Group Master Number (page 402)
Define the master extension number for the UCD hunt group. UCD Hunting group master
numbers can be 100-299, 332-400, or 417-899. They cannot be in the extension (300-331) or
trunk (401-416) number range. By default, the systems uses codes beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/trunk group access.
Program 0510 - Overflow Destination (page 402)
Define the overflow destination for the UCD hunt group. When all UCD group members are
busy, calls the to master number ring the overflow destination instead.
Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469)
Enter hunt type 05 for all extensions in the UCD Hunting group.
Program 1807 - Hunt Destination (page 470)
For each extension in the UCD Hunting group, enter the master number defined in Program
0510 - Hunt Group Master Number (page 402).
Refer to the table below for a UCD Hunting programming example.
UCD Hunting Programming (for 301, 303 and 304 with master 750)
0510: Hunt Group Master
Number
Select UCD Group 2 and assign master number 750.
0510: UCD Overflow Destination
Enter 305
1807: Hunt Type
Enter the Hunt Type 5 for all three extensions.
1807: Hunt Master Number
Enter 750 for all three extensions.
0401: UCD Overflow Timer
This timer sets when UCD overflow occurs. When all UCD
agents are busy, a queued call rings for this interval and then
overflows to the destination set in Program 0510 - Overflow Destination (page 402).
Other Related Features
Call Forwarding (page 43)
If a member of a Circular or Terminal Hunting group forwards their calls, hunting will follow
Call Forwarding. If a member of a UCD Hunting group forwards their calls, calls to the extension follow forwarding but calls to the UCD master number do not.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
DILs to a Circular or Terminal Hunting group member initiate hunting. In addition, DILs to a
UCD master number ring the UCD group directly.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 129
Extension Hunting
Directory Dialing (page 110)
Intercom Directory Dialing will show UCD Group names.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
Placing an agent in DND temporarily removes it from the UCD group.
Flexible Numbering Plan (page 134)
UCD Hunting group master numbers can be 100-299, 332-400, or 417-899. They cannot be in
the extension (300-331) or trunk (401-416) number range. By default, the systems uses codes
beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/trunk group access.
Group Ring (page 144)
Group Ring calls do not activate hunting.
Intercom (page 165)
Voice-announced Intercom calls do not initiate hunting.
Transfer (page 324)
Trunk calls transferred to a Terminal or Circular Hunting group member activate hunting. In
addition, trunk calls transferred to a UCD group master number activate hunting.
Voice Mail (page 340)
For Terminal and Circular Hunting, unsupervised transfers (UTRF) from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant route like trunk calls. Supervised transfers (TRF) from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant route like Intercom calls. In either case, unanswered calls eventually route
the initially called extension’s mailbox.
Feature Operation
To send a call to a Terminal or Circular Hunting group:
●
●
●
●
The options available depend on the type of hunting set up.
Transfer a trunk call to a hunt group member.
Set up a DIL to a hunt group member.
Place a ringing Intercom call to a hunt group member.
Set up a hunt group member as a trunk’s overflow destination.
To send a call to a UCD Hunting group:
●
●
●
●
Transfer a call to the UCD master number.
Set up a DIL to the UCD master number.
Place an Intercom call to the UCD master number.
Set up the UCD master number as a trunk’s overflow destination.
130 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
External Alerting Devices
External Alerting Devices
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 131
Flash
Flash
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Extension users can access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting trunk loop current.
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting trunk loop
current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or
PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Flash
Step 1: When an extension flashes a trunk, does the telco/PBX return new dial tone on the
same trunk without dropping the line?
•
In Program 0402 - PBX/Centrex Flash
(page 379), do not change the setting of the Flash
Response timer.
•
In Program 0402 - PBX/Centrex Flash
(page 379), change the setting of the Flash
Response timer for compatiblity with the connected telco/PBX.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0402 - PBX/Centrex Flash (page 379)
Set the Flash interval. When a user flashes a trunk, the system opens the trunk circuit for this
interval. Be sure to set this interval for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Other Related Features
PBX/Centrex Compatibility (page 222)
Flash allows an extension user to access certain telco or PBX features.
132 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Flash
Toll Restriction (page 314)
The system enforces normal Toll Restriction after the Flash.
Feature Operation
To Flash the trunk you are on:
1.
Press FLASH
A brief interruption, followed by new CO/PBX dial tone.
Line/loop key on (green).
2.
Dial the code for the desired CO/PBX feature.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 133
Flexible Numbering Plan
Flexible Numbering Plan
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Change the digits users dial for co-workers and other features.
The system’s Flexible Numbering Plan allows you to change the digits users dial to reach the attendant, other co-worker’s and trunks. The following chart shows the areas of the system number plan
you can change.
For this feature:
You can change the digits a
user dials to:
These digits are
normally:
Attendant Position
Reach the system operator(s)
0 or 01-04
Intercom
Call a co-worker over the Intercom
300-331
Direct Trunk Access
Directly access a trunk
401-416
Central Office Calls, Placing
Access a Trunk Group
90-98
Conditions
None
Default Setting
See the table above.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Flexible
Numbering Plan (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Do you want to change the digits users dial to reach the system operator(s)?
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
change the options for digit 0 and the new operator access digit. Review your new choice to be
sure it does not affect other system operations.
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
leave the options for digit 0 at their default setting.
If yes
If no
134 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Flexible Numbering Plan
Step-by-step guide for setting up Flexible
Numbering Plan (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Do you want to change the digits users dial to reach coworkers over the Intercom?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
change the options for digit 3 and the new Intercom access digit. Review your new choice to be
sure it does not affect other system operations.
In Program 0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers (page 398), assign new extension numbers to
station ports.
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
leave the options for digit 3 at their default setting.
Step 3: Do you want to change the digits users dial to directly access a trunk?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
change the options for digit 4 and the new trunk
access digit. Review your new choice to be sure it
does not affect other system operations.
In Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
(page 396), assign new extension numbers to
trunk ports.
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
leave the options for digit 4 at their default setting.
Step 4: Do you want to change the digits users dial to access a Trunk Group?
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
change the options for digit 9 and the new Trunk
Group access digit. Review your new choice to be
sure it does not affect other system operations.
•
In Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392),
leave the options for digit 9 at their default setting.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392)
Customize the system’s number plan by changing the digits users dial to reach an operator,
co-workers (i.e., Intercom), Direct Trunk Access and Trunk Group Access.
Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers (page 396)
Enter the extension number associated with each trunk port.
Program 0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers (page 398)
Enter the extension number associated with each station port.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 135
Flexible Numbering Plan
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Change the digits users dial to reach the system operators (normally 0 or 01-04).
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Change the digits users dial to access a Trunk Group for an outside call (normally 90-98).
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
Change the digits users dial to directly access a trunk (normally 401-416).
Extension Hunting (page 121)
UCD Hunting group master numbers can be 100-299, 332-400, or 417-899. They cannot be in
the extension (300-331) or trunk (401-416) number range. By default, the systems uses codes
beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/trunk group access.
Intercom (page 165)
Change the digits users dial to reach co-worker’s over the Intercom (normally 300-331).
Feature Operation
None
136 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Disconnect a co-worker’s outside call in an emergency.
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s
active trunk call. Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no
other trunks are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to
release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.
CAUTION
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the trunk. Always use
this feature in an emergency and when no other trunks are available.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled for attendants (COS 1). Disabled for all other extensions (COS 2-15).
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Forced
Trunk Disconnect
Step 1: Do you want to be able to disconnect another extension’s active trunk call?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Forced Trunk Disconnect
(page 363), enter Y to enable Forced Trunk Disconnect for the extension.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extension.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), make sure the extension has
outgoing (option 2) or full (option 3) access to the
trunks it should be able to disconnect.
In Program 0101 - Forced Trunk Disconnect
(page 363), enter N to disable Forced Trunk Disconnect for the extension.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extension.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 137
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Programming List
Program 0101 - Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 363)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to enable the ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
An extension can only use Forced Trunk Disconnect on a trunk to which it has outgoing
(option 2) or full (option 3) access.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
System attendants normally have Forced Trunk Disconnect capability.
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
As an alternative to disconnecting the trunk, Barge In instead.
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
An extension user with Direct Trunk Access can dial a code for the busy trunk before using
Forced Trunk Disconnect.
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference (page 307)
An extension user can end an Unsupervised Conference by using Forced Trunk Disconnect on
one of the trunks in the tandem call.
Feature Operation
To disconnect a busy trunk:
1.
2.
Press line key for busy trunk.
OR
Press ICM and dial the trunk’s Direct Trunk Access code (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Busy tone.
Line/loop key on (red).
Refer to Direct Trunk Access for the specifics.
Dial # to disconnect the line.
The line key goes out and you hear Intercom dial tone. To place a call on the trunk,
press the line key and dial the number.
138 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Easily answer a call ringing your Pickup Group, even if you don’t know which extension is ringing.
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user answer a call ringing an extension in their assigned
Pickup Group.This permits co-workers in the same Pickup Group to easily answer each other’s
ringing calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed
Group Call Pickup key. The system has a maximum of eight Pickup Groups, with an unlimited
number of extensions in each group. However, an extension can be a member of only one pickup
group.
Group Call Pickup can answer the following types of calls:
●
Ringing Intercom calls
●
Transfered calls
●
Direct Inward Lines
●
Calls on trunks assigned to the Pickup Group
To simplify picking up calls, an extension can have Programmable Function Keys assigned as
Group Call Pickup keys. There are three types of Group Call Pickup keys: immediate ring, no ring
(lamp only) or delayed ring.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Pickup Groups assigned.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Group Call
Pickup (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension be part of a Pickup Group?
•
In Program 1802 - Call Pickup Group Number
(page 455), enter the number (1-8) of the Pickup
Group to which the extension should belong.
•
In Program 1802 - Call Pickup Group Number
(page 455), assign the extension to Pickup Group
0.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 139
Group Call Pickup
Step-by-step guide for setting up Group Call
Pickup (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Should an incoming call on a trunk ring all extensions in a Pickup Group?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
In Program 1003 - Call Pickup Group (page 426),
assign the trunk to a Pickup Group (1-8).
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), make sure extensions in the
Pickup Group have incoming (option 1) or full
(option 3) access to the trunk.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
make sure to enable ringing for all extensions in
the Pickup Group that should ring for the trunk.
In Program 1003 - Call Pickup Group (page 426),
assign the trunk to Pickup Group 0.
Step 3: Should extension have one-touch Group Call Pickup?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
In Program 1701 - Group Pickup Immediate Ring
(page 437), use code 09 to assign a key as an
immediate ring Group Call Pickup key.
OR
In Program 1701 - Group Pickup No Ring
(page 437), use code 10 to assign a key as a no
ring (lamp only) Group Call Pickup key.
OR
In Program 1701 - Group Pickup Delay Ring
(page 437), use code 11 to assign a key as a
delayed ring Group Call Pickup key.
In Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key
Assignments (page 436), do not assign a key as a
Group Pickup key (codes 09, 10 or 11).
Step 4: Should DSS Console have one-touch Group Call Pickup?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
140 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 1704 - Group Pickup Immediate Ring
(page 445), use code 09 to assign a key as an
immediate ring Group Call Pickup key.
OR
In Program 1704 - Group Pickup No Ring
(page 445), use code 10 to assign a key as a no
ring (lamp only) Group Call Pickup key.
OR
In Program 1704 - Group Pickup Delay Ring
(page 446), use code 11 to assign a key as a
delayed ring Group Call Pickup key.
In Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
(page 444), do not assign a key as a Group Pickup
key (codes 09, 10 or 11).
DS2000 Software Manual
Group Call Pickup
Programming List
Program 1003 - Call Pickup Group (page 426)
Have an incoming call on the trunk ring all the extensions in the assigned pickup group.
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Group Call Pickup key (09 = Immediate
Ring, 10 = No Ring, 11 = Delayed Ring). The options are 1-8 (Pickup Groups 1-8) or 0 (unassigned).
Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment (page 444)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Group Call Pickup key (09 = Immediate
Ring, 10 = No Ring, 11 = Delayed Ring). The options are 1-8 (Pickup Groups 1-8) or 0 (unassigned).
Program 1802 - Call Pickup Group Number (page 455)
Assign the Call Pickup Group (1-8, 0 = undefined) for each extension.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night).
Other Related Features
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
DILs to an extension activate Group Call Pickup if the extension ringing is a member of a
Pickup Group.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
DSS Consoles can have Group Call Pickup keys.
Directed Call Pickup (page 108)
Directed Call Pickup is another way to pick up calls ringing an extension.
Intercom (page 165)
Ringing Intercom calls activate Group Call Pickup if the extension ringing is a member of a
Pickup Group.
Transfer (page 324)
A trunk call transferred to an extension in a Pickup Group activates Group Call Pickup.
Feature Operation
To answer a call ringing a phone in your Pickup Group:
Trunk ringing.
(Optional) Group Pickup flashing (red).
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press flashing Group Pickup .
Conversation with caller.
N/A.
OR
Dial *1.
Conversation with caller.
N/A.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 141
Group Listen
Group Listen
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Group Listen to talk to an important client or customer and have your co-workers listen in on
the meeting.
Group Listen permits a keyset user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice broadcast
over the telephone speaker. This lets the keyset user’s co-workers listen to the conversation. Group
Listen turns off the keyset’s Handsfree microphone so the caller does not hear the co-worker’s
voices during a Group Listen.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming List
Step-by-step guide for setting up Group
Listen
Step 1: Should extension be able to use Group Listen?
•
Extensions in the Headset mode cannot use
Group Listen. In Program 1807 - Headset
(page 469), enter N to disable the Headset mode.
•
N/A
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1807 - Headset (page 469)
Extensions in the Headset mode cannot use Group Listen. If you need Group Listen, be sure
to enter N to disable the Headset mode.
Other Related Features
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
Group Listen is not available to single line telephones.
142 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Group Listen
Feature Operation
To initiate Group Listen:
1.
Place or answer call using the handset.
2.
Press SPK twice (but do not hang up).
Use handset to speak to caller. Caller’s voice will broadcast over the telephone
speaker.
SPK flashes slowly (red).
You can talk to the caller through your handset. You and your co-workers hear your
caller’s voice over your phone’s speaker.
Your handsfree microphone and handset receiver are off.
To talk handsfree after initiating Group Listen:
1.
Press SPK twice.
N/A.
SPK on.
2.
Hang up.
Handsfree conversation with caller.
SPK on.
To cancel Group Listen and return to your handset:
1.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press flashing SPK.
Handset conversation with caller.
SPK off.
You can talk to your caller over your handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear
your caller’s voice.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 143
Group Ring
Group Ring
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Group Ring to call a group of co-worker’s simultaneously.
Group Ring allows you to arrange extensions into Ring Groups for answering calls. When a call
comes into the Ring Group master number, all extensions in the group ring simultaneously. Any
user in the Ring Group can answer the call just by lifting the handset. The ringing call can be:
●
A Direct Inward Line to the Ring Group (i.e., terminated to the Ring Group master number)
●
An trunk call transferred to the Ring Group master number
●
An intercom call to the Ring Group master number
The system provides up to 8 Ring Groups (1-8). The Ring Group master number can be any valid
extension number not already in use.
Overflow for Group Ring Calls
If unanswered, DILs to a Ring Group can route to a programmed overflow destination. The overflow destination can be an extension, another Ring Group, UCD Group or Voice Mail. You can set
up separate DIL overflow destinations for the day mode and at night. If unanswered at the overflow
destination, the call diverts to Key Ring. Note that a Ring Group DIL goes into the night mode
when any extension with night mode capability presses their Night key. See Night Service / Night
Ring on page 200 for more.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Ring Groups assigned.
144 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Group Ring
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Group Ring
(Page 1 of 3)
Step 1: Should extensions be in a Ring Groups?
•
If yes
In Program 0511 - Ring Group Master Extension
Numbers and Names (page 404), assign names
and extension numbers to Ring Groups (1-8).
Ring Group master numbers can be 100-299,
332-400, or 417-899. They cannot be in the
extension (300-331) or trunk (401-416) number
range. By default, the systems uses codes beginning with 0 for operator access and 9 for trunk/
trunk group access.
•
Program 1802 - Ring Group Number (page 455),
assign extensions to Ring Groups.
•
In Program 0511 - Ring Group Master Extension
Numbers and Names (page 404), do not assign
names and extension numbers to Ring Groups.
Program 1802 - Ring Group Number (page 455),
do not assign extensions to Ring Groups.
If no
•
Step 2: Check to be sure each trunk’s circuit type matches the connected trunk circuit.
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416),
enter the correct circuit type for each trunk (51 =
loop start DTMF, 52 = loop start DP, 53 = ground
start DTMF, 54 = ground start DP).
Step 3: Do you want to assign a DIL to the Ring Group in the day mode?.
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), assign the DIL to the Ring Group
master number. (You can also assign a DIL to an
extension, UCD Group master number, or Voice
Mail master number.)
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), do not assign the DIL to a Ring
Group master number.
If yes
If no
Step 4: Do you want an unanswered Ring Group DIL to overflow during the day mode?
•
If yes
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the
Day (page 426), enter Y.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 145
Group Ring
Step-by-step guide for setting up Group Ring
(Page 2 of 3)
•
If no
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the
Day (page 426), enter N.
Step 5: Assign the Ring Group DIL day overflow destination.
•
In Program 1003 - Day Overflow Destination
(page 426), assign the DIL day mode termination.
The destination can be an extension, UCD Group
master number, Ring Group master number,
Voice Mail master number or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).
Step 6: Do you want to assign a DIL to a Ring Group in the night mode?
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), assign the DIL to the Ring Group
master number.(You can also assign a DIL to an
extension, UCD Group master number, or Voice
Mail master number.)
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night)
(page 426), do not assign the DIL to a Ring
Group master number.
If yes
If no
Step 7: Do you want an unanswered DIL to overflow during the night mode?
•
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night
(page 427), enter Y.
•
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night
(page 427), enter N.
If yes
If no
Step 8: Assign the DIL night overflow destination.
•
In Program 1003 - Night Overflow Destination
(page 427), assign the DIL night mode termination. The destination can be an extension, UCD
Group master number, Ring Group master number, Voice Mail master number or Key Ring (by
pressing CLEAR).
Step 9: Does extension have a line key for Ring Group DIL?
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), no programming changes are required.
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), make
sure the DIL has a line key assigned (code 03).
If yes
If no
146 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Group Ring
Step-by-step guide for setting up Group Ring
(Page 3 of 3)
Step 10: Do you want to put the Ring Group DIL on a DSS Console key?
•
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), make
sure the DIL has a DSS Console line key assigned
(code 03).
•
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), make
sure the DIL does not have a DSS Console line
key assigned (code 03).
If yes
If no
Step 11: If the Ring Group DIL is unanswered, does call divert to its programmed overflow
destination after the proper interval.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
leave the DIL No Answer time at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
change the DIL No Answer time to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 12: If DIL is unanswered at the overflow destination, does call divert to Key Ring after
the proper interval.
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
leave the Transfer Recall time at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
change the Transfer Recall time to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376)
Set how long a DIL rings its destination before ringing its programmed overflow destination.
Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375)
This interval sets how long a call will ring the day or night overflow destination before diverting to key ring.
Program 0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names (page 404)
Assign extension numbers and names to the Ring Group master extensions.
Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416)
Set the DIL trunk’s circuit type for compatiblity with the connected telco or PBX. The options
are 51 (loop start DTMF), 52 (loop start DP), 53 (ground start DTMF) or 54 (ground start
DP).
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day) (page 426)
To have a DIL ring the Ring Group directly during the day mode, enter the Ring Group master
number.
Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the Day (page 426)
Enter Y to enable DIL overflow during the day mode. (Entering N for this option has the same
affect as entering Y followed by Key Ring in the following option.)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 147
Group Ring
Program 1003 - Day Overflow Destination (page 426)
Set the overflow destination for the Ring Group’s DIL during the day. The overflow destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, another Ring Group master number,
Voice Mail master number or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night) (page 426)
To have a DIL ring the Ring Group directly during the night mode, enter the Ring Group master number. You can optionally have the trunk ring a different destination at night, such as
anextension, UCD Group master number, or Voice Mail master number.
Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night (page 427)
Enable Y to enable DIL overflow during the night mode. (Entering N for this option has the
same affect as entering Y followed by Key Ring in the following option.)
Program 1003 - Night Overflow Destination (page 427)
Set the overflow destination for the Ring Group’s DIL during the night mode calls.The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, another Ring Group master number,
or Voice Mail master number.
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
A Ring Group DIL should also appear on a line key (code 03).
Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444)
A Ring Group DIL can optionally appear on a DSS Console line key (code 03).
Program 1802 - Ring Group Number (page 455)
Assign extensions to Ring Groups (1-8, 0 = no assignment).
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
System operators will not ring for Ring Group calls.
Call Forwarding (page 43)
Call Forwarding does not reroute Ring Group calls.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy Ring Group. When all extensions in the Ring
Group are busy, the call continues to ring until an extension becomes free.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
A DIL can terminate to a Ring Group master number. When a call comes in on the trunk, all
phones in the Ring Group ring simultaneously.
Directed Call Pickup (page 108)
Directed Call Pickup can intercept Ring Group calls.
Directory Dialing (page 110)
Intercom Directory dialing will show Ring Group names.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
Group Ring calls do not activate hunting.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
The Night key sets the day/night status of a DIL terminated to a Ring Group.
Transfer (page 324)
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Ring Group master number. If unanswered, the call
will continue to ring the group until a member picks it up.
Feature Operation
To make an Intercom call to a Ring Group:
1.
Lift handset and press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
148 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Group Ring
2.
Dial Ring Group number (e.g., 350).
Intercom ringing.
ICM on.
3.
Wait for co-worker to answer.
If all Ring Group members are busy, your call will continue to ring until a group member becomes free.
To Transfer your trunk call to a Ring Group:
1.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
2.
Dial Ring Group number (e.g., 350).
Intercom ringing.
ICM on and line key flashes (green).
3.
To screen (announce) the Transfer:
● Wait for Ring Group member to answer before hanging up.
OR
To have the call go through unscreened (unannounced):
● Hang up.
OR
To return to call before a Ring Group member picks it up:
● Press flashing (green) line key.
An unanswered Transfer to a Ring Group will continue to ring the group until a member picks it up. It will not recall to the transferring extension.
To answer a call that rings your Ring Group:
Ringing
N/A
1.
If call doesn’t appear on a line/loop key:
● Lift handset.
OR
If line appears on a line/loop key:
● Press flashing line/loop key.
To answer a call that ringing another group (of which you are not a member):
Ringing
N/A
1.
Lift handset and press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
2.
Dial ** and the Ring Group number (e.g., 350).
Conversation with caller.
ICM on.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 149
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
● Talk over the phone Handsfree, using the built-in speaker and microphone.
● With Handsfree Answerback, answer an Intercom call by just speaking toward
your phone.
Handsfree
Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone
(instead of the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick
up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands while
talking on the phone.
Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by
speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for
workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. Incoming Intercom calls alert with two
beeps if the extension has Handsfree Answerback — a single beep if it does not.
Forced Intercom Ringing causes an Intercom call to ring the destination extension. You can enable
Forced Intercom Ringing system-wide (for all extensions), or a user can dial a code to have their
Intercom call ring the destination.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
150 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Handsfree
Answerback
Step 1: Should Intercom calls voice-announce system-wide?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter Y to allow Intercom calls
to voice-announce system-wide. Users can still
dial 1 to have their calls ring.
In Program 1807 - Station Voice Announced
Intercom Calls (page 469), enter Y to enable
voice-announced intercom calls for specific
extensions. The User-Programmable Options # IV
(#48) and # IR (#47) locally override this setting.
In Program 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter N to have all Intercom
calls ring system-wide. Users cannot dial 1 to
have their calls voice-announce.
Step 2: Should user be able to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call without lifting
the handset (i.e., by using Handsfree Answerback)?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter Y to enable Handfree
Answerback system-wide.
In Program 1802 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom
Calls (page 456), enter Y to enable Handsfree
Answerback for specific extensions.
In Program 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter N to disable Handsfree
answerback system-wide. Users must lift the
handset to respond to voice-announced Intercom
calls.
Programming List
Program 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls (page 367)
Enter Y to allow extension user to respond to voice-announced Intercom calls by just speaking
toward the phone (i.e., by using Handsfree Answerback). When you enter N, the extension
user must lift the handset to speak.
Program 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom Calls (page 367)
Enter Y to enable voice-announced Intercom calls system-wide. If disabled, all Intercom calls
ring (i.e., Forced Intercom Ringing is enabled).
Program 1802 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls (page 456)
Enter Y to enable Handsfree reply (Handsfree Answerback) on a per-extension basis. Intercom calls initially ring when this option is disabled. This option requires that you have previously enabled 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 151
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback
Program 1807 - Station Voice Announced Intercom Calls (page 469)
Enter Y to enable voice-announced Intercom calls on a per-extension basis. This option
requires that you have previously enabled 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom Calls. The UserProgrammable Options # IV (#48) and #IR #47) locally override this setting.
Other Related Features
Automatic Handsfree (page 30)
Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing
a key — without pressing SPK first.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
Handsfree is not available to extensions in the headset mode. Handsfree Answerback still
available — depending on system programming.
Intercom (page 165)
Handsfree Answerback allows a user to answer an Intercom call by just speaking toward the
phone.
Microphone Mute (page 190)
Use Microphone Mute to temporarily turn off the Handsfree microphone.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
On- and Off-Premise Extensions do not have Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback capability.
Feature Operation
Handsfree
To activate Handsfree instead of lifting the handset:
1.
Press SPK.
Handsfree conversation with caller.
SPK on.
To talk on a Handsfree call:
1.
Speak toward phone.
To temporarily turn off the Handsfree microphone, see Microphone Mute on page 190.
To hang up a handsfree call:
1.
Press SPK.
Conversation stops.
SPK off.
To change a handset call into a Handsfree call:
1.
Press SPK.
N/A.
SPK on.
2.
Hang up the handset.
If you don’t hang up, you’ll activate Group Listen instead.
152 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback
To change a Handsfree call into a handset call:
1.
Lift handset.
Conversation with caller in handset.
SPK off.
Handsfree Answerback
Operation is automatic if enabled in system programming.
User Programmable Feature
DS2000 Software Manual
#IV
#48
Handsfree Answerback On (Forced Intercom Ringing Off)
#IR
#47
Forced Intercom Ringing On (Handsfree Answerback Off)
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 153
Headset Compatibility
Headset Compatibility
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Have the privacy of a handset call without having to hold the handset
A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, the headset provides privacy not available from Handsfree.
An example of a compatible headset is UNEX Model Pro-MP10A.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Headset
Compatibility
Step 1: Should extension be in the headset mode?
•
In Program 1807 - Headset (page 469), enter Y to
enable the headset mode.
•
In Program 1807 - Headset (page 469), enter N to
disable the headset mode.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension receive voice announcements while in the headset mode?
•
In Program 1807 - Headset Voice-Announced
Intercom Calls (page 469), enter Y to enable the
voice announcements.
•
In Program 1807 - Headset Voice-Announced
Intercom Calls (page 469), enter N to disable the
voice announcements.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1807 - Headset Voice-Announced Intercom Calls (page 469)
154 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Headset Compatibility
Enter Y to enable or N to disable incoming voice-announced Intercom calls while the extension is in the headset mode.
Program 1807 - Headset (page 469)
Enter Y to enable the Headset mode.
Other Related Features
Automatic Handsfree (page 30)
While in the headset mode, Automatic Handsfree simplifies answering trunk calls.
Background Music (page 35)
Background Music plays in the headset when the extension is in the headset mode.
Group Listen (page 142)
Group Listen is not available to extensions in the headset mode.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback (page 150)
Handsfree is not available to extensions in the headset mode. Handsfree Answerback is available — depending on system programming.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
An extension in the headset mode can receive Camp On tones for trunk calls, but not off-hook
ringing.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
On- and Off-Premise Extensions do not have headset capability.
Paging (page 214)
While in the headset mode, the extension user can hear Paging announcements in the headset.
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
Headset Compatibility is not available to single line telephones.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension user cannot Voice Over to a co-worker in the headset mode.
Feature Operation
To enable the headset mode:
1.
2.
Unplug the telephone handset but leave it in the handset cradle.
Plug in the headset.
When in the headset mode:
●
●
●
DS2000 Software Manual
Press a line key to place or answer a trunk call.
OR
Press ICM to get Intercom dial tone.
OR
If on a call, press SPK to hang up.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 155
Hold
Hold
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Have a call wait on Hold, then pick it up to continue the conversation.
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence
or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold,
the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the
extension that placed them on Hold. If the recall is unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring.
There are four types of Hold:
System (Regular) Hold
With System Hold, an outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all
other keysets. Any keyset user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.
Exclusive Hold
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold. The
trunk appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive Hold is important if
the user doesn’t want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold allows a user to be on a trunk call, activate a feature and automatically place the
call on Hold without first pressing the HOLD key. The system places a call on Hold automatically
when the user presses CONF or ICM, a Call Coverage Key or a Hotline key.
Intercom Hold
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other
extension.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
System Hold, Exclusive Hold and Automatic Hold enabled.
156 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Hold
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Hold
Step 1: Should extension be able to use Automatic Hold?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 0101 - Automatic Hold (page 364),
enter Y to enable Automatic Hold.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 0101 - Automatic Hold (page 364),
enter N to disable Automatic Hold.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
Step 2: Does an unanswered call on System Hold recall the extension that placed it on Hold
after the correct interval?
•
In Program 0403 - Hold Recall (page 386), leave
the Hold Recall interval at its current setting.
•
In Program 0403 - Hold Recall (page 386),
change the Hold Recall interval to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 3: Does an unanswered call on Exclusive Hold recall the extension that placed it on
Hold after the correct interval?
•
In Program 0403 - Exclusive Hold (page 386),
leave the Exclusive Hold Recall interval at its current setting.
•
In Program 0403 - Exclusive Hold (page 386),
change the Exclusive Hold Recall interval to meet
the site requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 4: Does an unanswered Hold recall revert to Key Ring after the proper interval?
•
In Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376), leave
the Trunk Revert interval at its current setting.
•
In Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376),
change the Trunk Revert interval to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 157
Hold
Programming List
Program 0101 - Automatic Hold (page 364)
Enter Y to enable Automatic Hold at an extension.
Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376)
This timer sets how long Hold Recall rings the extension that placed the call on hold before
Key Ring occurs. Key Ring rings all extensions programmed to ring for that line.
Program 0403 - Hold Recall (page 386)
Set how long a call stays on Hold before it recalls the extension that initially placed it on
Hold.
Program 0403 - Exclusive Hold (page 386)
Set how long a call stays on Exclusive Hold before it recalls the extension that initially placed
it on Exclusive Hold.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Call Timer (page 48)
A user’s Call Timer starts when they pick up a call from Hold. If they place the call on Hold
and another user picks it up, the timer restarts for the new user.
Directed Call Pickup (page 108)
Directed Call Pickup can pick up Hold recalls.
Key Ring (page 170)
Unanswered Hold Recalls revert to Key Ring if not picked up.
Music On Hold (page 195)
If installed, Music on Hold plays to callers on Hold.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
An extension user can place their current call on Hold and answer the waiting call.
Transfer (page 324)
If an extension receiving a screened Transfer answers the screen and immediately hangs up
(before the transferring extension), the call goes on Exclusi ve Hold at the transferring extension.
Feature Operation
To place a trunk call on System Hold:
1.
Press HOLD.
N/A
The line key winks (on) while on Hold, flashes slowly while recalling. The line
key is green for your calls - red for your co-workers.
2.
Hang up.
To pick up a trunk call on System Hold:
1.
Press flashing line key.
Conversation with caller.
Line key on (green).
158 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Hold
To place a trunk call on Exclusive Hold:
1.
Press HOLD twice.
N/A
For you, the line key winks (on - green) while on Hold, flashes slowly while
recalling. For your co-worker’s the line key is on (red).
2.
Hang up.
To pick up a trunk call on Exclusive Hold:
1.
Press flashing line key.
Conversation with caller.
Line key on (green).
To place an Intercom call on Hold:
1.
2.
You can place both voice-announced and ringing Intercom calls on Hold.
Press HOLD.
N/A
ICM goes out.
Hang up.
To pick up a call on Intercom Hold:
1.
Lift handset
2.
Press HOLD.
Conversation with caller.
ICM on.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 159
Hotline
Hotline
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Hotline provides partner extensions with one-button calling and Transfer.
Hotline gives a keyset user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer
calls to each other just by pressing a single key.
In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partner’s extension:
Hotline Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The covered extension is:
Off
Idle or not installed
On
Busy or ringing
Flashing fast
In Do Not Disturb
Conditions
An extension’s Hotline partner can be any other keyset (e.g., physical port). An extension cannot
have a Hotline key for master numbers or virutal ports.
Default Setting
No Hotline keys programmed.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Hotline
(Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension have a Hotline partner?
•
In Program 1701 - Hotline Key (page 436), enter
code 05 + the covered extension (300-331) to
assign a Hotline key.
•
In Program 1701 - Hotline Key (page 436), do not
enter code 05 to assign a key as a Hotline key.
If yes
If no
160 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Hotline
Step-by-step guide for setting up Hotline
(Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Should DSS Console also have a Hotline partners?
•
In Program 1704 - Hotline Key (page 445), enter
code 05 + the covered extension (300-331) to
assign a Hotline key.
•
In Program 1704 - Hotline Key (page 445), do not
enter code 05 to assign a key as a Hotline key.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1701 - Hotline Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Hotline key (code 05). The option is your
Hotline partner’s extension number.
Program 1704 - Hotline Key (page 445)
Assign a programmable key on a DSS Console as a Hotline key (code 04). The option is your
Hotline partner’s extension number.
Other Related Features
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
Call Coverage Keys provide many of the features available to Hotline partners.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
DSS Consoles can also have Hotline keys.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
An extension user can press their Hotline key twice to override their Hotline partner’s DND
Intercom (page 165)
A user can press a Hotline Key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers.
Transfer (page 324)
An extension user can Transfer a call to their Hotline partner by pressing their Hotline key.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension cannot Voice Over after calling a co-worker by pressing their Hotline key.
Feature Operation
To place a call to your Hotline partner:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Press Hotline key.
Two beeps.
Hotline key on (green) and ICM on (red).
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 161
Hotline
To Transfer your trunk call to your Hotline partner:
Conversation with caller.
(Optional) Line/loop key on.
1.
Press Hotline key.
Two beeps.
Hotline key on (green). Line/loop key flashes.
2.
Announce call and hang up.
OR
Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unnannounced.
If the call is not picked up, it recalls to you after the Transfer Recall interval. See
Transfer on page 324for more.
To answer a call from your Hotline partner:
Two beeps.
ICM on (red).
1.
Speak toward phone.
162 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Interactive Soft Keys
Interactive Soft Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use advanced telephone features just by pressing a soft key, without remembering feature codes.
Interactive Soft Keys provide intuitive feature access. It is no longer necessary to remember feature
codes to access the telephone’s advanced features because the function of the soft keys change as
the user process calls. For example, while on a trunk call a display keyset user can press the PARK
soft key to Park their call in orbit.
For additional information on Interactive Soft Key operation, refer to the DS2000 Soft Key Glossary (P/N 80000GLO01). Check with your Sales Representative for the availability of this guide.
Conditions
When an extension’s soft keys are enabled or disabled in programming, the user must take some
action at the telephone (such as lifting and replacing the handset) before the change takes effect.
Default Setting
Soft keys enabled.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Interactive
Soft Keys
Step 1: Should extension have Interactive Soft Keys?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
•
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Soft Keys (page 365), enter Y
to enable soft keys.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service
to extensions.
Take some action at the telephone (such as lifting
and replacing the handset) so the change will take
effect.
In Program 0101 - Soft Keys (page 365), enter N
to enable soft keys.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service
to extensions.
Take some action at the telephone (such as lifting
and replacing the handset) so the change will take
effect.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 163
Interactive Soft Keys
Programming List
Program 0101 - Soft Keys (page 365)
Enable (Y) or disable (Y) an extension’s soft keys.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
None
Feature Operation
Once enabled, Interactive Soft Key operation is automatic. See the Soft Key Glossary (P/N
80000GLO**) for the specifics.
164 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Intercom
Intercom
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Intercom to call any co-worker.
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete
internal calling capability.
Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by
speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for
workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. Incoming Intercom calls alert with two
beeps if the extension has Handsfree Answerback — a single beep if it does not.
Forced Intercom Ringing causes an Intercom call to ring the destination extension. You can enable
Forced Intercom Ringing system-wide (for all extensions), or a user can dial a code to have their
Intercom call ring the destination.
For more on setting up Handsfree Anserback and Forced Intercom Ringing, see Handsfree and
Handsfree Answerback (page 150) for more.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Intercom calling always enabled.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Intercom
Step 1: When placing Intercom calls, do extension users have adequate time to dial their
Intercom digits before the system disables dialing?
•
In Program 0401 - Intercom Inter-digit
(page 375), leave the Intercom Interdigit time at
its default setting.
•
In Program 0401 - Intercom Inter-digit
(page 375), change the the Intercom Interdigit
time to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 165
Intercom
Step-by-step guide for setting up Intercom
Step 2: Should Intercom calls voice-announce system-wide?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter Y to allow Intercom calls
to voice-announce system-wide. Users can still
dial 1 to have their calls ring.
In Program 1807 - Station Voice Announced
Intercom Calls (page 469), enter Y to enable
voice-announced intercom calls for specific
extensions. The User-Programmable Options #IV
(#48) and #IR (#47) locally override this setting.
In Program 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter N to have all Intercom
calls ring system-wide. Users cannot dial 1 to
have their calls voice-announce.
Step 3: Should user be able to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call without lifting
the handset (i.e., by using Handsfree Answerback)?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
166 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter Y to enable Handfree
Answerback system-wide.
In Program 1802 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom
Calls (page 456), enter Y to enable Handsfree
Answerback for specific extensions.
In Program 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom
Calls (page 367), enter N to disable Handsfree
answerback system-wide. Users must lift the
handset to respond to voice-announced Intercom
calls.
DS2000 Software Manual
Intercom
Programming List
Program 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls (page 367)
Enter Y to allow extension user to respond to voice-announced Intercom calls by just speaking
toward the phone (i.e., by using Handsfree Answerback). When you enter N, the extension
user must lift the handset to speak.
Program 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom Calls (page 367)
Enter Y to enable voice-announced Intercom calls system-wide. If disabled, all Intercom calls
ring (i.e., Forced Intercom Ringing is enabled).
Program 1802 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls (page 456)
Enter Y to enable Handsfree reply (Handsfree Answerback) on a per-extension basis. Intercom calls initially ring when this option is disabled. This option requires that you have previously enabled 0201 - Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls.
Program 0401 - Intercom Inter-digit (page 375)
When an extension user places a call, they must dial each succeeding digit within this interval.
Program 1807 - Station Voice Announced Intercom Calls (page 469)
Enter Y to enable voice-announced Intercom calls on a per-extension basis. This option
requires that you have previously enabled 0201 - Voice-Announced Intercom Calls. The UserProgrammable Options #IV (#48) and #IR (#47) locally override this setting.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Designate each extension’s operator.
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
A user can press a Call Coverage Key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
A user can Camp-On after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.
Callback (page 54)
A user can leave a Callback request after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) (page 95)
A user can press a DSS key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers.
Directory Dialing (page 110)
Directory Dialing is a convenient alternative to manually dialing Intercom numbers.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
Voice-announced Intercom calls do not initiate hunting.
Flexible Numbering Plan (page 134)
Change the digits users dial to place Intercom calls to co-workers.
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
Ringing Intercom calls activate Group Call Pickup if the extension ringing is a member of a
Pickup Group.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback (page 150)
Handsfree Answerback allows a user to answer an Intercom call by just speaking toward the
phone.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
Extensions with headsets cannot receive voice-announced Intercom calls.
Hotline (page 160)
A user can press a Hotline Key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers.
Last Number Redial (page 174)
Last Number Redial cannot redial Intercom calls.
Message Waiting (page 187)
A user can leave a Message Waiting after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.
Music On Hold (page 195)
Music on Hold plays to Intercom callers on Hold.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 167
Intercom
Names for Extensions and Trunks (page 198)
Extension names help identify Intercom callers to co-workers.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
All Intercom calls to On- and Off-Premise Extensions ring.
Ringdown Extension (page 249)
Ringdown Extension follows the voice-announce status of destination extension. For example, if an extension usually voice-announces Intercom calls, a ringdown to that extension will
also voice-announce.
Ringing Line Preference (page 251)
Ringing Line Preference answers a ringing Intercom call before a ringing trunk call.
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
Single line telephones cannot receive voice-announced Intercom calls.
Transfer (page 324)
The system cannot Transfer Intercom calls.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension user can Voice Over to a co-worker busy on an Intercom call.
Volume Controls (page 353)
The default Intercom (station-to-station) gain is 0 dB. While on an Intercom call, use VOL ▲
and VOL ▼ to change this setting.
Feature Operation
To place an Intercom call:
1.
Lift handset and press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on (red).
2.
Dial extension number (300-316).
Two beeps (if voice-announced) or ringing.
N/A
To call the operator, dial the operator s extension number or dial 0 or 01-04 (depending on how your system is set up).
If your call voice-announces the destination, you can dial 1 to force the call to ring.
To answer an Intercom call (if you hear two beeps and your phone has Handsfree
Answerback):
Two beeps.
ICM and SPK on (red).
1.
Speak toward phone.
OR
Lift the handset for privacy.
To answer an Intercom call (if you hear one beep and your phone does not have
Handsfree Answerback):
One beep.
ICM and SPK on (red).
1.
Lift the handset.
168 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Intercom
To answer an Intercom call (if you hear ringing):
Intercom ringing.
ICM flashes.
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Lift the handset.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 169
Key Ring
Key Ring
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
So they are not forgotten, unanswered calls automatically ring co-worker’s extensions.
A Key Ring trunk rings an extension according to the settings in Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466). Multiple extensions can be enabled to ring immediately or after a programmed
delay for each incoming trunk call. In addition, under certain conditions other types of trunk calls
divert to Key Ring if unanswered. The following conditions also initiate Key Ring:
●
Direct Inward Line
An unanswered DIL diverts to Key Ring if unanswered at the extension to which it is terminated (see Direct Inward Line on page 88 for more).
●
Hold
Calls left on Hold too long recall the extensions that initially placed them on Hold. If still
unanswered, they divert to Key Ring.
●
Park
Calls parked in orbit recall the extension that initially parked them. If unanswered, the call
diverts to Key Ring.
●
Transfer
An unanswered Transfer recalls the extension that initially transferred it. If still unanswered,
the trunk diverts to Key Ring.
Overflow for Key Ring Calls
If unanswered, Key Ring calls can route to a programmed overflow destination. The overflow destination can be an extension, Ring Group, UCD Group or Voice Mail. You can set up separate Key
ring overflow destinations for the day mode and at night. If unanswered at the overflow destination,
the call again diverts to Key Ring. Note that a Key Ring trunk goes into the night mode when any
extension with night mode capability presses their Night key. See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled for all extensions.
170 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Key Ring
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Key Ring
(Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension have Key Ring for trunk?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
- Enter 2 for day & night Key Ring,
- Enter 3 for night only Key Ring,
- Enter 4 for delayed day & night Key Ring.
To ensure that a trunk will always have a ring destination, consider making at least one extension in
the system type 2 for all trunks.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
enter 1 for lamp only (no Key Ring).
Step 2: Should trunk be a Key Ring trunk during the day?
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), press CLEAR to assign the trunk as a
day mode Key Ring trunk.
•
Refer to Direct Inward Line on page 88 to make a
different day mode assignment for the trunk.
If yes
If no
Step 3: Should trunk overflow during the day mode?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the
Day (page 426), enter Y.
In Program 1003 - Day Overflow Destination
(page 426), assign the extension, Ring Group,
UCD Group master number or Voice Mail master
number you want to use for the trunk’s day mode
overflow destination.
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the
Day (page 426), enter N.
Step 4: Should trunk be a Key Ring trunk during the night?
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night)
(page 426), press CLEAR to assign the trunk as a
night mode Key Ring trunk.
•
Refer to Direct Inward Line on page 88 to make a
different night mode assignment for the trunk.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 171
Key Ring
Step-by-step guide for setting up Key Ring
(Page 2 of 2)
Step 5: Should trunk overflow during the night mode?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night
(page 427), enter Y.
In Program 1003 - Night Overflow Destination
(page 427), assign the extension, Ring Group,
UCD Group master number or Voice Mail master
number you want to use for the trunk’s night
mode overflow destination.
In Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night
(page 427), enter N.
Step 6: Do the trunks ring their initial mode destinations for the correct interval before
diverting to the overflow destination?
•
In Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376), leave
the Trunk Revert interval at is currently assigned
value.
•
In Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376),
change the Trunk Revert interval to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 7: Do the trunks ring their overflow destinations for the correct interval before diverting to the Key Ring?
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
leave the Transfer Recall interval at is currently
assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
change the Transfer Recall interval to meet the
site requirements.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375)
This interval sets how long a call will ring the day or night overflow destination before diverting to key ring.
Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376)
This interval sets how long a call will ring a call will ring its initial day or night mode destinatin before routing the the programmed overflow destination.
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day) (page 426)
Press CLEAR to assign the trunk to Key Ring in the day mode.
Program 1003 - Activate Overflow During the Day (page 426)
Enter Y if unanswered day mode calls on the trunk should route to the day overflow destination. Enter N if unanswered calls should stay at Key Ring.
Program 1003 - Day Overflow Destination (page 426)
Enter the extension, Ring Group, UCD Group master number or Voice Mail master number
that you want to assign as the day overflow destination.
172 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Key Ring
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night) (page 426)
Press CLEAR to assign the trunk to Key Ring in the night mode.
Program 1003 - Activate Overflow at Night (page 427)
Enter Y if unanswered night mode calls on trunk should route to the night overflow destination. Enter N if unanswered calls should stay at Key Ring.
Program 1003 - Night Overflow Destination (page 427)
Enter the extension, Ring Group, UCD Group master number or Voice Mail master number
that you want to assign as the night overflow destination.
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night). To
ensure that a trunk will always have a ring destination, consider making at least one extension
in the system type 2 for all trunks.
Other Related Features
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
Call Coverage will pick up Key Ring calls.
Call Forwarding (page 43)
A Key Ring call will not follow an extension’s Call Forwarding.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
A Key Ring call will not send Camp-On beeps to a busy extension that normally rings for that
call.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
An unanswered DIL reverts to all extensions with Key Ring for the trunk.
Extended Ringing (page 119)
With Extended Ringing, a call rings longer at its destination before diverting to Key Ring.
Hold (page 156)
Unanswered Hold Recalls revert to Key Ring if not picked up.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
Off-Hook Signaling can occur for Key Ring calls.
Park (page 218)
An unanswered Park recall diverts to Key Ring.
Transfer (page 324)
An unanswered call transferred to an extension diverts to Key Ring if unanswered at the
transferring extension.
Feature Operation
Key Ring is automatic for those extensions programmed to receive it.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 173
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Quickly redial the last number dialed.
Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last outside number dialed. For
example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 32 digits a user dials. The number can be
any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless how whether
the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk as for the initial call. However, if that trunk is busy and is part of a trunk group, Last Number Redial will automatically select the next trunk in the group. The user can also preselect a specific trunk if desired.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Last
Number Redial
Step 1: Should extension be able to use Last Number Redial on the trunk?
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461),
- Enter 2 for outgoing only access,
- Enter 3 for full access.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 0 for no access.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
An extension can only use trunks for Last Number Redial for which it has outgoing access.
The access options are: 0 = No access, 1 = Incoming only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access.
174 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Last Number Redial
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Users can easily redial the last outside number dialed.
Intercom (page 165)
Last Number Redial cannot redial Intercom calls.
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
Save also simplifies dialing important numbers.
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
If all trunks are busy and Last Number Redial cannot go through, the user can dial 2 a queue
for a trunk to become free. If the user hangs up, the system converts the queue to a Trunk Callback.
Feature Operation
To redial your last call:
1.
2.
Lift the handset.
(Optional) Press an idle line key to preselect a trunk.
If you skip this step, the system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as
your original call.
3.
Press LND.
Dial tone, then your call dialing out.
Line key on (green).
If you hear busy tone, you can dial 2 to queue for a trunk to become free. If you hang
up, the system converts the queue to a Trunk Callback.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 175
Line Keys
Line Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Press a line key for one-touch access to an outside line.
A line key provides an extension user with one-button access to trunks. The extension user just
presses a line key to place or answer a call on the trunk. There is no need to dial codes to access or
intercept trunk calls. In addition, a line key provides a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the trunk to
which it is assigned (see the table below).
Line Key BLF Indications
When the key is:
The trunk is:
Off
Idle or not installed
On (red)
In use or on Exclusive Hold at a coworker’s extension
On (green)
In use at your extension
Winking on (red)
On System Hold at a co-worker’s
extension
Winking on (green)
On System Hold at your extension
Flashing slowly (red)
Ringing into the system
Flashing slowly (green)
Ringing or recalling directly to your
extension
Answering Priority
When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the
following order:
1. ICM Key
2. Line Key (from lowest to highest)
3. Loop Key (from lowest to highest)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Keys 1-8 are line keys for trunks 1-8.
176 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Line Keys
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Line Keys
Step 1: Should extension have a line key for the trunk?
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), assign a
key as a line key (code 03). The option is 01-16
(trunks 1-16).
•
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), do not
assign a key as a line key (code 03).
If yes
If no
Step 2: For the trunk assigned to the line key, should extension have incoming, outgoing or
full (both ways) access to the trunk?
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign option 1 (incoming
only).
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign option 2 (outgoing
only).
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign option 3 (full access).
Incoming
Outgoing
Both
Step 3: Should extension have ringing assigned to the line key?
•
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
enter the ringing mode for the trunk (2 = ringing
day and night, 3 = night ringing only, 4 = delay
ringing day and night).
•
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
enter 1 (lamp only).
If yes
If no
Step 4: Should extension have ability to press a line key for an outside line?
•
In Program 1802 - Key Access to Outbound Lines
(page 457), enter Y.
•
In Program 1802 - Key Access to Outbound Lines
(page 457), enter N.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key as a line key (code 03). The option is 01-16 (trunk 1-16).
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 177
Line Keys
Program 1802 - Key Access to Outbound Lines (page 457)
Enter Y to enable or N to disable key access to outbound lines.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night).
Other Related Features
Automatic Handsfree (page 30)
Automatic Handsfree allows the keyset user to answer a call ringing a line key without lifting
the handset; they just press the line key instead.
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Line Keys give a user one-touch access to specific trunks.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
When you assign a trunk as a DIL, it continues to flash its previously programmed line/loop
key assignments. It will ring line/loop keys only after diverting to Key Ring.
Loop Keys (page 179)
Loop keys also provide one-button access to trunks.
Ringing Line Preference (page 251)
Ringing Line Preference allows an extension user to answer a call ringing a line key just by
lifting the handset.
Feature Operation
To place a call over a specific trunk using a line key:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press line key.
Trunk dial tone.
Line key on.
You may also be able to press a Loop Key. See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
Dial outside number.
3.
To answer an incoming trunk call:
Trunk ring.
Line key flashing red for calls that ring you and your co-workers.
Line key flashing green for calls that ring you directly (such as DILs and transfers).
1.
Lift handset.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you have Automatic Handsfree, you can press the line or loop key without first lifting
the handset.
2.
Press flashing line key.
Conversation with caller.
Line key on.
178 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Loop Keys
Loop Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Loop keys simplify answering and placing calls.
Loop keys are programmable keys that simplify the way extension users place and answer outside
calls. There are two types of loop keys: Switched Loop Keys and Fixed Loop Keys.
Switched Loop Keys
For incoming calls, Switched Loop Keys provide an appearance for any trunk not assigned to a line
key for which the extension has access and ringing. Switched Loop Keys insure that there is a
visual appearance for trunks that do not ring an extension’s line keys.
For outgoing calls, Switched Loop Keys provide convenient access to the “dial 9” trunk groups. For
example, instead of pressing ICM and dialing 90 for trunk group 0, the user can just press the
Switched Loop Key and dial 0 instead.
Fixed Loop Keys
For outgoing calls, a Fixed Loop Key is a loop key assigned to a specific trunk group. When the
extension user presses the Fixed Loop Key for an outgoing call, they get the first trunk in the group
assigned to the key.
For incoming calls, the Fixed Loop Key works just like a Switched Loop Key. It provides an
appearance for any trunk not assigned to a line key for which the extension has access and ringing.
Answering Priority
When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the
following order:
1. ICM Key
2. Line Key (from lowest to highest)
3. Loop Key (from lowest to highest)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
●
No Switched Loop Keys assigned.
●
On all keysets, keys 9 and 10 are assigned as Fixed Loop Keys (trunk group 0).
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 179
Loop Keys
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Loop Keys
Step 1: Should extension have a Switched Loop Key?
•
In Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key
(page 436), assign a key as a Switched Loop Key
(code 01).
•
In Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key
(page 436), do not assign a key as a Switched
Loop Key (code 01).
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension be able to use Switched Loop Key for answering outside calls?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign incoming (1) or full (3)
access to the trunks that should be able to ring the
Switched Loop Key. Be sure all trunks assigned
ringing in 1805 below also have incoming or full
access.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
assign day/night ringing (2), night only ringing
(3), or delayed day/night ringing (4) to each trunk
that should be able to ring the Switched Loop
Key.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), do not assign incoming (1) or
full (3) access to the trunks that should be able to
ring the Switched Loop Key.
Step 3: Should extension user be able to place outgoing calls on Switched Loop Keys?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
180 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
assign installed trunks to trunk groups.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign outgoing (2) or full (3)
access to the trunks that should be available for
placing calls from the Switched Loop Key.
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424), do
not assign installed trunks to trunk groups.
DS2000 Software Manual
Loop Keys
Step-by-step guide for setting up Loop Keys
Step 4: Should extension have Fixed Loop Keys?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key (page 436),
assign a key as a Fixed Loop Key (code 02).
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
assign installed trunks to the trunk groups
assigned to the Fixed Loop Keys.
In Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key (page 436), do
not assign a key as a Fixed Loop Key (code 02).
Step 5: Should extension have Fixed Loop Keys for answering outside calls?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign incoming (1) or full (3)
access to the trunks in the assigned group that
should be able to ring the Fixed Loop Key. Be
sure all trunks assigned ringing in 1805 below
also have incoming or full access.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
assign day/night ringing (2), night only ringing
(3), or delayed day/night ringing (4) to each trunk
in the group that should be able to ring the Fixed
Loop Key.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), do not assign incoming (1) or
full (3) access to the trunks in the assigned group
that should be able to ring the Fixed Loop Key.
Step 6: Should extension user be able to place outgoing calls on Fixed Loop Keys?
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign outgoing (2) or full (3)
access to the trunks that should be available for
placing calls from the Fixed Loop Key.
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), do not assign outgoing (2) or
full (3) access to the trunks that should be available for placing calls from the Fixed Loop Key.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424)
Assign trunks to trunk groups.
Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Switched Loop Key (code 01).
Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Loop Key (code 02). You make a separate
assignment for inbound and outbound. The options are 00-08 (Trunk Groups 0-8).
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 181
Loop Keys
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night).
Other Related Features
Automatic Handsfree (page 30)
Automatic Handsfree allows the keyset user to answer a call ringing a line key without lifting
the handset; they just press the line key instead.
Call Forwarding (page 43)
Call Forwarding will not reroute a call ringing a loop key (unless the call is a DIL or transferred call).
Central Office Calls, Answering (page 58)
An extension user can press a Loop Key to answer an outside call.
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
An extension user can press a Loop Key to place an outside call.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
When you assign a trunk as a DIL, it continues to flash its previously programmed line/loop
key assignments. It will ring line/loop keys only after diverting to Key Ring.
Line Keys (page 176)
Loop keys also provide one-button access to trunks.
Ringing Line Preference (page 251)
Ringing Line Preference allows an extension user to answer a call ringing a loop key just by
lifting the handset.
Trunk Groups (page 335)
Switched and Fixed Loop Keys use the system’s Trunk Groups.
182 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Loop Keys
Feature Operation
To answer a call on a Loop Key:
Trunk ringing.
Loop Key flashing (red).
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press Switched Loop Key.
Conversation with caller.
Loop Key on (green).
To place a call on a Loop Key:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press Loop Key.
Intercom dial tone.
Loop Key on (green).
3.
Dial trunk group code (0-8).
Trunk dial tone.
Loop Key on (green).
4.
Dial outside number.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 183
Meet-Me Conference
Meet-Me Conference
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Set up a multiple-party telephone conversation with your co-workers.
With Meet-Me Conference, an extension user can set up a telephone meeting with their co-workers.
Each party joins the Converence by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets
extension users have a telephone meeting — without leaving the office. Users must join the meeting
within the Meet-Me Conference interval.
The system has two Meet-Me Conference codes (#11 and #12). After a Meet-Me Conference is set
up and the Meet-Me Conference interval expires, the code used becomes available for a new meeting. Since Meet-Me Conference is a type of Conference, the system’s Conference capacity determines:
●
The number of users that can join a Meet-Me Conference
and
●
The number of simultaneous conferences.
The following table shows the Conference capacities:
Description
Capacity
Conference circuits
32
Maximum simultaneous users in Conference
(total of all Conferences system-wide)
32
Maximum simultaneous conferences
8
Maximum parties in any one Conference
(trunks and/or extensions)
8
The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Meet-Me Conference enabled.
184 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Meet-Me Conference
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Meet-Me
Conference
Step 1: When a co-worker hears a Page for them to join a Meet-Me Conference, do they have
enough time to join the telephone meeting?
•
In Program 0401 - Meet-Me Conference
(page 375), leave the Meet Me Conference interval at its assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - Meet-Me Conference
(page 375), lengthen the Meet Me Conference
interval to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 2: When co-worker’s are joining a Meet-Me Conference, is the length of time they have
to join the meeting excessive?
•
In Program 0401 - Meet-Me Conference
(page 375), shorten the the Meet Me Conference
interval.
•
In Program 0401 - Meet-Me Conference
(page 375), leave the Meet Me Conference interval at its currently assigned value.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0401 - Meet-Me Conference (page 375)
When a user initiates a Meet-Me Conference, the system waits this interval for the Paged
party to join the call.
Other Related Features
The following features also allow different types of multiple party calls:
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
Conference (page 79)
Group Listen (page 142)
Privacy (page 226)
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference (page 307)
Feature Operation
To set up a Meet-Me Conference:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Page parties and announce the Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12).
See Paging on page 214 for more on how to page your co-workers.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 185
Meet-Me Conference
2.
Do not hang up.
3.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on (red).
4.
Dial announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12).
Conversation with coworkers.
• When the first co-worker joins the Conference, ICM flashes fast (until the
Meet-Me Conference interval expires).
• When the second and succeeding co-worker’s join, ICM goes out.
Your co-worker’s must join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference
time.
To join a Meet-Me Conference:
1.
Listen for paged invitation to join the Conference.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on (red).
3.
Dial announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12).
Conversation with coworkers.
• When the first co-worker joins the Conference, ICM flashes fast (until the
Meet-Me Conference interval expires).
• When the second and succeeding co-worker’s join, ICM goes out.
You can join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference time.
186 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Leave a Message Waiting request for a return call.
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension
requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW key at the called extension. Answering the
Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message Waiting
ensures that a user will not have to recall an unanswered extension. It also ensures that a user will
not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended.
Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:
●
Cancel all messages left at their extension.
●
Cancel message they left at co-worker’s extensions.
●
Scroll through their Messages Waiting and select a co-worker to call back.
An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of
extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension.
Conditions
A power failure or system reset cancels all Messages Waiting system wide.
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Message
Waiting
Step 1: Should the system have Message Waiting capability (applicable only when Voice Mail
is not installed)?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0201 - Voice Mail Installed
(page 368), enter N to disable Voice Mail.
The system can have Message Waiting or Voice
Mail, not both.
In Program 0201 - Voice Mail Installed
(page 368), enter Y to enable Voice Mail.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 187
Message Waiting
Programming List
Program 0201 - Voice Mail Installed (page 368)
Enter N to disable Voice Mail and enable Message Waiting.
Other Related Features
Call Forwarding (page 43)
● An extension user cannot leave a Message Waiting at an co-worker that has Call Forwarding Immediate (*34) enabled. Pressing MW automatically leaves a message at the forwarding destination instead.
● An extension user cannot leave a Message Waiting at a busy co-worker that has Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer (*32) enabled. Pressing MW will automatically leave a message at the forwarding destination instead.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting at an extension in Do Not Disturb.
Intercom (page 165)
A user can leave a Message Waiting after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.
Voice Mail (page 340)
A system can have either Voice Mail or Message Waiting activated — not both.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension user cannot leave a Message Waiting after using Voice Over.
Feature Operation
To leave a Message Waiting:
1.
Place Intercom call to co-worker.
The extension you call can be unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb.
2.
Press MW.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on (red).
3.
Hang up.
MW flashes fast at the extension you call.
To answer a Message Waiting:
N/A
ICM on (red).
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press MW.
Two beeps or ringing, then conversation with co-worker.
ICM on (red).
If the extension you call is unanswered, busy or in DND, the system cancels Message
Waiting.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message.
Normally, your MW key goes out. If it continues to flash, you have additional Messages Waiting.
188 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Message Waiting
To review your Messages Waiting and then select a message for a return call:
N/A
MW flashing fast (red).
1.
2.
3.
Do not lift the handset.
Press MW.
The first message display. Press MW repeatedly to display additional Messages Waiting, if any.
When the extension you want to call displays, lift the handset.
4.
Press MW.
Two beeps or ringing.
MW flashing fast (red).
If the extension you call is unanswered, busy or in DND, the system cancels Message
Waiting.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 189
Microphone Mute
Microphone Mute
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Talk to a co-worker in your office without your caller hearing the conversation.
Microphone Mute lets a keyset user turn off their phone’s Handsfree or handset microphone at any
time. Once activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversatoins in the user’s
work area. The user can turn off the Handsfree or handset microphone while their telephone is idle,
busy on a call, in DND or while a call is ringing. The microphone stays off until the user turns it
back on.
While an extension has their microphone muted, incoming Intercom calls announce with a single
beep (rather than the normal two beeps). The calling party hears this single beep also when the
called extension’s mic is muted.
Conditions
A system reset or power failure cancels all Microphone Mutes system wide.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback (page 150)
Use Microphone Mute to temporarily turn off the Handsfree microphone.
Feature Operation
To activate Microphone Mute:
1.
Press MIC.
The systems mutes your handsfree and handset microphone.
MIC on.
You can do this any time while on the phone or while your phone is idle.
While your microphone is muted, incoming Intercom calls announce with a single
beep (rather than the normal two beeps). Your caller hears this single beep also while your
mic is muted.
190 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Microphone Mute
To deactivate Microphone Mute:
N/A.
MIC on.
1.
Press MIC.
N/A.
MIC off.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 191
Monitor / Silent Monitor
Monitor / Silent Monitor
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Monitor a co-worker’s phone conversation without them knowing you are on the phone.
Monitor lets an extension user listen to the conversation at a busy extension. To implement Monitor,
an extension uer just calls a busy extension and dials the Monitor code. The busy extension and
their caller have no indication of the intusion. There are no tones heard and there is no visual indication that monitoring is occuring. For example, Monitor could help the superisor of a service
department. The department supervisor could listen to the questions that callers ask without disturbing the service call.
!! CAUTION !!
Monitor provides no warning tones prior to intrusion. Monitor may be
interpreted as an invasion of privacy.
Conditions
Monitor uses a system Conference circuit. See Conference on page 79 for more.
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Monitor
Step 1: Should an extension be able to Monitor a co-worker’s call?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
192 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 0101 - Silent Monitor (page 364),
enter Y to enable Monitor in the extension’s Class
of Service.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 0101 - Silent Monitor (page 364),
enter N to disable Monitor in the extension’s
Class of Service.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions
DS2000 Software Manual
Monitor / Silent Monitor
Programming List
Program 0101 - Barge-In (Intrusion) (page 362)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to allow the extension to Barge In on another extension.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Monitor an attendant.
Conference (page 79)
An extension user cannot Monitor a Conference.
Privacy (page 226)
Privacy does not block Monitor.
Feature Operation
To Monitor a call:
1.
Call busy extension.
Busy tone.
N/A
2.
Dial 6.
Two beeps.
N/A
3.
DS2000 Software Manual
Listen to the conversation in progress.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 193
Multiple Directory Numbers
Multiple Directory Numbers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 See Call Coverage Keys on page 40.
194 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Music On Hold
Music On Hold
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Callers can listen to music while waiting for their call to go through.
Music on Hold (MOH) plays music to calls on Hold, parked calls, and transferred calls. The music
lets the caller know that their calls is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system
provides silence to these types of calls. Music on Hold is available from three sources: two internal
beep tones and an external source connected to the CPU music input terminals. The external source
typically connects to a customer-provided music source (such as a CD player or FM receiver).
The system provides a single external music input source. Background Music and Music on Hold
share the same external source. For example, if Music on Hold uses a customer-provided program
from CD, Background Music uses this source as well. The external music source connects via pins
3 and 6 in the CPU’s 8-pin mod jack. Using the DS2000 installation cable, these pins punch down
as 3 and 4. For more on connecting a customer-provided music source, refer to the system’s Hardware Manual.
The external music source you use must be compatible with the following specifications:
Table 7: MOH Music Source Specifications
Input Impedance
10K Ohms
Relative Input Level
+18 dBr (+/- dBr) at 1.0 kHz
With Music on Hold enabled, transferred callers can optionally listen to ringback or MOH while
their call waits at the transfer destination.
Note:
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the America Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television
broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music
on Hold feature of telecommunications systems. Nitsuko America hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
External MOH enabled.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 195
Music On Hold
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Music on
Hold
Step 1: Should the system have Music on Hold?
•
In Program 0201 - Music on Hold (page 367),
enter Y to enable Music on Hold system wide.
•
In Program 0201 - Music on Hold (page 367),
enter N to disable Music on Hold system wide.
•
In Program 1003 - MOH Source (page 427),
assign the MOH source.The options are:
0 - No MOH
1 - External at CPU terminals
2 - Tone 1 (low pitch)
3 - Tone 2 (high pitch)
4 - ACI port (currently not used)
When entering data, be sure to press VOL ▲ or
VOL ▼ after entering your data. Do not press
CONF or HOLD instead.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Assign the Music on Hold source.
Step 3: Should transferred callers listen to MOH or ringback while waiting?
•
In Program 0201 - MOH on Transfer (page 367),
enter Y to enable Music on Hold for transferred
calls.
•
In Program 0201 - MOH on Transfer (page 367),
enter N to enable ringback for transferred calls.
MOH
Ringback
Programming List
Program 0201 - Music on Hold (page 367)
Enter Y for this option to enable Music on Hold system-wide.
Program 0201 - MOH on Transfer (page 367)
Enter Y for this option to enable Music on Hold for transferred calls.
196 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Music On Hold
Program 1003 - MOH Source (page 427)
Assign the MOH source for the trunk. The options are:
0 - No MOH
1 - External at CPU terminals
2 - Tone 1 (low pitch)
3 - Tone 2 (high pitch)
4 - ACI port ( currently not used).
When entering data, be sure to press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ after entering your data. Do not press
CONF or HOLD instead.
Other Related Features
Background Music (page 35)
Background Music and Music on Hold share the same external music source.
Hold (page 156)
If installed, Music on Hold plays to callers on Hold
Intercom (page 165)
Music on Hold plays to Intercom callers on Hold. Intercom callers always hear internal Tone 1.
Park (page 218)
If installed, Music on Hold plays to parked callers.
Transfer (page 324)
With Music on Hold enabled, transferred callers can optionally listen to ringback or MOH
while their call waits at the transfer destination.
Feature Operation
Music on Hold is automatic once enabled.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 197
Names for Extensions and Trunks
Names for Extensions and Trunks
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Names help identify trunks and extension.
Extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a keyset’s display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names make it easier to
identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls. Extension and
trunk names can consist of upper and lower case letters,spaces and punctuation. Trunk names can
be up to 20 characters long. Extension names can be up to 15 characters long.
Extension names display when placing or answering Intercom calls. Trunk names display when
using the following features:
●
Central Office Calls, Answering
●
Central Office Calls, Placing
●
Direct Inward Line
●
Direct Trunk Access
●
Directed Call Pickup
●
Last Number Redial
●
Line Keys
●
Loop Keys
●
Night Service / Night Ring
●
Park
●
Speed Dial
●
Transfer
Refer to Programming Names and Text Messages on page 361 when entering names.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
●
No extension names assigned (the extension’s number displays instead).
●
All trunk names are TRUNK followed by the trunk’s number (e.g., TRUNK 2 for trunk 2).
198 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Names for Extensions and Trunks
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Names for
Extensions and Trunks
Step 1: Do you want to program names for trunks?
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Name (page 416),
assign names to trunks (up to 20 characters).
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Name (page 416), do
not change the trunk names from their default
entries.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Do you want to program names for extensions.
•
In Program 1801 - Extension Name (page 449),
assign names to extensions (up to 15 characters).
•
In Program 1801 - Extension Name (page 449),
do not change the extension names from their
default entries.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1001 - Trunk Extension Number (page 416)
Enter the name for the trunk port. The trunk name can be up to 20 characters long.
Program 1801 - Extension Name (page 449)
Enter the name for the extension port. The extension name can be up to 15 characters long.
Other Related Features
See the list under Description above.
Feature Operation
Trunk and extension names automatically display once programmed.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 199
Night Service / Night Ring
Night Service / Night Ring
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Night Service to reroute calls after hours.
Night Service redirects trunk calls to their night mode destination. Typically, the attendant or supervisor activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most emplo yees are unavailable to
answer calls. There are two basic types of Night Service: Assigned Night Answer and Universal Night
Answer. Universal Night Answer (UNA) allows a user to pick up a call ringing the system at night.
Assigned Night Answer rings extensions directly at Night, providing specific answering points for
Night Service calls. (For example, you can program trunks to ring the security station at night.)
With UNA, an employee can go to any telephone and dial a UNA code to answer the call. The
extension does not need to have a line/loop key assigned for the ringing call.
Following are the four basic types of Night Service operation for a trunk. Note that only option 3
enables Universal Night Answer.
●
Option 1: Key Ring Day and Night
The trunk is a Key Ring trunk during the day and at night. The trunk rings according to the
settings in Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466). An extension’s Night Key (if programmed) controls the day/night mode of the trunk. The trunk will not enable Universal Night
Answer pickup. Turn to Key Ring on page 170 for more on setting up Key Ring trunks.
●
Option 2: Key Ring During the Day, DIL at Night
The trunk is a Key Ring trunk during the day and a DIL at night. During the day, the trunk
rings according to the settings in Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466). At night,
the trunk rings the DIL destination (i.e., extension, Ring Group UCD Hunting group or Voice
Mail). An extension’s Night Key (if programmed) controls the day/night mode of the trunk.
The trunk will not enable Universal Night Answer pickup. Turn to Key Ring on page 170 for
more on setting up Key Ring trunks. Turn to Direct Inward Line on page 88 for more on setting up Direct Inward Lines.
●
Option 3: DIL During the Day, Key Ring at Night
The trunk is a DIL during the day and a Key Ring trunk at night. The trunk rings the DIL destination during the day and rings according to the settings in Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466) at night. The DIL destination’s DND key controls the night mode of the
trunk. If the DIL destination is extension 300 (normally the attendant), pressing the DND key
also enables Universal Night Answer pickup. Turn to Direct Inward Line on page 88 for more
on setting up Direct Inward Lines. Turn to Key Ring on page 170 for more on setting up Key
Ring trunks.
●
Option 4: DIL Day and Night
The trunk is a DIL during the day and at night. The DIL destination’s DND key controls the
night mode of the trunk. Pressing the DND key will not enable Universal Night Answer
pickup. Turn to Direct Inward Line on page 88 for more on setting up Direct Inward Lines.
By default key 11 on attendant keyset is a Night key. This allows the attendant to activate the Night
Mode system-wide.
200 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Night Service / Night Ring
Conditions
None
Default Setting
●
Trunks 1-8 ring extensions on line keys 1-8 in the day and at night.
●
Key 11 on the attendant’s keyset is a the Night key.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Night
Service / Night Ring (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension be able to put Key Ring trunks into the night mode?
•
If yes
•
•
•
•
If no
•
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Activate Night Mode
(page 364), enter Y to allow extensions with the
assigned Class of Service to put the system in the
night mode. This capability is normally reserved
for attendants.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
To put a Night key on a keyset:
In Program 1701 - Night Key (page 438), assign a
key as a Night key (code 18 + CLEAR).
To put a Night key on a DSS Console:
In Program 1704 - Night Key (page 446), assign a
key as a Night key (code 18 + CLEAR).
In Program 0101 - Activate Night Mode
(page 364), enter N to prevent extensions with the
assigned Class of Service from putting the system
in the night mode.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 1701 - Night Key (page 438), and
Program 1704 - Night Key (page 446), do not
assign Night keys (code 18).
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 201
Night Service / Night Ring
Step-by-step guide for setting up Night
Service / Night Ring (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Do you want Key Ring trunks to ring extensions at night?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignment (page 466),
for each trunk at each extension assign option 2
(ringing day and night), option 3 (night ring only)
or option 4 (delay ring day and night).
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), for each trunk at each extension be sure to assign access option 1 (incoming
only) or 2 (outgoing only).
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignment (page 466),
for each trunk at each extension do not assign
option 2 (ringing day and night), option 3 (night
ring only) or option 4 (delay ring day and night).
Step 3: Do you want trunks to enable Universal Night Answer pickup?
If yes
Implement Night Service option 3:
• In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), terminate the trunk to extension 300
during the day.
• In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night)
(page 426), terminate the trunk to Key Ring at
night (by pressing CLEAR).
•
If no
Implement one of the other basic types of Night
Service operation (option 1, 2 or 4).
Programming List
Program 0101 - Activate Night Mode (page 364)
Enter Y to allow an extension to activate the Night Mode for Key Ring trunks.
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day) (page 426)
To enable UNA pickup for a trunk (e.g., ** + 01 at night), terminate the trunk to extension 300
during the day. UNA pickup only applies to Option 3.
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night) (page 426)
To enable UNA pickup for the trunk (e.g., ** + 021 at night), terminate the trunk to Key Ring
at night (by pressing CLEAR). UNA pickup only applies to Option 3.
Program 1701 - Night Key (page 438)
Assign a programmable key as a Night Key (code 18 + CLEAR). Pressing the Night Key puts
trunks terminated to Key Ring during the day into the night mode.
Program 1704 - Night Key (page 446)
Assign a DSS Console key as a Night Key (code 18 + CLEAR). Pressing the Night Key puts
trunks terminated to Key Ring during the day into the night mode.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
202 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Night Service / Night Ring
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night).
Other Related Features
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
● The extension to which the DIL is terminated controls the night mode of the DIL.
● If a DIL is terminated to the Voice Mail master number, a System Mode key (code 18 + the
Voice Mail number) controls the night mode status of the DIL.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
A DSS Console with a Night key can put the system in the night mode.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
A DIL destination activates the night mode for the DIL when they press DND.
Group Ring (page 144)
The Night key sets the day/night status of a DIL terminated to a Ring Group.
Feature Operation
To activate Night Service (i.e., put Key Ring trunks into the night mode):
1.
2.
This capability is normally restricted to attendants and supervisors.
Do not lift the handset.
Press the Night key.
N/A.
Night key on. You display shows: SYSTEM IN NIGHT MODE
To deactivate Night Service (i.e., put Key Ring trunks into the day mode):
N/A.
Night key on.
1.
2.
This capability is normally restricted to attendants and supervisors.
Do not lift the handset.
Press the Night key.
N/A.
Night key goes out.
To answer a call that rings a line or loop key at night:
Trunk ring.
Line or loop key flashing red for key ring call.
Line key flashing green for DIL.
1.
Lift handset.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you have Automatic Handsfree, you can press the line or loop key without first lifting
the handset.
2.
Press flashing line or loop key.
Conversation with caller.
Line or loop key on.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 203
Night Service / Night Ring
To answer a call ringing the system at night (UNA Pickup):
Trunk ring.
N/A
1.
2.
Press ICM.
Dial ** followed by the UNA code (01-04).
Dial the lowest number first (e.g., 01). If you hear busy, try the next highest number
(e.g., 02).
204 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Off-Hook Signaling
Off-Hook Signaling
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through.
When a user is busy on a call, Off-Hook Signaling indicates that another caller is trying to get
through. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the
called extension to become free. After the user hears the off-hook signal, they can use other system
features (such as Hold or Park) to process their active call and then answer the waiting call.
Off-Hook Signaling for Trunk Calls
While a keyset user is on a handset call, Off-Hook Signaling is available for trunk calls. The OffHook Signal can be:
●
A flashing green Ring/Message lamp, line/loop key, and muted off-hook ringing.
OR
●
A flashing green line/loop key and Camp-On tone.
Off-Hook Signaling for trunks occurs for DILs, transferred calls, Voice Mail Automated Attendant
transfers and Key Ring calls.
While Off-Hook Signaling ringing is occuring, use VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ to adjust the volume of ringing.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming List
Program 1802 - Off-Hook Signaling for CO Calls (page 456)
Set the Off-Hook Signaling options for trunk calls. The options are 0 (no Off-Hook Signaling),1 (Camp-On tones) and 2 (off-hook ringing).
Other Related Features
Attendant Call Queuing (page 22)
The Operator Call Key activates off-hook signaling.
Conference (page 79)
An extension user can Conference their active call with the waiting call.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
DILs can initiate Off-Hook Signaling beeps.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
An extension in the headset mode can receive Camp On tones for trunk calls, but not off-hook
ringing.
Hold (page 156)
An extension user can place their current call on Hold and answer the waiting call.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 205
Off-Hook Signaling
Key Ring (page 170)
Off-Hook Signaling can occur for Key Ring calls.
Park (page 218)
An extension user can Park their current call and answer the waiting call.
Split (Alternate) (page 272)
An extension user can alternate between their active call and their waiting call.
Transfer (page 324)
An extension user can Transfer their current call to a co-worker or Voice Mail and then answer
the waiting call. In addition, transferred calls can initiate Off-Hook Signaling.
Voice Over (page 350)
Voice Over also lets a user get through to a keyset extension user busy on a handset call. The
busy keyset extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party.
Feature Operation
Off-Hook Signaling is automatic for camped-on Intercom calls, Direct Inward Lines and transferred trunk calls.
206 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Connect analog devices such as single line telephones, fax machines and voice mail systems to the
system.
The system is compatible with 500 type (dial pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog telephone
devices. This includes telco OPX circuits, on-premise single line telephones (SLTs), fax machines,
modems and voice mail ports. On- and Off-Premise SLTs connect to 2-OPX Modules. On-Premise
SLTs connect to 2-OPX Modules or ASTU PCBs.
ASTU PCBs are available in two models, providing 4 and 8 ports, respectively. Each ASTU port
provides power and ring voltage for the connected SLT. ASTU PCBs use system DTMF receivers,
and do not provide the signaling required to light SLT Message Waiting lamps. The CPU provides
10 DTMF receivers that are shared by all devices connected to ASTU ports.
Each 2-OPX Module provides two OPX ports. In addition, the 2-OPX Module has its own DTMF
receivers (one for each port), internal ring generator and power supply to provide the connected
SLT with power and ring voltage. The 2-OPX Module does not provide the signaling required to
light SLT Message Waiting lamps. The 2-OPX extension numbers are as follows:
●
When connected to the first DSTU PCB in the system, the first 2-OPX extension number is
the same as the port’s extension number. The second 2-OPX extension number is the first port
plus 201. For example, the two extension numbers for the 2-OPX module plugged into extension 314 are 314 and 515.
●
When connected to the second DSTU PCB in the system, the first 2-OPX extension number is
the same as the port’s extension number. The second 2-OPX extension number is the first port
plus 217. For example, the two extension numbers for the 2-OPX module plugged into extension 316 are 316 and 533.
Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional details.
Ringing For Incoming Calls
On- and Off-Premise single line extensions do not ring according to the settings in Program 1805 Ring Assignments (page 466). They can, however, directly ring for the following:
●
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
●
Intercom (page 165)
●
Group Ring (page 144)
●
Ringdown Extension (page 249)
●
Transfer (page 324)
Conditions
●
2-OPX Module circuits meet the requirements of EIA Specification RS-464-A for OPS Class
C (loop resistance to 3,300 ohms, loop current = 16 mA or greater). The 2-OPX Module provides far end loop disconnect supervision for the connected circuits.
●
Dial Pulse (500 type) single line telephones cannot access any features that require the user to
dial # or *.
●
The system provides a pool of 10 DTMF recivers that are dynamically allocated as required.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 207
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Default Setting
The system’s 2-OPX Modules do not auto-ID. See the Programming List below more.
Programming List
Program 0403 - Drop Pulse Send (page 387)
Use this timer to set the duration of the ASTU PCB drop pulse. This pulse is sent from the
ASTU PCB to the connected analog device to initiate a disconnect.
Program 0403 - DTMF Detect (page 387)
Set the DTMF detection threshold for single line (analog device) ports. If the analog device
sends a DTMF signal longer than this interval, the system recognizes it as a valid DTMF tone
and decodes it. If the DTMF signal is equal to or less than this interval, the system ignores it
Program 1801 - Extension Circuit Type (page 449)
Assign circuit type 15 to each ASTU port. Assign circuit type 21 to the DSTU port to which
the 2-OPX is connected.
Other Related Features
Background Music (page 35)
Background Music is not available to On- and Off-Premise extensions.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
On- and Off-Premise extensions cannot use DND.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback (page 150)
On- and Off-Premise Extensions do not have Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback capability.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
On- and Off-Premise Extensions do not have headset capability.
Intercom (page 165)
All Intercom calls to On- and Off-Premise Extensions ring.
Paging (page 214)
On- and Off-Premise Extensions can make Paging announcements, but cannot receive Paging
announcements.
Prime Line Preference (page 223)
On- and off-premise extensions cannot use Prime Line Preference.
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
Save Number Dialed is not available to SLTs.
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
Single line telephones connect to either 2-OPX Modules or ASTU PCBs. On-premise single
line telephones have the same capability as Off-Premise Extensions.
Feature Operation
Call Forwarding (page 43)
1.
2.
3.
Lift handset + Dial *3 + Dial Call Forwarding type:
0 = Cancel your extension’s Call Forwarding
2 = Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer
4 = Call Forwarding Immediate
6 = Call Forwarding No Answer
Dial destination extension, 0 for your operator, or Voice Mail master number.
Hang up.
208 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
1.
2.
Call busy extension + Dial 2 + Do not hang up.
If you hang up, the system converts your Camp-On to a Callback.
Speak to your co-worker when they answer their Camp-On ring.
Callback (page 54)
1.
2.
3.
Call busy extension + Dial 2 and hang up.
Stay on the line without hanging up if you want to Camp-On instead.
When Callback rings your phone, lift handset to answer.
Speak to your co-worker when call goes through.
Central Office Calls, Answering (page 58)
1.
When your telephone rings, lift the handset.
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Line Dial-Up
1. Lift handset + Dial #9 followed by the trunk number (e.g., #901 for trunk 1).
Direct Trunk Access
1. Dial 4 plus the trunk number (e.g., 401 for trunk 1) + Dial outside number.
Trunk Group Access
1. Lift handset + Dial trunk group code (9 or 90-98) + Dial outside number.
Conference (page 79)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Establish Intercom or trunk call
Hookflash and dial extension you want to add.
Hookflash and dial #10 to set up Conference.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s Conference limit.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add aditional parties to your Conference.
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
1.
Dial 4 plus the trunk number (e.g., 401 for trunk 1) + Dial outside number.
Directed Call Pickup (page 108)
1.
Lift handset + Dial * * + Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.
To intercept a call ringing an attendant, dial the attendant’s extension number (e.g.,
300). Do not dial 0 or 01-04.
Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 137)
1.
2.
Lift handset + Dial the trunk’s Direct Trunk Access code (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Dial # to disconnect the line.
You hear Intercom dial tone. To place a call on the trunk, dial a trunk access code and
then dial the number.
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Lift handset + Dial *#.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 209
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Hold (page 156)
2.
Place
Hookflash.
This places a trunk call on Exclusive Hold.
(Optional) Hang up.
1.
Retrieve
From Intercom dial tone, dial *7
1.
Intercom (page 165)
Place
1. Lift handset + Dial extension number (300-316).
To call the operator, dial the operator s extension number or dial 0 or 01-04 (depending on how your system is set up).
If your call voice-announces the destination, you can dial 1 to force the call to ring.
Answer
1. Lift handset.
Last Number Redial (page 174)
1.
Lift handset + Dial #5.
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.
If you hear busy tone, you can dial 2 to queue for a trunk to become free. If you hang
up, the system converts the queue to a Trunk Callback.
Meet-Me Conference (page 184)
Setting Up
1. Page parties and announce the Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12).
See Paging on page 214 for more on how to page your co-workers.
2. Hang up + Lift Handset + Dial announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12).
Your co-worker’s must join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference
time.
Joining
1. Listen for paged invitation to join the Conference + Dial announced Meet-Me Conference
code (#11 or #12).
You can join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference time.
Message Waiting (page 187)
Leaving a Message Waiting
1. Place Intercom call to co-worker.
The extension you call can be unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb.
2. Dial 8 + Hang up.
MW flashes fast at the extension you call.
Answering a Message Waiting
The system currently provides no indication that an on- or off-premise extension has
messages waiting.
1. Lift handset + Dial *8.
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
1.
Dial ** + UNA code (01-04).
210 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Dial the lowest code first (e.g., 01). If you hear busy, try the next highest code (e.g.,
02).
Paging (page 214)
1.
SLTs cannot receive Paging announcements.
Lift handset + Dial *1 + Dial Paging zone (1-7 or 0 for all call).
Park (page 218)
Park a Call
1. Place or answer call + Hookflash + Dial * + Dial orbit (60-69 for system orbits, *300-*331 for
Personal Park)
Retrieve a Parked Call
1. Lift handset + Dial * + Dial orbit (60-69 for system orbits, *300-*331 for Personal Park)
Pulse to Tone Conversion (page 240)
Must be switched manually from the telephone. The system does not provide Pulse to Tone
Conversion for SLTs.
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service (page 242)
1.
Lift handset + Dial #40 + Dial trunk (401-416) or extension (300-331) you want to remove or
return to service + Dial 4 to return or 6 to remove. Hang up.
Speed Dial (page 263)
To dial a Speed Dial Number:
1.
2.
Lift handset and dial #.
Dial the Personal Speed Dial bin number (701-720).
OR
Dial the System Speed Dial bin number (normally 200-299).
The stored number dials out.
Transfer (page 324)
To Transfer your call:
1.
2.
3.
Place or answer call.
Hookflash + Dial extension to which you want to transfer the call.
To Transfer the call to the Voice Mail Automated Attendant, dial the Voice Mail master
number.
To Transfer the call unscreened, hang up.
OR
To screeen the Transfer, wait for the called party to answer before hanging up.
To return to the call if the calling party doesn’t want the Transfer:
1.
Hang up + Lift handset + Dial ** and co-worker’s extension number.
Do not hookflash or the call will go on Hold at the destination extension.
To receive a Transfer (if you get an intercom call announcing it):
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Stay on the line.
The Transfer goes through when the calling party hangs up.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 211
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions
Voice Mail (page 340)
1.
Lift handset + Dial *8.
212 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
One-Touch Keys
One-Touch Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available for Personal Speed Dial. Refer to Speed Dial on page 263.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 213
Paging
Paging
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Paging to broadcast announcements or quickly locate co-workers.
Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users and to external Paging
speakers. Paging allows a user to locate a co-worker or make an announcement without calling each
extension individually. There are two types of Paging: Internal Paging and External Paging.
Internal Paging
Internal Paging allows extension users to broadcast announcements into 7 internal Paging Zones
and All Call (all zone). When a user makes a zone page, the announcement broadcasts to all extensions assigned to the specified zone. If the user makes an All Call announcement, the announcement simultaneously broadcasts to extensions in all zones. All Call Paging automatically overrides
any zone pages already in progress. A system timer can optionally limit the duration of Paging
announcements.
To simplify Paging access, a keyset can have Programmable Function Keys assigned as Page keys.
Paging Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The zone is:
Off
Idle
On (red)
A co-worker is Paging into the
assigned zone
On (green)
The extension user is Paging into the
assigned zone.
External Paging
When a user pages into Internal All Call Page or Internal page Zone 1, the system simultaneously
broadcasts the announcement into the External Paging Zone. Access to the external zone is via pins
4 and 5 in the CPU’s 8-pin mod jack. Using the DS2000 installation cable, these pins punch down
as 1 and 2. Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional installation details.
When connecting External Paging equipment, be sure to adhere to the following requirements:
Table 8: Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance
600 Ohms @ 1 KHz
Output Level
0 dBr at 1.0 KHz
Note: External Paging does not activate the auxiliary relay contacts (CPU 8-pin mod jack pins 5
and 6).
Conditions
None
214 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Paging
Default Setting
All Call and Zone Paging allowed.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Paging
Step 1: Should extension be able to receive Paging announcements?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1807 - Paging Through Speaker
(page 469), enter Y to allow the extension to
receive paging announcements.
In Program 1802 - Page Zone Member
(page 457), assign extension to the zone for
which it should receive page announcements (1-7,
0 for All Call only).
In Program 1807 - Paging Through Speaker
(page 469), enter N to prevent extension from
receiving paging announcements.
Step 2: Should extension be able to make (broadcast) Paging announcements?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
•
•
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0101 - Initiate All Call Page
(page 363), enter Y to allow extensions with the
assigned Class of Service to make All Call Paging
announcements.
In Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 1
(page 363), through Program 0101 - Access Page
Zone 7 (page 364), enter Y to allow extensions
with the assigned Class of Service to make
announcements into zones 1-7.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 0101 - Initiate All Call Page
(page 363), enter N to prevent extensions with the
assigned Class of Service from making All Call
Paging announcements.
In Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 1
(page 363), through Program 0101 - Access Page
Zone 7 (page 364), enter N to prevent extensions
with the assigned Class of Service from making
announcements into zones 1-7.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 215
Paging
Step-by-step guide for setting up Paging
Step 3: When a user makes a Paging announcement, is the length of time the system
allows to make the page announcement adequate?
•
In Program 0401 - Page Duration (page 376),
leave the Page Duration interval at its currently
assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - Page Duration (page 376),
change the Page Duration interval to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 4: Should extension have one-touch Paging?
•
In Program 1701 - Page Zone Key (page 437),
assign a programmable function key as a Page
Zone key (code 13 + zones 1-7 or 0 for All Call).
•
In Program 1701 - Page Zone Key (page 437), do
not assign a programmable function key as a Page
Zone key (code 13).
If yes
If no
Step 5: Should DSS Console have one-touch Paging?
•
In Program 1704 - Page Zone Key (page 446),
assign a programmable function key as a Page
Zone key (code 13 + zones 1-7 or 0 for All Call).
•
In Program 1704 - Park Orbit Key (page 445), do
not assign a programmable function key as a Page
Zone key (code 13).
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0101 - Initiate All Call Page (page 363)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make an All Call Paging announcement.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 1 (page 363)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 1 Paging announcment.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 2 (page 363)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 2 Paging announcment.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 3 (page 363)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 3 Paging announcment.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 4 (page 363)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 3 Paging announcment.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 5 (page 364)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 3 Paging announcment.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 6 (page 364)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 3 Paging announcment.
Program 0101 - Access Page Zone 7 (page 364)
Enter Y to enable an extension’s ability to make a zone 3 Paging announcment.
Program 0401 - Page Duration (page 376)
Use this timer to set the maximum length of Page announcements.
216 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Paging
Program 1701 - Page Zone Key (page 437)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Page Zone key (code 13). The options are 07 (Page Zones 1-7 or 0 for All Call Page).
Program 1704 - Page Zone Key (page 446)
Assign a programmable key on a DSS Console as a Page Zone key (code 13). The options are
0-7 (Page Zones 1-7 or 0 for All Call Page).
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Program 1802 - Page Zone Member (page 457)
Assign the extension to a Page Zone (1-7).
Program 1807 - Paging Through Speaker (page 469)
Enter Y to enable Paging through the telephone speaker.
Other Related Features
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
DSS Consoles can have Page zone keys.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
DND blocks Paging announcements.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
While in the headset mode, the extension user can hear Paging announcements in the headset.
Feature Operation
To make an Internal Paging announcement:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
3.
Dial *1 and page zone number (1-7 or 0 for All Call).
Two beeps.
N/A
4.
Make announcement and hang up.
The system may limit the length of your announcement.
OR
Lift handset.
1.
2.
Press Paging key.
Two beeps.
N/A
3.
Make announcement and hang up.
The system may limit the length of your annoucement.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 217
Park
Park
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Park a call in orbit so a co-worker can pick it up. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to
handle their calls.
Park places a trunk call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it
up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the
call wait in one of 10 system orbits (60-69). Personal Park allows you to Park a call at an extension
so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call, a user can Page the person receiving the call and
hang up. The paged party dials a code or presses a programmed System Park key to pick up the call.
Many calls can be parked at the same extension, and are retrieved in LIFO (last-in, first-out) order.
A call parked in System Park Orbit for too long will recall the extension that initially parked it. The
recall for System Park Orbits 68 and 69 is permanently fixed at 5 minutes. If the recall remains
unanswerd, the call diverts to Key Ring.
A call parked in Personal Park Orbit for too long will initially recall to the extension at which it is
parked. If unanswered there, it recalls to the extension that parked the call. If still unanswered, it
diverts to Key Ring.
When an an extension has System Park keys, the keys provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the
orbit assigned to the key.
Park Key Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The Park orbit is:
Off
Idle
On (red)
A co-worker has parked a call in the
orbit assigned to the key.
Single wink on (green)
The extension user has parked a call
in the orbit assigned to the key.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
●
Park available.
●
No System Park keys assigned.
218 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Park
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Park
Step 1: If a parked call is not picked up, does it recall the extension that initially parked it at
after the desired interval?
•
In Program 0401 - Park Orbit (page 375), leave
the Park Orbit interval at its currently assigned
value.
•
In Program 0401 - Park Orbit (page 375), change
the Park Orbit interval to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension have System Park Orbit keys?
•
In Program 1701 - Park Orbit Key (page 436),
assign a key as a Park Orbit Key (code 04 + System Park Orbit 0-9).
•
In Program 1701 - Park Orbit Key (page 436), do
not assign a key as a Park Orbit Key (code 04).
If yes
If no
Step 3: Should DSS Console have System Park Orbit keys?
•
In Program 1701 - Park Orbit Key (page 445),
assign a key as a Park Orbit Key (code 04 + System Park Orbit 0-9).
•
In Program 1701 - Park Orbit Key (page 445), do
not assign a key as a Park Orbit Key (code 04).
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0401 - Park Orbit (page 375)
Set how long a call stays in System Park Orbits 60-67 only before recalling. Note that the
recall for orbits 68 and 69 is fixed at 5 minutes.
Program 1701 - Park Orbit Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Park Orbit key (code 04). The options are 09 (System Park Orbits 0-9).
Program 1704 - Park Orbit Key (page 445)
Assign a programmable key on a DSS Console as a Park Orbit key (code 04). The options are
0-9 (System Park Orbits 0-9).
Other Related Features
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
DSS Consoles can have Park keys.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 219
Park
Directed Call Pickup (page 108)
Directed Call Pickup also allows an extension user to pick up a call at a co-worker’s extension.
Key Ring (page 170)
Unanswered Park recalls divert to key ring.
Music On Hold (page 195)
If installed, Music on Hold plays to parked callers.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
An extension user can Park their current call and answer the waiting call.
Feature Operation
To Park a call in system orbit:
1.
While on a trunk call, press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
2.
Dial * + System Park Orbit (60-69).
3.
Hang up.
N/A
Line/loop key triple Wink On (green).
1.
OR
While on a trunk call, press Park key.
2.
Hang up.
N/A
Line/loop key triple wink on (green). Park key single wink on (green).
To retrieve a call from system Park orbit:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
3.
1.
2.
Dial * + System Park Orbit (60-69).
Conversation with caller.
Line/loop key on (green).
OR
Lift handset.
Press Park key.
N/A
Line/loop key on.
To Park a call at an extension (using Personal Park):
1.
While on a trunk call, press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
2.
Dial * * + Number of extension at which you want to park the call (300-331).
220 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Park
3.
Hang up.
N/A
For the extension that parked the call and for the extensin at which the call is
parked: Line/loop key triple wink on (green).
To retrieve a call parked at an extension:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
3.
DS2000 Software Manual
Dial * * + Number of extension at which the call is parked.
Conversation with caller.
Line/loop key on (green).
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 221
PBX/Centrex Compatibility
PBX/Centrex Compatibility
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
222 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Prime Line Preference
Prime Line Preference
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Idle Prime Line for trunks available.
Place or answer an outside call on your Prime Line just by lifting the handset.
Prime Line Preference allows a keyset user to place or answer an outside call by just lifting the
handset. The user does not have to press a line or loop key first. This simplifies handling calls for
users that primarily place or answer trunk calls. In programming, you designate a line or loop key
as a Prime Line Key. The trunk or trunk group assigned to that key becomes your Prime Line. Any
number of extensions can have the same Prime Line assignment.
There are two types of Prime Line Preference: Ringing Prime Line and Idle Prime Line.
Ringing Prime Line
This option is currently not available.
Idle Prime Line
Idle Prime Line lets a user place or answer a Prime Line call by just lifting the handset. If the Prime
Line Key is a line key, lifting the handset places or answers a call on the trunk assigned to the key.
If the Prime Line key is a Loop Key, lifting the handset places or answers a call on a trunk assigned
to the key.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Prime Lines are not set up.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Prime Line
Preference (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should an extension have Prime LIne Preference?
•
In Program 1807 - Prime Line Key (page 470),
enter the line/loop key that will be the extension’s
Prime Line.
•
In Program 1807 - Prime Line Key (page 470),
enter 0 (no assignment).
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 223
Prime Line Preference
Step-by-step guide for setting up Prime Line
Preference (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Designate the function of the Prime Line Key.
•
•
•
In Program 1701 - Switched Loop Key
(page 436), assign the Prime Line Key as a
Switched Loop Key (code 01).
OR
In Program 1701 - Fixed Loop Key (page 436),
assign the Prime Line Key as a Fixed Loop Key
(code 02 + Trunk Group 0-8).
OR
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), assign
the Prime Line Key as a Line Key (code 03 +
Trunk number 1-16).
Programming List
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Program the key assigned as the extension’s Prime Line as a Switched Loop Key (code 01),
Fixed Loop Key (code 02 followed by Trunk Group 0-8), or a Line Key (code 03 followed by
the trunk number 1-16).
Program 1807 - Prime Line Key (page 470)
Use this option to assign a trunk as the extension’s Prime Line. You enter the Prime Line’s key
number (1-24).
Other Related Features
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
If an extension’s Prime Line is another extension’s DIL, lifting the handset will answer the
call even though it does not ring the phone.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
On- and off-premise extensions cannot use Prime Line Preference.
Ringing Line Preference (page 251)
Prime Line Preference overrides Ringing Line Preference. For example, if you lift the handset
while a call is ringing your phone, you seize your Prime Line instead of answering the ringing
call.
Feature Operation
To answer a call on your Prime Line:
Trunk ring.
The key assigned as your Pime Line key flashes slowly.
To bypass your Prime Line, press another key (e.g., a line or loop key) before lifting the
224 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Prime Line Preference
handset.
1.
Lift the handset.
Conversation with caller.
The key assigned as your Pime Line key is on (green).
To place a call on your Prime Line:
To bypass your Prime Line, press another key (e.g., a line or loop key) before lifting the
handset.
1.
Lift the handset.
Trunk dial tone.
The key assigned as your Pime Line key is on (green).
2.
Dial call normally.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 225
Privacy
Privacy
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Privacy to prevent interruptions at high priority extensions.
An extension with Privacy blocks incoming Barge In attempts, and Call Waiting (Camp-On) signals. Privacy helps extension users that don’t want their conversations interrupted.
Note that if an extension with Privacy enabled is on a call with an extension with Privacy disabled,
they are still subject to Barge In attempts and Call Waiting signals to the non-private extension.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Privacy disabled in an extension’s Class of Service.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Privacy
Step 1: Should an extension have Privacy?
If yes
•
•
In Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363), enter Y.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign the extension’s
Class of Service.
If no
•
•
In Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363), enter N.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign the extension’s
Class of Service.
Programming List
Program 0101 - Privacy (page 363)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to enable Privacy.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Since the attendant is never busy for Intercom calls, the attendant always has Privacy enabled.
226 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Privacy
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
Privacy blocks Camp-On beeps.
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
Privacy blocks Barge In attempts.
Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 192)
Privacy does not block Monitor.
Privacy Release Groups (page 228)
There is no interaction between Privacy and Privacy Release Groups.
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 227
Privacy Release Groups
Privacy Release Groups
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Quickly join in a co-worker’s outside call.
You can program extensions into Privacy Release Groups to simplify sharing trunk calls. Co-workers in the same Privacy Release Group can easily join another group member’s trunk call just by
pressing the busy line key. The co-worker immediately joins in unannounced and uninvited. Privacy
Release Groups are a quick alternative to Conference where control over the Conference is not
required. In a Customer Service group, for example, a supervisor could just press a busy line key to
monitor any agent’s call.
I desired, an extension user can prevent other members of their Privacy Release Group from interrupting their active call. This ensures that group members will not interrupt confidential calls.
Any number of extensions can be in the same Privacy Release Group. However, an extension can
only be in a single group. Members of the Privacy Release Group must have line keys and access to
the trunks they want to share.
Privacy Release Groups utilizes a Conference circuit. The following table shows the Conference
capacities:
Description
Capacity
Conference circuits
32
Maximum simultaneous users in Conference
(total of all Conferences system-wide)
32
Maximum simultaneous conferences
8
Maximum parties in any one Conference
(trunks and/or extensions)
8
The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Privacy Release groups assigned.
228 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Privacy Release Groups
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Privacy
Release Groups
Step 1: Should extension be in a Privacy Release Group?
•
If yes
•
•
•
•
If no
In Program 1802 - Privacy Release Group
(page 455), assign the extension to a Privacy
Release Group (1-16). Users in the Privacy
Release Group must have line keys for the trunks
they want to share.
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), assign
the extension’s line keys. Users in the Privacy
Release Group must have line keys for the trunks
they want to share.
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), optionally assign line keys to the extension’s DSS Console. Users in the Privacy Release Group must
have line keys for the trunks they want to share.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign access to the trunks the
Privacy Release Group members want to share.
The options are 0 (no access), 1 (incoming only),
2 (outgoing only) and 3 (full access).
In Program 1802 - Privacy Release Group
(page 455), assign the extension to Privacy
Release Group 0.
Programming List
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
Assign a programmable key as a line key. Users in the Privacy Release Group must have line
keys for the trunks they want to share.
Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444)
Optionally assign a programmable key on a DSS Console as a line key. Users in the Privacy
Release Group must have line keys for the trunks they want to share.
Program 1802 - Privacy Release Group (page 455)
Assign an extension to a Privacy Release Group (1-16, 0 = Unassigned).
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
Users in the Privacy Release Group must have access for the trunks they want to share.The
options are 0 (no access), 1 (incoming only), 2 (outgoing only) and 3 (full access).
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 229
Privacy Release Groups
Other Related Features
The following features also allow different types of multiple party calls:
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
Conference (page 79)
Group Listen (page 142)
Meet-Me Conference (page 184)
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference (page 307)
Privacy (page 226)
There is no interaction between Privacy and Privacy Release Groups.
Feature Operation
To join a trunk call with a member of your Privacy Release Group:
N/A.
Line key on(red).
The line key is on (orange) at the extension that initially placed or answered the
call.
1.
Press line key.
You can optionally press a line key on your DSS Console.
Conversation with caller.
Line key on (green) for every Privacy Release Group member that joins the call.
To prevent a member of your Privacy Release Group from joining your call:
1.
Place or answer trunk call on line key.
Conversation with caller.
Line key on (orange).
2.
Press line key.
Conversation with caller continues.
Line key on (green).
A Privacy Release Group member cannot join your call.
Repeat step 2 to allow or prevent users to join your call.
3.
230 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Private Line
Private Line
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
You can have a line reserved exclusively for your own use.
A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a keyset for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private
Line knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own trunk for placing calls that is not available to others in the system.
There are three types of Private Lines:
●
Incoming Only
The keyset has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place a call on the Private Line. A customer service representative may want an incoming only Private Line to be
sure customers can always get through.
●
Outgoing Only
The keyset has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring for
incoming calls. A service dispatcher may want an ougoing only Private Line so they can
always get in touch with field technicians.
●
Both Ways
The keyset has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls. An executive may want a
both ways Private Line that is available only to them for placing and answering calls.
You can optionally set up shared Private Lines between a group of co-workers that work closely
together.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Private Lines programmed.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Private
Lines (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension have a Private Line
•
In Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416),
assign the correct circuit type to the Private Line.
•
Stop.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 231
Private Line
Step-by-step guide for setting up Private
Lines (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Should Private Line be exclusively for only one extension?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), make
sure that only the extension with the Private Line
has a line key for the trunk (code 03 followed by
the trunk number[1-16]).
OR
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), optionally assign the Private Line to a key on the DSS
Console (code 01 followed by the trunk number
[1-16]).
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), make sure that the extension
with the Private Line is the only phone that has
access to the trunk. See step 3 below for the specifics.
In Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436), assign
line keys (code 03 followed by the trunk number
[1-16]) for all extensions that will share the Private Line.
OR
In Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444), optionally assign the Private Line to a key on the DSS
Console (code 01 followed by the trunk number
[1-16]).
Step 3: Should Private Line be incoming, outgoing or both ways?
•
Incoming
•
•
Outgoing
•
•
Both
•
232 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 1 for incoming only
access.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
make sure only the extension with the Private
Line rings for the trunk.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 2 for outgoing only
access.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
make sure no extensions ring for the trunk.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), enter 3 for full access.
In Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466),
make sure only the extension with the Private
Line rings for the trunk.
DS2000 Software Manual
Private Line
Programming List
Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416)
Assign the correct circuit type to the Private Line.
Program 1701 - Line Key (page 436)
Assign the Private Line to a line key (code 03 followed by the trunk number [1-16]).
Program 1704 - Line Key (page 444)
Optionally assign the Private Line to a key on the DSS Console (code 01 followed by the
trunk number [1-16]).
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Assign ringing for each trunk at each extension (1 = Lamp only [day and night], 2 = Ringing
day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and night). Check
to be sure this program applies to this feature.
Other Related Features
The following features work normally for Private Lines.
Automatic Handsfree (page 30)
Delayed Ringing (page 82)
Group Ring (page 144)
Hold (page 156)
Last Number Redial (page 174)
Night Service / Night Ring (page 200)
Park (page 218)
Prime Line Preference (page 223)
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
Speed Dial (page 263)
Toll Restriction (page 314)
Transfer (page 324)
The following features do not apply to Private Lines
Call Forwarding (page 43)
If you want to be able to forward a private trunk, consider setting up a Direct Inward Line.
Feature Operation
To answer an incoming call on your Private Line:
Trunk ring.
Privalte Line flashing red.
1.
Lift handset..
Conversation with caller.
Private Line key on (green).
To place a call over your Private Line:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Lift handset.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 233
Private Line
2.
Press line key.
Trunk dial tone.
Private Line key on (green).
3.
Dial outside number.
234 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Programmable Function Keys simplify feature operation.
Each keyset has Programmable Function Keys. These Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of any keyset’s
Programmable Function Keys from the sytem program.
The 22-Button Standard and Display Telephones features 12 Programmable Function Keys.
The 34-Button Display Telephone features 24
Programmable Function Keys.
The 34-Button Super Display Telephone also
features 24 Programmable Function Keys.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 235
Programmable Function Keys
The following chart lists the available Programmable Function Key assignments.
•
ACD Log On (Future)
•
Line Key
•
Park Orbit
•
Call Coverage
•
Loop Key, Fixed
•
Reverse Voice Over
•
Call Timer
•
Loop Key, Switched
•
Speed Dial, Personal
•
Data Key (Future)
•
Message Center
•
Speed Dial, System
•
Group Pickup
•
Multiple Directory Numbers (Future)
•
Split Key
•
Hotline
•
Night Key
•
Voice Mail Record Key
•
Intercom Directory
Dialing
•
Page Zones
Conditions
If you unplug a 34-button telephone and replace it with a 22-button telephone, Programmable
Function Keys 13-24 are inaccessible. However, the system still retains the programming for those
keys.
Default Setting
●
Keys 1-8 are line keys for trunks 1-8.
●
Keys 9 and 10 are fixed loop keys.
●
Key 11 is an auto timer key.
●
Key 12 is an All Call Page key.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Programm
able Function Keys (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Do you want to customize an extension’s Programmable Function Keys?
•
In Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key
Assignments (page 436), review the options and
set up the Programmable Function Keys to meet
the site requirments.
•
In Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key
Assignments (page 436), leave each extension’s
Programmable Function Keys at their default settings.
If yes
If no
236 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Programmable Function Keys
Step-by-step guide for setting up Programm
able Function Keys (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Are any of an extension’s Programmable Function Keys set up as line keys?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1802 - Key Access to Outbound Lines
(page 457), enter Y to enable line key access to
trunks.
Also, reviewCentral Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 and Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more on setting up trunk calling.
To provide an answering point for incoming calls,
you should have at least one Loop Key reserved
for incoming calls. Refer to Loop Keys on
page 179 for more.
Programming List
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Assign programmable key functions per the following chart.
Option
Description
Key Code
Undefined
Use this option to designate a key as undefined
(no function).
00
Switched Loop
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a switched loop key.
01
Fixed Loop Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Fixed Loop Key.
02 + nn (trunk group)
Line Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a line key.
03 + nn (trunk
number)
Park Orbit Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Park Orbit key.
04 + n (Park Orbit
0-9)
Hotline Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Hotline key.
05 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediately ringing Call Coverage Key.
06 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
07 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a delayed ring Call Coverage Key.
08 + nnn (extension
number)
Group Pickup
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediate ring Group Call Pickup key.
09 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 237
Programmable Function Keys
Option
Description
Key Code
Group Pickup No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Group Call Pickup
key.
10 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Group Pickup
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a delay ring Group Call Pickup key.
11 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Page Zone Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Page Zone key.
13 + n (Page Zone 17, 0 for All Call)
System Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a One-Touch System Speed Dial key. You
assign the key to specific System Speed Dial
bin.
14 + nnn (System
Speed Dial bin, normally 200-299)
Personal Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Personal Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin.
15 + nnn (701-720)
Call Timer Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Call Timer key. There are two types of
timer key: manual and automatic.
16 + n (1 = Manual
Call Timer, 2 = Automatic Call Timer)
Voice Mail
Record Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Voice Mail Record key.
17
Night Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Night Key.
18 + CLEAR
Data Key
This option is currently not used.
Split Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Split key.
20
ICM Directory
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an Intercom Directory Dialing key.
21
•
22
ACD Log On Key
19 + nnn (extension
number)
This option is currently not used.
Reverse Voice
Over Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Reverse Voice Over key.
23
Message Center
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Message Center key.
24 + nnn (extension
number)
Save Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Save Number Dialed key.
Note that the extension
number does not have
to be an installed extension.
25
Program 1802 - Key Access to Outbound Lines (page 457)
Enter Y to enable an extension user to press a Programmable Function Key to access and outside line.
238 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Programmable Function Keys
Other Related Features
Check Key (page 71)
Check Programmable Function Key assignments.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) (page 95)
If enabled in programming, Programmable Function Keys become DSS keys when the user
presses ICM.
Feature Operation
Refer to the individual features in the chart above.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 239
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use special services (such as telephone banking) over dial pulse trunks.
An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion while placing a trunk call to change the dialing
mode from dial pulse to DTMF. For a system in a dial pulse area, this permits users to access
DTMF services (such as telephone banking) from their DP area. Pulse to tone conversion also helps
dial pulse callers use another company’s automated attendant dialing options. The user can, for
example:
●
Place a call to their bank over a DP trunk.
●
After the banking service answers, wait 6 seconds. (The system automatically converts dialing
to DTMF.)
●
Dial additional banking options.
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering on page 58 and Central Office Calls, Placing on page 63
for the specifics on setting up your trunk calling.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Pulse to Tone Conversion always enabled for dial pulse trunks.
Programming Guide
None
Programming List
Program 1001 - Trunk Circuit Type (page 416)
Be sure to program your DP trunk with circuit type 52.
Other Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion (page 240)
The system does not provide Pulse to Tone Conversion for SLTs. The conversion must be
switched manually from the telephone.
Speed Dial (page 263)
If a Speed Dial number using a dial pulse trunk contains a pause, the digits following the
pause automatically dial out as DTMF.
240 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Feature Operation
To convert your phone’s dialing to DTMF after placing your call on a DP trunk:
1.
Dial initial digits for call.
Digits dial out as dial pulse.
N/A
2.
Wait 6 seconds.
3.
Dial additional digits.
Additional digits dial out as DTMF.
N/A
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 241
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Temporarily remove problem extensions and trunks from service until they can be repaired.
Supervisors and attendants can remove problem trunks and extensions from service. This helps
ensure maximum system performance. For example, the attendant can busy-out a noisy trunk or
problem extension until service personnel can repair the problem. The trunk or extension the
appears busy to all callers. Following repair, the attendant or supervisor can return the trunk to service.
The extension or trunk removed from service shows as busy on the appropriate key (e.g., line key or
Hotline key). The port activity LED on the ATRU PCB indicates that the trunk is busy.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Removing
Trunks and Extensions from Service
Step 1: Should extension be able to remove another extension or trunk from service?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
242 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 0101 - Direct Trunk Access
(page 364), enter Y to enable Direct Trunk
Access.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 0101 - Direct Trunk Access
(page 364), enter N to disable Direct Trunk
Access.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
DS2000 Software Manual
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service
Programming List
Program 0101 - Direct Trunk Access (page 364)
Enter Y to enable an extension to use Direct Trunk Access. Note that enabling Direct Trunk
Access allows the user to bypass Toll Restriction.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
Normally, system attendants should have the ability to remove trunks and extensions from service.
Call Forwarding (page 43)
If Call Forwarding is enabled at an extension when it is removed from service, it is reinstated
when the extension is returned to service.
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
An extension user with Direct Trunk Access can remove trunks from service.
Selectable Display Messaging (page 256)
Removing and returning an extension to service does not cancel an extension’s Selectable
Display Messaging.
Feature Operation
To remove or return an extension or trunk to service:
1.
2.
3.
4.
DS2000 Software Manual
Press ICM and dial #40.
Dial the number of the extension you want to remove or return to service (300-331).
OR
Dial the number of the trunk you want to remove or return to service (401-416)
Dial 4 to return.
OR
Dial 6 to remove.
Dial tone.
The display on a telephone removed from service shows: Out of Service
The line key for a trunk removed from service is on (red).
Press SPK to hang up.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 243
Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
244 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Reverse Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Privately call a co-worker while you’re busy on your handset.
While on a handset call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy keyset user make a private Intercom call to
an idle co-worker. The busy user just presses and holds down a programmed Reverse Voice Over
key to make a private call to the assigned co-worker. The initial caller cannot hear the Reverse voice
Over conversation. The private Intercom call continues until the Reverse Voice Over caller releases
the key again. The initial handset call can be a trunk call or an Intercom call. An extension can have
Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one co-worker.
Reverse Voice Over could help a salesperson, for example, when placing a call to an important client. The salesperson can talk with the client and give special instructions to an assistant — without
interrupting the initial call.
When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline key. (You cannot, however, use it to Transfer calls.) The key also shows at a glance the status of the associated
extension:
Reverse Voice Over Busy Lamp Indications
When the key is:
The covered extension is:
Off
Idle or not installed
On
Busy or ringing
Flashing fast
In Do Not Disturb
Reverse Voice Over uses a system Conference circuit while it is active. The following table shows
the system’s Conference capacities:
Description
Capacity
Conference circuits
32
Maximum simultaneous users in Conference
(total of all Conferences system-wide)
32
Maximum simultaneous conferences
8
Maximum parties in any one Conference
(trunks and/or extensions)
8
The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them.
Conditions
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 245
Reverse Voice Over
Default Setting
No Reverse Voice Over keys assigned
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Reverse
Voice Over
Step 1: Should extension have Reverse Voice Over Capability?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
To put a Reverse Voice Over key on a keyset:
In Program 1701 - Reverse Voice Over Key
(page 439), assign a Reverse Voice Over key
(code 23 followed by the assigned extension
number).
OR
To put a Reverse Voice Over key on a DSS Console:
In Program 1704 - Reverse Voice Over Key
(page 447), assign a Reverse Voice Over key
(code 23 followed by the assigned extension
number).
In Program 1701 - Reverse Voice Over Key
(page 439), and in Program 1704 - Reverse Voice
Over Key (page 447), do not assign any Reverse
Voice Over keys (code 23).
Programming List
Program 1701 - Reverse Voice Over Key (page 439)
Assign a keyset programmable key as a Reverse Voice Over key (code 23 followed by the
assigned extension number).
Program 1704 - Reverse Voice Over Key (page 447)
Assign a DSS Console programmable key as a Reverse Voice Over key (code 23 followed by
the assigned extension number).
Other Related Features
Conference (page 79)
An extension user cannot add an incoming Reverse Voice Over call to a Conference.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
A DSS Console can have a Reverse Voice Over key.
Do Not Disturb (page 114)
DND does not block Reverse Voice Over.
Hold (page 156)
An extension cannot put an incoming Reverse Voice Over call on Hold.
Transfer (page 324)
While idle, an extension user cannot use their Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls.
246 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Reverse Voice Over
Feature Operation
To place a Reverse Voice Over call:
1.
While on a handset call, press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key.
Two beeps, then conversation with called co-worker.
Reverse Voice Over key on (red).
To return to your initial caller:
1.
Release your Reverse Voice Over key.
Conversation with initial caller in handset.
Reverse Voice Over key off.
To place a call to your assigned Reverse Voice Over destination:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
While your telephone is idle, press your Reverse Voice Over key.
Two beeps, then conversation with called co-worker.
Reverse Voice Over key on (green).
You can optionally lift the handset for Privacy.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 247
Ring Groups
Ring Groups
Description
Refer to Group Ring on page 144 for more information.
248 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Ringdown Extension
Ringdown Extension
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Call another extension, group or Voice Mail just by lifting the handset.
A Ringdown Extension automatically calls a co-worker, Voice Mail, a Ring Group or a UCD Hunting group when the user lifts the handset. The call automatically goes through — there is no need
for the user to dial digits or press additional keys. Ringdown extension are frequently used for
lobby phones, where the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Ring Down disabled.
Programming List
Program 1802 - Ring Down Destination (page 457)
Assign the extension’s Ringdown destination. The destination can be an extension, the Voice
Mail master number, a Ring Group number, or a UCD master number. The Ringdown destination cannot be a trunk (e.g., 401).
Other Related Features
Intercom (page 165)
Ringdown Extension follows the voice-announce status of destination extension. For example, if an extension usually voice-announces Intercom calls, a ringdown to that extension will
also voice-announce.
Ringing Line Preference (page 251)
Ringing Line Preference has precedence over Ringdown Extension. If Ringing Line Preference is ringing the phone, lifting the handset answers the call. Lifting the handset does not call
the Ringdown destination.
Voice Mail (page 340)
If the Ringdown destination is the Voice Mail master number, the Ringdown Extension user
hears the Voice Mail main greeting (“Please enter your mailbox number”) after the call connects.
Feature Operation
To use Ringdown Extension:
1.
Lift handset or press SPK.
Two beeps or ringing.
ICM on.
If you hear ringing, wait for the called pary to answer. If you hear two beeps, you may
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 249
Ringdown Extension
begin speaking.
To bypass Ringdown (if your keyset is set up as a Ringdown Extension):
1.
Before lifting the handset or pressing SPK, press one of the following:
- ICM
- Line key
- Programmable Function Key
250 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Ringing Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Simply lift the handset to answer a ringing call.
Ringing Line Preference lets a keyset user answer a ringing call by just lifting the handset. For a
user that primarily answers calls, Ringing Line Preference ensures that ringing calls have priority.
The tables below show the interaction between Ringing Line Preference and other features for both
handset and headset calls.
Table 9: Ringing Line Preference for Handset Call
Keyset
Feature
RLP = Y
Attendant
RLP = N
RLP = Y
RLP = N
Does lifting the handset answer the ringing call?
Intercom (page 165)
Ringing Intercom calls
Yes
Yes
Yes1
Yes1
Key Ring (page 170)
(Line/Loop Keys)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Transfer (page 324)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Group Ring (page 144)
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Extension Hunting (page 121)
(Call to UCD master)
Yes
Yes
No
No
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
No
No
No
No
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
No
No
No
No
1Ringing
Line Preference will not answer a call ringing the Operator Call Key.
Table 10: Ringing Line Preference for Headset Calls
Keyset
Feature
RLP = Y
Attendant
RLP = N
RLP = Y
RLP = N
Does pressing SPK while in the Headset mode
answer the ringing call?
Intercom (page 165)
Ringing Intercom calls
DS2000 Software Manual
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 251
Ringing Line Preference
Table 10: Ringing Line Preference for Headset Calls
Keyset
Feature
RLP = Y
Attendant
RLP = N
RLP = Y
RLP = N
Does pressing SPK while in the Headset mode
answer the ringing call?
Key Ring (page 170)
(Line/Loop Keys)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Transfer (page 324)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Group Ring (page 144)
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Extension Hunting (page 121)
(Call to UCD master)
Yes
Yes
No
No
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
No
No
No
No
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
No
No
No
No
When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the
following order:
1. ICM Key
2. Line Key (from lowest to highest)
3. Loop Key (from lowest to highest)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming List
Program 1807 - Ringing Line Preference (page 469)
Enter Y to enable Ringing Line Preference.
Other Related Features
Attendant Call Queuing (page 22)
Ringing Line Preference will not answer a call ringing the Operator Call Key.
Intercom (page 165)
Ringing Line Preference answers a ringing Intercom call before a ringing trunk call.
Prime Line Preference (page 223)
Prime Line Preference overrides Ringing Line Preference. For example, if you lift the handset
while a call is ringing your phone, you seize your Prime Line instead of answering the ringing
call.
252 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Ringing Line Preference
Ringdown Extension (page 249)
Ringing Line Preference has precedence over Ringdown Extension. If Ringing Line Preference is ringing the phone, lifting the handset answers the call. Lifting the handset does not call
the Ringdown destination.
Feature Operation
To use Ringing Line Preference:
1.
Lift handset or press SPK.
You automatically answer the call.
To bypass Ringing Line Preference:
1.
DS2000 Software Manual
Before lifting the handset or pressing SPK, press one of the following:
- ICM
- Line key
- Programmable Function Key
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 253
telemanuals.com
Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Save the number you just dialed for quick redialing.
Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it
later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually
dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place.
Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 32 digits. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk as for the initial call. However, if that trunk is busy and is part of a trunk
group, Save Number Dialed will automatically select the next trunk in the group. The user can also
preselect a specific trunk if desired.
Save Number Dialed requires a uniquely programmed Programmable Function Key or DSS Console Key.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No Save keys programmed.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Save
Number Dialed (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension have a Save key?
•
In Program 1701 - Save Key (page 439), enter
code 25.
•
In Program 1701 - Save Key (page 439), do not
enter code 25 to assign a key as a Save key.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should DSS Console have a Save key?
•
If yes
254 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
In Program 1704 - Save Key (page 447), enter
code 25.
DS2000 Software Manual
Save Number Dialed
Step-by-step guide for setting up Save
Number Dialed (Page 2 of 2)
•
If no
In Program 1704 - Save Key (page 447), do not
enter code 25 to assign a key as a Save key.
Programming List
Program 1701 - Save Key (page 439)
Assign a Save key to a keyset Programmable Function Key (code 25).
Program 1704 - Save Key (page 447)
Assign a Save key to a DSS Console (code 25).
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Save an outside number, then easily redial it later on.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
A DSS Console can have a Save key.
Last Number Redial (page 174)
Last Number Redial also simplifies dialing important numbers.
Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions (page 207)
Save Number Dialed is not available to on- and off-premise SLTs.
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
Save Number Dialed is not available to SLTs.
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
If an extension user presses their Save key and hears busy, they can dial 2 to wait in line for
the trunk to become available. The system will automatically redial the call. However, if the
user hangs up to convert the queue to a Trunk Callback, the system will not redial the saved
call once the trunk connects.
Feature Operation
To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 32 digits):
1.
Press Save Number Dialed Key.
The system stores the number you just dialed.
To redial a saved number:
1.
(Optional) Press a line key to preselect a trunk for the call.
2.
Press Save Number Dialed key.
Stored number dialing out.
Line/loop key triple Wink On (green).
The stored number dials out.
If you hear busy, you may be able to dial 2 and wait in line for the trunk to become
free.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 255
telemanuals.com
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Display Messaging
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
While you’re away from the phone, display telephone callers can receive personalized text messages you set up.
An extension user can select a preprogrammed Selectable Display Message for their extension.
Display keyset callers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized text messaging. For example, an extension user could select
the message “GONE FOR THE DAY.” Any display keyset user calling the extension would see the
message. Other than displaying the message, the system puts the call though normally.
The are 16 Selectable Display Messages (01-16), set up in system programming. Messages 01-09
are preset by default, but can be changed to meet the site requirements. Messages 10-16 are initially
undefined. Any message can be appended by the extension user. For example, a user could select
message 09 (OUT UNTIL) and append the time they are expected back (e.g., 5:00). The total length
of the message plus any user appended entries cannot exceed 20. Selectable Display Messages cannot begin with numbers.
Following are the 16 default Selectable Display Messages.
256 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
Option
Default
Message 01
CALL (plus 15 user entries)
Message 02
BACK BY (plus 12 user entries)
Message 03
MEETING IN RM (plus 4 user entries)
Message 04
OUT TO LUNCH (plus 7 user entries)
Message 05
GONE FOR THE DAY (plus 3 user entries)
Message 06
ON VACATION (plus 8 user entries)
Message 07
ON BUSINESS TRIP (plus 3 user entries)
Message 08
IN THE MEETING (plus 7 user entries)
Message 09
OUT UNTIL (plus 10 user entries)
Message 10
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 11
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 12
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 13
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 14
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 15
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 16
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
DS2000 Software Manual
Selectable Display Messaging
Conditions
None
Default Setting
See the table above.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Selectable
Display Messaging
Step 1: Should extension be able to enable Selectable Display Messaging?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 1001 - Internal Call Forwarding
(page 362), enter Y.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign an extension’s
Class of Service.
In Program 1001 - Internal Call Forwarding
(page 362), enter N.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign an extension’s
Class of Service.
Step 2: Do you want to change the default Selectable Display Messages or create new
ones?
•
In Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages
(page 414), edit the Selectable Display Messages.
•
Do not make any changes to Program 0801 Selectable Display Messages (page 414).
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 1001 - Internal Call Forwarding (page 362)
Enter Y to enable Call Forwarding.
Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages (page 414)
Program the system’s 16 Selectable Display Messages (up to 20 characters long).
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign an extension’s Class of Service.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 257
Selectable Display Messaging
Other Related Features
Call Forwarding (page 43)
Call Forwarding Cancel (page 47)
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise (page 46)
Enabling or canceling Call Forwarding cancels an extension’s Selectable Display Messaging.
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service (page 242)
Removing and returning an extension to service does not cancel an extension’s Selectable
Display Messaging.
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
SLTs cannot use Selectable Display Messaging.
Speed Dial (page 263)
Personal Speed Dial keys can store the codes that enable Selectable Display Messaging.
Feature Operation
To select a Selectable Display Message:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Dial *38 + Message number (01-16).
Dial tone stops.
ICM on, SPK flashes.
You can press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the messages instead of dialing the
message number.
Press HOLD.
Enter any additional digits.
The total number of digits/characters in the message cannot exceed 20. Use any valid
characters, digits or symbols (just as if you were entering names). Refer to the table below
when entering digits.
Press HOLD.
Press SPK to hang up.
DND is on while the Selectable Display Message is active.
To cancel a Selectable Display Message:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
Dial *30.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
Dial tone stops.
ICM, SPK and DND go out.
258 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Selectable Display Messaging
Use the following table when entering or appending messages:
Keys for Entering Names
Press this
key:
Then one of these keys to enter the character in the white cell:
1
2
3
4
#
1
&
1
2
A
B
C
2
3
D
E
F
3
4
G
H
I
4
5
J
K
L
5
6
M
N
O
6
7
P
Q
R
8
T
U
V
9
W
X
Y
0
SPACE
:
S
7
8
Z
9
0
*
*
#
#
To enter characters in lower case (e.g., e instead of E), press MW before pressing the key in the
first shaded column. Use LND to backspace over (erase) any characters you want to correct.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 259
Single Line Telephones
Single Line Telephones
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00
260 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
Available. Refer to Off-Premise Extensions / On-Premise SLT Extensions on
page 207 for more.
DS2000 Software Manual
Soft Keys
Soft Keys
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 See Interactive Soft Keys on page 163.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 261
Silent Monitor
Silent Monitor
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 See Monitor / Silent Monitor on page 192.
262 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Speed Dial
Speed Dial
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Instead of dialing a long telephone number to reach a client or customer, use Speed Dial instead.
Also, store Intercom digits for quick access to commonly used features.
Speed Dial gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. There are two types
of Speed Dial: System and Personal. Speed Dial numbers can be up to 30 digits long, using 0-9, #
and *. Every Speed Dial can have a programmed name up to 16 characters long. The name shows in
the telephone display as the Speed Dial number dials out.
Speed Dial can store outside numbers and Intercom digits. The capability to store Intercom digits
provides the user with “one-touch” access to features they use most often. For example, a user can
have a Speed Dial bin that simplifies forwarding calls to Voice Mail or a co-worker.
System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial gives every extension access to the same set of stored numbers. The system provides up to 1000 System Speed Dial numbers. Depending on the system option selected (see Programming Guide below), the system provides either 10, 100 or 1000 System Speed Dial numbers.
Personal Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dial provides extensions with 20 numbers stored privately for their own use. The
Personal Speed Dial keys on a DSS Console access the same bins as the extension to which it is
attached.
Allocating Speed Dial Blocks
The system allows up to 1240 unique Speed Dial numbers (bins). Bins are grouped into 62 distinct
blocks, with 20 numbers in each block. Review the table below and keep the following bullets in
mind when setting up Speed Dial:
System Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dial
Total Bins
Total Blocks
Block Numbers
Total Bins
Total Blocks
Block Numbers
10
(20-29)
1
1
(10 bins are not
used)
1220
61
2-61
100
(200-299)
5
1-5
1140
57
6-62
1000
(2000-2999)
50
1-50
240
12
51-62
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 263
Speed Dial
●
The system automatically assigns System Speed Dial blocks. By default, Personal Speed Dial
Blocks are assigned as follows.
Extension
Personal Speed Dial
Block Assignment
300
6
301
7
through
331
●
●
●
36
You can change the Personal Speed Dial block assignment for an extension in system programming. Always be careful, however, to not assign a Personal Speed Dial block that is
already in use for System Speed Dial. If you do, that extension’s personal entries will overwrite the system entries, and vice-versa.
Extensions with the same Personal Speed Dial block share the same Personal Speed Dial
numbers.
The Personal Speed Dial keys on a DSS Console access the same bins as the extension to
which it is attached. DSS Consoles do not have unique Personal Speed Dial numbers.
Unique Speed Dial Entries
In addition to the digits 0-9, # and *, you can enter the following for additional dialing options:
For this option
Or use this telephone
Programming List option:
Pause
MIC
Flash
FLASH
Storing Trunk Routing in a Speed Dial Bin
When you program a Speed Dial bin, you can select either a trunk or a Trunk Group over which the
call should route. For example, you can enter 1 for trunk 1 or 90 for Trunk Group 0.
●
If you enter a Trunk Group number, the system will select the lowest numbered trunk in the
group for the call. If that trunk is busy, the system will select the next highest trunk.
●
If you enter a trunk number, the system initially selects that specific trunk for the call. If the
trunk is busy, the system automatically tries the next trunk in that trunk’s group (if any). If
there is no other installed trunk in that group, the user hears busy tone and the call doesn’t go
through.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
●
100 System Speed Dial bins (200-299).
●
System Speed Dial uses Speed Dial blocks 1-5.
●
All extensions can program and use System Speed Dial.
●
Extension Speed Dial uses blocks 6-62. (Extension 300 uses block 6, extension 301 uses
block 7 etc.)
●
All bins are empty and no names are programmed.
264 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Speed Dial
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Speed Dial
Step 1: Should extension be able to use System Speed DIal?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
In Program 0101 - System Speed Dial Access
(page 362), enter Y if extension should have
access to System Speed Dial.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), make sure extensions have
access to the trunks you want to use for System
Speed Dial.
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
optionally set up Trunk Groups. See Storing
Trunk Routing in a Speed Dial Bin on page 264
for more on why you may want to do this.
In Program 0101 - System Speed Dial Access
(page 362), enter N is extension should not have
access to System Speed Dial.
Step 2: Should the system have 10 (2-digit), 100 (3-digit) or 1000 (4-digit) System Speed Dial
numbers?
•
In Program 0301 - Number of Digits in a System
Speed Dial Code (page 370), enter 2. System bins
will normally be 20-29.
•
In Program 0301 - Number of Digits in a System
Speed Dial Code (page 370), enter 3. System bins
will normally be 200-299.
•
In Program 0301 - Number of Digits in a System
Speed Dial Code (page 370), enter 4. System bins
will normally 2000-2999.
10
100
1000
Step 3: Do you want to enter System Speed Dial numbers from within system programming?
•
In Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
(page 431), enter System Speed Dial numbers.
Users with the proper access can also enter System Speed Dial numbers.
•
In Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
(page 431), do not enter System Speed Dial numbers. Users with the proper access can still enter
System Speed Dial numbers.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 265
Speed Dial
Step-by-step guide for setting up Speed Dial
Step 4: Should extension or DSS Console have Programmable Function Key access to System Speed Dial numbers.
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1701 - System Speed Dial Key
(page 438), assign a keyset programmable key as
a System Speed Dial Key (code 14 + System
Speed Dial bin number).
In Program 1704 - System Speed Dial Key
(page 446), assign a DSS Console key as a System Speed Dial Key (code 14 + System Speed
Dial bin number).
Do not assign keyset or DSS Console keys for
System Speed Dial access.
Step 5: Should extension be able to use Personal Speed DIal?
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
In Program 1802 - Speed Dial Block (page 457),
assign Personal Speed Dial Blocks to extensions.
Refer to Allocating Speed Dial Blocks on
page 263 for help with assigning blocks.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), make sure extensions have
access to the trunks you want to use for Personal
Speed Dial.
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
optionally set up Trunk Groups. See Storing
Trunk Routing in a Speed Dial Bin on page 264
for more on why you may want to do this.
In Program 1802 - Speed Dial Block (page 457),
assign the extension to Personal Speed Dial block
0.
Step 6: Do you want to enter Personal Speed Dial numbers from within system programming?
•
In Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial
(page 441), enter Personal Speed Dial numbers.
Users can also enter Personal Speed Dial numbers from their own phone.
•
In Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial
(page 441), do not enter Personal Speed Dial
numbers. Users can still enter Personal Speed
Dial numbers from their own phone.
If yes
If no
266 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Speed Dial
Step-by-step guide for setting up Speed Dial
Step 7: Should extension or DSS Console have Programmable Function Key access to Personal Speed Dial numbers.
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1701 - Personal Speed Dial Key
(page 438), assign a keyset programmable key as
a Personal Speed Dial Key (code 15 + System
Speed Dial bin number).
In Program 1704 - Personal Speed Dial Key
(page 446), assign a DSS Console key as a Personal Speed Dial Key (code 10 + System Speed
Dial bin number).
Do not assign keyset or DSS Console keys for
System Speed Dial access.
Step 8: Should the system be able to dial out any # characters stored in a Speed Dial bin?
You may not want to enable the dialing of stored #
characters if your system is installed behind a PBX.
•
In Program 0201 - Enable Dial-out of # in a
Speed Dial Number (page 368), enter Y.
•
In Program 0201 - Enable Dial-out of # in a
Speed Dial Number (page 368), enter N.
If yes
If no
Step 9: When the system encounters a pause stored in a Speed Dial bin, does it wait the
proper interval before outdialing the remainder of the number?
•
In Program 0401 - Dialing Pause (page 376), do
not change the entry from its assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - Dialing Pause (page 376),
change the pause duration for compatibility with
the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
If yes
If no
Step 10: When the system encounters a Flash stored in a Speed Dial bin, does it open the loop
on the trunk for the proper interval before outdialing the remainder of the number?
•
In Program 0402 - PBX Pause (page 379), do not
change the entry from its assigned value.
•
In Program 0402 - PBX Pause (page 379), change
the Flash duration for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 267
Speed Dial
Step-by-step guide for setting up Speed Dial
Step 11: Does the system properly detect dial tone for Speed Dial calls?
•
In Program 0402 - Dial Tone Detect (page 378),
do not change the entry from its assigned value.
•
In Program 0402 - Dial Tone Detect (page 378),
change the Dial Tone Detect duration for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
If yes
If no
Step 12: When the system outdials DTMF Speed Dial calls, are the DTMF digits properly
interpreted by the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 0402 - Speed Dial DTMF Tone On
(page 381), do not change the entry from its
assigned value.
In Program 0402 - Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off
(page 382), do not change the entry from its
assigned value.
In Program 0402 - Speed Dial DTMF Tone On
(page 381), change the DTMF on interval the system uses for Speed Dial calls to match the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
In Program 0402 - Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off
(page 382), change the DTMF on interval the system uses for Speed Dial calls to match the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Programming List
Program 0101 - System Speed Dial Access (page 362)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to allow the extension to access System Speed Dial
numbers.
Program 0201 - Enable Dial-out of # in a Speed Dial Number (page 368)
Enter Y for this option if you want the system to outdial any # characters stored in the Speed
Dial number. Enter N to have the system suppress outdialing the #. (You may want to enter N
if the system is installed behind a PBX.)
Program 0301 - Number of Digits in a System Speed Dial Code (page 370)
Assign the number of digits the system uses to designate System Speed Dial bins (2, 3 or 4).
With 2-digit bins, the system has 10 bins numbered 20-29. With 3-digit bins, the system has
100 bins numbered 200-299. With 4-digit bins, the system as 1000 bins numbered 2000-2999.
When Number of Digits
in a System Speed Dial
Code is:
System Speed Dial
bin numbers are:
And the total number
of System Speed Dial
bins is:
2
20-29
10
3
200-299
100
4
2000-2999
1000
268 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Speed Dial
Program 0401 - Dialing Pause (page 376)
For Speed Dial, the system waits this interval when it encounters a pause in a Speed Dial bin.
Program 0402 - Dial Tone Detect (page 378)
When the system seizes a line to place a Speed Dial call, it waits this interval for dial tone
before outdialing the call.
Program 0402 - PBX/Centrex Flash (page 379)
When the system encounters a flash in a Speed Dial bin, it opens the loop on the trunk for this
interval for outdialing the remainder of the call.
Program 0402 - Speed Dial DTMF Tone On (page 381)
Set the duration of DTMF digits for Speed Dial trunk calls automatically dialed by the system. Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
Program 0402 - Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off (page 382)
Sets the duration the the quiet time between DTMF digits for Speed Dial trunk calls automatically dialed by the system. Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/
Centrex.
Program 1002 - 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424)
Set up Trunk Groups if you want Speed Dial to use or overflow to Trunk Groups.
Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers (page 431)
Enter System Speed Dial bin names and numbers.
Program 1701 - System Speed Dial Key (page 438)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a System Speed Dial key (code 14). You
assign the key to specific System Speed Dial bin (normally 200-299).
Program 1701 - Personal Speed Dial Key (page 438)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Personal Speed Dial key (code 15). You
assign the key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin (e.g., 701-720).
Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial (page 441)
Enter Personal Speed Dial bin names and numbers. An extension user can also enter their Personal Speed Dial numbers from their own telephone.
Program 1704 - System Speed Dial Key (page 446)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a System Speed Dial key (code 14). You
assign the key to specific System Speed Dial bin (normally 200-299).
Program 1704 - Personal Speed Dial Key (page 446)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Personal Speed Dial key (code 15). You
assign the key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin (e.g., 701-720).
Program 1802 - Speed Dial Block (page 457)
Assign a Speed Dial block (1-62) to an extension.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access).
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
You can store outside numbers in Speed Dial bins for quick access to frequently called numbers.
Check Key (page 71)
Check Personal Speed Dial bin assignments.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
The DSS Console Personal Speed Dial bins are the same as the extension to which the console
is attached. This means that DSS Consoles that share the same block number still have unique
Personal Speed Dial.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension user can Voice Over after calling a co-worker by using Personal Speed Dial.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 269
Speed Dial
Feature Operation
Personal Speed Dial
To Program a Personal Speed Dial Number:
1.
Press ICM and dial ##.
Intercom dial tone comes on - then goes off.
SPK flashes slowly.
2.
Dial the Personal Speed Dial bin number (701-720).
OR
Press Personal Speed Dial Key (for bins 1-10).
OR
Press DIAL and the Personal Speed Dial Key for bins 11-20.
3. Press HOLD.
4. Enter the trunk number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (1-16)>
OR
Enter the Trunk Group number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number
(e.g., 90 for Trunk Group 0).
OR
Skip this step if you want to enter Intercom codes.
5. Press HOLD.
6. Enter the number you want to store (up to 30 digits long).
If storing Intercom codes, you can enter any valid dial sequence consisting of the digits 0-9, # and *.
To insert a pause, press MIC. To insert a Flash, press FLASH.
7. IPress HOLD.
8. Enter a name for the Speed Dial number
For help on programming names, see Keys for Entering Names on page 361.
9. Press HOLD.
10. Repeat from step 2 to program another bin number.
OR
Press SPK to exit.
To dial a Personal Speed Dial Number:
1.
Press ICM and dial #.
Intercom dial tone comes on - then goes off.
SPK and ICM on.
2.
Dial the Personal Speed Dial bin number (701-720).
The stored number dials out.
For one-button access to your Personal Speed Dial numbers:
1.
Press Personal Speed Dial Key for bins 1-10.
OR
Press DIAL then Personal Speed Dial key for bins 11-20.
OR
Press Programmable Function key for Personal Speed Dial bin.
The stored number dials out.
270 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
To Program a System Speed Dial Number:
1.
Press ICM and dial ##.
Intercom dial tone comes on - then goes off.
SPK flashes slowly.
2.
3.
Dial the System Speed Dial bin number (normally 200-299).
Press HOLD.
4.
Enter the trunk number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (1-16)>
OR
Enter the Trunk Group number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number
(e.g., 90 for Trunk Group 0).
Press HOLD.
5.
6.
Enter the number you want to store (up to 30 digits long).
You can enter any combination of the digits 0-9, # and *. To store a pause with your
Speed Dial number, press MIC.
7. Press HOLD.
8. Enter a name for the Speed Dial number
For help on programming names, see Keys for Entering Names on page 361.
9. Press HOLD.
10. Repeat from step 2 to program another bin number.
OR
Press CONF to exit.
To dial a System Speed Dial Number:
1.
Press ICM and dial #.
Intercom dial tone comes on - then goes off.
SPK and ICM on.
2.
Dial the System Speed Dial bin number (normally 200-299).
OR
Press Programmable Function Key for System Speed Dial bin.
The stored number dials out.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 271
Split (Alternate)
Split (Alternate)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Switch between active calls without Conferencing the calls together.
With Split, an extension user can split (alternate) between a current call and a new call. Split lets the
extension user easily alternate between the calls without joining (Conferencing) the parties
together.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Split disabled (no Split keys programmed).
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Split
Step 1: Should keyset be able to Split between calls?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 1701 - Split Key (page 438), assign a
Programmable Function Key as a Split key (code
20).
OR
In Program 1704 - Split Key (page 446), assign a
DSS Console key as a Split key (code 20).
In Program 1701 - Split Key (page 438), do not
assign a Programmable Function Key as a Split
key (code 20).
OR
In Program 1704 - Split Key (page 446), do not
assign a DSS Console key as a Split key (code
20).
Programming List
Program 1701 - Split Key (page 438)
Assign a Programmable Function Key as a Split key (code 20).
Program 1704 - Split Key (page 446)
Assign a DSS Console key as a Split key (code 20).
272 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Split (Alternate)
Other Related Features
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
Camp-On lets an extension user know that a call is waiting to be answered. The user can Split
between the waiting call and their current call.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
A DSS Console can have a Split key.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
An extension user can alternate between their active call and their waiting call.
Feature Operation
To Split between your current Intercom call and a new Intercom call:
1.
Your extension must have a Split Programmable Function Key.
Press HOLD to place your current Intercom call on Hold, then hang up.
2.
Place or answer Intercom call.
Intercom Callback ring from waiting Intercom call.
ICM slow flash.
3.
Press the Split key to switch between your two Intercom calls.
To Split between your current trunk call and an Intercom call:
Your extension must have a Split Programmable Function Key.
1.
Press ICM to place trunk call on Hold, then hang up.
Intercom Callback ring from waiting Intercom call.
Line key flutter on (green). ICM slow flash.
2.
3.
Place or answer waiting Intercom call.
Press the Split key to switch between the Intercom can and the trunk call.
Repeat this step to alternate between the callers.
To Split between your current Intercom call and a trunk call:
1.
Your extension must have a Split Programmable Function Key.
Press HOLD to place your current Intercom call on Hold.
2.
Answer trunk call.
Conversation with trunk caller.
ICM slow flash.
3.
Press the Split key to switch between your two calls.
To Split between your current trunk call and a waiting trunk call:
1.
Your extension must have a Split Programmable Function Key.
Press ICM to place your current trunk call on Hold, then hang up.
2.
Place or answer new trunk call.
Conversation with trunk caller.
Line key on (green) for active call, flutter on (green) for call on Hold..
3.
Press the Split key to switch between your two calls.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 273
Station Instruments
Station Instruments
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
System keysets provide a host of sophisticated extension features.
The system offers 22-Button Display, 22-Button Standard, 34-Button Display, and 34-Button Super
Display keyset telephones.
22-Button Display Telephone
The 22-Button Display Telephone features a 2by-20 alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive
Soft Keys for intuitive feature access, 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 12 Programmable
Function Keys and 14 fixed feature keys. It
also provides a built-in speakerphone, Dual
LEDs and a built-in desk stand.
22-Button Standard Telephone
The 22-Button Telephone also has 10 Personal
Speed Dial bin keys, 12 Programmable Function Keys and 14 fixed feature keys. It also provides a built-in speakerphone, Dual LEDs and
a built-in desk stand. It does not, however, have
a 2-line display and Interactive Soft Keys.
274 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Station Instruments
34-Button Display Telephone
The 34-Button Display Telephone features a 2line, 20 character display with 4 Interactive
Soft Keys for intuitive feature access, 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 Programmable
Function keys and 14 fixed feature keys. It also
offers a built-in speakerphone, Dual LEDs, and
a built-in desk stand. The 34-Button Display
Telephone is compatible with the optional REJ
Recording Jack.
34-Button Super Display
The 34-Button Super Display Telephone is the
system’s premier telephone instrument. It features an 8-line, 20-character display with 12
interactive keys that provide intuitive call processing. The Super Display also offers 24 usercustomizable programmable function keys for
one-button access to a host of sophisticated
features. The 14 fixed feature keys provide
quick access to the vast array of standard features. The Super Display is compatible with
the optional REJ Recording Jack.
Ring/Message Lamp
Each keyset has a Ring/Message Lamp. Located on the upper right of the keyset faceplate, the
Ring/Message Lamp indicates for the following features:
DS2000 Software Manual
For this feature:
The lamp does this:
Central Office Calls, Answering
Flashes slow (green) as call rings
Direct Inward Line
Flashes slow (green) as call rings
Hold
Flashes slow (green) during Hold recall
Intercom
Flashes slow (green) as call rings
Message Waiting
Flashes fast (red) when user has a Message Waiting indication left
Park
Flashes slow (green) during Park recall
Transfer
Flashes slow (green as call rings) and during Transfer recall
Voice Mail
Flashes fast (red) when messages are
waiting in mailbox
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 275
Station Instruments
Conditions
None
Default Setting
All extensions set up as 22-Button Display keysets (circuit type 02)
Programming List
Program 1801 - Extension Circuit Type (page 449)
Assign the correct circuit type for each extension:
●
01 = 22-Button Standard
●
02 = 22-Button Display
●
06 = 34-Button Display
●
09 = 34-Button Super Display
Other Related Features
None
Feature Operation
Refer to the individual features in this manual.
276 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Message Detail Recording
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
SMDR provides a printed record of your calls.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s trunk calls. Typically,
the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR
allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back and traffic
management easier. SMDR includes both incoming and outgoing calls, and can be turned off system-wide or selectively for each trunk.
The SMDR call record outputs when the call completes. The system assigns the SMDR record to
the last extension on the call. For example, if extension 306 answers the call, talks for 20 minutes,
and then Transfers the call to extension 302, extension 302 “owns” the entire call record as soon as
they hang up.
When connecting SMDR, use cable P/Ns 80893 and 85980 to connect the 8-pin DIN connector on
the CPU to the 9-pin COM port on the customer-provided laptop or data collection device. By
default, the data rate is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity (typically referred to as 9600
8N1).
The system buffers 50 SMDR call records. When the SMDR buffer fills, new call records will overwrite previously buffered call records.
Sample SMDR Report
Following is a sample SMDR report:
Station Message Detail Recording
05/07/1999 09:10P
---+---+--------------------------------+----------+---------+--------+Sta|Lin|
Number Dialed
| Account | Start |Duration|T
---+---+--------------------------------+----------+---------+--------+306| 01|
12039265400|
|09:10:18P|00:00:05|O
306| 01|
19055072888|
|09:10:48P|00:01:13|O
301| 02|
-|
|09:12:13P|00:01:12|I
304| 01|
-|
|09:12:07P|00:01:20|I
306| 01|
18003651928|
|09:15:38P|00:00:14|O
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 277
Station Message Detail Recording
SMDR Report Definitions
SMDR Report Definitions
Sta
The extension that placed or answered the call
Lin
The trunk used for the call
Number Dialed
For outgoing calls, the number dialed on the trunk
(up to 20 digits)
Account
Account code
Start
The time the call was initially answered
Duration
The total duration of the call
T
O = Outgoing trunk call
I = Incoming trunk call
SMDR Report Format
SMDR Report Format (Page 1 of 3)
Line
Character
Field
1-32
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
33,34
Carriage return, line feed
1-10
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
11
Space
12-16
Time (hh:mm:ss)
17
A (for am) or P (for pm)
18,19
Carriage return, line feed
1,2
Carriage return, line feed
Report Start Header
1
2
3
278 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Station Message Detail Recording
SMDR Report Format (Page 2 of 3)
Line
Character
Field
1-3
- characters
4
+ character
5-7
- characters
8
+ character
9-40
- characters
41
+ character
42-51
- characters
52
+ character
53-61
- characters
62
+ character
63-70
- characters
71
+ character
72
- character
1-3
Sta
4
| character
5-7
Lin
8
| character
9-40
(9 spaces) Number Dialed (10 spaces)
41
| character
42-51
(2 spaces) Account (1 space)
52
| character
53-61
(2 spaces) Start (2 spaces)
62
| character
63-70
Duration
71
| character
72
T
Call Record Header
1
2
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 279
Station Message Detail Recording
SMDR Report Format (Page 3 of 3)
Line
Character
Field
3
1-3
- characters
4
+ character
5-7
- characters
8
+ character
9-40
- characters
41
+ character
42-51
- characters
52
+ character
53-61
- characters
62
+ character
63-70
- characters
71
+ character
72
- character
1-3
Extension number
4
| character
5-7
Trunk number (2 digits, right justified, preceded by
one space)
8
| character
9-40
Number dialed (up to 20 characters, right justified,
preceded by spaces)
41
| character
42-51
Account Code (right justified, preceded by spaces)
52
| character
53-61
Start time of call (hh:mm:ssA or P)
62
| character
63-70
Duration of call (hh:mm:ss)
71
| character
72
Type of call
Call Record
1
Conditions
None
Default Setting
SMDR output disabled.
280 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up SMDR
Step 1: Should system output SMDR?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0301 - SMDR Port (page 371), enter
1 to enable SMDR at the CPU RS-232-C port.
In Program 0301 - CPU Baud Rate (page 371),
set the baud rate on the RS-232-C port to match
the requirements of the connected SMDR device.
In Program 0301 - SMDR Port (page 371), enter
0 to prevent the CPU from outputting SMDR.
Step 2: Should the SMDR report include the header?
•
In Program 0301 - Print SMDR Header
(page 371), enter Y to enable the SMDR header.
•
In Program 0301 - Print SMDR Header
(page 371), enter N to disable the SMDR header.
If yes
If no
Step 3: Should a specific trunk be included in the SMDR report?
•
In Program 1001 - Print SMDR (page 421), enter
Y to have the system include the trunk in the
SMDR report.
•
In Program 1001 - Print SMDR (page 421), enter
N to have the system exclude the trunk from the
SMDR report.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0301 - CPU Baud Rate (page 371)
Assign the baud rate for the RS-232-C port on the CPU. The options are 2 (1200), 3 (2400), 4
(4800), 5 (9600) and 6 (19200). You can also use Ctrl + Break from a laptop connected to the
CPU RS-232-C port to step through the available baud rates.
Program 0301 - SMDR Port (page 371)
Enter 1 to enable SMDR output from the CPU RS-232-C port, or enter 0 to disable SMDR at
the CPU RS-232-C port.
Program 0301 - Print SMDR Header (page 371)
Enter Y to have the beginning of the SMDR report include the column header data. Enter N to
have the SMDR report only include the call data (without the header).
Program 1001 - Print SMDR (page 421)
Enter Y to have the SMDR report include calls on the trunk. Enter N to have the SMDR report
exclude calls on the trunk.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 281
Station Message Detail Recording
Other Related Features
Call Timer (page 48)
The Call Timer also helps users keep track of their time on the phone.
Time and Date (page 312)
Time and date appear on the SMDR report.
Transfer (page 324)
The system assigns the SMDR record to the last extension on the call. For example, if extension 306 answers the call, talks for 20 minutes, and then Transfers the call to extension 302,
extension 302 “owns” the entire call record as soon as they hang up.
Year 2000 Compliance (page 355)
The SMDR report displays four digits for the year (i.e., 2000, 2001).
Feature Operation
SMDR is automatic once enabled.
282 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Station Overflow
Station Overflow
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 283
System Diagnostics
System Diagnostics
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
284 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Identification
System Identification
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Store the site name and telephone number in the system data base.
The system adminstrator can enter the site name and telephone number into the system data base.
This information is saved into system memory and will appear on system diagnostic reports, once
available.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
No entries.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up System
Identification
Step 1: Do you want to enter a site name for the system?
•
In Program 0302 - Company Name (page 372),
enter the name for the site (up to 14 characters).
•
In Program 0302 - Company Name (page 372),
do not enter the name for the site.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Do you want to enter the contact telephone number for the site
•
In Program 0302 - Company Phone Number
(page 372), enter the site telephone number (up to
14 characters).
•
In Program 0302 - Company Phone Number
(page 372), do nor enter the site telephone number.
If yes
If no
Programming List
Program 0302 - Company Name (page 372)
14 Enter the name of the company (up to 14 characters) at which the system is installed. The
name appears on top of various system reports.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 285
System Identification
Program 0302 - Company Phone Number (page 372)
Enter the number that the system should call to report a fault. This is not the number of the
company where the system is installed. It is the number of the remote service center.
Other Related Features
Automatic Fault Reporting (page 29)
System Diagnostics (page 284)
The company name and phone number will display on system diagnostic reports.
Feature Operation
None
286 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Programming Backup and Restore
System Programming Backup and Restore
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Backup and restore site data to a PC card.
You can use PC Card P/N 85880 or P/N 80050-V**.** (with system software preloaded) to back
up and restore your site data. Each PC card can store up to 12 complete data bases. In addition, you
can assign a name (up to 10 characters long) to each stored data base.
The PC Card provides a permanent, non-volatile backup of all the site’s programming. If you have
backed up your site data to a PC Card, for example, you can easily restore all site programming
after an extended power failure.
Backup and Restore also allows an installer to back up systems of varying software levels onto the
same PC card. For example, they can store a system at software level 00.01.14 in one address,
00.01.16C in another address, and 00.01.16F in a third address. If the system is inadvertantly misprogrammed on site, the installer can quickly have the system up and running once restored from
the PC card data.
Conditions
If you use PC Card P/N 80050-V**.** (with system software preloaded) to load a new version of
system software, your system will restart with the factory loaded (default) program entries. Any
existing site-specific programming is automatically erased.
Default Setting
No data bases stored.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up System
Programming Backup and Restore (Page 1 of
2)
Step 1: Do you want to back up the site data to a PC Card?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 9906 - Database Save (page 479),
back up the site data to one of the 12 available PC
card addresses.
Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional information on using the PC card for
backup and restore.
In Program 9906 - Database Save (page 479), do
not back up the site data to the PC card.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 287
System Programming Backup and Restore
Step-by-step guide for setting up System
Programming Backup and Restore (Page 2 of
2)
Step 2: Do you want to restore the site data from a PC card.
•
If yes
•
•
•
If no
In Program 9907 - Database Load (page 481),
restore the site data from one of the 12 available
PC card addresses.
Make sure the software level of the stored data
base matches the software level of the system.
Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional information on using the PC card for
backup and restore.
In Program 9907 - Database Load (page 481), do
not restore the site data from the PC card.
Programming List
Program 9906 - Database Save (page 479)
Save (back up) site data to a PC card.
Program 9907 - Database Load (page 481)
Restore (load) site data from a PC card.
Other Related Features
Automatic Fault Reporting (page 29)
System Diagnostics (page 284)
If the system diagnostics report a critical fault that requires a CPU change or system initialization, the installer can quickly restore site programming from the PC card.
Battery Backup (page 39)
In the event of commercial AC power failure, the battery on the CPU PCB provides short-term
backup of system memory and the system time and date (Real Time Clock).
Feature Operation
None
288 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Programming List
System Programming List
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The following system programs are available:
Program 0100 - Class of Service (page 362)
Program 0101 - Class of Service Options (page 362)
Program 0200 - Tenant Options (page 367)
Program 0201 - Tenant Option Programming (page 367)
Program 0300 - System Options (page 370)
Program 0301 - System Options (Part 1) (page 370)
Program 0302 - System Identification (page 372)
Program 0400 - Timers (page 375)
Program 0401 - System Timers (page 375)
Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (page 378)
Program 0403 - Station Timers (page 386)
Program 0404 - Analog Station Timers (page 389)
Program 0500 - System Numbering (page 392)
Program 0501 - Numbering Plan (page 392)
Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers (page 396)
Program 0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers (page 398)
Program 0510 - ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names (page 402)
Program 0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names (page 404)
Program 0600 - Toll Restriction (page 406)
Program 0601 - Toll Restriction Options (page 406)
Program 0800 - Display Messages (page 414)
Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages (page 414)
Program 1000 - Trunk Programming (page 416)
Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description (page 416)
Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424)
Program 1003 - Trunk Options (page 426)
Program 1100 - Speed Dial (page 431)
Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers (page 431)
Program 1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment (page 433)
Program 1700 - Key Programming (page 436)
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial (page 441)
Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment (page 443)
Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment (page 444)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 289
System Programming List
Program 1800 - Extension Options (page 449)
Program 1801 - Extension Port Description (page 449)
Program 1802 - Extension Options (Part 1) (page 455)
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
Program 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access (page 464)
Program 1805 - Ring Assignments (page 466)
Program 1807 - Extension Options (Part 2) (page 469)
Program 9800 - System Utilities, Part 1 (page 472)
Program 9801 - Copy Command (page 472)
Program 9900 - System Utilities, Part 2 (page 474)
Program 9901 - Reset Station Port (page 474)
Program 9905 - Password (page 478)
Program 9906 - Database Save (page 479)
Program 9907 - Database Load (page 481)
Program 9999 - System Initialization (page 482)
290 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Programming Password Protection
System Programming Password Protection
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Control access to system programming.
The system controls access to the programmable options according to the programming password
the administrator enters. There are three password levels:
Logging On with this Password:
Gives you access to these programs:
System Administrator 1 (level 1)
Password = 0000
Program 0302 - System Identification (page 372)
Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers (page 431)
System Administrator 2 (level 1)
Password = 9999
Program 0302 - System Identification (page 372)
Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages (page 414)
Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers (page 431)
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial (page 441)
Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment (page 443)
Installer (level 3)
Password - 372000
All
Conditions
None
Default Setting
See the table above.
Programming List
Program 9905 - Password (page 478)
Review the complete list of programmable options.
Other Related Features
System Programming Backup and Restore (page 287)
Backup your system programming to a PC card provides for a permanent, non-volatile
backup of all the site’s programming.
System Programming List (page 289)
Review the complete list of programmable options.
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 291
System Timers
System Timers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Information to be provided.
Use the system-side timers to tailor the system to the site’s requirements.
The system-wide timers allow the adminstrator system performance to meet the specific application
requirements. Review the table below for a description of each timer.
Following is a summary of the Program 0401 - System Timers (page 375) options.
Table 11: Program 0401 - System Timers (Page 1 of 2)
Option
Description
Default
Park Orbit
Use this timer to set how long a call stays in System
Park Orbit before it recalls the extension that parked
it. This timer if for orbits 60-67 only. The recall for
orbits 68 and 69 is fixed at 5 minutes.
60 sec.
Modem Reserve
Use this timer to set how long the system reserves a
modem, once requested by an extension user, from
the modem pool before returning in to the pool.
30 sec.
Transfer Recall
Use this timer to set how long a transferred call rings
the destination extension before recalling the extension from which it was initially transferred. This
option pertains to all idle extensions, as well as busy
multibutton extensions. Note that this timer does not
control how long a transferred call rings a busy operator.
30 sec.
When an extension user places a call, they must dial
each succeeding digit within this interval.
6 sec.
Meet-Me Conference
When a user initiates a Meet-Me Conference, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the
call.
30 sec.
Dialing Pause
For Automatic Route Selection, the system waits this
interval when it encounters a pause in an ARS Dial
Treatment.
1 sec.
Intercom Inter-digit
For Speed Dial, the system waits this interval when it
encounters a pause in a Speed Dial bin.
Page Duration
Use this timer to set the maximum length of Page
announcements.
30 sec.
Door Unlock
When a single line (2500 type) user hookflashes
while talking to a Door Box, the Door Box strike
opens for this interval.
30 sec.
292 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers
Table 11: Program 0401 - System Timers (Page 2 of 2)
Option
DIL No Answer
Trunk Revert
Description
Default
This timer sets how long a DIL rings an idle extension before Key Ring occurs. Key Ring rings all
extensions programmed to ring for that line.
15 sec.
This timer sets how long Hold Recall rings the extension that placed the call on hold before Key Ring
occurs. Key Ring rings all extensions programmed to
ring for that line.
15 sec.
This timer also sets how long a Transfer Recall rings
the extension that initially transferred the call before
Key Ring occurs.
Trunk Delay Ring
Use this timer to set how long the system waits before
ringing an extension that has the Delayed Ringing
option enabled.
10 sec.
Information to be provided.
20 sec.
Centrex Type Feature
Key Delay
This timer sets how long the system waits when it
finds a Centrex delay (i.e., D) programmed in a Centrex Feature Key.
50 sec.
ACD/UCD Overflow
This timer sets when UCD overflow occurs. When all
UCD agents are busy, a queued call rings for this
interval and then overflows to the UCD Overflow destination.
60 sec
Trunk Overflow
Number of Password
Attempts
Use this option to set how many times the system
allows a user to enter the incorrect programming
password before locking them out.
3
Program Lockout Time
Once the system locks out a user, it will wait this
interval before allowing the user to reenter the programming mode.
10 sec.
Force Program Exit
If a telephone in the programming mode is inactive
longer than this interval, the system automatically
cancels the programming mode and makes the telephone idle.
10 sec.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
See the table above.
Programming List
Program 0401 - System Timers (page 375)
The system-wide timers allow the adminstrator system performance to meet the specific application requirements.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 293
System Timers
Other Related Features
Refer to the following for related feature information:
Program 0401 - System Timers (page 375)
Feature Operation
None
294 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers, Stations
System Timers, Stations
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Adjustable station timers allow the system to more precisely meet the site requirements.
The system provides many station timers that the administrator can customize. Review the tables
below for a description of each station timer.
Following is a summary of the Program 0403 - Station Timers (page 386).
Table 12: Program 0403 - Station Timers (Page 1 of 2)
Option
Description
Default
Hold Recall
Use this timer to set how long a call stays on Hold
before it recalls the extension that initially placed it
on Hold.
60 sec.
Exclusive Hold
Use this timer to set how long a call stays on Exclusive Hold before it recalls the extension that initially
placed it on Exclusive Hold.
90 sec.
Camp-On
Use this timer to set how long a transferred call
camps-on to a busy single line phone before recalling
the extension that initially transferred the call.
60 sec.
Call Forward Ring No
Answer
When Call Forwarding Ring No Answer is enabled,
this timer sets how long a forwarded call rings an
unanswered extension before routing to the forwarding destination.
10 sec.
Also use this timer to set how long a transferred call
rings a busy operator extension before recalling the
extension from which it was initially transferred. Note
that this timer does not control how long a transferred call rings any other busy extension.
Call Waiting Tone Interval
Use this timer to set the interval between Call Waiting
tones.
10 sec.
Also use this timer to set the interval between Off
Hook Signaling alert tones.
Call Coverage Delay
For extensions with Delayed Ringing Call Coverage
keys, this timer sets how long a call flashes the key at
an extension before it starts to ring.
10 sec.
Hook flash Transfer
This timer is currently not implemented.
2 sec.
Hook Flash Disconnect
This timer is currently not implemented.
12 sec.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 295
System Timers, Stations
Table 12: Program 0403 - Station Timers (Page 2 of 2)
Option
Number of Extended
Rings
Description
Default
If an extension’s Class of Service enables Extended
Ringing, use the timer to set the duration of the
Extended Ringing.
20 sec.
Drop Pulse Send
Use this timer to set the duration of the ASTU PCB
drop pulse. This pulse is sent from the ASTU PCB to
the connected analog device to initiate a disconnect.
300 mS
DTMF Detect
Use this timer to set the DTMF detection threshold
for single line (analog device) ports. If the analog
device sends a DTMF signal longer than this interval,
the system recognizes it as a valid DTMF tone and
decodes it. If the DTMF signal is equal to or less than
this interval, the system ignores it.
70 mS
Ring No Answer Hunt
Use this timer to set the Extension Hunting Ring No
Answer Time. A call will ring a hunt group member
extension for this interval before automatically
cycling to the next extension in the group.
10 sec.
296 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers, Stations
Following is a summary of the Program 0404 - Analog Station Timers (page 389).
Table 13: Program 0404 - Analog Station Timers (Page 1 of 2)
Option
Description
Default
Country Data
Use this option to define the country of use and the
codec digitizing method for ASTU PCBs. This timer
consists of two bits (xy), with bit x defining the country and bit y defining the digitization method. For
example, the default entry 00 is for North America
(x=0) and u-law digitization method (y=0). Do not
change this entry from its default value (00).
00
(xy)
Rotary Dial Type
Use this option to define the rotary dial pulsing
method for the system’s ASTU PCBs. Do not change
this entry from its default value (01).
Standard
(0)
Loop Current
Use this option to set the maximum allowed loop current for the system’s ASTU PCBs. Normally choose
25mA for short loops and 35mA for long loops. In
general, a long loop is 3000 feet or longer and a short
loop is less than 3000 feet.
25mA (0)
Ringing Frequency
Use this option to define the AC ringing frequency for
the system’s ASTU PCBs. Do not change this entry
from its default value (20 Hz).
20 Hz (1)
Minimum Break Time
This timer defines the minimum amount of time the
loop must be opened to properly decode the dial pulse
digits sent from analog devices connected to ASTU
PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10
PPS.
2 (10 mS)
Maximum Break Time
This timer defines the maximum amount of time the
loop must be opened to properly decode the dial pulse
digits sent from analog devices connected to ASTU
PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10
PPS.
20 (100 mS)
Minimum Make Time
This timer defines the minimum amount of time the
loop must be closed to properly decode the dial pulse
digits sent from analog devices connected to ASTU
PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10
PPS.
2 (10 mS)
Maximum Make Time
This timer defines the maximum amount of time the
loop must be closed to properly decode the dial pulse
digits sent from analog devices connected to ASTU
PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10
PPS.
20 (100 mS)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 297
System Timers, Stations
Table 13: Program 0404 - Analog Station Timers (Page 2 of 2)
Option
Description
Default
Minimum Hookflash Time
For ASTU PCBs, this timer defines the minimum
amount of time the loop must be opened before the
system starts to detect a transfer or hang up sequence.
Open loop intervals shorter than the setting are
ignored by the ASTU PCB.
21 (105 MS)
Maximum Hookflash
Time
For ASTU PCBs, this timer defines the maximum
amount of time the loop can be opened in order for
the system to detect a Transfer sequence. Open loop
intervals longer than the setting are interpreted as
hang up.
200 (1000 mS
/ 1 second)
Minimum Ground Flash
Time
For ground start applications with ASTU PCBs, this
timer sets the amount of time a ground must be
applied before the system detects a transfer sequence.
The ASTU uses this timer when analog telephones
use ground Transfer instead of open loop Transfer.
This timer is not used in North America. Do not
change this timer from its default value.
21 (105 mS)
Minimum Off-Hook Time
For ASTU PCBs, this timer defines how long a connected analog device must remain off-hook before the
system recognizes the off-hook status.
21 (105 mS)
Off-Hook Guard Time
The ASTU PCB waits this interval after an analog
device hangs up before accepting any additional input
from the device. This timer helps prevent erroneous
detection due to hardware stabilization.
60 (300 mS)
Dial Pulse Guard Timer
The ASTU PCB waits this interval between dial pulse
digits before attempting to detect any additional DP
digits. This timer helps prevent erroneous DP dialing
due to hardware stabilization.
70 (350 mS)
Loop Disconnect Time
When the far end disconnects, the ASTU PCB opens
the loop to the connected analog device for this interval.
40 (200 mS)
Ring/MW Wait Period
Time
This timer determines the ringing sequence for the
devices connected ASTU PCBs. Because of power
consumption, it is not possible to ring all analog
devices on an ASTU simultaneously. Instead, the card
is divided into 4 groups with two ports in each group.
Ringing cycles between the 4 groups, ringing each
group for this interval.
15 (750 mS)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Refer to the charts above.
298 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers, Stations
Programming List
Program 0403 - Station Timers (page 386)
Customize general station timers.
Program 0404 - Analog Station Timers (page 389)
Customize analog station timers.
Other Related Features
Refer to the following for related feature information:
Program 0403 - Station Timers (page 386)
Program 0404 - Analog Station Timers (page 389)
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 299
System Timers, Trunks
System Timers, Trunks
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Customize critical trunk timers for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
The system provides many trunk timers that the administrator can customize. Review the table
below for a description of each trunk timer.
Following is a summary of the Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (page 378). Refer also to:
●
Rules for Detecting Normal CO (Single) Ring on page 304.
●
Rules for Detecting Special (Double) Ring on page 304.
●
Rules for Detecting Loop Current on page 305.
Table 14: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (Page 1 of 5)
Option
Camp-On
Line Response
Description
Default
Information to be provided.
60 sec.
When the system fails to detect loop current on a
trunk, it will wait this interval before marking the
trunk as defective.
100
(10 seconds)
Be sure the value you enter is compatible with the
local telco. If you set this value too short, the system
may mark properly functioning trunks as defective. If
too long, defective trunks may be left in service.
Dial Tone Detect
When the system seizes a line to place a Speed Dial
call, it waits this interval for dial tone before outdialing the call. The system requires that the first dial tone
be at least.5 seconds long and the second dial tone to
be at least 2.5 seconds long.
10 (1 second)
Be sure the value you enter is compatible with the
local telco. If you set this value too short, the system
may not seize properly functioning trunks. If too
long, there will be too long a delay before the system
skips over a defective trunk.
PBX/Centrex Flash
Use this timer to set the Flash interval. When a user
flashes a trunk, the system opens the trunk circuit for
this interval. For accurate flash function, be sure to set
this interval for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex.
800 mS
If you set this interval too short, the telco may not
always register the flash. If too long, inadvertent disconnects may occur.
Flash Disconnect
300 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
TBD
2496mS
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers, Trunks
Table 14: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (Page 2 of 5)
Option
Description
Default
Force Idle (Trunk Guard
Time)
Use this timer to set the guard time for trunks. When
the system disconnects a trunk (e.g., after a user hang
up), the system keeps the line idle until this timer
expires. The Trunk Guard Time helps prevent call collisions.
25 (2.5 sec)
If you set this interval too short, call collisions may
occur. If too long, there will be unnecessary delays
before you can use the trunk for a new call.
PBX Pause
Use this timer to set the delay that occurs after the
system dials a PBX access code. After the system
dials the code, it waits this interval before outdialing
the rest of the number.
0
If you set this interval too short, the PBX may not
have enough time to set up the call and return dial
tone. If too long, the PBX may disconnect the call.
Minimum Ring Detection
Timer
Use this timer to set the threshold for ring detection.
If the ring signal is longer than this interval, the system interprets the signal as valid ringing. If the signal
is equal to or shorter than this interval, the system
ignores the ringing.
104 mS
Be sure the value you enter is compatible with the
local telco. If you set this value too short, the system
may detect line spikes and anomalies as ringing. If
too long, the system may not properly interpret a
valid ringing signal.
DP Make Timer
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial Pulse
Make signal (i.e., relay closed). This is the “on” time
in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatibility
with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. Keep in
mind that there are three components of a Dial Pulse
digit: Make interval, Break interval and Interdigit
interval. An improper setting may cause misdialing.
40 mS
DP Break Timer
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial Pulse
Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is the “off” time
in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatability
with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. Keep in
mind that there are three components of a Dial Pulse
digit: Make interval, Break interval and Interdigit
interval. An improper setting may cause misdialing.
60 mS
DP Interdigit Timer
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial Pulse
Interdigit signal (i.e., relay open time between each
digit). Set this timer for compatability with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. Keep in mind that there
are three components of a Dial Pulse digit: Make
interval, Break interval and Interdigit interval. An
improper setting may cause misdialing.
800 mS
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 301
System Timers, Trunks
Table 14: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (Page 3 of 5)
Option
Description
Default
Manual DTMF Tone On
This timer sets the duration of DTMF digits for trunk
calls manually dialed by an extension user. This is
required because the system buffers the digits the user
dials.
250 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the telco or PBX/Centrex may not be able to
properly detect the DTMF digit. If too long, outbound
dialing is unnecessarily slowed down.
Manual DTMF Tone Off
This timer sets the duration of the interval between
DTMF digits for trunk calls manually dialed by an
extension user. This is required because the system
buffers the digits the user dials.
100 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the telco or PBX/Centrex may not be able to set
up to receive the next DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is unnecessarily slowed down.
Speed Dial DTMF Tone
On
This timer sets the duration of DTMF digits for Speed
Dial trunk calls automatically dialed by the system.
100 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the telco or PBX/Centrex may not be able to
properly detect the DTMF digit. If too long, outbound
dialing is unnecessarily slowed down.
Speed Dial DTMF Tone
Off
This timer sets the duration the quiet time between
DTMF digits for Speed Dial trunk calls automatically
dialed by the system.
100 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the telco or PBX/Centrex may not be able to set
up to receive the next DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is unnecessarily slowed down.
Loop Current Detection
Time
For loop start trunks, loop current must be present for
this interval before the system seizes the trunk.
800 mS
Set this interval for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the system may inadvertently seize unstable
trunks. If too long, the system may not properly seize
a valid trunk.
Codec Digitizing Method
302 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
Use this option to set the system’s codec companding
method type for the trunk. Be sure this option is
always set to 0 (µ-law companding enabled). Do not
set this option to 1 (A-law companding enabled).
0 (µ-law)
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers, Trunks
Table 14: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (Page 4 of 5)
Option
Setting for International
Rotary Disk
Far End Disconnect
Description
Default
Set this option for compatibility with the type of
rotary dial (500 type) telephone used. Be sure to
always set this option to 0.
Use this timer to set the loop disconnect interval for
trunk calls. If the system detects a loop current interruption longer than this interval it assumes the telco
has disconnected the trunk. It then returns the trunk
trunk to idle.
0
(US standard)
300 mS
Set this interval for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the system may inadvertently disconnect valid
trunks. If too long, the system may leave trunks connected that it should tear down.
Minimum Single Ring
Detection Timer
The system uses this timer to detect valid ringing signal from the connected telco or PBX. Valid single
ring must be longer than this interval.
504 mS
Minimum Double Ring
Detection Off Timer
The system uses this timer to detect valid double ring
from the connected PBX. Valid double ring must be
longer than this interval.
104 mS
Maximum Double Ring
Detection Off Timer
The system uses this timer to detect valid double ring
from the connected PBX. Valid double ring must be
less than this interval.
304 mS
Ringing Signal End
Detect Timer
If the ringing signal on a trunk call is interrupted for
longer than this interval, the system assumes ringing
has stopped and terminates the call.
6016 mS
Set this option for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX Centrix. If this interval is set to short,
valid ringing will be inadvertently cut off. If too long,
the system will leave the call set up even after ringing
has stopped.
Caller ID Detection Timer
Caller ID is currently not available. Do not change
this timer from its default setting.
3268 mS
The Caller ID Timer is the amount of time a system
DSP is turned on, “listening” for Caller ID digits on a
trunk. The listen mode starts 100 mS after the first
ring burst and continues until the AC Impedance
Timer times out. Only change this timer is you are
having errors in the displayed Caller ID digits.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 303
System Timers, Trunks
Table 14: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (Page 5 of 5)
Option
Description
Default
Ground Start Timer
Before the system can start a ground start trunk, the
telco’s tip ground must be present for longer than this
interval.
800 mS
Set this interval for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too
short, the system may inadvertently start a trunk it
should not set up. If too long, the system may not start
trunks that are functioning normally.
Pause Timer
This timer sets the system pause interval. For example, if a user programs a pause into a Speed Dial bin,
the system will wait this interval and then proceed
with dialing the remaining digits in the bin.
DP Mute Timer
P.F. Recovery Detect
Timer
Information to be provided.
3008 mS
8 mS
When the ATRU PCB recovers from a power failure,
it checks the power failure trunk (trunk 1) for loop
current for the P.F. Recovery Detect interval. If loop
current is detected, it assumes the Power Failure Telephone is still connected and does not tear down the
call. If loop current is not detected, the ATRU PCB
switches the trunk out of the power failure mode.
3008 mS
Rules for Detecting Normal CO (Single) Ring
Incoming Ring Signal
Ring On
Ring Off
Ringing Signal End Detection Timer (6016 mS)
Minimum Single Ring Detection Timer (504 mS)
Minimum Ring Detection Timer (104 mS)
1.
2.
3.
The ring signal must be longer than the Minimum Ring Detection Timer (normally 104 mS).
The ring signal must also be longer than the Minimum Single Ring Detection Timer (normally
504 mS).
The interval between ring bursts must not be longer than the Ringing Signal End Detection
Timer (normally 6016 mS).
Rules for Detecting Special (Double) Ring
(This option is normally not required and is intended for only for certain Centrex/PBX applications
304 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
System Timers, Trunks
with unique incoming ring.)
Minimum Double Ring Detection Off Timer (104 mS)
Maximum Double Ring Detection Off Timer (304 mS)
Incoming Ring Signal
Ring On
Ring Off
Ringing Signal End Detection Timer (6016 mS)
Minimum Single Ring Detection Timer (504 mS)
Minimum Ring Detection Timer (104 mS)
1.
The ring signal must be longer than the Minimum Ring Detection Timer (normally 104 mS).
2.
The ring signal must be shorter than the Minimum Single Ring Detection Timer (normally 504 mS).
3.
The off interval between the two double rings must be greater than the Minimum Double Ring
Detection Off Timer (normally 104 mS) but less than the Maximum Double Ring Detection
Off Timer (normally 304 mS).
The interval between the second burst of a ring cycle and the first burst of the next cycle must
not be longer than the Ringing Signal End Detection Timer (normally 6016 mS).
4.
Rules for Detecting Loop Current
System sets up call
Loop Current Off
Loop Current On
System does not
tear down call
Far End Disconnect
Time (300 mS)
Loop Current Detection Time (800 mS)
Trunk Seize
Line Response Time (10 seconds)
1.
2.
3.
DS2000 Software Manual
When the system seizes a trunk, it will wait the Line Response Time (normally 10 seconds) for
loop current. (If it doesn’t detect loop current, it marks the trunk as defective. If it does detect
loop current, it will proceed to step 2 below.) Note that Line Response Time is a system timer.
(not a trunk timer).
Once loop current is detected, it must be present for the Loop Current Detection Time (normally 800 mS).
If loop current is interrupted for longer than the Far End Disconnect Time (normally 300 mS),
the system disconnects the call.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 305
System Timers, Trunks
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Refer to the chart above.
Programming List
Refer to the chart above.
Other Related Features
Refer to the following for related feature information:
Program 0402 - Trunk Timers (page 378)
Feature Operation
None
306 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Join two callers in Conference, leave the call and let their conversation continue.
Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a trunk-to-trunk conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user that established the Conference is not part of the conversation. The
Conference continues until either outside party hangs up.
Tandem Trunking uses a Conference circuit. The following table shows the system’s Conference
capacities:
Description
Capacity
Conference circuits
32
Maximum simultaneous users in Conference
(total of all Conferences system-wide)
32
Maximum simultaneous conferences
8
Maximum parties in any one Conference
(trunks and/or extensions)
8
The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Tandem Trunking disabled.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 307
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Tandem
Trunking / Unsupervised Conference
Step 1: Should trunk have the ability to be included in an Unsupervised Conference?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 1003 - Tandem Trunk (page 427),
enter Y. Note that only one of the trunks in the
tandem call must have this option enabled.
In Program 0402 - Far End Disconnect
(page 383), set the Far End Disconnect time for
compatiblity with the local telco.
In Program 1003 - Tandem Trunk (page 427),
enter N. Note that only one of the trunks in the
tandem call must have this option enabled.
Programming List
Program 0402 - Far End Disconnect (page 383)
Set the Far End Disconnect time for compatibility with the local telco.
Program 1003 - Tandem Trunk (page 427)
Enabled (Y) or disable (N) the trunk’s ability to be included in an Unsupervised Conference.
Only one of the trunks in the tandem call must have this option enabled.
Other Related Features
The following features also allow different types of multiple party calls:
Barge In (Intrusion) (page 37)
An extension user can Barge In on a tandem call.
Conference (page 79)
Group Listen (page 142)
Meet-Me Conference (page 184)
Privacy Release Groups (page 228)
Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 137)
An extension user can end an Unsupervised Conference by using Forced Trunk Disconnect on
one of the trunks in the tandem call.
Feature Operation
To set up a tandem call (Unsupervised Conference):
1.
Establish trunk call.
Conversation with caller.
Line Key or Loop Key on.
308 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised Conference
2.
3.
Press CONF.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on and Line/Loop Key flashing.
Your caller hears Music On Hold (if installed) while they wait for you to set up the
Conference.
Place or answer trunk call
OR
Retrieve trunk call from Park Orbit.
4.
Press CONF to set up the Conference.
Conversation with your conferenced callers.
Line/Loop Keys on (green).
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s Conference limit.
5.
Hang up.
N/A
Line/Loop Keys on (red)
If the outside parties disconnect, the trunks you selected do not have Tandem Trunking
capability.
To disconnect a tandem call (using Forced Trunk Disconnect):
1.
2.
Press line key for busy trunk.
OR
Press ICM and dial the trunk’s Direct Trunk Access code (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Busy tone.
Line/loop key on (red).
Refer to Direct Trunk Access for the specifics.
Dial # to disconnect the line.
The tandem call disconnects.
To Barge In on a tandem call:
1.
Press line key for busy trunk.
OR
Press ICM and dial the trunk’s Direct Trunk Access code (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Busy tone.
Line/loop key on (red).
Refer to Direct Trunk Access for the specifics.
2.
Dial 4.
You hear two beeps and you join the tandem call.
Line/loop keys on (green).
You can optionally place the Conference on hold. Your callers hear Music on Hold (if
installed) while waiting on Hold. Press CONF to reinstate the Conference.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 309
Tenant Service
Tenant Service
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
310 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Tie Lines
Tie Lines
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 311
Time and Date
Time and Date
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The time and date shows on telephone displays and prints on system reports.
The system Time and Date appears on:
●
Display Telephones
●
Station Message Detail Recording reports
The system administrator can change the time and date from the system programming mode.
Although the data is entered in 24-hour format, it always displays in 12-hour format (e.g., 1300 =
1:00PM).
Conditions
The system retains the time and date after a system reset or short term power failure.
Default Setting
●
01:00:00 (1:00AM)
●
01/01/1998 (Thursday, January 1, 1998)
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Time and
Date
Step 1: Do you want to change the system time?
•
In Program 0302 - Time (page 372), enter the new
system time (HH:MM:SS in 24 hour format).
•
In Program 0302 - Time (page 372), do not
change the system time.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Do you want to change the system date?
•
In Program 0302 - Date (page 373), enter the new
system date (MM:DD:YYYY). For example,
enter 01012000 for January 1, 2000.
•
In Program 0302 - Date (page 373), do not
change the system date.
If yes
If no
312 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Time and Date
Programming List
Program 0302 - Time (page 372)
Enter the system time.
Program 0302 - Date (page 373)
Enter the system date.
Other Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (page 34)
ARS uses the date and time when routing calls.
Battery Backup (page 39)
The battery on the CPU PCB backs up the CPU Real Time Clock for 10-14 days.
Station Message Detail Recording (page 277)
Time and date appear on the SMDR report.
Year 2000 Compliance (page 355)
The system is fully Y2K (year 2000) compliant. The year always displays as four digits and
the system correctly recognizes leap years.
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 313
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Toll Restriction to help you control the costs of outgoing long distance calls.
Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place
only certain types of calls, the system administrator can control long distance costs. The system
applies Toll Restriction according to an extension’s Toll Restriction Level. For each of the 7 Toll
Restriction Levels, the administrator can enable or disable the following options.
●
Active Dial Pad (Continuous Dialing)
Active Dial Pad continuously enables the telephone dial pad. This is important if co-workers
typically use dial-up services (suck as automated banking) or frequently dial into Voice Mail
systems. With Active Dial Pad disabled, the system disables the telephone dial pad 6 seconds
after the user has dialed their last digit. Toll Restriction controls Active Dial Pad for both
incoming and outgoing calls.
●
N11 Dialing
N11 Dialing enables or disables an extension’s ability to use N11 services such as directory
assistance (411) and repair (611). Consider enabling this option if the connected telco charges
by the call (i.e., meters) these services. Note that the system never restricts a user from dialing 911 or 1 + 911. (Toll Restriction uses the NPA Dialing table to control 1 + N11 dialing.)
●
0 + Dialing
0 + Dialing enables or disables an extension’s ability to manually dial 0 + (operator assisted)
calls. These calls typically include collect calls and credit card calls. Be sure to disable this
option if you don’t want co-workers making these types of calls. The setting of 0 + Dialing
does not affect the operation of international dialing (see the option immediately following).
●
International (011) Dialing
Use the International Dialing option to restrict extension access to high-cost international
(011) dialing. You can, for example, enable international dialing for high priority users and
executives while disabling international dialing for all other co-workers.
●
Equal Access (10XXX) Dialing
Equal Access allows users to select long distance carriers other than your primary carrier. Your
primary carrier is the long distance provider you access when you seize a trunk and dial 1. To
reach another provider, dial 10 and that provider’s three-digit code (e.g., 10321). The system
does not restrict the numbers dialed after the Equal Access code, but can prevent users from
dialing specific 10XXX codes. Enter the codes you want to deny or allow in the 10XXX Toll
Restriction Table.
●
NXX Dialing
NXX Dialing provides restriction for calls not exceeding 7 digits that begin with the digits 29. These are typically local exchanges. Enter the codes you want to deny or allow in the NXX
Dialing Toll Restriction Table. You might want to prevent local calling to all exchanges that
are not in the immediate vicinity of your company.
●
NPA Dialing
NPA Dialing performs 3-digit analysis on numbers dialed that exceed 7 digits and are not 0+,
314 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Toll Restriction
011, or 10XXX calls. Enter the codes you want to deny or allow in the NPA Dialing Toll
Restriction Table. To control long distance costs, for example, you might want to limit NPA
calls to in-state or neighboring state area codes. Note that if a number is allowed or denied by
NPA Dialing, it can be further allowed or denied by 6-Digit Analysis below.
●
6-Digit Analysis (NPA + NXX translation)
The 6-Digit Analysis option evaluates both the NPA and NXX component of the number
dialed. Enter the 6-digit codes you want to deny or allow in the 6-Digit Analysis Toll Restriction Table. This option allows for more flexible Toll Restriction assignments. For example,
you can allow calls only to the area code and exchange for your out-of-state branch and
restrict all other exchanges within that area code.
Refer to the Toll Restriction Rules table for additional routing information.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
●
Toll Restriction disabled (Toll Level 0 assigned to all extensions).
For Toll Levels 1-7 (once assigned):
●
Active Dial enabled (Yes).
●
N11 Dialing enabled (Yes).
●
0+ Dialing enabled (Yes).
●
International Dialing enabled (Yes).
●
Equal Access (10+XXX) Dialing disabled (allow table with no entries).
●
NXX Dialing disabled (allow table with no entries).
●
NPA Dialing disabled (allow table with no entries).
●
6-Digit Analysis disabled (allow table with no entries)
Programming List
Program 0601 - Program Toll Restriction (page 406)
Use this option to program Toll Restriction. (You must always use the following option to initialze Toll Restriction before using it for the first time.)
Program 0601 - Initialize Toll Restriction (page 406)
Use this option to initialize Toll Restriction. You must always initialize Toll Restriction before
using if for the first time. If you have already programmed Toll Restriction, initializing will
erase all your entries and reinstate the default Toll Restriction values.
Program 0601 - Toll Restriction Level (page 406)
Use this option to select the Toll Restriction level you want to program. The entries that follow
pertain to the Toll Restriction Level you select in this option.
Toll Level Rules
1. Toll Level follows the day/night mode of the trunk used for the call. If a trunk is terminated to Key Ring in Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day) (page 426), an
extension’s Night key controls the day/night mode of the trunk. (A uniquely programmed Night key controls the day/night mode of trunks terminated to UCD Hunting or Ring Groups.) If a trunk is terminated to an extension in Program 1003 Direct Termination (Day) (page 426), the extension’s DND key controls the day/
night mode of the trunk.
2. If a trunk has 1001: Override Extension Toll Level enabled (Y), the system uses the
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 315
Toll Restriction
Toll Level assigned to the trunk in 1001: Trunk Toll Level. The entries are 1-7, 0 =
no Toll Restriction applied.
3. If a trunk has Program 1001 - Override Extension Toll Restriction (page 421) disabled (N), and the trunk is in the day mode, the system uses the Toll Level assigned
in Program 1801 - Extension Toll Level Day (page 450). The entries are 1-7, 0 = no
Toll Restriction applied.
4. If a trunk has Program 1001 - Override Extension Toll Restriction (page 421) disabled (N), and the trunk is in the night mode, the system uses the Toll Level assigned
in Program 1801 - Extension Toll Level Night (page 450). The entries are 1-7, 0 =
no Toll Restriction applied.
5. When an extension user with Toll Restriction enabled flashes a trunk, the system
enforces toll Restrictin on any digits the user dials from the new dial tone. For example, if an extension user cannot dial 203 926 5400 before they flash, they cannot dial
203 926 5400 after they flash.
Program 0601 - Active Dial Pad (page 406)
Enable (Y) or disable (N) Active Dial Pad (continued dialing). With Active Dial Pad enabled,
the telephone outputs a digit over the trunk each time the user presses a dial pad key. With
Active Dial Pad disabled, the the system turns off the extension’s dial pad six seconds after the
user dials their last digit. Toll Restriction controls Active Dial Pad for both incoming and outgoing calls.
Program 0601 - N11 Dialing (page 406)
Enable (Y) or disable (N) N11 Dialing. If disabled, the system terminates the call on the third
digit of an N11 call. The system never restricts 911 calls. To control 0NN and 1 + 0NN calls,
refer to the 0 + Dialing and International Dialing options below. Toll Restriction controls 1 +
N11 calls through the NPA Dialing table.
Program 0601 - 0 + Dialing (page 407)
Enable (Y) or disable (N) 0 + dialing. If enabled, the telephone can dial operator assisted calls
and credit card calls. If disabled, the system terminates the call as soon as the user dials 0.
Program 0601 - International Dialing (page 407)
Enable (Y) or disable (N) International Dialing. If enabled, the extension can directly dial 011
international calls. If disabled, the system terminates the call as soon as the user dials 01.
Program 0601 - Equal Access Dialing (page 407)
This option allows/prevents an extension user from directly dialing Equal Access (10XXX)
calls. The system compares the 10XXX code the user dials to the 10XXX table that you program. You can set up the table as an allow or deny table. If set up as an allow table, the system
will allow only those codes you enter into the table, and deny all others. If set up as a deny
table, the system will deny only those codes you enter into the table, and allow all others.
Program 0601 - NXX Dialing (page 407)
This option allows/prevents an extension user from directly dialing NXX (local exchange)
calls. The system compares the NXX code the user dials to the NXX table that you program.
You can set up the table as an allow or deny table. If set up as an allow table, the system will
allow only those codes you enter into the table, and deny all others. If set up as a deny table,
the system will deny only those codes you enter into the table, and allow all others.
Program 0601 - NPA Dialing (page 408)
This option allows/prevents an extension user from directly dialing NPA (area code) calls. The
system compares the NPA code the user dials to the NPA table that you program. You can set
up the table as an allow or deny table. If set up as an allow table, the system will allow only
those codes you enter into the table, and deny all others. If set up as a deny table, the system
will deny only those codes you enter into the table, and allow all others. (Note that if you want
to do 6-Digit Analysis on an NPA, be sure the NPA Dialing Table doesn’t restrict the code.)
316 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Toll Restriction
Program 0601 - 6-Digit Analysis (page 408)
This option enables/disables 6-Digit Analysis. With 6-Digit Analysis, the system restricts a call
according to the NPA and NXX the user dials. If 6-Digit Analysis is allowed, the system compares the NPA and NXX code the user dials to the 6-Digit Table that you program. You can set
up the table as an allow or deny table. If set up as an allow table, the system will allow only
those codes you enter into the table, and deny all others. If set up as a deny table, the system will
deny only those codes you enter into the table, and allow all others. (Note that if you want to do
6-Digit Analysis on an NPA, be sure the NPA Dialing Table doesn’t restrict the code.)
Additional Toll Restriction Programming Notes
●
Valid Toll Restriction table entries are the digits 0-9. Use * as a wild card to represent any
digit 0-9. For example 20* = 200 through 209.
●
The system provides a total of 600 Toll Restriction Elements. Each element corresponds to a
3-digit Toll Restriction Table entry. For example, the 10XXX Table, NXX Dialing Table, and
the NPA Dialing Table use one element for each entry. The 6-Digit Analysis Table uses two
elements for each entry.
●
To set up a global deny table (i.e., denies all entries), you have two choices:
- Set up an allow table and leave it empty.
- Set up a deny table and enter *** (3-digit entry) or ****** (6-Digit Analysis entry).
●
To set up a global allow table (i.e., allows all entries), you have two choices:
- Set up a deny table and leave it empty.
- Set up an allow table and enter *** (3-digit entry) or ****** (6-Digit Analysis entry).
Toll Restriction Rules
Toll Restriction Rules (Page 1 of 4)
Step 1: Has caller dialed 911 or 1911?
•
The system allows the call.
•
Wait for caller to dial 3 or more digits, then go to
next step.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 317
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Rules (Page 2 of 4)
Step 2: Has the caller dialed 0 as the first digit?
•
If yes
•
•
•
•
•
If the 0 + Dialing option is Y, and the International Dialing option is also Y, the system allows
the call.
If the 0 + Dialing option is Y, the International
Dialing option is N, and the first 2 digits are 01,
the system restricts the call.
If the 0 + Dialing option is N, the International
Dialing option is Y, and the first 2 digits are 01,
the system allows the call.
If the 0 + Dialing option is N, the International
Dialing option is Y, and the first 2 digits are not
01, the system restricts the call.
If the 0 + Dialing option is N, and the caller just
dials 0, the system restricts the call.
Go to the next step.
If no
Step 3: Has the caller dialed an N11 number (e.g., 311, 411, 611, 811)?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
If the N11 Dialing option is Y, the system allows
the call.
If the N11 Dialing option is N, the system checks
to see if the digits dialed are 911 or 1911. If they
are, the system allows the call. If they are not, the
system denies the call.
Go to the next step. (Toll Restriction uses the
NPA Dialing Table to restrict 1 + N11 numbers.)
Step 4: Does the number dialed begin with 1 or 2-9?
•
Go to step 5 below.
•
Go to step 8 below.
If 1
If 2-9
318 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Rules (Page 3 of 4)
Step 5: Has caller dialed a 10XXX Equal Access number (e.g., 10320)
If yes
The system currently supports 5-digit (10XXX)
Equal Access. It does not support 7-digit
(10XXXXX) Equal Access.
If the Equal Access Table is an allow table:
• The system denies the call if the number dialed is
not in the table.
• The system allows the call if the number dialed is
in the table.
If the Equal Access Table is a deny table:
• The system denies the call if the number dialed is
in the table.
• The system allows the call if the number dialed is
not in the table.
•
Go to the next step.
If no
Step 6: If the number dialed is not an Equal Access Code, the system looks at the NPA
Dialing Table.
The system currently looks at the first four digits
dialed and compares them to the NPA Dialing table.
If the NPA Dialing Table is an allow table:
• If the number dialed is not in the table, the system
checks the 6-Digit Analysis Table in step 7 below.
If the number is not allowed in the 6-digit table,
the system denies the call.
• If the number dialed is in the table, the system
goes to the step 7 below to further analyze the
dialed number. If the number is not denied by the
6-digit table, the system allows the call.
If the NPA Dialing Table is a deny table:
• If the number dialed is in the table, the system
checks the 6-Digit Analysis Table in step 7 below.
If the number is not allowed in the 6-digit table,
the system denies the call.
• If the dialed number is not in the table, the system
goes to the step 7 below to further analyze the
dialed number. If the number is not denied by the
6-digit table, the system allows the call.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 319
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Rules (Page 4 of 4)
Step 7: Before denying or allowing the call based on the NPA Dialing Table, the system looks
at the 6-Digit Analysis Table (i.e., uses NPA + NNX analysis).
If the number dialed is accepted by the NPA Dialing
Table above, the system waits for 7 digits and then
compares them to the 6-Digit Analysis Table entries.
If the 6-Digit Analysis Table is an allow table:
• The system denies the call if the number dialed is
not in the table.
• The system allows the call if the number dialed is
in the table.
If the 6-Digit Analysis Table is a deny table:
• The system denies the call if the number dialed is
in the table.
• The system allows the call if the number dialed is
not in the table.
Step 8: If the first digit dialed is 2-9, the system waits for timeout or for more than 7 digits.
If the dialing times out before more than 7 digits are
dialed, the system looks at the NXX Dialing Table.
If the NXX Dialing Table is an allow table:
• The system denies the call if the NXX portion of
the number dialed is not in the table.
• The system allows the call if the NXX portion of
the number dialed is in the table.
If the NXX Dialing Table is a deny table:
• The system denies the call if the NXX portion of
the number dialed is in the table.
The system allows the call if the NNX portion of the
number dialed is not in the table.
If more than 7 digits are dialed, the system goes back
to step 6 and reanalyzes the NPA Dialing Table and
the 6-Digit Analysis Table.
Other Related Features
Direct Trunk Access (page 106)
Direct Trunk Access does not bypass Toll Restriction.
Flash (page 132)
When an extension user with Toll Restriction enabled flashes a trunk, the system enforces toll
Restrictin on any digits the user dials from the new dial tone. For example, if an extension user
cannot dial 203 926 5400 before they flash, they cannot dial 203 926 5400 after they flash.
320 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Toll Restriction
Forced Trunk Disconnect (page 137)
Forced Trunk Disconnect does not bypass Toll Restriction.
Last Number Redial (page 174)
Last Number Redial will not store a number denied by Toll Restriction.
Private Line (page 231)
Toll Restriction restricts Private Lines just like any other trunk.
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
Save Number Dialed will not store a number denied by Toll Restriction.
Speed Dial (page 263)
The system enforces Toll Restriction on Speed Dial numbers as they are dialed, not as they are
stored.
Feature Operation
Toll Restriction operation is automatic.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 321
Toll Restriction Override
Toll Restriction Override
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
322 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 323
Transfer
Transfer
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Send the trunk call you are on to a co-worker.
Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active trunk call to any other extension
in the system, an Ring Group, UCD Hunting Group or Voice Mail. With Transfer, any extension
user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if
not picked up at the destination extension. If still unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring. This
assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers.
The system allows the following types of transfers:
●
Screened Transfer
The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up.
●
Unscreened Transfer
The transferring party extends the call without an announcement.
The system cannot Transfer Intercom calls.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
324 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Transfer
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Transfer
(Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Does an unanswered Transfer ring the destination extension long enough before
recalling the extension that initially transferred it?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
For non-operator extensions:
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
leave the Transfer Recall interval at it’s currently
assigned value.
For operators:
In Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer
(page 386), leave the Call Forward Ring No
Answer interval at it’s currently assigned value.
For non-operator extensions:
In Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375),
change the Transfer Recall interval to meet the
site requirements.
For operators:
In Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer
(page 386), change the Call Forward Ring No
Answer interval to meet the site requirements.
Step 2: If a transferred call is not picked up, recalls the transferring extension, and is still
not picked up, does it divert to Key Ring after the proper interval?
•
In Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376), leave
the Trunk Revert interval at it’s currently assigned
value.
•
In Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376),
change the Trunk Recall interval to meet the site
requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 3: If a user transfers a call into a busy UCD Hunting group, does it divert to the overflow destination (if programmed) after the proper interval?
•
In Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow
(page 377), leave the ACD/UCD Overflow interval at it’s currently assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow
(page 377), change the ACD/UCD Overflow
interval to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 325
Transfer
Step-by-step guide for setting up Transfer
(Page 2 of 2)
Step 4: While a transferred caller is waiting to be picked up, should they hear Music on
Hold instead of ringback?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
In Program 0201 - Music on Hold (page 367),
enter Y for this option to enable Music on Hold
system-wide.
Program 0201 - MOH on Transfer (page 367),
enter Y for this option to enable Music on Hold
for transferred callers.
In Program 0201 - MOH on Transfer (page 367),
enter N for this option to disable Music on Hold
for transferred callers.
Programming List
Program 0201 - Music on Hold (page 367)
Enter Y for this option to enable Music on Hold system-wide (if you also enabled MOH on
Transfer below).
Program 0201 - MOH on Transfer (page 367)
Enter Y for this option to enable Music on Hold for transferred callers.
Program 0401 - Transfer Recall (page 375)
Set how long a transferred call rings the destination extension before recalling the extension
from which it was initially transferred. This option pertains to all idle extensions, as well as
busy multibutton extensions. Note that this timer does not control how long a transferred call
rings a busy operator.
Program 0401 - Trunk Revert (page 376)
Sets how long a Transfer Recall rings the extension that initially transferred the call before
Key Ring occurs. Key Ring rings all extensions programmed to ring for that line.
Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow (page 377)
Set how long a transferred call (or DIL) camps on to a busy UCD Hunt Group before ringing
the overflow destination.
Program 0403 - Call Forward Ring No Answer (page 386)
Set how long a transferred call rings a busy operator extension before recalling the extension
from which it was initially transferred. Note that this timer does not control how long a transferred call rings any busy non-operator extension.
Other Related Features
Call Forwarding (page 43)
Call Forwarding will reroute transferred calls.
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
An extension user can Transfer a call to the covered extension by pressing the Call Co verage key.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
Transfer can automatically Camp-On to a busy extension.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) (page 95)
You can press your DSS k ey to Transfer a call instead of dialing a co-worker’s extension number.
326 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Transfer
Extended Ringing (page 119)
With Extended Ringing enabled, transferred trunks ring the destination extension for the
Number of Extended Rings before recalling the transferring extension.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
Trunk calls transferred to a Terminal or Circular Hunting group member activate hunting. In
addition, trunk calls transferred to a UCD group master number activate hunting.
Group Call Pickup (page 139)
A trunk call transferred to an extension in a Pickup Group activates Group Call Pickup.
Group Ring (page 144)
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Ring Group master number. If unanswered, the call
will continue to ring the group until a member picks it up.
Hold (page 156)
If an extension receiving a screened Transfer answers the screen and immediately hangs up
(before the transferring extension), the call goes on Exclusi ve Hold at the transferring extension.
Hotline (page 160)
An extension user can Transfer a call to their Hotline partner by pressing their Hotline key.
Intercom (page 165)
The system cannot Transfer Intercom calls.
Key Ring (page 170)
An unanswered call transferred to an extension diverts to Key Ring if unanswered at the
transferring extension.
Music On Hold (page 195)
With Music on Hold enabled, transferred callers can optionally listen to ringback or MOH
while their call waits at the transfer destination.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
An extension user can Transfer their current call to a co-worker or Voice Mail and then answer
the waiting call. In addition, transferred calls can initiate Off-Hook Signaling.
Reverse Voice Over (page 245)
While idle, an extension user cannot use their Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls.
Station Message Detail Recording (page 277)
The system assigns the SMDR record to the last extension on the call. For example, if extension 306 answers the call, talks for 20 minutes, and then Transfers the call to extension 302,
extension 302 “owns” the entire call record as soon as they hang up.
Voice Over (page 350)
An extension user can Voice Over after making a ScreenedTransfer and hearing busy/ring tone.
Feature Operation
To Transfer your call:
1.
You cannot Transfer Intercom calls.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press ICM.
3.
4.
DS2000 Software Manual
Intercom dial tone.
ICM anbd SPK on
You can press your Call Coverage or Hotline key instead of ICM.
Dial your co-worker’s extension.
OR
Press a DSS key.
OR
Dial a Ring Group or UCD Hunting group master number.
Announce call to make a Screened Transfer.
OR
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 327
Transfer
Press the flashing line key to return to the call if your co-worker doesn’t want it (i.e., rejects
your screen).
OR
Hang up to send the call through Unscreened.
The call will recall to you if unanswered at the destination extension. If you don’t
answer the recall, it diverts to Key Ring.
To Transfer your call to a co-worker’s mailbox:
1.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press ICM.
3.
4.
5.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM anbd SPK on
You can press your Call Coverage or Hotline key instead of ICM.
Press MW.
Dial your co-worker’s extension.
Hang up.
328 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Dial a single code to place a call over the first available trunk in a trunk group.
With Trunk Group Routing enabled, an extension user can just press ICM and dial 9 to place a trunk
call. Trunk Group Routing automatically selects the first available trunk in the extension’s programmed “dial 9” trunk group. This simplifies placing calls in systems that have a lot of trunks for
outgoing calls. Rather than press one of many line keys, the user just dials 9 instead.
Conditions
Systems using Trunk Groups or Trunk Group Access should use the hybrid FCC registration number (i.e., the number that ends in MF-E). Look at the label on the bottom of your equipment cabinet
for more information.
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Trunk
Group Routing (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should dial 9 capability be available system-wide?
•
In Program 0501 - Single Digit Access
(page 395), enter Y.
•
In Program 0501 - Single Digit Access
(page 395), enter N.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension have dial 9 capability?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 1802 - Station’s Dial 9 Group
(page 456), assign a trunk group that has valid,
installed trunks to which the extension has access.
Also review the steps below.
In Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424),
assign installed trunks to the extension’s dial 9
trunk group assigned above.
In Program 1802 - Station’s Dial 9 Group
(page 456), assign a trunk group that does not
have valid, installed trunks to which the extension
has access.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 329
Trunk Group Routing
Step-by-step guide for setting up Trunk
Group Routing (Page 2 of 2)
Step 3: Check the trunk and trunk group access options for the extension.
•
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), be sure the extension has either
outgoing access (2) or full access (3) for some of
the trunks in their dial 9 group.
In Program 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
(page 464), be sure to enable (Y) access to the
extension’s dial 9 group.
Programming List
Program 0501 - Single Digit Access (page 395)
Enter Y to enable user’s to dial 9 for their specified trunk group. Enter N to require users to
dial 9 followed by the Trunk Group number (0-8).
Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424)
Program installed trunks into the trunk group you want to designate as an extension’s dial 9
group in Program 1802 - Station’s Dial 9 Group on page 456 below.
Program 1802 - Station’s Dial 9 Group (page 456)
Assign the extension’s dial 9 trunk group.
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
To make outgoing call, make sure the extension has either outgoing access (2) or full access
(3) for the trunk.
Program 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access (page 464)
Make sure the extension has access to the trunk group specified in Program 1802 - Station’s
Dial 9 Group on page 456.
Other Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
Review this feature for other ways to place trunk calls.
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332)
An extension user camp-on or leave a Callback if all trunks in the dial 9 group are busy.
Trunk Groups (page 335)
With Trunk Group Routing disabled, extension users can optionally dial 90-98 to place calls
on trunk groups 0-8.
Feature Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
330 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Trunk Group Routing
3.
Dial 9.
4.
Trunk dial tone.
Line key on.
If you don’t hear dial tone as soon as you dial 9, your system does not have Trunk
Group Routing enabled. SeeCentral Office Calls, Placing on page 63 for more.
If you hear busy tone after dialing 9, all the trunks in your dial 9 group are busy. You
can dial 2 to wait in line for a trunk to become free, or dial 2 to have an available trunk
call you back. See Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback on page 332 for more.
Dial outside number.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 331
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
When all trunks are busy, Trunk Queuing lets a user wait in line for a trunk to become free.
Trunk Callback will automatically call the user back when a trunk is available.
Trunk Queuing
Trunk Queueing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy trunk or trunk
group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available.
The user does not have to manually retry the trunk later.
Trunk Callback
After queuing for a trunk, the extension user just hangs up to convert the Trunk Queue into a Trunk
Callback. When the trunk becomes free, the system automatically recalls the extension. As soon as
the extension user answers the callback ring, the system connects the extension to the trunk.
An extension user can leave a Trunk Callbackfor many trunks. The system processes the callbacks
as the trunks become free. In addition, many extensions can leave a Trunk Callback for the same
trunk. The system processes the Trunk Callbacks on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis.
If an extension user leaves a Trunk Callback request and then fails to answer the calback ring within
four rings, the system cancels the Callback.
Trunk Queuing Priority
Selected extensions can have Trunk Queuing Priority enabled in their Class of Service. If more than
one extension queues for a busy trunk, the system services the extension with Trunk Queuing Priority first. If more than one extension with priority is queued for the same busy trunk, the system services the priority extensions on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis.
Conditions
A system reset or power failure cancels all Trunk Callbacks system-wide.
Default Setting
●
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback enabled for attendants (COS 1), but disabled for all
other extensions (COS 2-15).
●
Trunk Queuing Priority disabled for all extensions (COS 1-15).
332 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Trunk
(Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback
Step 1: Should extension be able to queue for a busy trunk?
•
In Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Line
(page 363), enter Y to enable Trunk (Line)
Queueing.
•
In Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Line
(page 363), enter N to disable Trunk (Line)
Queueing.
If yes
If no
Step 2: Should extension have Trunk Queuing Priority?
•
In Program 0101 - Trunk (Line) Queuing Priority
(page 363), enter Y to enable Trunk Queuing Priority.
•
In Program 0101 - Trunk (Line) Queuing Priority
(page 363), enter N to disable Trunk Queuing Priority.
If yes
If no
Step 3: Assign Class of Service to extensions.
•
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
Programming List
Program 0101 - Trunk (Line) Queuing Priority (page 363)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to enable Trunk (Line) Queuing Priority.
Program 0101 - Camp-On to Busy Line (page 363)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter Y to allow camping on to a busy trunk.Program 1801 Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Other Related Features
Callback (page 54)
An extension user can Camp-On to a busy co-worker then hang up to turn the Camp-On into a
Callback.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
Camp-On lets an extension user Camp-On to a busy extension.
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 63)
An extension user can queue for a busy trunk, or queue and hang up to leave a callback for a
busy trunk.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 333
Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback
Last Number Redial (page 174)
If all trunks are busy and Last Number Redial cannot go through, the user can dial 2 a queue
for a trunk to become free. If the user hangs up, the system converts the queue to a Trunk Callback.
Save Number Dialed (page 254)
If an extension user presses their Save key and hears busy, they can dial 2 to wait in line for
the trunk to become available. The system will automatically redial the call. However, if the
user hangs up to convert the queue to a Trunk Callback, the system will not redial the saved
call once the trunk connects.
Feature Operation
To queue for a busy trunk:
1.
Press line key for busy trunk.
OR
Press ICM and dial the trunk’s Direct Trunk Access code (e.g., 401 for trunk 1).
Busy tone.
Line/loop key on (red).
2.
Dial 2; do not hang up.
Busy tone stops.
ICM and SPK on.
If you hang up, the system converts your queue to a Trunk Callback.
When the trunk becomes free, you are automatically connected.
• If you initially queued for the trunk, you hear trunk dial tone so you can
place your call again.
• If you left a Trunk Callback, your hear Trunk Callback ring. If you answer
within four rings, you will hear dial tone from the trunk. You can then place
your call again.
ICM and SPK on.
3.
4.
Place your outside call.
334 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Information to be provided.
Dial codes to access trunk groups for outgoing calls.
Extension users can optionally dial trunk group access codes 90-98 to select trunk groups 0-8 for
outgoing calls. This is helpful in applications that have different services arranged into trunk
groups. For example, dialing 90 could access a group of DDD trunks for local calls, and dialing 91
could access a group of WATS trunks for long distance calls. (Note that systems with Trunk Group
Routing (page 329) enabled cannot also dial trunk group access codes 90-98.)
When a user dials a trunk group access code (90-98), the system selects the lowest number in the
group that is available. If that trunk is busy, it automatically selects the next highest trunk. If all
trunks in the group are busy, the user can optionally queue for a trunk to become free. See Trunk
(Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback (page 332) for more.
Systems using Trunk Groups or Trunk Group Access should use the hybrid FCC registration number (i.e., the number that ends in MF-E). Look at the label on the bottom of your equipment cabinet
for more information.
Conditions
Systems using Trunk Groups or Trunk Group Access should use the hybrid FCC registration number (i.e., the number that ends in MF-E). Look at the label on the bottom of your equipment cabinet
for more information.
Default Setting
Dialing 90-98 for trunk groups 0-8 is disabled because single digit access (dial 9) is enabled.
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Trunk
Groups (Page 1 of 2)
Step 1: Should extension be able to dial codes 90-98 to place calls on trunk group.
•
If yes
•
•
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
In Program 0501 - Single Digit Access
(page 395), enter N to disable single digit access
(dial 9).
In Program 1002 - 1002 - Trunk Groups
(page 424), assign trunks to trunk groups.
In Program 0501 - Single Digit Access
(page 395), enter Y to enable single digit access
(dial 9).
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 335
Trunk Groups
Step-by-step guide for setting up Trunk
Groups (Page 2 of 2)
Step 2: Should extension be able to access all installed trunks in all trunk groups for placing calls (via codes 90-98)?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign either outgoing (2) or
full (3) access to each trunk the extension should
be able to use for outgoing calls.
In Program 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
(page 464), be sure the extension has access (Y)
to each trunk group it should be able to use for
outging calls.
In Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461), assign either no (0) or incoming (1) access to each trunks the extension should
not be able to use for outgoing calls.
In Program 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
(page 464), be sure the extension has no access
(N) to each trunk group it should not be able to
use for outging calls.
Programming List
Program 0501 - Single Digit Access (page 395)
Enter N to disable single digit access. With single digit access disabled, an extension user can
dial 90-98 to access trunk groups 0-8.
Program 1002 - Trunk Groups (page 424)
Assign trunks to Trunk Groups (0-8).
Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments (page 461)
For each extension, assign the access options for each trunk (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming
only. 2 = Outgoing only, 3 = Full access). This feature may not require access - check into this
when the feature is working.
Program 1804 - Trunk Group Access (page 464)
For each extension, enter Y to allow or N to prevent outgoing trunk group access. The system
always allows incoming trunk group access.
Other Related Features
Loop Keys (page 179)
Switched and Fixed Loop Keys use the system’s Trunk Groups.
Trunk Group Routing (page 329)
With Trunk Group Routing enabled, extension users can press ICM and dial 9 to place outgoing calls.
336 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Trunk Groups
Feature Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press ICM.
Intercom dial tone.
ICM on.
3.
4.
DS2000 Software Manual
Dial trunk group code (90-98).
Trunk dial tone.
Line key on.
If you hear dial tone as soon as you dial 9, your system has Trunk Group Routing
enabled. SeeTrunk Group Routing on page 329 for more.
Dial outside number.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 337
Trunk Timers
Trunk Timers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available. See System Timers, Trunks on page 300 for more.
338 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Announce Unit (VAU)
Voice Announce Unit (VAU)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 339
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00
Available. Check with your Sales Representative for the availability of Park
and Page.
Voice Mail ends the frustration of and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag, freeing up the company’s receptionists and secretaries for more production work.
The system is fully compatible with Nitsuko’s NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated Attendant
Systems. These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive Voice Mail and Automated
Attendant features. Automated Attendant automatically answers the system’s incoming calls. After
listening to a customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice Mail.
Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the extension connect to that extension’s mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling
back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered calls or when the extension is busy, or just for unanswered calls.
Leaving a Message
Voice Mail lets a keyset extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is unanswered,
busy in Do Not Disturb. The caller just presses their Voice Mail key to leave a message in the called
extension’s mailbox. There is no need to call back later.
Transferring to Voice Mail
By using Transfer to Voice Mail, an extension user can Transfer a call to the user’s own or a
coworker’s mailbox. After the Transfer goes through, the caller can leave a message in the mailbox.
Conversation Record
While on a call, an extension user can have Voice Mail record the conversation. The keyset user just
presses their Voice Mail Record Key. Once recorded, the Voice Mail stores the conversatoin as a
new message in the user’s mailbox. After calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the
recorded conversation.
Personal Answering Machine Emulation
A keyset user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This lets Voice
Mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s
incoming calls route to the user’s subscriber mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears two
alert tones followed by the caller’s incoming message. The keyset user can then:
●
Let the call go through to their mailbox.
●
Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox.
Voice Mail Overflow
If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to an
extension, Ring Group or UCD Hunting group when all Voice Mail ports are busy. During periods
of high traffic, this prevents the outside calls from ringing Voice Mail for an inordinate amount of
time. Without overflow, the outside calls ring Voice Mail until a port becomes available or the outside caller hangs up.
340 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Mail
In addition, Voice Mail can be the overflow destination for the following types of calls (refer to the
individual features for the specifics):
●
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
A trunk that directly rings an extension can overflow to Voice Mail.
●
Extension Hunting (page 121)
A trunk that rings an Extension Hunting group can overflow to Voice Mail.
●
Group Ring (page 144)
A trunk that rings a group of extensions can overflow to Voice Mail.
●
Key Ring (page 170)
A trunk ringing extension’s line keys can overflow to Voice Mail.
Message Center Mailbox
A Message Center Mailbox is a mailbox shared by more than one extension. Any keyset that has a
Message Center Key for the shared mailbox can:
●
Listen to the messages stored in the mailbox.
●
Transfer calls to the shared mailbox.
●
Use many other Voice Mail features previously available only at an extension’s individual
mailbox.
A Message Center Mailbox helps co-workers that work together closely - such as members of the
same Pickup Group. For example, the group supervisor can send important messages to the shared
Message Center Mailbox, to which any group member can respond when time allows. Each group
member’s Message Center Key flashes when messages are waiting.
Note on Current NVM-Series Voice Mail Configuration
Set up the NVM-Series Voice Mail as follows:
1. Select IN - Install System
2. Reinstall the Voice Mail for DS01/VS (24 x 72) and customize the trunk numbers to begin
with 401.
If setting up Voice Mail Park and Page, in Voice Mail programming make the following change:
1. Select CU - Customize Database.
2. Select MO - Mailbox Options
3. Enter the the extension’s mailbox number (e.g., 300 for extension 300).
4. For the mailbox selected (e.g., 300), change the Park/Pageing string to: FW**nnn/*10M
(where nnn is the extension’s number).
For extension 300, for example, the string would be FW**300/*10M.
Refer to your NVM-Series Documentation for additional details.
Conditions
If an extension has a flashing MW lamp and the system resets or power fails, the MW key continues
to flash after the system restarts.
Default Setting
Voice Mail not installed.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 341
Voice Mail
Programming Guide
Step-by-step guide for setting up Voice Mail
(Page 1 of 4)
Step 1: Make sure you have analog ports reserved for Voice Mail.
•
•
•
If you are using a 2-OPX Module, be sure to enter
type 21 in Program 1801 - Extension Circuit
Type (page 449). The 2-OPX Module must be P/
N 92177A.
If you are using ports on an ASTU PCB, be sure
to enter type 15 in Program 1801 - Extension
Circuit Type (page 449).
Following the instructions in your Voice Mail
documentation, connect the analog ports to Voice
Mail system.
Step 2: Assign a UCD Hunt Group for Voice Mail.
•
•
Program 0510 - Group Number (page 402), select
an available UCD Hunt Group for Voice Mail.
In Program 0510 - Hunt Group Master Number
(page 402), assign a master number to the hunt
group you designate for Voice Mail.
Step 3: Enable Voice Mail programming.
•
In Program 0201 - Voice Mail Installed
(page 368), enter Y. (Entering N enables Message
Waiting.)
•
In Program 0201 - Voice Mail Master Extension
Number (page 368), enter the Voice Mail master
extension number (e.g., 700).
•
In Program 1802 - Voice Mail Port (page 457),
enter Y for each analog extension connected to
Voice Mail.
•
In Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469), enter
hunt type 05 (for UCD hunting) for each analog
extension connected to Voice Mail.
In Program 1807 - Hunt Master Number
(page 470), enter the Voice Mail UCD Group
master number (assigned in step 2 above) for each
analog extension connected to Voice Mail.
Step 4: Set up the Voice Mail ports.
•
342 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Mail
Step-by-step guide for setting up Voice Mail
(Page 2 of 4)
Step 5: Do you want the Voice Mail Automated Attendant to answer trunk calls?
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), enter the Voice Mail master extension
number (e.g., 700). The Automated Attendant will
now also answer calls at night.
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), make sure the trunk is not terminated
to the Voice Mail master extension number.
If yes
If no
Step 6: Do you want the Voice Mail Automated Attendant to answer trunk calls only at
night?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), make sure the trunk is not terminated
to the Voice Mail master extension.
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night)
(page 426), enter the Voice Mail master extension
number (e.g., 700). The Automated Attendant will
now also answer calls when the system is in the
night mode.
In Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day)
(page 426), make sure the trunk is not terminated
to the Voice Mail master extension number.
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night)
(page 426), make sure the trunk is not terminated
to the Voice Mail master extension.
Step 7: When all Voice Mail ports are busy, do you want Automated Attendant calls to ring a
designated overflow destination?
•
In Program 0510 - Overflow Destination
(page 402), enter the Voice Mail overflow destination. The destination can be an extension, Ring
Group master number of a UCD Group master
number.
•
In Program 0510 - Overflow Destination
(page 402), press CLEAR to remove the overflow
destination.
If yes
If no
Step 8: When all Voice Mail ports are busy, do calls wait for the proper interval before ringing the overflow destination?
•
In Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow
(page 377), leave the ACD/UCD Overflow interval at its currently assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow
(page 377), change the ACD/UCD Overflow
interval to meet the site requirements.
If yes
If no
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 343
Voice Mail
Step-by-step guide for setting up Voice Mail
(Page 3 of 4)
Step 9: Do calls ring the Voice Mail overflow destination for the proper interval before
diverting to Key RIng?
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
leave the DIL No Answer interval at its currently
assigned value.
•
In Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376),
change the DIL No Answer interval to meet the
site requirements.
If yes
If no
Step 10: Should extension have Conversation Record capability?
•
If yes
•
•
•
•
If no
•
•
•
344 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
If you want the Conversation Record key on the
keyset:
In Program 1701 - Voice Mail Record Key
(page 438), assign a keyset programmable key as
a Voice Mail Record key (code 17).
If you want the Conversation Record key on the
DSS Console:
In Program 1704 - Voice Mail Record Key
(page 446), assign a DSS Console key as a Voice
Mail Record key (code 17).
In Program 0101 - Conversation Record
(page 365), enter Y to enable Conversation
Record in an extension’s Class of Service.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
In Program 1701 - Voice Mail Record Key
(page 438), make sure a keyset key is not
assigned as a Voice Mail Record key (code 17).
In Program 1704 - Voice Mail Record Key
(page 446), make sure a DSS Console key is not
assigned as a Voice Mail Record key (code 17).
In Program 0101 - Conversation Record
(page 365), enter Y to enable Conversation
Record in an extension’s Class of Service.
In Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service
Assignment (page 450), assign Class of Service to
extensions.
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Mail
Step-by-step guide for setting up Voice Mail
(Page 4 of 4)
Step 11: Should extension have access to a Message Center?
•
If yes
•
•
If no
•
If you want the Message Center key on the keyset:
In Program 1701 - Message Center Key
(page 439), assign a keyset programmable key as
a Message Center key (code 24). You must also
enter the Message Center mailbox number (300331).
If you want the Message Center key on the DSS
Console:
In Program 1704 - Message Center Key
(page 447), assign a DSS Console key as a Message Center key (code 24). You must also enter
the Mesage Center mailbox number (300-331).
In Program 1701 - Message Center Key
(page 439), make sure a keyset key is not
assigned as a Message Center key (code 24).
In Program 1704 - Message Center Key
(page 447), make sure a DSS Console key is not
assigned as a Message Center key (code 22).
Programming List
Program 0101 - Conversation Record (page 365)
Enter Y to enable Conversation Record in an extension’s Class of Service. If enabled, the user
can press either their Conversation Record key or the RECORD soft key to initiate recording.
If disabled (N), the user cannot record conversations into their mailbox.
Program 0201 - Voice Mail Installed (page 368)
Enter Y to enable Voice Mail.
Program 0201 - Voice Mail Master Extension Number (page 368)
Enter the number of the Voice Mail master extension (e.g., 700).
Program 0401 - DIL No Answer (page 376)
A call rings the Voice Mail overflow destination for this interval before diverting to Key Ring.
Program 0401 - ACD/UCD Overflow (page 377)
When all Voice Mail ports are busy, a call rings the overflow destination after this interval.
Program 0510 - Group Number (page 402)
Program 0510 - Hunt Group Master Number (page 402)
Select an available UCD Hunt Group and assign the master number (100-899, excluding trunk
extension numbers 401-416).
Program 0510 - Overflow Destination (page 402)
Assign the Voice Mail overflow destination. The destination can be an extension, Ring Group
Master Number, or UCD Group Master Number
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Day) (page 426)
To have the Voice Mail Automated Attendant answer the trunk in the day or at night, assign
the Voice Mail master number (e.g., 700) as the day termination.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 345
Voice Mail
Program 1003 - Direct Termination (Night) (page 426)
To have the Voice Mail Automated Attendant answer the trunk at night (if it has a different termination in the day), assign the Voice Mail Master number (e.g., 700) as the night termination.
If the day termination above is the Voice Mail master, the system ignores the assignment in
this program.
Program 1701 - Voice Mail Record Key (page 438)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Voice Mail Record key (code 17).
Program 1701 - Message Center Key (page 439)
Assign a programmable key as a Voice Mail Message Center key (code 24). The option is the
extension number assigned as the Message Center (300-331).
Program 1704 - Voice Mail Record Key (page 446)
Assign a programmable key on an extension as a Voice Mail Record key (code 17).
Program 1704 - Message Center Key (page 447)
Assign a programmable key as a Voice Mail Message Center key (code 24). The option is the
extension number assigned as the Message Center (300-331).
Program 1801 - Extension Circuit Type (page 449)
Enter 15 for each Voice Mail analog port connected to an ASTU PCB.
Enter 21 for each Voice Mail analog port connected to a 2-OPX Module.
Program 1801 - Extension Class of Service Assignment (page 450)
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
Program 1802 - Voice Mail Port (page 457)
Enter Y for each analog extension connected to Voice Mail.
Program 1807 - Hunt Type (page 469)
For each extension designated as a Voice Mail port in Program 1802 - Voice Mail Port
(page 457), enter hunt type 05 (for UCD hunting).
Program 1807 - Hunt Master Number (page 470)
Enter the extension hunting group master number created for Voice Mail in Program 0510 Hunt Group Master Number (page 402).
Other Related Features
Attendant Position (page 24)
● TRF transfers to the attendant from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant flash the Operator Call key and the Ring Indicator lamp. The call does not flash a line/loop key. (Note that
Ringing Line Preference will not pick up a call ringing the attendant’s Call Queue key.)
● UTRF transfers to the attendant from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant flash the
trunk’s line/loop key and the Ring Indicator lamp.
Call Forwarding (page 43)
You can forward calls Voice Mail.
Direct Inward Line (page 88)
● The Voice Mail Automated Attendant will answer a DIL terminated to the Voice Mail Master Number.
●
If a DIL is terminated to the Voice Mail master number, a System Mode key (code 18 +
the Voice Mail number) controls the night mode status of the DIL.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 98)
A DSS Console can have Voice Mail Record and Message Center keys.
Extension Hunting (page 121)
For Terminal and Circular Hunting, unsupervised transfers (UTRF) from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant route like trunk calls. Supervised transfers (TRF) from the Voice Mail Automated Attendant route like Intercom calls. In either case, unanswered calls eventually route
the initially called extension’s mailbox.
Message Waiting (page 187)
A system can have either Voice Mail or Message Waiting activated — not both.
346 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Mail
Ringdown Extension (page 249)
If the Ringdown destination is the Voice Mail master number, the Ringdown Extension user
hears the Voice Mail main greeting (“Please enter your mailbox number”) after the call connects.
Feature Operation
Calling Your Mailbox
To call your mailbox:
Your Voice Mail key flashes fast when you have new messages in your mailbox..
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
3.
Press MW.
OR
Dial Voice Mail master number (e.g., 700) followed by your mailbox number.
Your mailbox number is normally the same as your extension number. You may optionally dial a co-worker’s mailbox – or use this procedure to call your mailbox from a coworker’s phone.
If requested by Voice Mail, enter your security code.
Your MW LED goes out.
Leaving a Message
To leave a message in a mailbox of an unanswered extension:
1.
The extension you call can be busy, in DND or unanswered.
Press MW.
The Voice Mail system will prompt you to leave a message.
Forwarding Calls to your Mailbox
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
Dial *3.
Dial tone stops.
ICM and SPK on.
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Dial Call Forwarding type:
0 = Cancel forwarding
2 = Busy/No Answer
4 = Immediate
6 = No answer
Press MW.
Press SPK to hang up.
Your DND key is on while our calls are forwarded.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 347
Voice Mail
Transferring Calls to a Mailbox
To Transfer your active call to a mailbox:
Method A
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
3.
Press MW and dial the number of the mailbox to receive the Transfer (e.g., 301 for extension
301).
This number can be your mailbox number (if you’re away from your desk) or a coworker’s mailbox number.
If you want to Transfer the call to the Voice Mail Automated Attendant, dial the Voice
Mail master number in stead of pressing MW and dialing an extension number.
Press SPK to hang up.
Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
Method B
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
3.
Press DSS key for co-worker’s extension + MW.
Press SPK to hang up.
Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
Method C
1.
Press keyset or DSS Console Hotline key.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
3.
Press MW.
Press SPK to hang up.
Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
Recording your call
To record your active call in your mailbox:
1.
Only one party on a call can use Conversation Record at any one time. This includes
Intercom calls and Conference calls.
Press Voice Mail Record key.
The key lights green while the system calls your mailbox. Once recording begins, the
key flashes fast you and your caller hear the voice prompt “Recording.”
You can also have a Record key on your DSS Console. It lights red while the system
calls your mailbox and flashes fast once recording begins.
Personal Answering Machine Emulation
To activate Answering Machine Emulation:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
348 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Mail
2.
Dial *3.
Dial tone stops.
ICM and SPK on.
3.
4.
5.
Dial 7.
Dial Answering Machine Emulation option (2 or hang up to forward all calls, 7 to forward just
trunk calls).
Press SPK to hang up.
To cancel Answering Machine Emulation:
1.
Press ICM.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
2.
Dial *30.
Dial tone.
ICM and SPK on.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
When Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller’s message, you can:
●
●
Do nothing to have the caller’s message automatically recorded in your mailbox,
Lift the handset to intercept the call and speak to your caller.
Checking Your Messages
To check your messages:
1.
Press MW.
You see: Number of MSG = n (where n is the number of new messages in your mailbox).
Using the Message Center
1.
2.
3.
DS2000 Software Manual
The Message Center key flashes fast (green) when there are new messages not listened
to in the Message Center mailbox..
Press SPK or lift handset.
Press the Message Center key.
If requested by Voice Mail, enter the security code for the Message Center mailbox.
Your MW LED goes out.
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 349
Voice Over
Voice Over
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Get through to a co-worker busy on a handset call — without interrupting their call.
Voice Over lets a user get through to a keyset extension user busy on a handset call. With Voice
Over, the busy keyset extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting
party. The keyset extension user can respond to the interrupting party without being heard by the
original caller. If desired, the keyset extension user can easily switch between their original caller
and the interrupting co-worker. The original caller and the interrupting party can never hear each
other’s conversation.
Voice Over could help a lawyer, for example, waiting for an urgent call. While on a call with
another client, the lawyer’s paralegal could announce the urgent call as soon as it comes in. The
lawyer could then give the paralegal instructions on how to handle the situation — all without the
original client hearing the conversation.
Either a keyset or SLT can initiate a Voice Over, but only a keyset can receive a Voice Over.
Voice Over uses a system Converence circuit. The following table shows the system’s Conference
capacities:
Description
Capacity
Conference circuits
32
Maximum simultaneous users in Conference
(total of all Conferences system-wide)
32
Maximum simultaneous conferences
8
Maximum parties in any one Conference
(trunks and/or extensions)
8
The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming List
Program 1802 - Off-Hook Signaling for Intercom Calls (page 455)
Enter 3 for each extension that should be able to receive Voice Over.
350 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Voice Over
Other Related Features
Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
An extension can Voice Over after calling a co-worker by pressing their Call Coverage key.
Conference (page 79)
An extension user cannot Voice Over to a co-worker busy on a Conference call.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) (page 95)
An extension can Voice Over after using Direct Station Selection to call a co-worker.
Headset Compatibility (page 154)
An extension user cannot Voice Over to a co-worker in the headset mode.
Hotline (page 160)
An extension cannot Voice Over after calling a co-worker by pressing their Hotline key.
Intercom (page 165)
An extension user can Voice Over to a co-worker busy on an Intercom call.
Message Waiting (page 187)
An extension user cannot leave a Message Waiting after using Voice Over.
Off-Hook Signaling (page 205)
When a user is busy on a call, Off-Hook Signaling indicates that another caller is trying to get
through.
Single Line Telephones (page 260)
An SLT can initiate a Voice Over but cannot receive a Voice Over.
Speed Dial (page 263)
An extension user can Voice Over after calling a co-worker by using Personal Speed Dial.
Transfer (page 324)
An extension user can Voice Over after making a Screened Transfer and hearing busy/ring
tone.
Feature Operation
To initiate a Voice Over to a busy extension:
You can only leave a Voice Over if you hear busy/ring tone.
1.
Dial 9.
Two beeps, then you can speak with your co-worker.
N/A
To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension:
Two beeps while on a handset call.
N/A.
1.
Press and hold MIC.
Release MIC to talk to your initial caller. You can repeat this procedure as long as the
Voice Over initiator doesn’t hang up.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 351
Voice Prompting Messages
Voice Prompting Messages
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
352 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Volume Controls
Volume Controls
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Easily adjust the volume of ringing, Paging and other features.
A keyset user can press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ to adjust the volume of the following features while
they are active:
●
Incoming ring1
●
Paging1
●
Background Music1
●
Handsfree speaker and incoming voice announcements broadcast through your telephone
speaker1
●
Handset/headset receiver volume1
●
Off Hook Ringing
●
Incoming Voice Over Announcement
1These
features retain the volume levels set by the keyset user.
There are six steps in the Volume Control adjustment range. This makes it easier for the keyset user
to set up just the right volume levels.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Alphanumeric Display (page 19)
While the telephone is idle, pressing VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ adjusts the contrast of the telephone
display.
Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 51)
The extension user cannot adjust the volume of incoming Camp On tone.
Intercom (page 165)
The default Intercom (station-to-station) gain is 0 dB. While on an Intercom call, use VOL ▲
and VOL ▼ to change this setting.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 353
Volume Controls
Feature Operation
To adjust the volume of a feature while it is active:
1.
While your keyset is active, press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ adjusts the display contrast.
Press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼.
354 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Year 2000 Compliance
Year 2000 Compliance
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
The system is fully Y2K (Year 2000) compliant.
The system provides Year 2000 Compliance. The change of the date from one century to the next is
handled by the system software and is no different than the change from one year to the next. The
day following 12/31/99 will be 01/01/00. The system will process the leap year correctly and will
not require an upgrade or reprogramming. In addition, the SMDR report will properly show the
years in the 21st century.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Year 2000 Compliance always enabled.
Programming List
None
Other Related Features
Station Message Detail Recording (page 277)
The SMDR report displays four digits for the year (i.e., 2000, 2001).
Time and Date (page 312)
The system is fully Y2K (year 2000) compliant. The year always displays as four digits and
the system correctly recognizes leap years.
Feature Operation
None
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 1: Features ◆ 355
Year 2000 Compliance
356 ◆ Chapter 1: Features
DS2000 Software Manual
Introduction to Programming
Chapter 2
Programming
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
Before You Start Programming
Before Reading This Section
This section provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this section, you find
out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data
into system memory.
Do not start customizing your system without first reading Section 1, Features.
When you want to customize a feature, find it in Section 1 and learn about it. (If you have trouble
finding the feature, try cross-referencing it in the Index at the back of this book.) Section 1 will tell
you what programs you have to change to get the operation you want. Then, look the program up in
this section if you have any questions about how to enter the data.
How to Use This Section
This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 0101 is at the beginning
of the section and Program 9905 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into
the following headings:
Description
Description tells what the program is. Along with the Description are the Conditions which
describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program. get an overview of the
feature. For the Default Settings of each programmable option, refer to the information provided
with each program. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs.
In each program description there are is a Software History icon which summarizes how the program works with different system software levels:
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 357
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
This is the Software History icon. Since Nitsuko America is constantly enhancing your system, all
options may not be available in all software levels. Read this text to find out the specifics.
Telephone Programming Instructions
Telephone Programming Instructions shows you how to enter the program’s data into system memory. For example:
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 0101 + HOLD
0101:CLASS OF SERVIC
COS NUM?XX
tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 0101 from the telephone dial pad and then press the HOLD key.
After you do, you’ll see the message “COS NUM?xx” on the telephone display. To learn how to enter the programming mode, see How to Enter the Programming Mode below.How
to Enter the Program-
ming Mode
To enter the programming mode:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Go to any working display telephone.
In a newly installed system, use extension 300 (port 1).
Do not lift the handset.
Press ICM.
#*#*
LCCPU VER nn.nn.nn
Enter Password:
5.
Dial the system password + HOLD
Refer to the following table for the default system passwords.
Table 15: Password Levels
Password Level
Password
Level
System Administrator 1
0000
1
System Administrator 2
9999
2
Installer
372000
3
To change the passwords, use Program 9905 - Password on page 478.
USER: nnn
ENTER PROGRAM?
Logging On with this Password:
Gives you access to these programs:
System Administrator 1 (level 1)
Password = 0000
Program 0302 - System Identification (page 372)
Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers (page 431)
358 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
System Administrator 2 (level 1)
Password = 9999
Program 0302 - System Identification (page 372)
Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages (page 414)
Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers (page 431)
Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments (page 436)
Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial (page 441)
Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment (page 443)
Installer (level 3)
Password - 372000
All
How to Exit the Programming Mode
To exit the programming mode:
USER: nnn
ENTER PROGRAM?
1.
Press and release the hookswitch.
OR
Press SPK.
The system automatically stores your entries in Random Access Memory (RAM).
Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs
Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data
and move around in the menus.
Table 16: Keys for Entering Data
Use this key:
0-9, # and *
When you want to:
Enter data into the program.
HOLD
Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing
Enter on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press
HOLD to accept the entry (i.e., bypass the entry without changing it).
CONF
Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing
Enter on a PC keyboard) and back up one step in the program.
LND
Delete the entry to the left (like pressing Backspace on a PC
keyboard.
To delete an entire name entry (without backspacing over each
letter), just reenter the name without pressing LND first.
DS2000 Software Manual
CLEAR
Erase the entire command line you just entered and undefine the
entry.
CHECK
Erase the entry you just made and replace it with the prior stored
entry.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 359
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
Table 16: Keys for Entering Data
Use this key:
When you want to:
VOL ▲
Scroll forward through a list of entries in a program. If you enter
data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before
scrolling forward to the next entry.
VOL ▼
Scroll backward through a list of entries in a program. If you
enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling backward to the previous entry.
ICM
Enable the scroll mode. When you press this key and it lights,
you can then press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ to scroll through the
options. To choose the displayed value, press HOLD.
Connecting a PC or Printer
Information to be provided.
360 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
Programming Names and Text Messages
Several programs reference require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and
editing text.
Table 17: Keys for Entering Names
Keys for Entering Names
Press this
key:
Then one of these keys to enter the character in the white cell:
1
2
3
4
#
1
&
1
2
A
B
C
2
3
D
E
F
3
4
G
H
I
4
5
J
K
L
5
6
M
N
O
6
7
P
Q
R
8
T
U
V
9
W
X
Y
0
SPACE
:
S
7
8
Z
9
0
*
*
#
#
To enter characters in lower case (e.g., e instead of E), press MW before pressing the key in the
first shaded column. Use LND to backspace over (erase) any characters you want to correct.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 361
0100 - Class of Service
0101 - Class of Service Options
0100 - Class of Service
0101 - Class of Service Options
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0101- Class of Service Programming to set up the Class of Service options. The
system has 15 Classes of Service, numbered 1-15. You assign Classes of Service to extensions in
Program 1801: Extension Class of Service Assignment on page 450. Many extensions can have the
same Class of Service. Class of Service 1 is normally reserved for the attendant (port 1).
Conditions
None
Table 18: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Off-Premise Call Forward
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Off-Premise Call Forwarding.
• See Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on
page 46 for more.
OFF PREM FWRD?
N
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Barge In on a co-worker.
• See Barge In (Intrusion) on page 37 for
more.
BREAK-IN?
Camp-On to Busy
Extension
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy extension. Enter Y to allow the extension to
Camp-On to a busy co-worker. Enter N to
prevent the extension from Camping-On to a
busy co-worker. Entering N also automatically converts an extension’s Camp On to
Callback.
• See Call Waiting / Camp-On on page 51
for more.
• See Callback on page 54 for more.
CAMP-ON BUSY EXT?
Internal Call Forwarding
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Internal Call Forwarding.
• See Alternate Attendant on page 21 for
more.
• See Call Forwarding on page 43 for
more.
CALL FORWARDING?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to access System Speed Dial.
• See System Speed Dial on page 263 for
more.
SYS SPDL ACCESS?
Barge-In (Intrusion)
System Speed Dial
Access
362 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
DS2000 Software Manual
0100 - Class of Service
0101 - Class of Service Options
Table 18: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Entries
Default
Use this option to enable or disable
Extended Ringing at the extension.
• See Extended Ringing on page 119 for
more.
EXTENDED RING?
N
Privacy
Use this option to enable or disable Privacy
at the extension.
• See Privacy on page 226 for more.
PRIVACY?
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Trunk (Line) Queuing
Priority
Use this option to enable or disable Trunk
(Line) Queuing Priority at the extension. If
more than one extension with Priority is
queued on a busy trunk, the system services
the Priority extensions on a first-queued,
first-served basis.
• See Trunk Queuing Priority on page 332
for more.
LINE Q PRIORITY?
N
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
• See Forced Trunk Disconnect on
page 137 for more.
FORCE
DISCONNECT?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy trunk.
• See Trunk (Line) Queuing / Trunk Callback on page 332 for more.
CAMP ON TO LINES?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make an All Call Paging
announcement.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ALL CALL?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 1.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 1?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 2.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 2?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 3.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 3?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 4.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 4?
Extended Ring
Camp-On to Busy Line
Initiate All Call Page
Access Page Zone 1
Access Page Zone 2
Access Page Zone 3
Access Page Zone 4
DS2000 Software Manual
Description
Y = Enabled
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 363
0100 - Class of Service
0101 - Class of Service Options
Table 18: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Access Page Zone 5
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 5.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 5?
Y
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 6.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 6?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 7.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE 7?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Silent Monitor.
• See Monitor / Silent Monitor on
page 192 for more.
SILENT MONITOR?
Access Page Zone 6
Access Page Zone 7
Silent Monitor
Flash for Single Line
Sets
•
ACD Supervisor
•
Single Ring for Single
Line Sets
View System Alarms
Automatic Hold
Activate Night Mode
Direct Trunk Access
Not currently supported.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
FLASH FOR SLT?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
•
This option is currently not implemented.
Use this option to enable or disable single ring for single line telephones. This
option only apples to single line telephones. See Central Office Calls,
Answering on page 58 for more.
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to view the system alarms.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Hold at an extension.
• See Hold on page 156 for more.
ACD SUPERVISOR?
SINGLE RING?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
VIEW SYS ALARMS?
Y = Enable
N = Disable
AUTO HOLD?
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to activate Night Service.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
ACTIVATE NITES?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Direct Trunk Access.
Note that enabling Direct Trunk Access
allows the user to bypass Toll Restriction.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
DIRECT TRK ACCES?
364 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y = Enable
N = Disable
COS 1 = N
COS 2-15 = N
COS 1 = N
COS 2-15 = N
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
DS2000 Software Manual
0100 - Class of Service
0101 - Class of Service Options
Table 18: Program 0101 - Class of Service Options
Option
Remote Call Forwarding /
Alternate Attendant
Soft Keys
Conversation Record
DS2000 Software Manual
Description
•
This option is currently not implemented.
Entries
Default
REMOTE FWRD?
COS 1 = Y
COS 2-15 = N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Use this option to enable or disable a display
set’s Interactive Soft Keys.
• See See Interactive Soft Keys on
page 163 for more.
SOFTKEYS
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to record conversations into
their Voice Mail mailbox. If enabled, the
user can press either their Conversation
Record key or RECORD soft key to initiate
recording.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
RECORD CONV
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 365
0100 - Class of Service
0101 - Class of Service Options
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0101 + HOLD
0101:CLASS OF SERVIC
COS NUM?XX
3.
4.
5.
6.
Dial the Class of Service you want to program (1-15) + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the option you want to change + HOLD
Enter Y or N for displayed option + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another option.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 3 and select another Class of Service.
OR
Press HOLD twice to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
366 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0200 - Tenant Options
0201 - Tenant Option Programming
0200 - Tenant Options
0201 - Tenant Option Programming
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0201- Tenant Option Programming to set up various options for Tenant Groups.
Conditions
None
Table 19: Program 0201 - Tenant Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Call Waiting (Camp-On)
Tone
Use this option to enable or disable system
wide Call Waiting Tones (double beeps).
• See Call Waiting / Camp-On on page 51
for more.
CALL WAIT?
Y
Handsfree Reply on
Intercom Calls
Use this option to enable or disable systemwide Handsfree Reply for voice-announced
Intercom calls. If you enable this option, you
must also enable Voice-Announced Intercom
Calls below.
• See Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback on page 150 for more.
HF REPLY ON ICM?
Voice-Announced
Intercom Calls
Use this option to enable or disable systemwide voice-announced Intercom calls. You
must enable this option if you have Handsfree Reply on Intercom Calls enabled above.
If you disable this option, extension users
can only receive ringing Intercom calls.
• See Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback on page 150 for more.
VOICE ANN ICM?
Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Handsfree system-wide.
• See Automatic Handsfree on page 30 for
more.
• See Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback on page 150 for more.
AUTO HANDSFREE?
Music on Hold
MOH on Transfer
DS2000 Software Manual
Use this option to enable or disable Music
on Hold system wide.
• See Music On Hold on page 195 for
more.
Use this option to enable or disable MOH
for transferred calls system-wide. If enabled,
transferred callers hear Music on Hold while
waiting. If disabled, transferred callers hear
ringback.
• See Transfer on page 324 for more.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
ENBLE MOH?
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
MOH ON TRANSFER?
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 367
0200 - Tenant Options
0201 - Tenant Option Programming
Table 19: Program 0201 - Tenant Options
Option
Background Music
Voice Mail Installed
Description
Use this option to enable or disable Background Music system-wide.
• See Background Music on page 35 for
more.
Enable this option if you have an NVMseries Voice Mail system installed. Disable
this option if you don’t have Voice Mail
installed. If you enable this option, be sure to
specify a Voice Mail master extension number in the option below.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
Voice Mail Master
Extension Number
Use this option to specify the Voice Mail
master extension number. Be sure to make
an entry for this item if you enabled the
Voice Mail Installed option above. The entry
you make must be within the system’s number plan.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
Enable Dial-out of # in a
Speed Dial Number
Use this option to control how the system
handles the dialing of the # digit when it is
stored in a Speed Dial number. If enabled,
the system outdials the # as part of the number. If disabled, the system bypasses the #
without outdialing it. You may want to disable this option if the system is installed
behind a PBX.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
368 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entries
Default
ENBLE BGM?
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
V-MAIL INSTALLED?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
V-MAIL MST EXT?
000
nnn (extension number)
ENABLE # IN SPDL?
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
DS2000 Software Manual
0200 - Tenant Options
0201 - Tenant Option Programming
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0201 + HOLD
0101:TENANT OPTIONS
CALL WAIT?XX
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter Y or N for the displayed option.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the option you want to change + HOLD
Enter Y or N for displayed option + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another option.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 369
0300 - System Options
0301 - System Options (Part 1)
0300 - System Options
0301 - System Options (Part 1)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0301- System Options to set up various options system-wide options.
Conditions
None
Table 20: Program 0301 - System Options
Option
Number of Operators
Operator 1 Extension
Operator 2 Extension
Operator 3 Extension
Operator 4 Extension
Number of Digits in a
System Speed Dial Code
Description
Use this option to set the number of operators (attendants) in the system. The system
can have up to four operators.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to assign the 1st operator’s
extension number.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to assign the 2nd operator’s
extension number. Before assigning this
option, be sure you have entered the correct
number in the Number of Operators option.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to assign the 3rd operator’s
extension number. Before assigning this
option, be sure you have entered the correct
number in the Number of Operators option.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to assign the 4th operator’s
extension number. Before assigning this
option, be sure you have entered the correct
number in the Number of Operators option.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use the option to assign the number of digits
the system uses to designate System Speed
Dial bins (2, 3 or 4). With 2-digit bins, the
system has 10 bins numbered 20-29. With 3digit bins, the system has 100 bins numbered
200-299. With 4-digit bins, the system as
1000 bins numbered 2000-2999.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
370 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entries
Default
NUM OF
OPERATORS?
01
1-4
OPERATOR 1 EXT?
300
Enter any valid extension
number
OPERATOR 2 EXT?
Undefined
Enter any valid extension
number
OPERATOR 3 EXT?
Undefined
Enter any valid extension
number
OPERATOR 4 EXT?
Undefined
Enter any valid extension
number
SYS SPDL CODE
DGTS?
3
2 = 2-digit (20-29)
3 = 3-digit (200-299)
4 = 4-digit (2000-2999)
DS2000 Software Manual
0300 - System Options
0301 - System Options (Part 1)
Table 20: Program 0301 - System Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
CPU Baud Rate
Use this option to set the speed of the
LCCPU PCB RS-232-C port. You may want
to connect a PC or SMDR printer to this
port.
• See Connecting a PC or Printer on
page 360 for more.
• See Station Message Detail Recording
on page 277 for more.
LCCPU BAUD RATE?
04
Use this option to specify the port the system
uses for SMDR.
• See Connecting a PC or Printer on
page 360 for more.
• See Station Message Detail Recording
on page 277 for more.
SMDR PORT?
SMDR Port
Print SMDR Header
Use this option to include or exclude the
header from the SMDR report.
• See Connecting a PC or Printer on
page 360 for more.
• See Station Message Detail Recording
on page 277 for more.
4 = 9600
0
0 = NONE
1 = CPU Serial Port
PRINT SMDR HEADR?
Y
Y = Enable header
N = Disable header
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0301 + HOLD
0301:SYSTEM OPTIONS
NUM OF OPERATORS?
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter Y or N for the displayed option.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the option you want to change + HOLD
Enter Y or N for displayed option + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another option.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 371
0300 - System Options
0302 - System Identification
0302 - System Identification
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0302- System Identification enter information about the system and to set the Time
and Date. This information is used in various system reports.
Conditions
None
Table 21: Program 0302 - System Identification Options
Option
Company Name
Company Phone Number
System Type
Software Version
Time
Description
Use this option to enter your company’s
name. The name prints in system reports.
• See System Identification on page 285
for more.
Use this option to enter your company’s
phone number. This is the number the system will call to report a problem (not the
system’s number). You must enter a trunk
access code (9, 9X or #9XX) before the
number. For more information about trunk
access codes, see Central Office Calls, Placing on page 63.
• See System Identification on page 285
for more.
This option displays your system’s type. It
shows DS-2000. You cannot edit this option.
• See System Identification on page 285
for more.
This option displays your system’s software
level. It is for viewing only. You cannot edit
this option.
• See System Identification on page 285
for more.
Use this option to set the system time. Enter
data using the 24-hour format HH:MM:SS.
For example, 13:00:00 = 1:00 PM.
• See Time and Date on page 312 for
more.
372 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entries
Default
NAME?
No entry
24 characters max
(For instructions on
entering names. see Keys
for Entering Names on
page 361.)
PHONE?
No entry
24 digits max, using:
0-9, # and *
P = Pause
T = Tone Detection
F = Flash
D = Delay
SYS TYP:
DS-2000
Automatically displayed.
S/W VER:
Automatically displayed.
Depends on
software level
TIME?
Current time
HH:MM:SS
HH = Hours (0-24)
MM = Minutes (0-59)
SSS = Seconds
Enter in 24-hour format
DS2000 Software Manual
0300 - System Options
0302 - System Identification
Table 21: Program 0302 - System Identification Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Date
Use this option to enter the system Time and
Date. The system shows Time and Date on
telephone displays and in various system
reports.
• See Time and Date on page 312 for
more.
DATE?
Current date
MM-DD-YY
MM = Month (1-12)
DD = Day (1-31)
YYYY = Year (e.g.,
2000)
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0302 + HOLD
0302:SYSTEM ID
NAME?
3.
Enter the system name (up to 14 characters) + VOL ▲.
(Refer to Programming Names and Text Messages on page 361 if you need help in entering
names)
OR
Press VOL ▲ to scroll to the next option.
0302:SYSTEM ID
PHONE?
4.
After pressing VOL ▲ to scroll to the next entry, you can press CONF to exit the program.
Enter the site phone number (up to 14 digits) + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to scroll to the next option.
0302:SYSTEM ID
SYS TYP:DS-1000
You cannot edit this entry.
5.
Press VOL ▲ to scroll to the next option.
0302:SYSTEM ID
S/W VER:
You cannot edit this entry.
6.
Press VOL ▲ to scroll to the next option.
0302:SYSTEM ID
TIME?
7.
Enter the system time (HH:MM:SS in 24-hour format) + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to scroll to the next option.
0302:SYSTEM ID
DATE?:
8.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter the system date (MM:DD:YYYY) + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to scroll to the next option.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 373
0300 - System Options
0302 - System Identification
OR
Press CONF to exit the program.
374 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0401 - System Timers
0400 - Timers
0401 - System Timers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0401- System Timers to enter the values for system-wide timers. Conditions
None
Table 22: Program 0401 - System Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Park Orbit
Use this timer to set how long a call stays in
System Park Orbit before it recalls the extension that parked it. This timer if for orbits
60-67 only. The recall for orbits 68 and 69 is
fixed at 5 minutes.
• See Park on page 218 for more.
PARK RECALL?
60 sec.
Use this timer to set how long the system
reserves a modem, once requested by an
extension user, from the modem pool before
returning in to the pool.
• See Computer Telephony Integration on
page 78 for more.
• See System Diagnostics on page 284 for
more.
MODEM RESERVE?
Use this timer to set how long a transferred
call rings the destination extension before
recalling the extension from which it was
initially transferred. This option pertains to
all idle extensions, as well as busy multibutton extensions. Note that this timer does not
control how long a transferred call rings a
busy operator.
• See Transfer on page 324 for more.
TRANSFER RECALL?
Modem Reserve
Transfer Recall
Intercom Inter-digit
Meet-Me Conference
DS2000 Software Manual
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
30 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
30 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
When an extension user places a call, they
must dial each succeeding digit within this
interval.
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
•
ICM INTERDIGIT?
When a user initiates a Meet-Me Conference, the system waits this interval for the
Paged party to join the call.
• See Meet-Me Conference on page 184
for more.
MEET ME CONF?
6 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
30 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 375
0400 - Timers
0401 - System Timers
Table 22: Program 0401 - System Timers
Option
Dialing Pause
Description
For Automatic Route Selection, the system
waits this interval when it encounters a
pause in an ARS Dial Treatment.
• See Automatic Route Selection on
page 34 for more.
Entries
Default
DIALING PAUSE?
1 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
For Speed Dial, the system waits this interval when it encounters a pause in a Speed
Dial bin.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
Page Duration
Door Unlock
DIL No Answer
Trunk Revert
Use this timer to set the maximum length of
Page announcements.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE DURATION?
When a single line (2500 type) user hookflashes while talking to a Door Box, the
Door Box strike opens for this interval.
• See Door Box on page 116 for more.
DOOR UNLOCK?
This timer sets how long a DIL rings an idle
extension before Key Ring occurs. Key Ring
rings all extensions programmed to ring for
that line.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
DIL NO ANSWER?
This timer sets how long Hold Recall rings
the extension that placed the call on hold
before Key Ring occurs. Key Ring rings all
extensions programmed to ring for that line.
• See Hold on page 156 for more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
TRUNK REVERT?
30 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
30 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
15 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
15 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
This timer also sets how long a Transfer
Recall rings the extension that initially transferred the call before Key Ring occurs.
• See Transfer on page 324 for more.
Trunk Delay Ring
Trunk Overflow
Use this timer to set how long the system
waits before ringing an extension that has
the Delayed Ringing option enabled.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Delayed Ringing on page 82 for
more.
•
Information to be provided.
TRK DELAY RING?
10 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
TRUNK OVERFLOW?
20 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
376 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0401 - System Timers
Table 22: Program 0401 - System Timers
Option
Description
Centrex Type Feature
Key Delay
ACD/UCD Overflow
This timer sets how long the system waits
when it finds a Centrex delay (i.e., D) programmed in a Centrex Feature Key.
• See PBX/Centrex Compatibility on
page 222 for more.
Entries
Default
CENTRX FTR DLY?
50 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
This timer sets when UCD overflow occurs.
When all UCD agents are busy, a queued
call rings for this interval and then overflows
to the UCD Overflow destination.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
ACD/UCD OVRFLOW?
Number of Password
Attempts
Use this option to set how many times the
system allows a user to enter the incorrect
programming password before locking them
out.
• See System Programming List on
page 289 for more.
PSWD ATTEMP NUM?
3
Program Lockout Time
Once the system locks out a user, it will wait
this interval before allowing the user to reenter the programming mode.
• See System Programming List on
page 289 for more.
PROGRAM
LOCKOUT?
10 sec.
If a telephone in the programming mode is
inactive longer than this interval, the system
automatically cancels the programming
mode and makes the telephone idle.
• See System Programming List on
page 289 for more.
FORCE PROG EXIT?
Force Program Exit
60 sec
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
10 sec.
1-9999 sec.
0 = Disabled
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0401 + HOLD
0401:SYSTEM TIMERS
PARK RECALL?
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the timer you want to change + HOLD
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another timer.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 377
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0402- Trunk Timers to enter the values for trunk timers.Conditions
None
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Camp-On
Description
•
Information to be provided.
Entries
Default
CAMP ON?
60 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Line Response
When the system fails to detect loop current
on a trunk, it will wait this interval before
marking the trunk as defective.
Be sure the value you enter is compatible
with the local telco. If you set this value too
short, the system may mark properly functioning trunks as defective. If too long,
defective trunks may be left in service.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Dial Tone Detect
When the system seizes a line to place a
Speed Dial call, it waits this interval for dial
tone before outdialing the call. The system
requires that the first dial tone be at least.5
seconds long and the second dial tone to be
at least 2.5 seconds long.
LINE RESPONSE?
4-1020 in 100 mS increments (e.g., 4 = 400 mS,
10 - 1000 mS)
DL TONE DETECT?
100
(10 seconds)
10 (1 second)
0-9999 in 100 mS increments (e.g., 10 = 1 second, 100 = 10 seconds)
Be sure the value you enter is compatible
with the local telco. If you set this value too
short, the system may not seize properly
functioning trunks. If too long, there will be
too long a delay before the system skips over
a defective trunk.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
378 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
PBX/Centrex Flash
Use this timer to set the Flash interval. When
a user flashes a trunk, the system opens the
trunk circuit for this interval. For accurate
flash function, be sure to set this interval for
compatibility with the connected telco or
PBX/Centrex.
FLASH PBX?
800 mS
16-4080 mS
If you set this interval too short, the telco
may not always register the flash. If too long,
inadvertent disconnects may occur.
• See Flash on page 132 for more.
• See PBX/Centrex Compatibility on
page 222 for more.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Flash Disconnect
•
TBD
FLASH DISC.?
2496mS
16-4080 mS
Force Idle (Trunk Guard
Time)
Use this timer to set the guard time for
trunks. When the system disconnects a trunk
(e.g., after a user hang up), the system keeps
the line idle until this timer expires. The
Trunk Guard Time helps prevent call collisions.
FORCE IDLE?
25 (2.5 sec)
10-9999 in 100 mS
increments (e.g., 10 = 1
second)
If you set this interval too short, call collisions may occur. If too long, there will be
unnecessary delays before you can use the
trunk for a new call.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
PBX Pause
Use this timer to set the delay that occurs
after the system dials a PBX access code.
After the system dials the code, it waits this
interval before outdialing the rest of the
number.
PBX PAUSE?
0
0-9999 sec.
0 = No pause
If you set this interval too short, the PBX
may not have enough time to set up the call
and return dial tone. If too long, the PBX
may disconnect the call.
• See PBX/Centrex Compatibility on
page 222 for more.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 379
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Minimum Ring Detection
Timer
Use this timer to set the threshold for ring
detection. If the ring signal is longer than
this interval, the system interprets the signal
as valid ringing. If the signal is equal to or
shorter than this interval, the system ignores
the ringing.
MIN RING DET?
104 mS
8-2040 mS
Be sure the value you enter is compatible
with the local telco. If you set this value too
short, the system may detect line spikes and
anomalies as ringing. If too long, the system
may not properly interpret a valid ringing
signal.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DP Make Timer
DP Break Timer
DP Interdigit Timer
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial
Pulse Make signal (i.e., relay closed). This is
the “on” time in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this
timer for compatibility with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. Keep in mind that
there are three components of a Dial Pulse
digit: Make interval, Break interval and
Interdigit interval. An improper setting may
cause misdialing.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
PULSE DIAL MAKE?
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial
Pulse Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is
the “off” time in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this
timer for compatability with the connected
telco or PBX/Centrex. Keep in mind that
there are three components of a Dial Pulse
digit: Make interval, Break interval and
Interdigit interval. An improper setting may
cause misdialing.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
PULSE DIAL BRK?
Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial
Pulse Interdigit signal (i.e., relay open time
between each digit). Set this timer for compatability with the connected telco or PBX/
Centrex. Keep in mind that there are three
components of a Dial Pulse digit: Make
interval, Break interval and Interdigit interval. An improper setting may cause misdialing.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
PULSE INTRDIGIT?
380 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
40 mS
4-1020 mS
60 mS
4-1020 mS
800 mS
100-9999 mS
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Manual DTMF Tone On
This timer sets the duration of DTMF digits
for trunk calls manually dialed by an extension user. This is required because the system buffers the digits the user dials.
MAN DTMF ON?
250 mS
10-2550 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this
interval too short, the telco or PBX/Centrex
may not be able to properly detect the
DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is
unnecessarily slowed down.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Manual DTMF Tone Off
This timer sets the duration of the interval
between DTMF digits for trunk calls manually dialed by an extension user. This is
required because the system buffers the digits the user dials.
MANB DTMF OFF?
100 mS
10-2550 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this
interval too short, the telco or PBX/Centrex
may not be able to set up to receive the next
DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is
unnecessarily slowed down.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Speed Dial DTMF Tone
On
This timer sets the duration of DTMF digits
for Speed Dial trunk calls automatically
dialed by the system.
SPDL DTMF ON?
100 mS
10-2550 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this
interval too short, the telco or PBX/Centrex
may not be able to properly detect the
DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is
unnecessarily slowed down.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 381
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Speed Dial DTMF Tone
Off
Description
This timer sets the duration the quiet time
between DTMF digits for Speed Dial trunk
calls automatically dialed by the system.
Entries
Default
SPDL DTMF ON?
100 mS
10-2550 mS
Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this
interval too short, the telco or PBX/Centrex
may not be able to set up to receive the next
DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is
unnecessarily slowed down.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Loop Current Detection
Time
For loop start trunks, loop current must be
present for this interval before the system
seizes the trunk.
LOOP CURRENT?
800 mS
4-1020 mS
Set this interval for compatibility with the
connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set
this interval too short, the system may inadvertently seize unstable trunks. If too long,
the system may not properly seize a valid
trunk.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Codec Digitizing Method
Use this option to set the system’s codec
companding method type for the trunk. Be
sure this option is always set to 0 (µ-law
companding enabled). Do not set this option
to 1 (A-law companding enabled).
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
CODEC A/D TYPE?
0 (µ-law)
Setting for International
Rotary Disk
Set this option for compatibility with the
type of rotary dial (500 type) telephone used.
Be sure to always set this option to 0.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DP FOR INT’L?
0
(US standard)
382 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
0 = µ-law
1 = A-law
0 = US standard
1 = Norwegian
2 = Swedish
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Far End Disconnect
Use this timer to set the loop disconnect
interval for trunk calls. If the system detects
a loop current interruption longer than this
interval it assumes the telco has disconnected the trunk. It then returns the trunk
trunk to idle.
FAR END DISC.?
300 mS
4-1020 mS
Set this interval for compatibility with the
connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set
this interval too short, the system may inadvertently disconnect valid trunks. If too long,
the system may leave trunks connected that
it should tear down.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Minimum Single Ring
Detection Timer
The system uses this timer to detect valid
ringing signal from the connected telco or
PBX. Valid single ring must be longer than
this interval.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
SNGL RG MIN DET?
Minimum Double Ring
Detection Off Timer
The system uses this timer to detect valid
double ring from the connected PBX. Valid
double ring must be longer than this interval.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DBL RG MIN OFF?
Maximum Double Ring
Detection Off Timer
The system uses this timer to detect valid
double ring from the connected PBX. Valid
double ring must be less than this interval.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DBL RG MAX OFF?
Ringing Signal End
Detect Timer
If the ringing signal on a trunk call is interrupted for longer than this interval, the system assumes ringing has stopped and
terminates the call.
SIGNAL STOP DET?
504 mS
8-2040 mS
104 mS
8-2040 mS
304 mS
8-2040 mS
6016 mS
64-16320 mS
Set this option for compatibility with the
connected telco or PBX Centrix. If this interval is set to short, valid ringing will be inadvertently cut off. If too long, the system will
leave the call set up even after ringing has
stopped.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 383
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Table 23: Program 0402 - Trunk Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Caller ID Detection Timer
Caller ID is currently not available. Do not
change this timer from its default setting.
CID DETECT
3268 mS
64-16320 mS
The Caller ID Timer is the amount of time a
system DSP is turned on, “listening” for
Caller ID digits on a trunk. The listen mode
starts 100 mS after the first ring burst and
continues until the AC Impedance Timer
times out. Only change this timer is you are
having errors in the displayed Caller ID digits.
• See Caller ID on page 57 for more.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Ground Start Timer
Before the system can start a ground start
trunk, the telco’s tip ground must be present
for longer than this interval.
GROUNDING
800 mS
16-4080 mS
Set this interval for compatibility with the
connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set
this interval too short, the system may inadvertently start a trunk it should not set up. If
too long, the system may not start trunks that
are functioning normally.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Pause Timer
DP Mute Timer
P.F. Recovery Detect
Timer
This timer sets the system pause interval.
For example, if a user programs a pause into
a Speed Dial bin, the system will wait this
interval and then proceed with dialing the
remaining digits in the bin.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
Information to be provided.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
When the ATRU PCB recovers from a power
failure, it checks the power failure trunk
(trunk 1) for loop current for the P.F. Recovery Detect interval. If loop current is
detected, it assumes the Power Failure Telephone is still connected and does not tear
down the call. If loop current is not detected,
the ATRU PCB switches the trunk out of the
power failure mode.
• See System Timers, Trunks on page 300
for more.
384 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
PAUSE
3008 mS
64-16320 mS
DP MUTE
8 mS
4-1020 mS
PF RECOVERY
3008 mS
64-16320 mS
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0402 - Trunk Timers
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0402 + HOLD
0402:TRUNK TIMERS
CAMP ON?
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the timer you want to change + HOLD
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another timer.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 385
0400 - Timers
0403 - Station Timers
0403 - Station Timers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0403- Station Timers to enter the values for station timers.
Conditions
None
Table 24: Program 0403 - Station Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Hold Recall
Use this timer to set how long a call stays on
Hold before it recalls the extension that initially placed it on Hold.
• See Hold on page 156 for more.
HOLD RECALL?
60 sec.
Use this timer to set how long a call stays on
Exclusive Hold before it recalls the extension that initially placed it on Exclusive
Hold.
• See Hold on page 156 for more.
EX-HOLD RECALL?
Exclusive Hold
Camp-On
•
Information to be provided.
0-9999 sec.
90 sec.
0-9999 sec.
CAMP-ON?
60 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Call Forward Ring No
Answer
When Call Forwarding Ring No Answer is
enabled, this timer sets how long a forwarded call rings an unanswered extension
before routing to the forwarding destination.
FWRD NO ANSWER?
10 sec.
0-9999 sec.
In addition, use this timer to set how long a
transferred call rings a busy operator extension before recalling the extension from
which it was initially transferred. Note that
this timer does not control how long a transferred call rings any other busy extension.
This timer also sets how long a call will ring
an idle UCD Hunting group member before
cycling to the next member of the group.
• See Call Forwarding on page 43 for
more.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
386 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0403 - Station Timers
Table 24: Program 0403 - Station Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Call Waiting Tone Interval
Use this timer to set the interval between
Call Waiting tones.
• See Call Waiting / Camp-On on page 51
for more.
CL WAIT INTIRVL?
10 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Also use this timer to set the interval
between Off Hook Signaling alert tones.
• See Off-Hook Signaling on page 205 for
more.
Call Coverage Delay
Hook flash Transfer
For extensions with Delayed Ringing Call
Coverage keys, this timer sets how long a
call flashes the key at an extension before it
starts to ring.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
•
This timer is currently not implemented.
CL CVR DLY RING?
10 sec.
0-9999 sec.
HOOK FLASH XFER?
2 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Hook Flash Disconnect
•
This timer is currently not implemented.
FLSH DISCONNECT?
12 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Number of Extended
Rings
Drop Pulse Send
DTMF Detect
DS2000 Software Manual
If an extension’s Class of Service enables
Extended Ringing, use the timer to set the
duration of the Extended Ringing.
• See Extended Ringing on page 119 for
more.
EXTENDED RING?
20 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Use this timer to set the duration of the
ASTU PCB drop pulse. This pulse is sent
from the ASTU PCB to the connected analog device to initiate a disconnect.
• See Off-Premise Extensions / OnPremise SLT Extensions on page 207 for
more.
DROP PULSE SEND?
Use this timer to set the DTMF detection
threshold for single line (analog device)
ports. If the analog device sends a DTMF
signal longer than this interval, the system
recognizes it as a valid DTMF tone and
decodes it. If the DTMF signal is equal to or
less than this interval, the system ignores it.
• See Off-Premise Extensions / OnPremise SLT Extensions on page 207 for
more.
DTMF DETECT?
300 mS
0-9999 mS
70 mS
0-9999 mS
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 387
0400 - Timers
0403 - Station Timers
Table 24: Program 0403 - Station Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Ring No Answer Hunt
Use this timer to set the Extension Hunting
Ring No Answer Time. A call will ring a
hunt group member extension for this interval before automatically cycling to the next
extension in the group.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
RG NO ANS HUNT?
10 sec.
0-9999 sec.
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0403 + HOLD
0403:STATION TIMERS
HOLD RECALL?
3.
4.
5.
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the timer you want to change + HOLD
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another timer.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
388 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0404 - Analog Station Timers
0404 - Analog Station Timers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use 0404: Analog Station Timers to set parameters and timers for ASTU PCBs.
Conditions
None
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Country Data
Use this option to define the country of use
and the codec digitizing method for ASTU
PCBs. This timer consists of two bits (xy),
with bit x defining the country and bit y
defining the digitization method. For example, the default entry 00 is for North America
(x=0) and u-law digitization method (y=0).
Do not change this entry from its default
value (00).
COUNTRY DATA?
00
(xy)
Rotary Dial Type
Loop Current
Ringing Frequency
Minimum Break Time
Maximum Break Time
DS2000 Software Manual
Use this option to define the rotary dial pulsing method for the system’s ASTU PCBs.
Do not change this entry from its default
value (01).
Use this option to set the maximum allowed
loop current for the system’s ASTU PCBs.
Normally choose 25mA for short loops and
35mA for long loops. In general, a long loop
is 3000 feet or longer and a short loop is less
than 3000 feet.
xy
x= 0 (North America), 1
(International) or 2
(Japan)
y = 0 (u-law) or 1 (Alaw)
ROTARY TYPE?
0 = Standard (1-10)
1 = Norwegian (9-1, 10)
2 = Swedish (10, 1-9)
LOOP CURRENT
25mA (0)
0 = 25mA (short loop)
1 = 35 mA (long loop)
Use this option to define the AC ringing frequency for the system’s ASTU PCBs. Do
not change this entry from its default value
(20 Hz).
RINGING FREQ?
This timer defines the minimum amount of
time the loop must be opened to properly
decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog
devices connected to ASTU PCBs. Change
this value only if the connected analog
devices are set to dial at a rate other than
10 PPS.
MIN BREAK TIME?
This timer defines the maximum amount of
time the loop must be opened to properly
decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog
devices connected to ASTU PCBs. Change
this value only if the connected analog
devices are set to dial at a rate other than
10 PPS.
Standard
(0)
20 Hz (1)
0 = 25 Hz
1 = 20 Hz
2 = 16 Hz
2 (10 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
MAX BREAK TIME?
20 (100 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 389
0400 - Timers
0404 - Analog Station Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Minimum Make Time
This timer defines the minimum amount of
time the loop must be closed to properly
decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog
devices connected to ASTU PCBs. Change
this value only if the connected analog
devices are set to dial at a rate other than
10 PPS.
MIN MAKE TIME?
2 (10 mS)
Maximum Make Time
Minimum Hookflash Time
This timer defines the maximum amount of
time the loop must be closed to properly
decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog
devices connected to ASTU PCBs. Change
this value only if the connected analog
devices are set to dial at a rate other than
10 PPS.
For ASTU PCBs, this timer defines the minimum amount of time the loop must be
opened before the system starts to detect a
transfer or hang up sequence. Open loop
intervals shorter than the setting are ignored
by the ASTU PCB.
Maximum Hookflash
Time
For ASTU PCBs, this timer defines the maximum amount of time the loop can be
opened in order for the system to detect a
Transfer sequence. Open loop intervals
longer than the setting are interpreted as
hang up.
Minimum Ground Flash
Time
For ground start applications with ASTU
PCBs, this timer sets the amount of time a
ground must be applied before the system
detects a transfer sequence. The ASTU uses
this timer when analog telephones use
ground Transfer instead of open loop Transfer. This timer is not used in North America. Do not change this timer from its
default value.
Minimum Off-Hook Time
For ASTU PCBs, this timer defines how
long a connected analog device must remain
off-hook before the system recognizes the
off-hook status.
Off-Hook Guard Time
The ASTU PCB waits this interval after an
analog device hangs up before accepting any
additional input from the device. This timer
helps prevent erroneous detection due to
hardware stabilization.
390 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
MIN MAKE TIME?
20 (100 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
MIN FLASH TIME?
21 (105 MS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
MAX FLASH TIME?
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
MIN GND TIME?
200 (1000 mS
/ 1 second)
21 (105 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
MIN GND TIME?
21 (105 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
OFF HOOK GUARD?
60 (300 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
DS2000 Software Manual
0400 - Timers
0404 - Analog Station Timers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Dial Pulse Guard Timer
The ASTU PCB waits this interval between
dial pulse digits before attempting to detect
any additional DP digits. This timer helps
prevent erroneous DP dialing due to hardware stabilization.
DIAL GUARD?
70 (350 mS)
Loop Disconnect Time
Ring/MW Wait Period
Time
When the far end disconnects, the ASTU
PCB opens the loop to the connected analog
device for this interval.
This timer determines the ringing sequence
for the devices connected ASTU PCBs.
Because of power consumption, it is not possible to ring all analog devices on an ASTU
simultaneously. Instead, the card is divided
into 4 groups with two ports in each group.
Ringing cycles between the 4 groups, ringing each group for this interval.
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
LOOP DISC TIME?
40 (200 mS)
1-255
(5-1275 mS in 5 mS
increments [e.g., 2 =
10mS, 3 = 15 mS, 4 = 20
mS)
RING/MW PERIOD?
15 (750 mS)
1-255
(50-12750 mS in 50 mS
increments [e.g., 2 = 100
mS, 3 = 150 mS, 4 = 200
mS)
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0404 + HOLD
0403:ASTU TIMERS
COUNTRY DATA?
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the timer you want to change + HOLD
Enter data for the displayed timer + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another timer.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 391
0500 - System Numbering
0501 - Numbering Plan
0500 - System Numbering
0501 - Numbering Plan
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0501- Numbering Plan to customize the system’s number plan. For each dialed
digit (0-9, excluding # and *), assign a Function Type and an Expected Digits entry. Function Type
defines the digit’s function in the system (see the table below).
Function Type
Description
1
Operator Access
2
Intercom and Direct Trunk Access
3
Trunk Group Access
Expected Digits sets how many digits the system expects to receive when the digit string begins
with selected digit. For example, digit 3 has Function Type 2 and Expected Digits 3. This means
that digits 300-399 are Intercom numbers.
Refer to Flexible Numbering Plan on page 134 for more on customizing the system’s number plan.
Conditions
None
Table 25: Program 0501 - Numbering Plan
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Digit 0 Options
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 0. These
strings are normally used for telephone system operator access (1).
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“0” FUNCTION TYP?
1
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 0. These strings
are normally two digits long (2).
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“0” EXPECTED DGTS”
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 1. These
strings are normally reserved for Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“1” FUNCTION TYP?
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 1. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“1” EXPECTED DGTS”
Digit 1 Options
392 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
1-3
2
1-3
2
1-3
3
1-3
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0501 - Numbering Plan
Table 25: Program 0501 - Numbering Plan
Option
Digit 2 Options
Digit 3 Options
Digit 4 Options
Digit 5 Options
DS2000 Software Manual
Description
Entries
Default
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 2. These
strings are normally reserved for Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“2” FUNCTION TYP?
2
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 2. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“2” EXPECTED DGTS”
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 3. These
strings are by default assigned to Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“3” FUNCTION TYP?
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 3. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“3” EXPECTED DGTS”
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 4. These
strings are by default assigned to Direct
Trunk Access (2).
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Direct Trunk Access on page 106 for
more.
“4” FUNCTION TYP?
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 4. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Direct Trunk Access on page 106 for
more.
“4” EXPECTED DGTS”
1-3
3
1-3
2
1-3
3
1-3
2
1-3
3
1-3
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 5. These
strings are normally reserved for Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“5” FUNCTION TYP?
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 5. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“5” EXPECTED DGTS”
2
1-3
3
1-3
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 393
0500 - System Numbering
0501 - Numbering Plan
Table 25: Program 0501 - Numbering Plan
Option
Digit 6 Options
Digit 7 Options
Digit 8 Options
Digit 9 Options
Description
Entries
Default
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 6. These
strings are normally reserved for Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“6” FUNCTION TYP?
2
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 6. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“6” EXPECTED DGTS”
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 7. These
strings are normally reserved for Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“7” FUNCTION TYP?
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 7. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“7” EXPECTED DGTS”
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 8. These
strings are normally reserved for Intercom
access (2).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“8” FUNCTION TYP?
Use this option to define the total length of
dial strings beginning with 8. These strings
are normally three digits long (3).
• See Intercom on page 165 for more.
“8” EXPECTED DGTS”
Use this option to define the function type
for dial strings beginning with 9. These
strings are normally reserved to trunk access
(3).
• See Automatic Route Selection on
page 34 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Trunk Group Routing on page 329
for more.
• See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
“9” FUNCTION TYP?
394 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
1-3
3
1-3
2
1-3
3
1-3
2
1-3
3
1-3
3
1-3
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0501 - Numbering Plan
Table 25: Program 0501 - Numbering Plan
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Single Digit Access
Use this option to enable or disable single
digit access. If enabled (Y), users can dial 9
to select their assigned dial 9 Trunk Group.
If disabled, users must dial 9 followed by the
Trunk Group number (0-8 for Trunk Groups
0-8).
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Trunk Group Routing on page 329
for more.
SINGL DGT ACCESS?
Y
Y or N
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0501 + HOLD
0501:NUMBERING PLAN
“0” FUNCTION TYP?
3.
4.
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter data for the displayed option + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to the option you want to change + HOLD
Enter data for the displayed option + HOLD
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll to another option.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 395
0500 - System Numbering
0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0504- Trunk Port Extension Numbers to assign extension numbers to trunk ports.
The extension numbers you enter must be unique and not overlap extension numbers used for
extensions, ACI ports, DCI ports and Extension Hunting master numbers.
●
Ports 001 -016 are the system’s physical trunk ports.
Ports 017-032 are virtual ports used for DID trunks and OPX extensions.
Conditions
None
Table 26: Program 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Extension Number
For the trunk port selected, use this option to
enter the extension number associated with
the port.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Flexible Numbering Plan on
page 134 for more.
EXT NUM?
Not assigned
Name
For the trunk port selected, this option shows
the name associated with the port.
• See Names for Extensions and Trunks on
page 198 for more.
•
NAME?
View only
View only
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0504 + HOLD
0504:TRUNK ID
TRUNK PORT?
3.
Enter the number of the trunk port you want to program (01-32) + HOLD.
0504:TRUNK ID-PT:nnn
EXT NUM?nnn
4.
The previously programmed extension number displays.
Enter the number of the extension you want assigned to the port.
OR
Press HOLD to leave the entry unchanged.
0504:TRUNK ID-PT:nnn
NAME?(name)
The previously programmed name displays.
396 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
Return to step 3 and enter another trunk port.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 397
0500 - System Numbering
0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers
0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.Will swap port/extension numbers but not programming.
Use Program 0505- Station Port Extension Numbers to assign extension numbers to station
ports. The extension numbers you enter must be unique and not overlap extension numbers used for
trunks, ACI ports, DCI ports and Extension Hunting master numbers.
●
Ports 001 -032 are the system’s physical extension ports.
●
Ports 033-048 are virtual ports used for DID trunks and OPX extensions.
Conditions
None
Table 27: Program 0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Extension Number
For the station port selected, use this option
to enter the extension number associated
with the port.
• See Flexible Numbering Plan on
page 134 for more.
EXT NUM?
Not assigned
Name
For the station port selected, this option
shows the name associated with the port.
• See Names for Extensions and Trunks on
page 198 for more.
•
NAME?
View only
View only
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0505 + HOLD
0505:STA ID
STATION PORT?
3.
Enter the number of the station port you want to program (01-48) + HOLD.
0505:STA ID-PT:nnn
EXT NUM?nnn
4.
The previously programmed extension number displays.
Enter the number of the extension you want assigned to the port.
OR
Press HOLD to leave the entry unchanged.
0505:STA ID-PT:nnn
NAME?(name)
5.
The previously programmed name displays.
Return to step 3 and enter another station port.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program number.
398 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 399
0500 - System Numbering
0506 - ACI/CPU Analog Port Extension Numbers and Names
0506 - ACI/CPU Analog Port Extension Numbers and Names
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
400 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0507 - DCI Extension Numbers and Names
0507 - DCI Extension Numbers and Names
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 401
0500 - System Numbering
0510 - ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names
0510 - ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0510- ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names to assign extension
numbers and names to the ACD/UCD master extensions. The system can have up to eight ACD/
UCD groups (1-8). The extension numbers you enter must be unique and cannot be a physical port
(e.g., 300).
Conditions
None
Table 28: Program 0510 - ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names
Option
Description
Group Number
Use this option to select the ACD/UCD
group you want to program.
Hunt Group Master
Number
Use this option to enter the master extension
number associated with the group selected.
• See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
on page 28 for more.
• See Flexible Numbering Plan on
page 134 for more.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
Overflow Destination
Use this option to assign the ACD/UCD
Group overflow destination.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
Name
Use this option to enter the name associated
with the group selected.
• See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
on page 28 for more.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
• When entering names, use Table 17:
Keys for Entering Names on page 361.
Entries
Default
GROUP NUM?
N/A
EXT NUM?
Group 1 = 700
(for Voice
Mail).
All other
groups are not
assigned.
UCD Hunting group
master numbers can be
100-299, 332-400, or
417-899. They cannot be
in the extension (300331) or trunk (401-416)
number range. By
default, the systems uses
codes beginning with 0
for operator access and 9
for trunk/trunk group
access.
OVERFLOW DEST?
Not assigned
300-331 (extensions 300331), Ring Group Master
Number, or UCD Group
Master Number
NAME?
Not assigned
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
Enter the programming mode.
402 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0510 - ACD/UCD Master Extension Numbers and Names
2.
0510 + HOLD
0510:ACD ID
GROUP NUM?
3.
Enter the number of the group you want to program (1-8) + HOLD.
0510:ACD ID-GROUP:nn
EXT NUM?nnn
4.
The previously programmed extension number displays.
Enter the number of the extension you want assigned to the group.
OR
Press HOLD to leave the entry unchanged.
0510:ACD ID-GROUP:nn
NAME?(name)
5.
The previously programmed name displays.
Enter the name for the group (10 character maximum) + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to leave the displayed name unchanged.
0510:ACD ID
GROUP NUM?
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
Return to step 3 and enter another group.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 403
telemanuals.com
0500 - System Numbering
0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names
0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0511- Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names to assign extension
numbers and names to the Ring Group master extensions. The system can have up to eight Ring
Groups (1-8). The extension numbers you enter must be unique and not overlap extension numbers
used for trunks, extensions, ACI ports, DCI ports or Extension Hunting master numbers.
Conditions
None
Table 29: Program 0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names
Option
Description
Extension Number
Use this option to enter the extension number associated with the Ring Group selected.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Flexible Numbering Plan on
page 134 for more.
• See Ring Groups on page 248 for more.
Name
Use this option to enter the name associated
with the Ring Group selected.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Ring Groups on page 248 for more.
• When entering names, use Table 17:
Keys for Entering Names on page 361.
404 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entries
Default
EXT NUM?
Not assigned
Ring Group master numbers can be 100-299, 332400, or 417-899. They
cannot be in the extension (300-331) or trunk
(401-416) number range.
By default, the systems
uses codes beginning
with 0 for operator access
and 9 for trunk/trunk
group access.
NAME?
Not assigned
DS2000 Software Manual
0500 - System Numbering
0511 - Ring Group Master Extension Numbers and Names
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0511 + HOLD
0511:RING GROUP ID
GROUP NUM?
3.
Enter the number of the group you want to program (1-8) + HOLD.
0511:RING GROUP:nn
EXT NUM?nnn
4.
The previously programmed extension number displays.
Enter the number of the extension you want assigned to the group.
OR
Press HOLD to leave the entry unchanged.
0511:RING GROUP:nn
NAME?(name)
5.
The previously programmed name displays.
Enter the name for the group (10 character maximum) + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to leave the displayed name unchanged.
0511:RING GROUP ID
GROUP NUM?
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
Return to step 3 and enter another group.
OR
Press HOLD to return to step 2 and enter another program
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 405
telemanuals.com
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
Use Program 0601- Toll Restriction Options to assign Toll Restriction options to each of the
seven Toll Levels (1-7). When you assign a Toll Level to an extension, the extension uses the
options set up in this program.
Conditions
None
Table 30: Program 0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Option
Description
Program Toll Restriction
Use this option to program Toll Restriction.
(You must always use the following option
to initialize Toll Restriction before using it
for the first time.)
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
Initialize Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Level
Active Dial Pad
N11 Dialing
Use this option to initialize Toll Restriction.
You must always initialize Toll Restriction
before using if for the first time. If you have
already programmed Toll Restriction, initializing will erase all your entries and reinstate
the default Toll Restriction values.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
Entries
Default
PROG-P
N/A
P = Program
INIT-I
Use this option to select the Toll Restriction
level you want to program. The entries that
follow pertain to the Toll Restriction Level
you select in this step.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
TOLL LEVEL
Use this option to enable or disable Active
Dial Pad (continuous dialing) for trunk calls.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
ACTIVE DIAL PAD?
Use this option to enable or disable dial N11
services such as directory assistance (411)
and repair (611). This option does not
restrict 911 or 1 + 911 calls. These calls are
always allowed.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
N11 DIALING?
406 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
N/A
I = Initialize
1
1-7
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
DS2000 Software Manual
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Table 30: Program 0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
0 + Dialing
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to manually dial 0 + (operator
assisted) calls.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
0 + DIALING?
Y
International Dialing
Equal Access Dialing
Use this option to enable or disable 011
(international) dialing.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
This option allows/prevents an extension
user from directly dialing Equal Access
(10XXX) calls. The system compares the
10XXX codes the user dials to the 10XXX
table that you program.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
• See Toll Restriction Rules on page 317
for more.
•
•
NXX Dialing
This option allows/prevents an extension
user from directly dialing NXX (local
exchange) calls. The system compares the
NXX codes the user dials to the NXX table
that you program.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
• See Toll Restriction Rules on page 317
for more.
•
•
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter A to set the table up as an allow
table, or D to set the table up as a deny
table.
D to convert an existing allow table into
a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
Enter A to set the table up as an allow
table, or D to set the table up as a deny
table.
D to convert an existing allow table into
a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
INT’L DIAL?
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
10+XXX DIALING
ALLOW OR DENY
TABLE?
A
(Allow table)
A = Allow Table
D = Deny Table
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D
N/A
A = Add a code to the
table
D = Delete a code from
the table
V = View the table entries
NXX DIALING
ALLOW OR DENY
TABLE?
A
(Allow table)
A = Allow Table
D = Deny Table
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D
N/A
A = Add a code to the
table
D = Delete a code from
the table
V = View the table entries
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 407
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Table 30: Program 0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Option
Description
Entries
Default
NPA Dialing
This option allows/prevents an extension
user from directly dialing NPA (area code)
calls. The system compares the NPA codes
the user dials to the NPA table that you program.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
• See Toll Restriction Rules on page 317
for more.
NPA DIALING
ALLOW OR DENY
TABLE?
A
(Allow table)
•
•
6-Digit Analysis
Enter A to set the table up as an allow
table, or D to set the table up as a deny
table.
D to convert an existing allow table into
a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
This option enables/disables 6-Digit Analysis. With 6-Digit Analysis, the system
restricts a call according the NPA and NXX
the user dials. The system compares the
codes the user dials to the 6-Digital Analysis
table that you program.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
• See Toll Restriction Rules on page 317
for more.
•
•
Enter A to set the table up as an allow
table, or D to set the table up as a deny
table.
D to convert an existing allow table into
a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
408 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
A = Allow Table
D = Deny Table
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D
N/A
A = Add a code to the
table
D = Delete a code from
the table
V = View the table entries
6 DGT ANALYSIS
ALLOW OR DENY
TABLE?
A
(Allow table)
A = Allow Table
D = Deny Table
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D
N/A
A = Add a code to the
table
D = Delete a code from
the table
V = View the table entries
DS2000 Software Manual
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
Telephone Programming Instructions
To quickly locate the procedure for a Toll Restriction option, go to the steps listed below:
●
To select the Toll Level you want to program, go to step 4.
●
To enable or disable Active Dial Pad, go to step 5.
●
If setting up N11 Dialing, go to step 6.
●
When enabling or disabling 0+ Dialing, go to step 7.
●
For International Dialing options, go to step 8.
●
When programming Equal Access (10XXX) Dialing, go to step 9.
●
If you want to configure NXX Dialing, go to step 12.
●
To select the NPA Dialing options, go to step 15.
●
To set up 6-Digit Analysis, go to 18.
1.
Enter the programming mode.
2.
0601 + HOLD.
0601:TOLL RESTRICT
PROG-P / INIT-I?
3.
Enter P (7) to program Toll Restriction and go to the next step.
0601:TOLL RESTRICT
TOLL LEVEL?1
OR
Enter I (4) + HOLD to initialize Toll Restriction and return to the previous step.
0601:TOLL RESTRICT
TABLES INITIALIZED!
You must always initialize Toll Restriction when programming it for the first time. If
you initialize an existing Toll Restriction setup, you’ll return all your programmed entries
to their factory-installed initial values.
Toll Level
4.
Enter the Toll Level you want to program (1-7) + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select the currently displayed Toll Level.
0601:TOLL LEVEL:n
ACTIVE DIAL PAD?n
The options that follow pertain to the Toll Level selected.
Active Dial Pad
5.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable Active Dial Pad + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to select the currently displayed value.
0601:TOLL LEVEL:n
N11 DIALING?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
N11 Dialing
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter Y to enable or N to disable N11 Dialing + VOL ▲.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 409
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
OR
Press VOL ▲ to select the currently displayed value.
0601:TOLL LEVEL:n
0 + DIALING?nnn
The previously programmed value displays
0+ Dialing
7.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable 0+ Dialing + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to select the currently displayed value.
0601:TOLL LEVEL:n
INT’L DIAL?nnn
The previously programmed value displays
International Dialing
8.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable International Dialing + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to select the currently displayed value.
0601:10+XXX DIALING
ALLOW OR DENY TABLE?
The previously programmed table type displays (A = allow, D = deny).
Equal Access (10XXX) Dialing
9.
Enter A to set up the table as an allow table.
OR
Enter D to set up the table as a deny table.
0601:10+XXX ALLW TBL
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
OR
0601:10+XXX DENY TBL
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
Enter D to convert an existing allow table into a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
10. Press A to add codes into the table.
OR
Press D to delete codes from the table.
OR
Press V to view the current contents of the table.
If you press V to view the table, the bottom line of the display will show the first set of
table entries. Press V to see the remaining entries. The prompt TABLE DONE tells you
when you are at the end of the table or the table is empty. The prompt > tells you that there
is additional data in the table to view.
If you press A or D to add codes into the table, you see the prompt DATA. Just enter the
codes you want into the table. When entering data, new data appears to the right of the
previously entered data. (The system automatically assumes that every group of three digits is an entry.)
11. When you are done entering data, press VOL ▲ to go to the next option.
0601:NXX DIALING
ALLOW OR DENY TABLE?
410 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
The previously programmed table type displays (A = allow, D = deny).
NXX Dialing
12. Enter A to set up the table as an allow table.
OR
Enter D to set up the table as a deny table.
0601:NXX ALLOW TABLE
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
OR
0601:NXX DENY TABLE
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
Enter D to convert an existing allow table into a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
13. Press A to add codes into the table.
OR
Press D to delete codes from the table.
OR
Press V to view the current contents of the table.
If you press V to view the table, the bottom line of the display will show the first set of
table entries. Press V to see the remaining entries. The prompt TABLE DONE tells you
when you are at the end of the table or the table is empty. The prompt > tells you that there
is additional data in the table to view.
If you press A or D to add codes into the table, you see the prompt DATA. Just enter the
codes you want into the table. When entering data, new data appears to the right of the
previously entered data. (The system automatically assumes that every group of three digits is an entry.)
14. When you are done entering data, press VOL ▲ to go to the next option.
0601:NPA DIALING
ALLOW OR DENY TABLE?
The previously programmed table type displays (A = allow, D = deny).
NPA Dialing
15. Enter A to set up the table as an allow table.
OR
Enter D to set up the table as a deny table.
0601:NPA ALLOW TABLE
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
OR
0601:NPA DENY TABLE
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
Enter D to convert an existing allow table into a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
16. Press A to add codes into the table.
OR
Press D to delete codes from the table.
OR
Press V to view the current contents of the table.
If you press V to view the table, the bottom line of the display will show the first set of
table entries. Press V to see the remaining entries. The prompt TABLE DONE tells you
when you are at the end of the table or the table is empty. The prompt > tells you that there
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 411
0600 - Toll Restriction
0601 - Toll Restriction Options
is additional data in the table to view.
If you press A or D to add codes into the table, you see the prompt DATA. Just enter the
codes you want into the table. When entering data, new data appears to the right of the
previously entered data. (The system automatically assumes that every group of three digits is an entry.)
17. When you are done entering data, press VOL ▲ to go to the next option.
0601:6 DGT ANALYSIS
ALLOW OR DENY TABLE?
The previously programmed table type displays (A = allow, D = deny).
6-Digit Analysis
18. Enter A to set up the table as an allow table.
OR
Enter D to set up the table as a deny table.
0601:6 DGT ALLOW TBL
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
OR
0601:6 DGT ALLOW TBL
ADD-A/VIEW-V/DEL-D?
Enter D to convert an existing allow table into a deny table, or enter A to convert an
existing deny table into an allow table.
19. Press A to add codes into the table.
OR
Press D to delete codes from the table.
OR
Press V to view the current contents of the table.
If you press V to view the table, the bottom line of the display will show the first set of
table entries. Press V to see the remaining entries. The prompt TABLE DONE tells you
when you are at the end of the table or the table is empty. The prompt > tells you that there
is additional data in the table to view.
If you press A or D to add codes into the table, you see the prompt DATA. Just enter the
codes you want into the table. When entering data, new data appears to the right of the
previously entered data. (The system automatically assumes that every group of six digits
is an entry.)
20. When you are done entering data, press VOL ▲ to go back to the Active Dial Pad option for
the currently selected Toll Level.
0601:TOLL LEVEL:n
ACTIVE DIAL PAD?nn
OR
Press CONF to go back to the Program/Initialize option.
0601:TOLL RESTRICT
PROG-P / INIT-I
OR
Press CONF twice to exit Toll Restriction programming.
412 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0700 - Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
0701 - Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Options
0700 - Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
0701 - Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Options
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 413
0800 - Display Messages
0801 - Selectable Display Messages
0800 - Display Messages
0801 - Selectable Display Messages
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages to program the system’s 16 Selectable Display
Messages. Each message can be up to 20 characters long, including a blank spaces you may want to
ad for readability. All messages are appendable by user-entered digits.
When entering names, use Table 17: Keys for Entering Names on page 361. When creating a new
user-appendable message, consider adding a space at the end of the text portion to improve readability. In the table, the X characters reserve space for user-entered digits.
●
See Selectable Display Messaging on page 256 for more.
Conditions
None
Table 31: Program 0801 - Selectable Display Messages
Option
Default
Message 01
CALL (plus 15 user entries)
Message 02
BACK BY (plus 12 user entries)
Message 03
MEETING IN RM (plus 4 user entries)
Message 04
OUT TO LUNCH (plus 7 user entries)
Message 05
GONE FOR THE DAY (plus 3 user entries)
Message 06
ON VACATION (plus 8 user entries)
Message 07
ON BUSINESS TRIP (plus 3 user entries)
Message 08
IN THE MEETING (plus 7 user entries)
Message 09
OUT UNTIL (plus 10 user entries)
Message 10
GONE FOR THE DAY (plus 3 user entries)
Message 11
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 12
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 13
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 14
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 15
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Message 16
Undefined (up to 20 characters)
Telephone Programming Instructions
414 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
0800 - Display Messages
0801 - Selectable Display Messages
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
0801 + HOLD
0801:DISPLAY MESSAGE
MESSAGE NUM?
3.
Enter the number of the message you want to program + HOLD.
0801:DISPLAY MESSAGE
(message text)
4.
The previously programmed message displays.
Enter the new display message + HOLD.
When entering a message, refer to 0506 - ACI/CPU Analog Port Extension Numbers
and Names on page 400.
OR
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
0801:DISPLAY MESSAGE
MESSAGE NUM?
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 415
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description to program various options for trunks ports.
Also see Program 1003 - Trunk Options on page 426.
Conditions
Per FCC regulations, do not set 1001- Trunk Transmit Gain on page 417 higher than 0 dB.
Table 32: Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description
Option
Description
Trunk Circuit Type
Use this option to set the trunk’s circuit type.
Set this option for compatibility with the
connected telco or PBX.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Direct Inward Dialing on page 87
for more.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
•
• See Pulse to Tone Conversion on
page 240 for more.
Trunk Extension Number
Trunk Name
This option displays the trunk’s extension
number programmed in 0504 - Trunk Port
Extension Numbers on page 396. This is for
viewing only. You cannot edit this option
from Program 1001.
Use this option to assign a name to the trunk
port.
• Refer to Table 17: Keys for Entering
Names on page 361 when entering
names.
• See Names for Extensions and Trunks on
page 198 for more.
416 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entries
Default
TYP?
51
00 = Uninstalled
51 = Loop start DTMF
52 = Loop start DP
EXT:
(View only)
4nn
(View only)
NAME:
TRUNK nn
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
Table 32: Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Trunk Transmit Gain
Use this option to set the trunk’s transmit
gain. This gain setting allows you to compensate for the transmit gain characteristics
of the connected telco or PBX.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Direct Inward Dialing on page 87
for more.
•
• See PBX/Centrex Compatibility on
page 222 for more.
TRANSMIT GAIN?
0
DS2000 Software Manual
0 = 0 dB gain
1 = .5 dB gain
2 = 1 dB gain
3 = 1.5 dB gain
4 = 2 dB gain
5 = 2.5 dB gain
6 = 3 dB gain
7 = 3.5 dB gain
8 = 4 dB gain
9 = 4.5 dB gain
10 = 5 dB gain
11 = 5.5 dB gain
12 = 6 dB gain
13 = 6.5 dB gain
14 = 7 dB gain
15 = 7.5 dB gain
16 = 8 dB gain
17 = 8.5 dB gain
18 = 9 dB gain
19 = 9.5 dB gain
20 = 10 dB gain
21 = 10.5 dB gain
22 = 11 dB gain
23 = -11.5 dB gain
24 = 12 dB gain
25 = 12.5 dB gain
26 = 13 dB gain
27 = 13.5 dB gain
28 = 14 dB gain
29 = 14.5 dB gain
30 = 15 dB gain
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 417
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
Table 32: Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description
Option
Description
Entries
Default
TRANSMIT GAIN?
0
(Cont’d)
31 = .5 dB loss
32 = 1 dB loss
33 = 1.5 dB loss
34 = 2 dB loss
35 = 2.5 dB loss
36 = 3 dB loss
37 = 3.5 dB loss
38 = 4 dB loss
39 = 4.5 dB loss
40 = 5 dB loss
41 = 5.5 dB loss
42 = 6 dB loss
43 = 6.5 dB loss
44 = 7 dB loss
45 = 7.5 dB loss
46 = 8 dB loss
47 = 8.5 dB loss
48 = 9 dB loss
49 = 9.5 dB loss
50 = 10 dB loss
51 = 10.5 dB loss
52 = 11 dB loss
53 = 11.5 dB loss
54 = 12 db loss
55 = 12.5 dB loss
56 = 13 dB loss
57 = 13.5 dB loss
58 = 14 dB loss
59 = 14.5 loss
60 = 15 dB loss
418 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
Table 32: Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Trunk Receive Gain
Use this option to set the trunk’s receive
gain. This gain setting allows you to compensate for the receive gain characteristics of
the connected telco or PBX.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Direct Inward Dialing on page 87
for more.
•
• See PBX/Centrex Compatibility on
page 222 for more.
RECEIVE GAIN?
0
DS2000 Software Manual
0 = 0 dB gain
1 = .5 dB gain
2 = 1 dB gain
3 = 1.5 dB gain
4 = 2 dB gain
5 = 2.5 dB gain
6 = 3 dB gain
7 = 3.5 dB gain
8 = 4 dB gain
9 = 4.5 dB gain
10 = 5 dB gain
11 = 5.5 dB gain
12 = 6 dB gain
13 = 6.5 dB gain
14 = 7 dB gain
15 = 7.5 dB gain
16 = 8 dB gain
17 = 8.5 dB gain
18 = 9 dB gain
19 = 9.5 dB gain
20 = 10 dB gain
21 = 10.5 dB gain
22 = 11 dB gain
23 = -11.5 dB gain
24 = 12 dB gain
25 = 12.5 dB gain
26 = 13 dB gain
27 = 13.5 dB gain
28 = 14 dB gain
29 = 14.5 dB gain
30 = 15 dB gain
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 419
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
Table 32: Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description
Option
Description
Entries
Default
RECEIVE GAIN?
0
(Cont’d)
31 = .5 dB loss
32 = 1 dB loss
33 = 1.5 dB loss
34 = 2 dB loss
35 = 2.5 dB loss
36 = 3 dB loss
37 = 3.5 dB loss
38 = 4 dB loss
39 = 4.5 dB loss
40 = 5 dB loss
41 = 5.5 dB loss
42 = 6 dB loss
43 = 6.5 dB loss
44 = 7 dB loss
45 = 7.5 dB loss
46 = 8 dB loss
47 = 8.5 dB loss
48 = 9 dB loss
49 = 9.5 dB loss
50 = 10 dB loss
51 = 10.5 dB loss
52 = 11 dB loss
53 = 11.5 dB loss
54 = 12 db loss
55 = 12.5 dB loss
56 = 13 dB loss
57 = 13.5 dB loss
58 = 14 dB loss
59 = 14.5 loss
60 = 15 dB loss
Trunk Class of Service
Assignment
PBX Line
Loop Length
Use this option to assign Class of Service (115) to OPX trunks and tie lines.
•
• See Tie Lines on page 311 for more.
Use this option to designate a trunk as a
PBX line. Enable this option if the trunk
connects to a PBX instead of the telco.
• See PBX/Centrex Compatibility on
page 222 for more.
Use this option to compensate for a trunk’s
loop length. Use the short option (1) only
when the system is very close to the central
office or behind a PBX. Use the long option
(2) for normal installations.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
420 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
CLASS OF SERVICE?
1
1-15
PBX LINE
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
LOOP LENGTH
2 (Long loop)
1 = Short loop
2 = Long loop
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
Table 32: Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Trunk Toll Restriction
Level
Use this option to set the Toll Level of the
trunk during the day mode. If this Toll Level
is higher than the extension’s Toll Level, it
may cause additional dialing restrictions. If
it is lower, it will have no effect.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
TOLL LEVEL?
0
Override Extension Toll
Restriction
Use this option to “release” the Toll Restriction on a trunk. If enabled, any user can dial
any number on the trunk without restriction.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
Print SMDR
Use this option to have the SMDR report
include or exclude the trunk.
• See Station Message Detail Recording
on page 277 for more.
0-7
OVRD EXT TL LVL?
No
Y = Toll Restriction overridden
N = Toll Restriction not
overridden
PRINT SMDR?
Yes
Y = Yes (include in
SMDR report)
N = No (exclude from
SMDR report)
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1001 + HOLD
1001:TRK DESCRIPTION
TRUNK PORT?
3.
Enter the number of the trunk you want to program (1-16) + HOLD.
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
TYPE?n
4.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the new trunk circuit type + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current circuit type unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
EXT:nnn
The extension number programmed in 0504 - Trunk Port Extension Numbers on
page 396displays. You cannot edit this option.
5.
Press VOL ▲.
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
NAME:nnnnnn
Enter the trunk name. Refer to Programming Names and Text Messages on page 361 if
you need help with entering names.
6.
Press VOL ▲.
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
TRANSMIT GAIN?
7.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter the new transmit gain + VOL ▲.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 421
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the transmit gain unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
RECEIVE GAIN?
8.
Enter the new receive gain + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current receive gain unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
CLASS OF SERVICE?
9.
Enter the new Class of Service for the trunk + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current Class of Service unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
PBX LINE?
10. Enter Y ro assign or N to unassign the line as a PBX line + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
LOOP LENGTH?
11. Enter 1 for shor loop or 2 for long loop (the normal setting) + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
TOLL LEVEL?
12. Enter the new Toll Level for the trunk (1-7) + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current Toll Level unchanged
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
OVRD EXT TL LVL?
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged.
13. Enter Y + VOL ▲ to override (release) Toll Restriction for the trunk.
OR
Enter N + VOL ▲ to enforce the extension’s Toll Restriction.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged.
1001: TRUNK PORT?:n
PRINT SMDR?
14. Enter Y + VOL ▲ to have calls on the trunk included on the SMDR report.
OR
Enter N + VOL ▲ to have the calls excluded from the SMDR report.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged.
1001:TRUNK PORT?:n
TYPE?nnnnnnnn
15. Enter new circuit type data for the selected trunk.
OR
Press CONF to select another trunk.
422 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1001 - Trunk Port Description
OR
Press CONF twice to exit the program.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 423
1000 - Trunk Programming
1002 - Trunk Groups
1002 - Trunk Groups
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1002 - Trunk Groups to assign trunks (1-16) to trunk groups (0-8). This program
also lets you assign the priority of trunks within each group. When a user seizes a trunk group, the
system selects the lowest order trunk in the group first. If the lowest order trunk is busy or out of
service, the system searches sequentially by order number (e.g., from order 01 to order 02) for the
first available trunk.
Conditions
None
Table 33: Program 1002 - Trunk Groups
Option
Description
Trunk Group
•
•
•
Order Number
Use this option to select the trunk group
you want to program. A trunk can only
be in one group.See Loop Keys on
page 179 for more.
See Trunk Group Routing on page 329
for more.
See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
Entries
Default
TRUNK GROUP?
0-8
Trunks 1-8 are
not assigned to
a trunk group.
Trunks 9-16
are in group 0.
ORDER nn:
TRK NUM?nn
The trunk’s
order is the
same as its
port number
(e.g., 1=1,
2=2).
Use this option to set the priority of the trunk
within the group. When a user seizes a trunk
group, the system selects the lowest priority
trunk within the group first.
• See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1002 + HOLD
1002: TRUNK GROUPS
TRUNK GROUP?
3.
Select the trunk group you want to program + HOLD.
1002: TRUNK GROUP nn
ORDER 01: TRK NUM?nn
4.
The trunk currently assigned to order 01 displays.
Enter the trunk you want to assign to order 01 + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1002:TRUNK GROUP nn
ORDER 02: TRK NUM?nn
5.
When you are done entering data for the group, press HOLD
6.
Return to step 2 and select another trunk group to program.
424 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1002 - Trunk Groups
OR
Press CONF to exit the program.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 425
1000 - Trunk Programming
1003 - Trunk Options
1003 - Trunk Options
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1003 - Trunk Options to program various options for trunks.
Also see Program 1001 - Trunk Port Description on page 416.
Conditions
None
Table 34: Program 1003 - Trunk Options (Part 2)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Call Pickup Group
Use this option to have an incoming call on
the trunk ring all the extensions in the
assigned pickup group.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
PICK-UP GROUP?
0
If the trunk is a Direct Inward Line, use this
option to set the day termination (answering
point). The DIL rings the answering point
directly. This option has no effect on other
types of trunks.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
DAY TERMINATION?
Direct Termination (Day)
Activate Overflow During
the Day
Use this option to enable or disable overflow
during the day mode.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
Day Overflow
Destination
Use this option to set the overflow destination for day mode calls (including DILs).
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
Direct Termination
(Night)
If the trunk is a Direct Inward Line, use this
option to set the night termination (answering point). The DIL rings the answering
point directly at night. This option has no
effect on other types of trunks.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
426 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
1-8
0 = Unassigned
Key Ring
300-331 (extensions),
UCD master number,
Voice Mail master number, Ring Group master
number or Key Ring (by
pressing CLEAR)
DAY OVERFLOW?
N
Y = Day overflow
enabled
N = Day overflow disabled
DAY OVRFLW DEST?
300
300-331 (extensions),
UCD master number,
Voice Mail master number, Ring Group master
number or Key Ring (by
pressing CLEAR)
NT TERMINATION?
Key Ring
300-331 (extensions),
UCD master number,
Voice Mail master number, Ring Group master
number or Key Ring (by
pressing CLEAR)
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1003 - Trunk Options
Table 34: Program 1003 - Trunk Options (Part 2)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Activate Overflow at
Night
Use this option the enable or disable Night
Ring (Universal Night Answer). If enabled,
the trunk will activate UNA if it rings while
the system is in the night mode.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
NIGHT OVERFLOW?
N
Night Overflow
Destination
Use this option to set the overflow destination for Night Mode calls.
• See Direct Inward Line on page 88 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
Distinctive Ring
Use this option to set the Distinctive Ring
tone for the trunk. Extension users can adjust
the ring frequency of tones 1-6. Tones 7 and
8 are fixed.
• See Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash
Patterns on page 113 for more.
DISTINCTIVE RING?
Use this option to assign the Music on Hold
music source.
• See Music On Hold on page 195 for
more.
MOH SOURCE?
MOH Source
Tandem Trunk
Use this option to enable or disable a trunk’s
ability to be included in an Unsupervised
Conference.
• See Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised
Conference on page 307 for more.
Y = Night overflow
enabled
N = Night overflow disabled
NT OVRFLW DEST?
300
300-331 (extensions),
UCD master number,
Voice Mail master number, Ring Group master
number or Key Ring (by
pressing CLEAR)
1
1-8
1
0 = None
1 = External (CPU terminals)
2 = Tone 1 (low pitch)
3 = Tone 2 (high pitch)
4 = ACI port (currently
not used)
TANDEM TRUNK?
N
Y = Unsupervised Conference enabled
N = Unsupervised Conference disabled
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1003 + HOLD
1003: TRUNK OPTION
TRUNK PORT?
Press CONF at any time to back up to the previous entry. This automatically saves
your data entry,
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 427
1000 - Trunk Programming
1003 - Trunk Options
3.
Select the trunk port you want to program + HOLD.
1003: TRUNK OPTION
PICK-UP GROUP?nn
4.
The previously programmed Pickup Group displays.
Enter the number of the Pickup Group to which the trunk should belong (1-8, 0 for unassigned) + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
DAY TERM?nnn
5.
The previously programmed assignment displays.
Enter the day mode termination for the trunk + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
DAY OVERFLOW?n
6.
The previously programmed assignment displays.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable day mode ringing for the trunk + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
DAY OVRFLW DEST?nnn
7.
The previously programmed assignment displays.
Enter the day mode overflow destination + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
NIGHT TERM?nnn
8.
The previously programmed assignment displays.
Enter the night mode termination for the trunk + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
NIGHT OVERFLOW?n
9.
The previously programmed assignment displays.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable night mode ringing for the trunk + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
NT OVRFLW DEST?nnn
The previously programmed assignment displays.
10. Enter the night mode overflow destination + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
DISTINCTIVE RING?
The previously programmed assignment displays.
428 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1000 - Trunk Programming
1003 - Trunk Options
11. Enter the Distinctive Ringing tone for the trunk (1-8) + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
MOH SOURCE?nnn
The previously programmed assignment displays.
12. Enter the MOH source for the trunk (0 = No MOH, 1 = External at CPU terminals, 2 = Tone 1
[low pitch], 3 = Tone 2 [high pitch], 4 = ACI port [currently not used]) + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1003:TRUNK OPTION
TANDEM TRUNK?n
The previously programmed assignment displays.
13. Enter Y to enable or N to disable Tandem Trunking capability for the trunk + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
OR
Press CONF to return to step 3 and program another trunk.
OR
Press CONF twice to exit this program.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 429
1000 - Trunk Programming
1004 - Loop Group Assignment
1004 - Loop Group Assignment
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
430 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1100 - Speed Dial
1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
1100 - Speed Dial
1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers to enter numbers and names into the System
Speed Dial bins. The system has up to 1000 Speed Dial bins, depending on the setting of Program
0301 - Number of Digits in a System Speed Dial Code on page 370.
When Number of Digits
in a System Speed Dial
Code is:
System Speed Dial
bin numbers are:
And the total number
of System Speed Dial
bins is:
2
20-29
10
3
200-299
100
4
2000-2999
1000
Speed Dial numbers can be up to x?x? digits long, use 0-9, # and *. In addition, you can enter the
following for additional dialing options:
For this option
Or use this telephone
programming option:
Pause
MIC
Flash
FLASH
Conditions
None
Table 35: Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
Option
System Speed Dial Bin
Line
System Speed Dial
Number
DS2000 Software Manual
Description
Use this option to select the System Speed
Dial bin you want to program.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
Use this option to choose the trunk System
Speed Dial normally selects for the bin you
are programming.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
For the bin selected above, use this option to
enter the System Speed Dial number. The
number can be up to x?x? digits long, using
0-9, # and *. You can also enter special characters (see the table above). Special characters count as a single digit.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
Entries
Default
BIN?
Not assigned
1-10
1-100
1-1000
LINE
1
1-16
NUM?
Not assigned
0-9, #, *, MIC (Pause),
DND (Dial Tone Detect),
FLASH (Flash) or DIAL
(Delay)
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 431
1100 - Speed Dial
1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
Table 35: Program 1101 - System Speed Dial Numbers
Option
Description
System Speed Dial Name
Use this option to enter the name for the
System Speed Dial bin (up to 16 characters).
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
• When entering names, see Programming
Names and Text Messages on page 361.
Entries
Default
NA?
Not assigned
Not assigned
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1101 + HOLD
1101: SYS SPEED DIAL
BIN?nnn
3.
The previously programmed bin displays.
Select the System Speed Dial bin you want to program (20-29, 200-299 or 2000-2999) +
HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to program the currently selected bin.
1101:SPDL BIN:nnnn
NUM?
4.
The System Speed Dial number previously programmed for this selected bin displays.
Enter the System Speed Dial number for the selected bin + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1101:SPDL BIN:nnnn
NA?
5.
Enter the name for the selected System Speed Dial bin + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
432 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1100 - Speed Dial
1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment
1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment to designate blocks for System and Personal
Speed Dial. The system has 57 blocks, with 20 Speed Dial numbers in each block. The following
chart shows how you can allocate blocks in your system, depending on the setting of Program 0301
- Number of Digits in a System Speed Dial Code on page 370. System Speed Dial can require either
1, 5 or 50 blocks. These leaves 56, 52 or 7 blocks available for extensions, respectively. If an extension wants a unique set of Personal Speed Dial numbers, it must have one unique block assigned to
it.
System bins
Blocks required for
System Speed dial
Blocks available for
extensions
10
(20-29)
1
56
100
(200-299)
5
52
1000
(2000-2999)
50
7
Table 36: Program 1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Extension Speed Dial
Blocks
Use this option to specify the number of
blocks you want assigned to Personal Speed
Dial.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
NUM OF EXT BLKS?
32
System Speed Dial
Blocks
Use this option to specify the number of
blocks you want assigned to System Speed
Dial.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
NUM OF SYS BLKS?
1-56
25
1-50
Conditions
None
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1102 + HOLD
1102: SPDL BLK ASSNMT
NUM OF EXT BLKS?nn
3.
DS2000 Software Manual
The previously programmed entry displays.
Enter the number of blocks you want assigned to Personal Speed Dial + HOLD.
OR
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 433
1100 - Speed Dial
1102 - Speed Dial Block Assignment
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1102: SPDL BLK ASSNMT
NUM OF SYS BLKS?nn
4.
The previously programmed entry displays.
Enter the number of blocks you want assigned to System Speed Dial + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
434 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1500 - Access Level
1501 - Extension Access Level
1500 - Access Level
1501 - Extension Access Level
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 435
1700 - Key Programming
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
1700 - Key Programming
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments to assign the programmable
keys on a keyset. By default, keys 1-8 are line keys, keys 9 and 10 are Fixed Loop keys for trunk
group 0, key 11 is an Auto Timer key and key 12 is an All Call Page key. (The last key on an attendant telephone is automatically an Operator Call key.)
Conditions
None
Table 37: Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Option
Description
Key Code
Entry
Undefined
Use this option to designate a key as undefined
(no function).
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
00
UNDEFINED
Switched Loop
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a switched loop key.
• See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
01
SWITCH LOOP
Fixed Loop Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Fixed Loop Key.
• See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
02 + nn (trunk group)
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a line key.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Line Keys on page 176 for more.
• See Private Line on page 231 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
03 + nn (trunk
number)
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Park Orbit key.
• See Park on page 218 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
04 + n (Park Orbit
0-9)
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Hotline key.
• See Hotline on page 160 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
05 + nnn (extension
number)
Line Key
Park Orbit Key
Hotline Key
436 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
(01)
FIXED LOOP GRP
00-08 = Trunk Groups
0-8
LINE
01-16 = Trunks 1-16
PARK ORBIT?n
0-9 = System Park
Orbits 0-9
HOTLINEnnn
300-331 = Hotline partner’s extension number
(300-331)
DS2000 Software Manual
1700 - Key Programming
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Table 37: Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Option
Description
Key Code
Entry
Call Coverage
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediately ringing Call Coverage Key.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
06 + nnn (extension
number)
CALL CVR RING
Call Coverage No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
07 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a delayed ring Call Coverage Key.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
08 + nnn (extension
number)
Group Pickup
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediate ring Group Call Pickup key.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
09 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Group Pickup No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Group Call Pickup
key.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
10 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Group Pickup
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a delay ring Group Call Pickup key.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
11 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Page Zone Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Page Zone key.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
13 + n (Page Zone 17, 0 for All Call)
DS2000 Software Manual
Covered extension
number, Ring Group
master number, or UCD
Group master number
CALL CVR NO RING
Covered extension
number, Ring Group
master number, or UCD
Group master number
CALL CVR DELAY
Covered extension
number, Ring Group
master number, or UCD
Group master number
GRP PCKUP RING
01-08 = pickup groups
1-8
GRP PCKUP NO
RING
01-08 = pickup groups
1-8
GRP PCKUP DELAY
01-08 = pickup groups
1-8
PAGE ZONE
0-7 (Page Zones 1-7 or
0 for All Call Page)
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 437
1700 - Key Programming
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Table 37: Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Option
Description
Key Code
Entry
System Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a System Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to specific System Speed Dial bin.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
14 + nnn (System
Speed Dial bin normally 200-299)
SYS SPDL BIN
Personal Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Personal Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
15 + nnn (701-720)
PERS SPDL BIN
Call Timer Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Call Timer key. There are two types of
timer key: manual and automatic.
• See Call Timer on page 48 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
16 + n (1 = Manual
Call Timer, 2 = Automatic Call Timer)
CALL TIMER
Voice Mail
Record Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Voice Mail Record key.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
17
RECORD
Night Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Night Key.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
18 + CLEAR
SYS MODE
Data Key
•
Split Key
ICM Directory
Key
ACD Log On Key
(to control the system’s
night mode)
18 + Master Number
(to control the night
mode of a DIL terminated to the master
number)
19 + nnn (extension
number)
DATA
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Split key.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Split (Alternate) on page 272 for more.
20
SPLIT
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an Intercom Directory Dialing key.
• See Directory Dialing on page 110 for
more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
21
ICM DIR
•
22
ACD LOG
This option is currently not used.
This option is currently not used.
438 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1700 - Key Programming
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Table 37: Program 1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
Option
Description
Key Code
Entry
Reverse Voice
Over Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Reverse Voice Over key.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Reverse Voice Over on page 245 for
more.
23 + nnn (extension
number)
REV VOICE OVER
Message Center
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Message Center key.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
24 + nnn (extension
number)
Save Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Save Number Dialed key.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
• See Save Number Dialed on page 254 for
more.
Note that the extension
number does not have
to be an installed extension.
25
MESSAGE CTR
300-331 (extension
numbers 300-331)
SAVE
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1701 + HOLD
1701:KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION #?
3.
Enter the number of the station port you want to program + HOLD
1701:STA:nnn
KEY NUMBER 1?
4.
Enter the number of the key you want to program + HOLD.
OR
Press HOLD to select the currently displayed key.
1701:STA:nnn
nnnnnnnnn n?
5.
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
KEY:n
The previously programmed key definition displays.
Enter key code and options as required + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged.
Enter data for another key.
OR
Press CONF to return to step 4 and select another key to program.
OR
Press CONF twice to return to step 3 and select another extension to program.
OR
Press CONF three times to exit the program.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 439
1700 - Key Programming
1701 - Programmable Function Key Assignments
440 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1700 - Key Programming
1702 - Personal Speed Dial
1702 - Personal Speed Dial
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial to program an extension’s Personal Speed Dial bins (120). Extension users can also program their Personal Speed Dial bins from their own telephone.
Personal Speed Dial numbers can be up to x?x? digits long, use 0-9, # and *. In addition, you can
enter the following for additional dialing options:
For this option
Or use this telephone
programming option:
Pause
MIC
Flash
FLASH
Conditions
None
Table 38: Program 1702 - Personal Speed Dial
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Personal Speed Dial Bin
Use this option to select the Personal Speed
Dial bin you want to program.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
BIN?
Not assigned
Personal Speed Dial
Number
For the bin selected above, use this option to
enter the Personal Speed Dial number. The
number can be up to x?x? digits long, using
0-9, # and *. You can also enter special characters (see the table above). Special characters count as a single digit.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
Personal Speed Dial
Name
Use this option to enter the name for the Personal Speed Dial bin (up to 16 characters).
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
• When entering names, see Programming
Names and Text Messages on page 361.
0-19
NUM?
Not assigned
Not assigned
NA?
Not assigned
Not assigned
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1702 + HOLD
1702:PERS SPEED DIAL
STATION PORT?
3.
Enter the number of the station port you want to program (1-32) + HOLD
1702:P-SPDL S_PT:nnn
BIN?
The previously programmed bin displays.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 441
1700 - Key Programming
1702 - Personal Speed Dial
4.
For the extension chosen, select the Personal Speed Dial bin you want to program (1-20) +
HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to program the currently selected bin.
1702:P-SPDL S_PT:nnn
NUM?
5.
The Personal Speed Dial number previously programmed for this selected bin displays.
Enter the Personal Speed Dial number for the selected bin + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
1702:P-SPDL S_PT:nnn
NA?
6.
Enter the name for the selected Personal Speed Dial bin + HOLD.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged and advance to the next entry.
442 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1700 - Key Programming
1703 - DSS Key Assignment
1703 - DSS Key Assignment
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1703 - DSS Key Assignment to program an extension’s DSS keys. Programmable
Function Keys automatically become DSS keys when the user press ICM. While in the DSS mode,
the extension has one button Intercom access and a Busy Lamp Field for the assigned co-worker.
By default, BLF keys 1-24 are assigned to extensions 300-323.
Conditions
None
Table 39: Program 1703 - BLF Key Assignment
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Key Number
Use this option to select the key you want to
program.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) on
page 95 for more.
KEY?
Not assigned
Use this option to assign an extension to the
BLF key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) on
page 95 for more.
BLF EXT NUM?
BLF Extension
Assignment
1-24
Not assigned
300-331
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1703 + HOLD
1703:BLF LEVEL KEYS
STATION PORT?
3.
Enter the number of the station port (1-32) you want to program + HOLD
1703:BLF LEVEL KEYS
KEY?
4.
For the station port selected, enter the number of the key (1-24) you want to program + HOLD
1703:BLF LEVEL KEYS
BLF EXT NUM?nnn
5.
The previously programmed assignment displays.
Enter the number of the extension (300-331) assigned to the BLF key + HOLD
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged.
1703:BLF LEVEL KEYS
KEY?
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 443
1700 - Key Programming
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment to assign the keys for the system’s DSS Consoles. There are two types of DSS Consoles: 24-button and 110 button. For default assignments,
refer to the following table.
DSS Console Default Assignments
These keys:
Have this function:
24-Button DSS Console
1-24
Hotlines to extensions 300-323
110-Button DSS Console
1-32
Hotlines to extensions 300-331
33-48
Lines 1-16
49-59
System Speed Dial bins 200-209
59-78
Personal Speed Dial bins 700719
79, 80
Page zones 0 (All Call) and 1.
81-82
System Park Orbits 0 and 1.
83-110
Unassigned
Conditions
None
Table 40: Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Option
Description
Key Code
Entry
Undefined
Use this option to designate a key as undefined
(no function).
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
00
UNDEFINED
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a line key.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
03 + nn (trunk
number)
Line Key
444 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
(00)
LINE?nn
01-16 = Trunks 1-16
DS2000 Software Manual
1700 - Key Programming
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Table 40: Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Option
Description
Key Code
Park Orbit Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Park Orbit key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Park on page 218 for more.
04 + n (Park Orbit
0-9)
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Hotline key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Hotline on page 160 for more.
05 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediately ringing Call Coverage Key.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
06 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
07 + nnn (extension
number)
Call Coverage
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
• See Call Coverage Keys on page 40 for
more.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
08 + nnn (extension
number)
Group Pickup
Immediate Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an immediately ringing Group Call Pickup
key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
09 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Group Pickup No
Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a lamp only (no ring) Group Call Pickup
key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
10 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Hotline Key
DS2000 Software Manual
Entry
PARK ORBIT?n
0-9 = System Park
Orbits 0-9
HOTLINE?nnn
300-331 = Hotline partner’s extension number
(300-331)
CALL CVR RING
Covered extension
number, Ring Group
master number, or UCD
Group master number
CALL CVR NO RING
Covered extension
number, Ring Group
master number, or UCD
Group master number
CALL CVR DELAY
Covered extension
number, Ring Group
master number, or UCD
Group master number
GRP PKUP RING
01-16 = pickup groups
1-16
GRP PKUP NO RING
01-16 = pickup groups
1-16
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 445
1700 - Key Programming
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Table 40: Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Option
Description
Key Code
Group Pickup
Delay Ring
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a delay ring Group Call Pickup key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
11 + nn (Pickup
Group 01-08)
Page Zone Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Page Zone key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
13 + n (Page Zone 17, 0 for All Call)
System Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a System Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to specific System Speed Dial bin.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
14 + nnn (System
Speed Dial bin, normally 200-299)
SYS SPDL BIN?
Personal Speed
Dial Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Personal Speed Dial key. You assign the
key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin. The
DSS Console shares Personal Speed Dial bins
with the extension to which it is attached.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
15 + nnn (701-720)
PERS SPDL BIN?
Voice Mail
Record Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Voice Mail Record key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
17
RECORD?
Night Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Night key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
18 + CLEAR
SYS MODE?
Data Key
•
Split Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Split key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Split (Alternate) on page 272 for more.
This option is currently not used.
446 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entry
GRP PKUP DELAY
01-16 = pickup groups
1-16
PAGE ZONE?
0-7 (Page Zones 1-7 or
0 for All Call Page)
(to control the system’s
night mode)
18 + Master Number
(to control the night
mode of a DIL terminated to the master
number)
19 + nnn (extension
number)
DATA?
20
SPLIT
DS2000 Software Manual
1700 - Key Programming
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Table 40: Program 1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Option
Description
Key Code
Entry
ICM Directory
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as an Intercom Directory Dialing key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Directory Dialing on page 110 for
more.
21
ICM DIR
•
22
ACD LOG
REV VOICE OVER
ACD Log On Key
This option is currently not used.
Reverse Voice
Over Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Reverse Voice Over key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Reverse Voice Over on page 245 for
more.
23 + nnn (extension
number)
Message Center
Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Message Center key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
24 + nnn (extension
number)
Save Key
Use this option to assign a programmable key
as a Save Number Dialed key.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
• See Save Number Dialed on page 254 for
more.
Note that the extension
number does not have
to be an installed extension.
25
MESSAGE CTR
300-331 (extension
numbers 300-331)
SAVE
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1704 + HOLD
1704:DSS KEY PROG
DSS BLOCK NUM?
3.
Select the block that corresponds to the DSS Console you want to program + HOLD
1704:DSS KEY PROG
DSS KEY 1
4.
For the console selected, enter the number of the key you want to program + HOLD.
OR
Press HOLD to select key 1.
DSS BLOCK:n KEY:n
nnnnnnnnn n?
5.
DS2000 Software Manual
The previously programmed key definition displays.
Enter key code and options as required + VOL ▲.
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 447
1700 - Key Programming
1704 - DSS Console Key Assignment
6.
You can optionally press ICM and then VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the available key definitions, then HOLD to select your entry.
Enter data for another key.
OR
Press CONF to return to step 4 and select another key to program.
OR
Press CONF twice to return to step 3 and select another console.
OR
Press CONF three times to exit the program.
448 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1801 - Extension Port Description to set up various options for extensions. Also see
Program 1802 - Extension Options (Part 1) on page 455 and Program 1807 - Extension Options
(Part 2) on page 469.
Conditions
None
Table 41: Program 1801 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Extension Circuit Type
Use this option to assign circuit type to station devices. In the column at right, the numbers in square brackets [ ] indicate how
many ports the device requires.
• See Door Box on page 116 for more.
• See Initial Startup Programming on
page 6 for more.
• See Off-Premise Extensions / OnPremise SLT Extensions on page 207 for
more.
• See Station Instruments on page 274 for
more.
•
PT TYP?
00 = Uninstalled [1]
01 = 22-Button
Standard [1]
02 = 22-Button
Display [1]
06 = 34-Button
Display [1]
09 = 34-Button Super
Display [1]
10 = Door Box [1]
15 = Analog station [1]
21 = 2OPX [2]
00 (Uninstalled)
DCI Type
•
This option is currently not used.
DCI TYP?
0
Device Number
•
This option is currently not used.
DEVICE ORDER NUM?
1
EXT:
View only
Extension Numbering
Extension Name
DS2000 Software Manual
This option shows the extension number
assigned to the station port. This option is
view only — you cannot edit this entry.
• See 0505 - Station Port Extension Numbers on page 398 for more.
• See 0506 - ACI/CPU Analog Port Extension Numbers and Names on page 400
for more.
• See 0507 - DCI Extension Numbers and
Names on page 401 for more.
•
Use this option to assign a name to the
extension port.
• Refer to Table 17: Keys for Entering
Names on page 361 when entering
names.
• See Names for Extensions and Trunks on
page 198 for more.
View only
NAME:
STATION nn
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 449
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
Table 41: Program 1801 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
DSS Type
Use this option to specify the type of DSS
Console plugged into the telephone (1 = 24button, 2 = 110-button, 0 = unassigned).
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
DSS TYP?
0 = Uninstalled
1 = 24-Button
2 = 110 Button
300 = 1
301-331 = 0
DSS Block Number
Second Channel Option
Extension Class of
Service Assignment
Extension Toll Level Day
Use this option to assign a DSS block to the
console.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console on page 98 for more.
•
This option is currently not implemented.
Use this option to assign the extension’s
Class of Service.
• See Class of Service on page 73 for
more.
DSS BLOCK NUM?
2ND CHANNEL?
N
N = No
Y = Yes
CLASS OF SERVICE?
01
1-15
Use this option to assign an extension’s Toll
Level during the day mode.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
STA TOLL LVL DAY?
Extension Toll Level
Night
Use this option to assign an extension’s Toll
Level during the night mode.
• See Toll Restriction on page 314 for
more.
STA TOLL LVL NITE?
DCI Class of Service
Assignment
•
DCI Toll Level Day
•
This option is currently not used.
01
00 = Unassigned
01-04
00
1-7, 0 = No restriction
00
1-7, 0 = No restriction
DCI COS?
1
1=15
This option is currently not used.
DCI TOLL LVL DAY?
1
1-7, 0 = No restriction
DCI Toll Level Night
•
This option is currently not used.
DCI TOLL LVL NITE?
1
1-7, 0 = No restriction
Access Level
•
This option is currently not used.
ACCESS LVL?
5
0-5
Station Overflow
Destination
•
This option is currently not implemented.
OVRFLW EXT?
Overflow Condition for
Intercom Calls
•
This option is currently not implemented..
ICM OVRFLOW
B-R-D?
0
Overflow Condition for
External Calls
•
This option is currently not implmented.
CO OVRFLW B-R-D?
0
450 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
300
300-331
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
Table 41: Program 1801 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Overflow Condition for
DID Calls
•
This option is currently not implemented.
DID OVRFLW B-R-D?
0
Overflow Condition for
Tie Line Calls
•
This option is currently not implemented.
E&M OVRFLW B-R-D?
0
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1801 + HOLD
1801:EXTENSION PROG
STATION PORT?
3.
Enter the number of the station port you want to program (1-32) + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select port 1 (extension 300).
1801: STA PORT n
PT TYPE?n
4.
The previously programmed value displays. See the chart above for valid circuit types.
Enter the new station circuit type + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current circuit type unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DCI TYP?n
5.
The previously programmed value displays. See the chart above for valid DCI types.
Enter the DCI circuit type (if installed) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DEVICE ORDER NUM?n
6.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the software port (for 3DCI, 3ACI, VAU and VAU Expansion Modules only) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
EXT:nnn
7.
This display shows the extension number assigned to the port. This option is view only
— you cannot edit or change it.
Press VOL ▲.
1801: STA PORT n
NAME:nnnnnnn
Use this option to enter or change the extension’s name. Refer to Programming Names
and Text Messages on page 361 for more.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 451
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
8.
Press VOL ▲.
1801: STA PORT n
DSS TYP?n
9.
The previously programmed value displays.
If installed, enter the DSS Console type (00-02) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DSS BLOCK NUM?
10. If installed, enter the DSS Console block number (if installed) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
2nd CHANNEL?n
The previously programmed value displays.
11. Enter Y to enable or N to disable second channel operation + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
CLASS OF SERVICE?n
The previously programmed value displays.
12. Enter extension’s Class of Service (1-15) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
STA TOLL LVL DAY?n
The previously programmed value displays.
13. Enter the extension’s day mode Toll Level (1-7, 0 = No restriction) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
STA TOLL LVL NITE?n
The previously programmed value displays.
14. Enter the extension’s night mode Toll Level (1-7, 0 = No restriction) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DCI COS?n
The previously programmed value displays.
15. For 3DCI Modules, enter the module’s Class of Service (1-15) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DCI TOLL LVL DAY?n
The previously programmed value displays.
16. For 3DCI Modules, enter the module’s day mode Toll Level (1-7, 0 = No restriction) + VOL ▲
OR
452 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DCI TOLL LVL NITE?n
The previously programmed value displays.
17. For 3DCI Modules, enter the module’s night mode Toll Level (1-7, 0 = No restriction) + VOL
▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
ACCESS LEVEL?n
The previously programmed value displays.
18. Enter the extension’s Access Level (0-5) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
OVRFLW EXT?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
19. Enter the extension’s overflow destination (300-331) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
ICM OVRFLW B-R-D?n
The previously programmed value displays.
20. Enter the overflow condition for Intercom calls (0 = no overflow, 1 = busy, 2 = ring and 3 =
delay) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
CO OVRFLW B-R-D?n
The previously programmed value displays.
21. Enter the overflow condition for trunk calls (0 = no overflow, 1 = busy, 2 = ring and 3 = delay)
+ VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
DID OVRFLW B-R-D?n
The previously programmed value displays.
22. Enter the overflow condition for DID calls (0 = no overflow, 1 = busy, 2 = ring and 3 = delay)
+ VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1801: STA PORT n
E&M OVRFLW B-R-D?n
The previously programmed value displays.
23. Enter the overflow condition for tie line calls (0 = no overflow, 1 = busy, 2 = ring and 3 =
delay) + VOL ▲
OR
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 453
1800 - Extension Options
1801 - Extension Port Description
Press VOL ▲ to go back to the first option for this port.
1801: STA PORT n
PT TYP?n
The previously programmed value displays.
24. Press CONF to select another station port to program.
OR
Press CONF twice to exit this program.
454 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1802 - Extension Options (Part 1) to set up additional options for extensions. Also
see Program 1801 - Extension Port Description on page 449 and Program 1807 - Extension
Options (Part 2) on page 469.
Conditions
None
Table 42: Program 1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Do Not Disturb
Use this option to enable or disable Do Not
Disturb at the extension.
• See Do Not Disturb on page 114 for
more.
ALLOW DND?
Y
Use this option to assign an extension to a
Ring Group.
• See Group Ring on page 144 for more.
• See Ring Groups on page 248 for
more.This may be the same as Group
Ring.
RING GROUP NUM?
Call Pickup Group
Number
Use this option to assign an extension to a
Pickup Group.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
PK-UP GROUP NUM?
Privacy Release Group
Use this option to assign an extension to a
Privacy Release Group.
• See Privacy on page 226 for more.
PRIV REL GRP NUM?
Ring Group Number
Off-Hook Signaling for
Intercom Calls
Use this option to assign an extension’s OffHook Signaling options for Intercom calls.
• See Voice Over on page 350 for more.
Off-Hook Signaling for
Hotline Partner
•
DS2000 Software Manual
This option is currently not used.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
0
1-8
0 = Unassigned
0
1-8
0 = Unassigned
0
1-16
0 = Unassigned
OHS ICM?
1
0 = No Off-Hook
Signaling
1 = Call Wait beeps over
speaker
3 = Voice Over
OHS HS?
2
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 455
1800 - Extension Options
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Table 42: Program 1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Option
Description
Off-Hook Signaling for
CO Calls
Use this option to assign an extension’s OffHook Signaling options for trunk calls.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Off-Hook Signaling on page 205 for
more.
Handsfree Reply on
Intercom Calls
Use this option to enable or disable Handsfree reply (Handsfree Answerback). Calls
ring if disabled.
• See Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback on page 150 for more.
HF REPLY ON ICM?
Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Handsfree.
• See Automatic Handsfree on page 30 for
more.
• See Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback on page 150 for more.
AUTO HANDSFREE?
Use this option to enable or disable the DSS
function for an extension’s Programmable
Function Keys.
• See Direct Station Selection (DSS) on
page 95 for more.
BUSY LAMP FIELD?
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to access lines 1-16 by dialing
trunk access codes #901-#916.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
LINE DIAL UP?
Use this option to assign the trunk group a
user accesses when they dial 9 for an outside
line or press a switched loop key. This
option does not apply to systems with ARS
installed.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
• See Trunk Group Routing on page 329
for more.
• See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
DIAL 9 GROUP?
Busy Lamp Field
Line Dial Up
Station’s Dial 9 Group
Retain Trunk Volume
Setting
•
Currently not used.
456 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
Entries
Default
OHS CO?
1
0 = No Off-Hook
Signaling
1 = Camp On tone
2 = Off hook ringing
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
1
0-8
RETAIN TRK VOL?
Y
Y = Enable (retain user
setting)
N = Disable (use median
system setting)
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Table 42: Program 1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Y
Key Access to Outbound
Lines
Use this option to enable or disable the
extension user’s ability to press a Programmable Function Key to access and outside
line.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Line Keys on page 176 for more.
• See Programmable Function Keys on
page 235 for more.
KEY ACESS TO LN?
Page Zone Member
Use this option to assign the extension to a
Page Zone (1-7).
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE ZONE
MEMBER?
BGM
Use this option to enable or disable Background Music at the extension.
• See Background Music on page 35 for
more.
Extension’s Operator
Ring Down Destination
Speed Dial Block
Use this option to assign the extension’s
operator. This is the co-worker the extension
user reaches when they dial 0.
• See Attendant Position on page 24 for
more.
Use this option to assign the extension’s
Ring Down destination. To use this option,
you must also enable the Ring Down option
above.
• See Ringdown Extension on page 249 for
more.
Use this option to assign a Speed Dial block
to an extension.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
Voice Mail Port
For analog ports, use this option to assign
the port as a Voice Mail port.
• See Voice Mail on page 340 for more.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Include extension in
Page Zone
N = Do not include
extension in Page Zone
BGM?
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
EXT’S OPERATOR?
300
300-331
RG DN DEST?
UND
0 = None (Ring Down
disabled)
Extension number (300331), UCD master number, Voice Mail master
number, Ring Group
master number
SPDL BLOCK NUMN?
1
1-57
VOICE MAIL PORT?
N
Y = Assigned as a Voice
Mail port
N = Not a Voice Mail port
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1802 + HOLD
1802:EXT OPT PART I
STATION PORT?
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 457
1800 - Extension Options
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
3.
Enter the extension number (300-331) you want to program + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select extension 300.
1802: STA PORT n
ALLOW DND?nnn
4.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the Y to enable or N to disable Do Not Disturb + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current assignment unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
RING GROUP NUM?n
5.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the extension’s Ring Group (1-8, 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
PK-UP GROUP NUM?n
6.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the extension’s Pickup Group (1-8, 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
PRIV REL GRP NUM?nn
7.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the extension’s Privacy Release Group (1-16, 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
OHS ICM
8.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the Off-Hook Signaling for Intercom Calls option (0 = None, 1 = Call Wait beeps over
speaker, 3 = Voice Over, + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
OHS HL?
The previously programmed value displays.
9.
This option is currently not used. Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
OHS CO
The previously programmed value displays.
10. Enter the Off-Hook Signaling for trunk calls (0 = None, 1 = Call Wait beeps over speaker, 2 =
Off-hook ringing, + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
458 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
HF REPLY ON ICM?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
11. Enter Y to enable or N to disable Handsfree Answerback + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
AUTO HANDSFREE?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
12. Enter Y to enable or N to disable Automatic Handsfree + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
BUSY LAMP FIELD?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
13. Enter Y to enable or N to disable the programmable key BLF mode + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
LINE DIAL UP?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
14. Enter Y to enable or N to disable the extension’s ability to dial #901-#916 + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
DIAL 9 GROUP?nn
The previously programmed value displays.
15. Enter the extension’s dial 9 trunk group (0-8) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
RETAIN TRK VOL?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
16. Enter Y to retain user setting or N to use median system setting + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
KEY ACCESS TO LN?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
17. Enter Y to enable or N to disable programmable key access to trunks + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
PAGE ZONE MEMBER?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
18. Enter Y to include or N to exclude the extension + VOL ▲
OR
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 459
1800 - Extension Options
1802 - Extension Options (Part 1)
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
BGM?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
19. Enter Y to enable or N to disable Background Music at the extension + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
EXT’S OPERATOR?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
20. Enter the extension’s operator (300-331, 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
RING DOWN?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
21. Enter Y to enable or N to disable Ring Down for the extension + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
RG DN DEST?nnn
The previously programmed value displays. If you enable Ring Down, you must assign
a Ring Down destination in the next step.
22. Enter the extension’s Ring Down destination (24 digits max., 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
SPDL BLOCK NUM?nn
The previously programmed value displays.
23. Enter the extension’s Speed Dial block (1-57, 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
VOICE MAIL PORT?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
24. For analog ports, enter Y to assign or N to unassign the port as a Voice Mail port + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged
1802: STA PORT n
ALLOW DND?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
25. Press CONF to select another extension port.
OR
Press CONF twice to exit the program.
460 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments
1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments to assign the incoming and outgoing
trunk access for extensions.
Conditions
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 461
1800 - Extension Options
1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments
None
Table 43: Program 1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Access Option
For each extension, use this option to assign
the access option for each trunk.
• See Initial System Startup on page 6 for
more.
• See Automatic Route Selection on
page 34 for more.
• See Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on
page 46 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Conference on page 79 for more.
• See Direct Inward Dialing on page 87
for more.
• See Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
on page 94 for more.
• See Direct Trunk Access on page 106 for
more.
• See Forced Trunk Disconnect on
page 137 for more.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
• See Last Number Redial on page 174 for
more.
• See Line Keys on page 176 for more.
• See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
• See Privacy Release Groups on page 228
for more.
• See Private Line on page 231 for more.
• See Save Number Dialed on page 254 for
more.
• See Speed Dial on page 263 for more.
• See Tandem Trunking / Unsupervised
Conference on page 307 for more.
• See Tie Lines on page 311 for more.
• See Trunk Group Routing on page 329
for more.
• See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
NO ACCESS?
0 = No access
INCOMING ONLY?
1 = Incoming only
OUTGOING ONLY?
2 = Outgoing only
FULL ACCESS?
3 = Full access
3 (All trunks,
all extensions)
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1803 + HOLD
1803:LINE ACCESS
STATION #?nnn
462 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1803 - Extension Line Access Assignments
3.
Enter the number of the station you want to program + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select extension 300.
1803: STA:nnn
LINE NUMBER?n
4.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the number of the trunk you want to program + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select trunk 1.
1803:STA:nnn LINE:n
nnnnnnnnnnn
5.
The previously programmed value displays on the second line. The first line of the display shows the extension and trunk you are programming.
Enter the access option for the trunk selected (0 = No access, 1 = Incoming only, 2 = Outgoing
only, 3 = Full access) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current unchanged.
1803:S_PT:n LINE:n
nnnnnnnnnnn
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
You see the options for the next consecutive trunk. The previously programmed value
displays.
Enter the access option for the currently selected trunk + VOL ▲
OR
Press CONF to select another trunk.
OR
Press CONF twice to select another extension port.
OR
Press CONF three times to exit the program.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 463
1800 - Extension Options
1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access to assign the outgoing access to trunk
groups. Incoming trunk group access is always allowed.
Conditions
None
Table 44: 1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Trunk Group Access
For each extension, use this option to assign
outgoing access for each trunk group.
• See Initial System Startup on page 6 for
more.
• See Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 63 for more.
• See Trunk Groups on page 335 for more.
LINE GROUP n:nnn
Y = Allow
N = Prevent
Y (All extensions, all trunk
groups)
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1804 + HOLD
1804:LINE GRP ACCESS
STATION #?nnn
3.
Enter the number of the extension you want to program + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select extension 300.
1804: STA:nnn
LINE GROUP?n
4.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the number of the trunk group (0-8) you want to program + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select trunk group 1.
1804:STA:nnn GRP:n
LINE GROUP n:nnn
5.
The previously programmed value displays on the second line. The first line of the display shows the extension and trunk group you are programming.
Enter Y to allow or N to prevent outgoing access to the trunk group selected + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current unchanged.
1804:STA:nnn GRP:n
LINE GROUP n:nnn
You see the options for the next consecutive trunk group. The previously programmed
value displays.
464 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1804 - Extension Trunk Group Access
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
Enter Y to allow or N to prevent outgoing access to the trunk group selected + VOL ▲
OR
Press CONF to select another trunk group.
OR
Press CONF twice to select another extension.
OR
Press CONF three times to exit the program.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 465
1800 - Extension Options
1805 - Ring Assignments
1805 - Ring Assignments
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1805 - Ring Assignments to set up incoming ringing for each trunk at each extension.
Conditions
None
Table 45: 1805 - Ring Assignments
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Ring Assignment
For each extension, use this option to assign
the access option for each trunk.
• See Initial System Startup on page 6 for
more.
• See Central Office Calls, Answering on
page 58 for more.
• See Delayed Ringing on page 82 for
more.
• See Direct Inward Dialing on page 87
for more.
• See Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
on page 94 for more.
• See Group Call Pickup on page 139 for
more.
• See Key Ring on page 170 for more.
• See Line Keys on page 176 for more.
• See Loop Keys on page 179 for more.
• See Night Service / Night Ring on
page 200 for more.
• See Private Line on page 231 for more.
• See Tie Lines on page 311 for more.
1 = Lamp only (day and
night)
2 = Ringing day and
night
3 = Night Ring only,
lamp during the day
4 = Delay ring day and
night
2 (All extensions, all
trunks)
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1805 + HOLD
1805:RING ASSIGNMENT
STATION #?n
3.
Enter the number of the station you want to program + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select extension 300.
1805: STA:nnn
LINE NUMBER?n
4.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the number of the trunk you want to program + HOLD
OR
466 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1805 - Ring Assignments
Press HOLD to select trunk 1.
1805:STA:nnn LINE:n
DAY / NITE RING
5.
The previously programmed value displays on the second line. The first line of the display shows the extension and trunk you are programming.
For the extension and trunk selected, enter the ring option (1 = Lamp only (day and night), 2 =
Ringing day and night, 3 = Night Ring only, lamp during the day, 4 = Delay ring day and
night) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1805:STA:nnn LINE:n
DAY / NITE RING
6.
DS2000 Software Manual
You see the options for the next consecutive trunk. The previously programmed value
displays.
Enter the ring option for the trunk + VOL ▲
OR
Press CONF to select another trunk.
OR
Press CONF twice to select another extension.
OR
Press CONF three times to exit the program.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 467
1800 - Extension Options
1806 1806 -
— This program is not used. —
468 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1807 - Extension Options (Part 2)
1807 - Extension Options (Part 2)
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 1807 - Extension Features (Part 2) to additional options for extensions. Also see
Program 1801 - Extension Port Description on page 449 and Program 1802 - Extension Options
(Part 1) on page 455.
Conditions
None
Table 46: 1807 - Extension Features (Part 2)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Station Voice Announced
Intercom Calls
Use this option to enable or disable incoming voice-announced Intercom calls while
the extension is not in the headset mode. If
disabled, all Intercom calls to the extension
ring.
• See Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback on page 150 for more.
STA VOICE CALL
Y
Headset VoiceAnnounced Intercom
Calls
Use this option to enable or disable incoming voice-announced Intercom calls while
the extension is in the headset mode.
• See Headset Compatibility on page 154
for more.
•
HDSET VOICE CALL?
Y
Use this option to enable or disable Paging
through the telephone speaker.
• See Paging on page 214 for more.
PAGE THRU SPK?
Use this option to enable or disable the
Headset mode.
• See Group Listen on page 142 for more.
• See Headset Compatibility on page 154
for more.
HEADSET?
Paging Through Speaker
Headset
Ringing Line Preference
Hunt Type
DS2000 Software Manual
Use this option to enable or disable Ringing
Line Preference.
• See Ringing Line Preference on
page 251 for more.
Use this option to assign the hunt type for
the extension.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
RING LINE PREF?
N
Y = Enable (i.e., enable
Ringing Line Preference)
N = Disable (i.e., enable
idle line preference)
HUNT TYPE?
None
0 = None
1= Trunk RNA
2 = T Busy RNA
3 = A Busy RNA
4 = Trunk Busy
5 = UCD
6 = ACD
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 469
1800 - Extension Options
1807 - Extension Options (Part 2)
Table 46: 1807 - Extension Features (Part 2)
Option
Description
Entries
Default
Hunt Destination
(For type 1-4 hunting only) Use this option
to assign the next extension in a Circular or
Terminal Hunt group.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
HUNT DEST?
Undefined
Hunt Master Number
Prime Line Key
Walking Class of Service
Security Code
300-331
CLEAR = Undefined
(For type 5 and 6 hunting only) Use this
option to assign the hunt group master number to the member extension. These numbers
are set up in 0510 - ACD/UCD Master
Extension Numbers and Names on page 402.
• See Extension Hunting on page 121 for
more.
ENTER MASTER NUM:
Use this option to assign a trunk as the
extension’s Prime Line. You enter the Prime
Line’s key number (1-24).
• See Prime Line Preference on page 223
for more.
PRIME LINE KEY?
•
This option is currently not used.
Undefined
Any valid master number
CLEAR = Undefined
0
1-16
0 = Unassigned
W-COS CODE?
No entry
8-digits long, using 0-9, #
and *.
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
1807 + HOLD
1807:EXT OPT PART II
STATION PORT?n
3.
Enter the number of the station port you want to program (1-32) + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select port 1 (extension 300).
1807:STA PORT:n
HDSET VOICE CALL?nnn
4.
The previously programmed value displays. The top line of the display indicates the
extension port you are programming.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable incoming voice-announced Intercom calls while the extension is in the headset mode + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
PAGE THRU SPK?nnn
5.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable Paging through the telephone speaker + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
470 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
1800 - Extension Options
1807 - Extension Options (Part 2)
WHISPER PAGE?nnn
6.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable Voice Over + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
HEADSET?nnn
7.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable the headset mode + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
RING LINE PREF?nnn
8.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter Y to enable or N to disable Ringing Line Preference + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
PRIME LINE PREF?n
9.
The previously programmed value displays.
Enter the extension’s Prime Line trunk assignment (1-16, 0 = Unassigned) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
LINE PREF TYPE?n
The previously programmed value displays.
10. Enter the extension’s Prime Line trunk group assignment (0-8) + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
1807:STA PORT:n
HDSET VOICE CALL?nnn
The previously programmed value displays.
11. Enter Y to enable or N to disable the headset mode for the extension + VOL ▲
OR
Press CONF to select another extension port.
OR
Press CONF twice times to exit the program.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 471
9800 - System Utilities, Part 1
9801 - Copy Command
9800 - System Utilities, Part 1
9801 - Copy Command
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 9801 - Copy Command to copy Class of Service, extension and trunk data. You can
copy data from a single source to a single destination, or from a single source to a range of COSs,
extensions or trunks.
Program 9801 - Copy Command will copy data in the following programs:
Program 0101: Class of Service Options
Program 1001: Trunk Port Description
Program 1003: Trunk Options
Program 1701: Programmable Function Key Assignments
Program 1702: Personal Speed Dial
Program 1703: DSS Key Assignment
Program 1801: Extension Port Description
Program 1802: Extension Options (Part 1)
Program 1803: Extension Line Access Assignments
Program 1804: Extension Trunk Group Access
Program 1805: Ring Assignments
Program 1807: Extension Options (Part 2)
Conditions
None
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
9801 + HOLD
9801:COPY COMMAND
ENTER PGM#
3.
Enter the number of the program in which you want to copy data.
COPY: nnnn
SOURCE nnnn
4.
COPY displays the program you selected. SOURCE will display the trunk or extension
that will be the source for the copied data.
Enter the source (extension or trunk) from which you want to copy data + HOLD.
COPY (program)
DEST RANGE
(source)
5.
If copying to a single destination, enter the destination trunk or extension number.
OR
If copying to a range of extensions or trunks, enter the lowest numbered extension or trunk in
the range.
6.
Press HOLD.
COPY (program) (source)
DEST RANGE nnn-
7.
If copying to a single destination, enter the enter the same destination trunk or extension you
entered in step 5 above.
472 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
9800 - System Utilities, Part 1
9801 - Copy Command
8.
OR
If copying to a range of extensions or trunks, enter the highest numbered extension or trunk in
the range.
Press HOLD.
COPY (program) (source)
COPY COMPLETE!
9.
DS2000 Software Manual
Press CONF to select another program to copy.
OR
Press CONF twice to exit the program.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 473
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9901 - Reset Station Port
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9901 - Reset Station Port
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 9901 - Reset Station Port to reset an extension. This program also gives you the
option of reviewing the status of the extension before you reset it.
Conditions
None
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
9901 + HOLD
9901:RESET STA PORT
STATION PORT?n
3.
Enter the number of the station port you want to program (1-32) + HOLD
OR
Press HOLD to select port 1 (extension 300).
9901:STA PORT:n
EXT:nnnn
4.
The first line of the display indicates the station port you have selected.
Press VOL ▲.
9901:STA PORT:n
NAME:nnnnnnnnnn
5.
The extension’s name displays.
Press VOL ▲.
9901:STA PORT:n
RESET STA PT?nnn
6.
Enter Y + VOL ▲ to reset the station port.
OR
Enter N + VOL ▲ to skip to the next station port without resetting the port.
474 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9902 - Reset Trunk Port
9902 - Reset Trunk Port
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 475
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9903 - System and PCB Reset
9903 - System and PCB Reset
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
476 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9904 - Side Tone Test
9904 - Side Tone Test
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Not available.
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 477
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9905 - Password
9905 - Password
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 9905 - Password to change the system passwords. The table below shows the default
system passwords. Turn to System Programming List on page 289 for more on the system passwords.
Table 47: Password Levels
Password Level
Password
Level
System Administrator 1
0000
1
System Administrator 2
9999
2
Installer
372000
3
Conditions
None
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
9905 + HOLD
9905:SYS PASSWORD
ENTER PSWD LEVEL?
3.
Enter the level (1-3) for the password you want to change + VOL ▲
9905:SYS PASSWORD
LVL x?nnnnnnnnnnnnnn
4.
The level selected and previously programmed password displays.
Enter the password for the level selected + VOL ▲
OR
Press VOL ▲ to leave the current entry unchanged.
9905:SYS PASSWORD
ENTER PSWD LEVEL?
5.
Repeat from step 3 to enter another password level.
OR
Press CONF to exit the program.
478 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9906 - Database Save
9906 - Database Save
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 9906 - Database Save to back up site data to PC Card P/N 85880 or P/N 80050V**.**. Refer to your Hardware Manual for the specifics.
Conditions
The following table lists the PC Card Backup Error Messages that you may see when using the
instructions below.
This error message:
No PCCARD
ERASE FAILED
Means this:
The PC Card is not installed.
Install the PC Card and try again.
The system could not overwrite an existing data
base on the PC Card.
Repeat the procedure. If you get the message
again, try another PC Card.
The system could not save data to the PC Card.
SAVE FAILED
Repeat the procedure. Of you get the error message
again, try another PC Card.
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the PC Card into the CPU.
Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional information.
Be sure the CPU mode switch is set to RUN.
Enter the programming mode.
9906 + HOLD
9906:DATABASE SAVE
START?
5.
Enter Y + HOLD.
9906:DATABASE NAME
To quit program 9906 instead, enter N + HOLD.
6.
Enter a name for the database you want to save (up to 10 characters long).
9906:DATABASE NAME
(name)
Refer to Programming Names and Text Messages on page 361 if you need help when
entering names.
Skip this step if you want to save data in an address that already has a name assigned.
7.
When you are done entering the name, press HOLD.
9906:DB 00 (time)
(name) (date)
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 479
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9906 - Database Save
You see the address, name and date of the first data base stored. If you data bases are
stored, you see:
9906:DB 00
(empty)
8.
9.
The system assigns the name you entered in step 7 to the address you select below:
- Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the 12 data base addresses (DB 00 through DB 11)
OR
- Skip this step to select the currently displayed data base.
Press HOLD.
Normally, you see:
9906:SAVING
...........
The PC Card Active LED is on during backup.
If the address you choose already has data stored in it. you see:
9906:DATABASE SAVE
REPLACE DB nn Y/N
- Press N + HOLD to back up to step 5.
OR
- Press Y + HOLD to proceed.
You automatically exit programming when the upload completes.
480 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9907 - Database Load
9907 - Database Load
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 9907 - Database Load to load site data previously saved to PC Card P/N 85880 or P/
N 80050-V**.** into the system data base. Refer to your Hardware Manual for the specifics.
Conditions
The following table lists the PC Card Load Error Messages that you may see when using the
instructions below.
This error message:
No PCCARD
NO DATABASE
Means this:
The PC Card is not installed.
Install the PC Card and try again.
There is no data stored in the data base address you
selected.
Select another data base address and try again.
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the PC Card into the CPU.
Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional information.
Be sure the CPU mode switch is set to RUN.
Enter the programming mode.
9907 + HOLD
9907:DATABASE LOAD
START?
5.
Enter Y + HOLD.
9907:DB 00 (time)
(name) (date)
You see the name and date of the first data base stored. If no data bases are stored, you
see:
9907:DB 00
(empty)
6.
7.
DS2000 Software Manual
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the 12 data base addresses (DB 00 through DB 11)
and select the one you want to restore.
When the data base you want to restore displays, press HOLD.
The PC Card Active LED is on during restore.
You automatically exit programming when the upload completes.
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 481
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9999 - System Initialization
9999 - System Initialization
Description
LCCPU 01.00.00 Available.
Use Program 9999 - System Initialization to initialize the system database.
! Warning!
Initializing the system erases all your programmed entries
and replaces them with the factory-installed default values.
Conditions
None
Telephone Programming Instructions
1.
2.
Enter the programming mode.
9999 + HOLD
9999:INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE SYS?nnn
3.
Enter Y + HOLD to initialize the system.
OR
Enter N + HOLD to exit the program without initializing.
If you enter Y, the system will initialize with the factory-installed default and return to
the idle state.
482 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9999 - System Initialization
DS2000 Software Manual
Chapter 2: Programming ◆ 483
9900 - System Utilities, Part 2
9999 - System Initialization
484 ◆ Chapter 2: Programming
DS2000 Software Manual
Placing. . .63
Line Keys. . .176
Loop Keys. . .179
Private Line. . .231
Centrex Compatibility. . .222
Chapter. . .1
Check Key. . .71
Circular Hunting. . .121
Class of Service. . .73
Computer Telephony Integration. . .78
Conference. . .79
Meet Me. . .184
Console
DSS. . .98
Conversation Record with Voice Mail. . .340
CTI. . .78
Numerics
2500 Sets. . .207
2-OPX Module. . .17, 207
A
Account Codes. . .18
Alphanumeric Display. . .19
Alternate. . .272
Alternate Attendant. . .21
Analog Communications Interface (ACI).
Analog Extensions. . .207
Announced Transfer. . .324
Answer Machine Emulation. . .340
Answering Outside Calls. . .58
Attendant Call Queuing. . .22
Attendant Position. . .24
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD). . .28
Automatic Call Timer. . .48
Automatic Fault Reporting. . .29
Automatic Handsfree. . .30
Automatic Hold. . .156
Automatic Ring Down. . .33
Automatic Route Selection. . .34
Available. . .240
. .20
D
Data Communications Interface. . .81
Date and Time. . .312
DCI. . .81
Delayed Ringing. . .82
Dial Codes (by Number). . .8
Dial Number Preview. . .84
Dial Tone Detection. . .86
Dialing Equal Access Codes. . .118
DIL. . .88
Direct Inward Dialing. . .87
Direct Inward Line. . .88
Direct Inward System Access (DISA). . .94
Direct Messaging. . .187
Direct Station Selection (DSS). . .95
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. . .98
Direct Trunk Access. . .106
Directed Call Pickup. . .108
Directory Dialing. . .110
DISA. . .94
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns.
DND. . .114
Do Not Disturb. . .114
Door Box. . .116
DP to DTMF Conversion. . .240
DSS. . .95
Dummy Extensions. . .194
B
Background Music. . .35
Backup and Restore. . .287
Barge In (Intrusion). . .37
Battery Backup. . .39
C
Call Coverage Keys. . .40
Call Forwarding. . .43
Cancel. . .47
Off-Premise. . .46
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail.
Call Park. . .218
Call Pickup, Group. . .139
Call Timer. . .48
Automatic. . .48
Manual. . .48
Call Waiting. . .51
Callback. . .54
Caller ID. . .57
Camp-On. . .51
Central Office Calls
Answering. . .58
Loop Keys. . .179
Private Line. . .231
DS2000 Software Manual
. .340
. .113
E
E911. . .117
Equal Access Capability. . .118
Exclusive Hold. . .156
Extended Ringing. . .119
Extension Class of Service. . .73
Index ◆ i
Extension DSS. . .95
Extension Hunting. . .121
Extension Names. . .198
Extension Ringdown. . .249
External Alerting Devices. . .131
External Paging. . .214
L
Last Number Redial. . .174
Repeat Redial. . .244
Leaving a Message in Voice Mail.
LED Flash Patterns. . .113
Line Keys. . .176
Load Factor. . .3
Loop Keys. . .179
F
Flash. . .132
Flash Patterns. . .113
Flexible Numbering Plan. . .134
Forced Trunk Disconnect. . .137
Forwarding Your Calls. . .43
M
Manual Call Timer. . .48
Meet Me Conference. . .184
Message Center Mailbox. . .341
Message Waiting. . .187
Microphone Mute. . .190
Monitor (Silent Monitor). . .192
Multiple Directory Numbers. . .194
Music On Hold. . .195
G
Group Call Pickup. . .139
Group Listen. . .142
Group Ring. . .144
Groups
Trunks. . .335
N
Names for Extensions and Trunks. . .198
Night Service (Night Ring). . .200
Number Redial, Last. . .174
NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated
Attendant. . .340
H
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback.
Headset Compatibility. . .154
Hold. . .156
Automatic Hold. . .156
Exclusive Hold. . .156
Intercom Hold. . .156
System Hold. . .156
Hotline. . .160
Hunting. . .121
Circular. . .121
Terminal. . .122
UCD. . .122
. .150
O
Off-Hook Signaling. . .205
Off-Premise Call Forwarding. . .46
Off-Premise Extensions. . .207
One-Touch Keys. . .213
On-Premise Extensions. . .207
Orbits. . .218
Overflow
Voice Mail. . .340
Overflow, Station. . .283
Overriding Toll Restriction. . .322
I
Idle Prime Lines. . .223
Initial Startup Programming. . .6
Installing Voice Mail. . .341
Integrated Voice Mail. . .340
Interactive Soft Keys. . .163
Intercom. . .165
Handsfree Answerback. . .150
Intercom Hold. . .156
Internal Paging. . .214
K
Key Ring.
ii ◆ Index
. .170
. .340
P
Paging. . .214
PAME. . .340
Park. . .218
PBX Compatibility. . .222
Personal Answering Machine Emulation with Voice
Mail. . .340
Personal Park. . .218
Pickup, Group Call. . .139
Placing Outside Calls. . .63
Prime Line Preference. . .223
DS2000 Software Manual
Privacy. . .226
Privacy Release Groups. . .228
Private Line. . .231
Programmable Function Keys. . .235
Programming List. . .289
Pulse to Tone Conversion. . .240
System Configuration. . .3
System Hold. . .156
System Number Plan/Capacities. . .9
System Park Orbits. . .218
System Programming Backup and Restore.
System Programming List. . .289
System Speed Dial. . .263
System Timers. . .292
Q
Queuing
Trunks.
T
. .332
Tandem Trunking. . .307
Tenant Service. . .310
Terminal Hunting. . .122
Text Messaging. . .256
Tie Lines. . .311
Time and Date. . .312
Timers. . .292
Station Timers. . .295
System. . .292
Trunks. . .300
TMS Reports. . .323
Toll Restriction. . .314
Toll Restriction Override. . .322
Tones and Flash Patterns. . .113
Traffic Management Reports. . .323
Transfer. . .324
Screened. . .324
Unscreened. . .324
Transferring to Voice Mail. . .340
Trunk Callback. . .332
Trunk Calls
Off Hook Signaling. . .205
Private Line. . .231
Toll Restriction. . .314
Trunk Group Routing. . .329
Trunk Groups. . .335
Trunk Names. . .198
Trunk Timers. . .300
Trunks
Tie Lines. . .311
R
Redial, Last Number. . .174
Relays. . .131
Removing Trunks and Extensions From Service.
Repeat Redial. . .244
Reports
SMDR Report. . .277
Traffic Management. . .323
Reverse Voice Over. . .245
Ring Groups. . .144
Ringdown Extension. . .249
Ringing
Delayed. . .82
Distinctive. . .113
Extended. . .119
Ringing Line Preference. . .251
Ringing Prime Lines. . .223
. .242
S
Save Number Dialed. . .254
Screened Transfer. . .324
Selectable Display Messaging. . .256
Setting the Time and Date. . .312
Setting Up Voice Mail. . .341
Silent Monitor. . .192
Single Line Telephones. . .207
SMDR. . .277
Soft Keys. . .163
Speakerphone. . .150
Speed Dial. . .263
Station Call Coverage. . .40
Station Class of Service. . .73
Station DSS. . .95
Station Instruments. . .274
Ring/Message Lamp (00.01.16)
Station Overflow. . .283
Station Timers. . .295
Storing Intercom Features. . .263
Switching Between Calls. . .272
DS2000 Software Manual
. .287
U
UCD Hunting. . .122
Unannounced Transfer. . .324
Unsupervised Conference. . .307
User-Programmable Features. . .5
V
VAU Module. . .339
Voice Announce Unit.
. .339
Index ◆ iii
Voice Mail. . .340
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail. . .340
Conversation Record. . .340
Leaving a Message. . .340
Message Center Mailbox. . .341
Overflow. . .340
Personal Answering Machine Emulation.
Setting Up Voice Mail. . .341
Transferring to Voice Mail. . .340
Voice Over. . .350
Reverse Voice Over. . .245
Voice Prompting Messages. . .352
Volume Controls. . .353
. .340
Y
Y2K Compliance. . .355
Year 2000 Compliance. . .355
iv ◆ Index
DS2000 Software Manual
Nitsuko America, Telecom Division
4 Forest Parkway
Shelton, CT 06484
TEL: 203-926-5400
FAX: 203-929-0535
Other Important Telephone Numbers
Sales: ......................................................................................203-926-5450
Customer Service: ..................................................................203-926-5444
Customer Service FAX: .........................................................203-926-5454
Technical Service: ..................................................................203-925-8801
Discontinued Product Service:...............................................900-990-2541
Technical Training:.................................................................203-926-5430
Emergency Technical Service (After Hours).........................203-929-7920
(Excludes discontinued products)
Nitsuko Canada, Division of Nitsuko America
165 Matheson Blvd. E., Unit #4-6
Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 3K2
TEL: 905-507-2888
FAX: 905-507-2971
Hardware Manual
80000INS02
October 1999
This system uses fixed slot software. During installation, you can
plug DSTU PCBs only into slots CN1 and CN2. You can plug an
ASTU PCB only into slot CN2 (in place of the second DSTU PCB).
Install ATRU PCBs only into slots CN3 and CN4.
10/13/99
1. Installing the
Cabinet
2. PCB Installation
3. Installing
Extensions and Trunks
4. Optional
Equipment
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
6. Specifications
and Parts
This manual has been developed by Nitsuko America. It is intended for the use of its customers and service
personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:
Nitsuko America, Telecom Division
4 Forest Parkway
Shelton, CT 06484
Attention: Manager, Technical Publications
Nothing contained in this guide shall be deemed to be, and this guide does not constitute, a warranty of, or
representation with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This guide is subject to change without notice
and Nitsuko America has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this guide. Further, Nitsuko
America also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as
it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this guide is complete or accurate in all respects and
Nitsuko America shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall Nitsuko America be liable
for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this guide.
©1999 by Nitsuko America. All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Year 2000 Compliance
The DS2000 is unaffected by the date change to year 2000. The system processes the Leap Year correctly and
does not require any additional upgrades or reprogramming.
Section 1, INSTALLING THE CABINET
In this section . . .
Page
Installing the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Before Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Site Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Planning the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Removing the Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Unpacking the Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . 1-6
Mounting the Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Hanging the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Grounding the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Removing the Right Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Attaching the Ground Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Power Supply Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Installing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Load Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
1-1
1. Installing the
Cabinet
— For Your Notes —
1-2
INSTALLING THE CABINET
Unpacking
Unpack the equipment and check it against your equipment lists.
Inspect for physical damage. If you are not sure about a component’s function, review the Product Description Manual. Contact
your Sales Representative if you have additional questions.
Have the appropriate tools for the job on hand, including: a test
set, a punch down tool and a digital voltmeter.
Site Requirements
The common equipment is contained in the wall-mounted Main
Equipment Cabinet. Choose a central location for the cabinet
that allows enough space for the equipment — and provides
enough room for you to comfortably work. The Installation
Layout (Figure 1-1 on the next page) shows you about how
much space your system requires.
Before Installing
Make sure you have a building plan showing the location of
the common equipment, extensions, the telco demarcation and
earth ground. In addition, the installation site must meet the
requirements outlined in the Standard Practices Manual.
1-3
1. Installing the
Cabinet
INSTALLING THE CABINET
Planning the Installation (Figure 1-1)
80000 - 15A
Before installing the common equipment, you should mount a
Main Distribution Frame (MDF) plywood backboard in a centrally located spot. A 1/2 sheet of plywood (4’ x 4’) should be
more than adequate. Mount this backboard using suitable fasteners, taking care to adhere to standard installation practices
and local codes.
Plywood backboard
4’
Trunk
Blocks
4’
The equipment cabinet requires a three-prong, dedicated 110
VAC 60 Hz circuit (NEMA 5-15 receptacle) located within 7
feet of the AC receptacle.
Normally, you install the extension and trunk blocks to the right
of the Main Cabinet. Telco should also install the RJ21X to the
right of the Main Cabinet.
Station
Blocks
To telco
ground
Station
Blocks
To earth
ground
Dedicated
AC Outlet
Surge
Protector
Figure 1-1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT
1-4
INSTALLING THE CABINET
Removing the Cover (Figure 1-2)
Before wall-mounting, remove the cover on the Main Equipment
Cabinet.
1. Unscrew the two captive screws on the front of the cabinet
cover.
80000 -
12
2. Lift up slightly on the front of the cover — then gently slide
the cover back to remove it.
Figure 1-2 REMOVING THE COVER
1. Installing the
Cabinet
1-5
INSTALLING THE CABINET
Unpacking the Wall Mount Bracket (Figure 1-3)
Mount the wall mount bracket on the MDF in a convenient location, about 12” higher than where you want the bottom of the cabinet to line up.
80000 - 14
The wall mount bracket and screws are taped to the packing material in the Main Equipment Cabinet box. Unpack the wall mount
bracket and mounting screws.
Mounting the Wall Mount Bracket (Figure 1-4)
80
00
0
-1
1
Figure 1-3 WALL MOUNT BRACKET
Figure 1-4 MOUNTING THE WALL MOUNT BRACKET
1-6
INSTALLING THE CABINET
Hanging the Cabinet (Figure 1-5)
1. Hang the Main Equipment Cabinet on the wall mount hanger as shown at right.
80000 - 13
2. Using the remaining two screws that were packed with the
hanger, secure the cabinet to the plywood backboard.
Figure 1-5 HANGING THE CABINET
1. Installing the
Cabinet
1-7
GROUNDING THE CABINET
Removing the Right Side Panel (Figure 1-6)
80000 - 16
Remove the cabinet right side panel to gain easy access to the
ground lugs and system cabling. The cabinet has two ground
connections: ETH (Earth Ground) and PBXG (PBX Ground).
1. Remove the two screws that secure the right side panel to
the cabinet.
2. Carefully slide the right side panel down until it swings clear
of the cabinet.
Figure 1-6 REMOVING THE SIDE PANELS
1-8
GROUNDING THE CABINET
Attaching the Ground Wires (Figures 1-7 and 1-8)
To earth ground
80000 - 17
The system provides two ground terminations. Each ground
connects from the system to the ground termination using 12
AWG stranded copper wire (see Figure 1-7).
●. Use the ETH (Earth Ground) for safety/system ground. You
must connect ETH to a known earth ground.
●. Use the PBXG (PBX Ground) if you have trunks that require
telco ground (such as ground start trunks). This ground is not
required for loop start trunks.
1. Remove the lug on the ground connection you want to connect.
To telco ground
2. Following Figure 1-8, run the ground wire(s) through the RFI
Suppressor Assembly as shown.
3. For Earth Ground:
Run a ground wire from the ETH lug to a known earth ground.
For PBX Ground:
Run a ground wire from the PBXG lug to the telco ground.
4. Crimp ring terminals as required to the ground wires.
5. Reinstall and firmly tighten the lug(s) removed in step 1 above.
Do not plug in the power cord or reinstall the right side
panel until all PCB installation and cabling are complete.
1. Installing the
Cabinet
Figure 1-7 ATTACHING THE GROUND WIRES
1-9
GROUNDING THE CABINET
!! Install RFI Suppressor Assemblies as shown below !!
You must install separate RFI Suppressor Assemblies for the
ground wire, the CPU connections (i.e., mod jack and RS-232
cables), each trunk cable and each station cable. The suppressors must be mounted inside the cabinet and as close to the
appropriate PCB as possible.
08000
35
Figure 1-8 INSTALLING THE RFI SUPPRESSOR
1-10
POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
Installing the Power Supply (Figures 1-9 and 1-10)
The power supply provides the
DC power sources required to
operate the system:
1. Slide the power supply into the
CN101 slot as shown at right.
2. Using a long-shaft phillips
head screwdriver, tighten the
two screws that secure the
power supply.
80
Figure 1-9 POWER SUPPLY
1. Installing the
Cabinet
Figure 1-10 Installing the Power Supply
00
0-
29
1-11
System Configuration
Your cabinet uses fixed slot software. This means:
● You can plug DSTU PCBs only into slots CN1 and CN2.
● You can plug an ASTU PCB only into slot CN2 (in place of
the second DSTU PCB).
● Install ATRU PCBs only into slots CN3 and CN4.
Load Factor
●
●
Load factor in your fixed slot system is an issue only if you
have DSS Consoles and 2-OPX Modules installed (see the
load factor chart below). Exceeding the load factor will cause
your system’s power supply to automatically shut down.
The maximum configuration of your fixed slot system is 16
trunks and 32 extensions.
Item
System Load Factor Calculations
Load Factor
Qty
Total Load
16DSTU PCB
4ASTU PCB
8ASTU PCB
110-Button DSS
24-Button DSS
2-OPX Module
16
8
12
2
1
3
Total load for this configuration
(Cannot exceed 48)
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
1-12
Section 2, PCB INSTALLATION AND STARTUP
In this section . . .
Page
PCB Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Where to Install the PCBs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installing PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Central Processing Unit (CPU) PCB . . . . . . . . 2-3
Installing the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Digital Station (16DSTU) PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Analog Station (8ASTU and 4ASTU) PCBs . . 2-6
Analog Trunk (8ATRU) PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Connecting Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Working with 8-Pin Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Punching Down the Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Making your own Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
!! Important !!
Install telephones connected to DSTU and ASTU PCBs as
on-premise extensions only.
2-1
2. PCB Installation
PCB LOCATION
Where to Install the PCBs (Figure 2-1)
16 Trunks
32 Extensions
80000 - 28
Maximum Configuration:
Follow the chart below and Figure 2-1 when installing PCBs.
Item
Description
Location
CPU
Central Processing Unit CN0
Max.
1
16DSTU 16 Digital Stations
CN1 and CN2
2
ASTU
4 or 8 Analog Stations
CN2
1
8ATRU
8 Analog Trunks
CN3 and CN4
2
Power Supply
CPU
Caution
Do not plug in the CPU PCB hot (i.e., with the
system power applied).
You can plug in ASTU and ATRU PCBs hot as
required.
You can plug in DSTU PCBs hot provided you
first disconnect the station cabling from the PCB.
16DSTU (300-315)
16DSTU (316-331)
4ASTU (316-319)
8ASTU (316-323)
8ATRU (1-8)
8ATRU (9-16)
Figure 2-1 PCB LOCATION
2-2
INSTALLING PCBs
Central Processing Unit (CPU) PCB (Figure 2-2)
The CPU provides:
● The system’s central processing, stored program and memory
for the customer’s site-specific data.
n
l-
●
PC Card interface.
●
Conference circuits, DTMF receivers and DTMF generators.
●
External music input and on-board synthesized music source.
●
External paging output and associated relay.
●
Real Time Clock
●
Battery for short term (14 day) backup of the customer’s
site-specific data.
Figure 2-2 CPU PCB
2. PCB Installation
2-3
INSTALLING PCBs
Installing the CPU (Figures 2-3 and 2-4)
CPU PCB installs in the CN0 slot in the Main Equipment Cabinet.
●
To install the CPU PCB:
1. Slide the Mode Switch to
the RUN position (see
Figure 2-3).
Mode Switch
80000 - 26
2. Insert the battery into the
battery clips.
3. Plug the CPU into slot CN0
(see Figure 2-4).
Refer to Part 4, Installing
Optional Equipment for
instructions on connecting the
music source, External Paging
and the auxiliary relay.
Battery
0-
30
00
80
Figure 2-3 Setting up the CPU
Figure 2-4 INSTALLING THE CPU
2-4
INSTALLING PCBs
Digital Station (16DSTU) PCB (Figures 2-5 and 2-6)
The 16DSTU provides connection for
16 digital telephones. Refer to Section
3, Installing Extensions and Trunks for
wiring instructions.
To install the 16DSTU PCB:
1. Plug the 16DSTU PCB for extensions 300-315 into slot CN1.
2. Plug the 16DSTU PCB for extensions 316-331 into slot CN2.
3. Set the mode switch on each
installed 16DSTU to RUN.
●
Mode
Switch
1
0
00
80
Figure 2-5 DIGITAL STATION (16DSTU) PCB
2. PCB Installation
Figure 2-6 INSTALLING THE 16DSTU PCB
-3
2-5
INSTALLING PCBS
Analog Station (8ASTU and 4ASTU) PCBs
(Figures 2-7 and 2-8)
Mode
The 8ASTU PCB provides connection
for 8 analog extensions. The 4ASTU
PCB provides connection for 4 analog
extensions. Refer to Section 3,
Installing Extensions and Trunks for
wiring instructions.
Switch
To install the ASTU PCB:
1. Plug the ASTU PCB into slot CN2.
With an 8ASTU PCB, this provides extensions 316-323.
With a 4ASTU PCB, this provides extensions 316-319.
You should reserve slot CN1
for a 16DSTU PCB.
2. Set the mode switch on the ASTU to
RUN.
●
1A
0
00
80
Figure 2-7 ANALOG STATION (ASTU) PCB
Figure 2-8 INSTALLING THE ASTU PCB
-3
2-6
INSTALLING PCBs
Analog Trunk (8ATRU) PCB (Figures 2-9 and 2-10)
The 8ATRU provides connection for 8
loop start analog trunks. Refer to Section
3, Installing Extensions and Trunks for
wiring instructions.
To install the 8ATRU PCB:
1. Plug the 8ATRU PCB for trunks 1-8
into slot CN3.
2. Plug the 8ATRU PCB for trunks 916 into slot CN4.
3. Set the mode switch on each
installed 8ATRU to RUN.
●
Mode
Switch
2
0
00
80
Figure 2-9 ANALOG TRUNK (8ATRU) PCB
2. PCB Installation
Figure 2-10 INSTALLING THE 8ATRU PCB
-3
2-7
CONNECTING BLOCKS
Working With 8-Pin Jacks
The system uses 8-pin mod jacks to connect extensions, trunks
and optional equipment. Using the Installation Cable (P/N
80892) makes it easy to connect the PCBs to standard 66M1-50
connecting blocks. These cables have 6 8-pin modular jacks on
one end and are unterminated on the other. In general, each cabinet needs:
● One 66M1-50 block and Installation Cable (P/N 80892) for
extensions and optional equipment.
●
One 66M1-50 block and Installation Cable (P/N 80892) for
trunks.
Note: Depending on your PCB configuration and local codes,
you may need an additional 66M1-50 block and
Installation Cable (P/N 80892) for optional equipment.
Punching Down the Cables (Figures 2-11 to 2-14)
The Installation Cables have 6 8-pin jacks installed on one end
and are unterminated on the other. Each 8-pin jack connects 4
extensions or 4 trunks.
1. For each 66M1-50 block, punch down the Installation Cable
in standard color-code order.
● Use Figure 2-11 when connecting extensions.
● Use Figure 2-12 when connecting trunks.
2. After you have punched down your cables, route them
through the side of the cabinet and secure them with the
strain relief (Figure 2-13).
3. Following Figure 2-14, snap an RFI Suppressor Assembly
around each 50-pin cable.
Making your own Cables (Figure 2-15)
If you want to make your own cables (instead of using
Installation Cable P/N 80892), follow the pinouts in Figure 2-15.
2-8
2-9
PCB Location
16DSTU PCB
8ASTU PCB
Extensions 300-323 Shown
25-PAIR CABLE
8
BLOCK
TERM
COLOR
CODE
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHT-BLU
BLU-WHT
WHT-ORN
ORN-WHT
WHT-GRN
GRN-WHT
WHT-BRN
BRN-WHT
300
300
301
301
302
302
303
303
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
WHT-SLT
SLT-WHT
RED-BLU
BLU-RED
RED-ORN
ORN-RED
RED-GRN
GRN-RED
304
304
305
305
306
306
307
307
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
RED-BRN
BRN-RED
RED-SLT
SLT-RED
BLK-BLU
BLU-BLK
BLK-ORN
ORN-BLK
308
308
309
309
310
310
311
311
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
4
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
BLK-GRN
GRN-BLK
BLK-BRN
BRN-BLK
BLK-SLT
SLT-BLK
YEL-BLLU
BLU-YEL
312
312
313
313
314
314
315
315
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
5
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
YEL-ORN
ORN-YEL
YEL-GRN
GRN-YEL
YEL-BRN
BRN-YEL
YEL-SLT
SLT-YEL
316
316
317
317
318
318
319
319
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
6
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
VIO-BLU
BLU-VIO
VIO-ORN
ORN-VIO
VIO-GRN
GRN-VIO
VIO-BRN
BRN-VIO
320
320
321
321
322
322
323
323
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
49
50
VIO-SLT
SLT-VIO
4
1
RJ-61X Plug
For Power Failure
Telephone connections,
refer to Section 4,
Optional Equipment.
80000 - 19A
FUNCTION
NC
NC
RJ-61X
2. PCB Installation
3
12
RJ61X
Figure 2-11 CONNECTING EXTENSIONS
CONNECTING BLOCKS
56
2-10
PCB Location
8ATRU PCB
8ATRU PCB
N/C N/C
6
Trunks 1-16
5
25-PAIR CABLE
3
RJ61X
BLOCK
TERM
COLOR
CODE
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHT-BLU
BLU-WHT
WHT-ORN
ORN-WHT
WHT-GRN
GRN-WHT
WHT-BRN
BRN-WHT
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
WHT-SLT
SLT-WHT
RED-BLU
BLU-RED
RED-ORN
ORN-RED
RED-GRN
GRN-RED
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
RED-BRN
BRN-RED
RED-SLT
SLT-RED
BLK-BLU
BLU-BLK
BLK-ORN
ORN-BLK
9 T
9 R
10 T
10 R
11 T
11 R
12 T
12 R
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
4
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
BLK-GRN
GRN-BLK
BLK-BRN
BRN-BLK
BLK-SLT
SLT-BLK
YEL-BLLU
BLU-YEL
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
NC
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
YEL-ORN
ORN-YEL
YEL-GRN
GRN-YEL
YEL-BRN
BRN-YEL
YEL-SLT
SLT-YEL
VIO-BLU
BLU-VIO
VIO-ORN
ORN-VIO
VIO-GRN
GRN-VIO
VIO-BRN
BRN-VIO
VIO-SLT
SLT-VIO
CONNECTING BLOCKS
2
1
8
1
RJ-61X Plug
80000 - 20
FUNCTION
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
RJ-61X
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
5
4
3
6
2
7
1
8
Figure 2-12 CONNECTING TRUNKS
4
CONNECTING BLOCKS
80000 - 33
!! Install RFI Suppressor Assemblies as shown below !!
You must install separate RFI Suppressor Assemblies for the
ground wire, the CPU connections (i.e., mod jack and RS-232
cables), each trunk cable and each station cable. The suppressors must be mounted inside the cabinet and as close to the
appropriate PCB as possible.
0-
35
8000
Figure 2-13 SECURING THE CABLES
2. PCB Installation
Figure 2-14 INSTALLING THE RFI SUPPRESSOR
2-11
CONNECTING BLOCKS
The following products should help if you make your own cables:
● Suttle SE-266-8K 8 Position Modular Plug (requires an SE-166
or SE-166-6 modular crimping tool).
● Hubbell BRFTP4P Snap-On 8 Position Modular Plug (does not
require a special crimping tool).
Check with your local supplier for other comparable products.
To 66 Block
WHT-BLU (1T)
To CPU
Mod Jack
Latch
faces up
RJ61X
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Port
Designation
BLU-WHT (1R)
4T
3T
2T
1R
1T
2R
3R
4R
WHT-ORN (2T)
80000 - 18C
ORN-WHT (2R)
WHT-GRN (3T)
GRN-WHT (3R)
WHT-BRN (4T)
Note
reversal
Figure 2-15 8-PIN (RJ61X) JACK PINOUTS
BRN-WHT (4R)
2-12
Section 3, INSTALLING EXTENSIONS AND TRUNKS
In this section . . .
Page
Connecting Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Connecting Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Connecting Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Connecting Analog Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Up and System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Finishing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Reinstalling the Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reinstalling the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-1
3. Installing
Extensions and Trunks
CONNECTING EXTENSIONS
Connecting Extensions (Figure 3-1)
One-Pair
Cross Connect
Each 16DSTU PCB connects 16 digital extensions. Each
8ASTU PCB connects 8 analog extensions. Each 4ASTU PCB
connects 4 analog extensions.
1. Using Figure 2-11 as a guide, insert the mod jacks into the
appropriate connector on the PCB.
2. Install a modular jack for each extension within 6 feet of the
telephone’s location.
3. For each extension, run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from
the cross-connect block to the modular jack.
4. Terminate the station cable WHT/BLU - BLU/WHT leads to
the RED and GRN lugs in the modular jack.
5. Back at the main equipment location, run one pair of crossconnect wire between the pins on the B block and cross-connect block to complete the connection.
YEL
BLU-WHT
Station
Block
Cross
Connect
Block
RED
BLK
WHT-BLU
GRN
625
Modular
Jack
25-Pair
Installation Cable
(P/N 80892)
6. Install bridging clips as required.
80
00
0
-3
6A
You can also connect analog extensions to 2-OPX
modules. See page 4-14 for more.
Figure 3-1 CONNECTING EXTENSIONS
3-2
CONNECTING TRUNKS
Connecting Analog Trunks (Figure 3-2)
Each 8ATRU PCB connects 8 loop start CO trunks.
1. Using Figure 2-12 as a guide, insert the mod jacks into the
appropriate connector on the PCB.
80000 - 37
2. For each trunk, run one pair cross-connect wire between the
pins on the cross-connect block and the CPE (customer side)
of the telco’s RJ21X.
One-Pair
Cross Connect
3. Install bridging clips as required.
"A"
Block
Telco
RJ21X
25-Pair Cable
to Central Office
25-Pair
Installation Cable
(P/N 80892)
Figure 3-2 CONNECTING ANALOG TRUNKS
3. Installing
Extensions and Trunks
3-3
POWER UP AND SYSTEM LEDS
Power-Up (Figures 3-3 to 3-5)
Now that all the PCBs you need are installed and you have
cabled the system, you can now power-up. You do not need to
reattach the right side panel before powering up the system.
Leaving the right side panel removed makes the station and
trunk cabling more accessible.
To power up the system:
1. Make sure the system is properly grounded and the PCB
bracket is reinstalled and secured.
➠ indicates the LEDs normal (i.e., system OK) status.
➠
+ 5 V DC (Green)
On: +5 V DC power present
Off: +5 V DC power not present
●
2. Install surge protectors in the AC outlet you intend to use for
system power.
- 5 V DC (Yellow)
-5 V DC power present
Off: -5 V DC power not present
➠ On:
3. Plug the main cabinet’s AC power cord into its surge protector.
4. Turn on the main cabinet power switch.
After about 30 seconds, verify that the PCB LEDs
agree with the illustrations at right and on page 3-5.
- 40 V DC (Red)
➠ On: -40 V DC power present
Off: -40 V DC power not present
Figure 3-3 POWER SUPPLY STATUS LEDS
3-4
P
POWER UP AND SYSTEM LEDS
C
➠ indicates the LEDs normal (i.e., system OK) status.
➠
➠ indicates the LEDs normal (i.e., system OK) status.
CPU Running (Green)
Slow flash: CPU OK
On: CPU starting
Major Alarm (Red)
On: Major alarm present
➠ Off: Major alarm not present
➠
Minor Alarm (Red)
On: Minor alarm present
➠ Off: Minor alarm not present
RS-232 Port (Yellow)
Flashing: RS-232 port active
➠ Off: RS-232 idle
PC Card (Red)
Flashing:PC card write/read active
➠ Off: PC card idle
3-4 CPU STATUS LEDS
A
Sync Status (Green)
Fast flash: PCB running, waiting
for sync. Same as
having mode switch
set to stop.
Slow flash: PCB running, in sync.
Port Activity (Yellow)
➠ Off: All ports on PCB idle.
Flash: Port(s) busy. The faster
the flash, the more ports
are busy.
Figure 3-5 DSTU, ASTU and ATRU STATUS LEDS
3-5
3. Installing
Extensions and Trunks
FINISHING THE INSTALLATION
Reinstalling the Side Panel (Figure 3-6)
80000 - 16 A
To reinstall the side panel:
1. Carefully realign the right side panel and slide it into position.
2. Reattach the two screws that secure the right side panel to
the cabinet.
●
Figure 3-6 REINSTALLING THE SIDE PANELS
3-6
FINISHING THE INSTALLATION
Reinstalling the Front Cover (Figure 3-7)
To reinstall the front cover:
1. Hook the tabs on the rear of the cover into their associated slots.
2. Push the front of the cover into place.
3. Screw in the two captive screws that secure the cover to
the cabinet.
80000 -
12 A
●
Figure 3-7 REINSTALLING THE FRONT COVER
3. Installing
Extensions and Trunks
3-7
— For Your Notes —
3-8
Section 4, INSTALLING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
In this section . . .
Page
External Paging and Page Relays . . . . . . . .4-2
In this section . . .
Page
2-OPX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Installing External Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Installing External Paging Control Relays. . . . 4-4
Installing the 2-OPX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Programming 2-OPX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Wall-Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Installing the Digital Door Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Programming the Digital Door Box . . . . . . . . 4-6
Installing the Wall-Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Installing the Wall-Mount Handset Hanger . . 4-16
Wall-Mounting a Key Telephone. . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Music Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Installing a Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Programming Background Music . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Programming Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Desk Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Power Failure Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Installing the REJ Recording Jack. . . . . . . . . 4-22
Using the Desk Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
REJ Recording Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Power Failure Cut-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
DSS Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Installing a DSS Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Programming DSS Consoles. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-1
4. Optional
Equipment
EXTERNAL PAGING AND PAGE RELAYS
Installing External Paging (Figure 4-1)
The CPU provides an External Paging output and associated
relay contacts. You connect the Paging output to audio inputs
on customer provided Paging systems. In some Paging systems,
you can use the associated CPU relays to automatically turn the
amplifiers on and off. The control relays are normally open and
close whenever the External Paging is activated.
To connect an External Paging amplifier:
1. Find an available connector in a station cable and make sure
it is correctly punched down at the 66M1-50 block.
●
Follow standard color code order. Be sure the block is
properly cross-connected.
2. For the connector chosen, locate pins 1T and 1R (see Figure
4-1) and connect the music source.
3. Plug the modular jack into the CPU modular connector.
Be sure the connected Paging equipment is compatible with the
following CPU page output specifications:
Output Impedance: 600 Ohms
Output Level:
0 dBr @ 1.0 kHz
4-2
EXTERNAL PAGING AND PAGE RELAYS
The following products should help if you make your own cables:
● Suttle SE-266-8K 8 Position Modular Plug (requires an SE-166
or SE-166-6 modular crimping tool).
● Hubbell BRFTP4P Snap-On 8 Position Modular Plug (does not
require a special crimping tool).
Check with your local supplier for other comparable products.
To 66 Block
WHT-BLU (1T)
To CPU
Mod Jack
Latch
faces up
RJ61X
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Port
Designation
4T
3T
2T
1R
1T
2R
3R
4R
80000 - 18B
BLU-WHT (1R)
Page Out
WHT-ORN (2T)
ORN-WHT (2R)
Music In
WHT-GRN (3T)
GRN-WHT (3R)
Relay Contacts
WHT-BRN (4T)
Note
reversal
BRN-WHT (4R)
Figure 4-1 CONNECTING EXTERNAL PAGING
4. Optional
Equipment
No Connection
4-3
EXTERNAL PAGING AND PAGE RELAYS
Installing External Paging Control Relays (Figure 4-2)
You can program the CPU relays to automatically close when
External Paging or night ringing is active. The control relays
are normally open and close when active.
To connect an External Paging Control Relays:
1. Find an available connector in a station cable and make sure
it is correctly punched down at the 66M1-50 block.
●
Follow standard color code order. Be sure the block is
properly cross-connected.
2. For the connector chosen, locate pins 3T and 3R (see Figure
4-2) and connect to the device the relays will control.
3. Plug the modular jack into the CPU modular connector.
Be sure the equipment connected to the relays is compatible
with the following CPU relay specifications:
Output Impedance: 600 Ohms
Output Level:
Nominal 250 mV (-10dBm)
Maximum Output: 400 mV RMS
Configuration:
Normally open
4-4
EXTERNAL PAGING AND PAGE RELAYS
The following products should help if you make your own cables:
● Suttle SE-266-8K 8 Position Modular Plug (requires an SE-166
or SE-166-6 modular crimping tool).
● Hubbell BRFTP4P Snap-On 8 Position Modular Plug (does not
require a special crimping tool).
Check with your local supplier for other comparable products.
To 66 Block
WHT-BLU (1T)
To CPU
Mod Jack
Latch
faces up
RJ61X
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Port
Designation
BLU-WHT (1R)
4T
3T
2T
1R
1T
2R
3R
4R
WHT-ORN (2T)
ORN-WHT (2R)
Page Out
Music In
WHT-GRN (3T)
GRN-WHT (3R)
80000 - 18
Relay Contacts
WHT-BRN (4T)
Note
reversal
BRN-WHT (4R)
Figure 4-2 CONNECTING CONTROL RELAYS
4. Optional
Equipment
No Connection
4-5
DOOR BOX
Installing the Digital Door Box (Figure 4-3)
Any available 16DSTU PCB port can support a Digital Door
Box (P/N 92246).
Programming the Digital Door Box
1801: Extension Circuit Type
Assign the Door Box circuit type 10.
●
To install the Digital Door Box:
1. Snap open the Door Box case.
●
2. Punch down one end of a two-pair twisted station cable on
the extension block as shown in Figure 4-3.
3. Run the station cable through the hole in the back of the
Door Box.
When wall mounting, use the two holes in the base of
the Door Box for the mounting screws.
4. Strip the conductors back about 1/2 inch and connect to the
Door Box terminals.
4-6
Digital Door Box
(Extension 304)
DOOR BOX
White/Blue
9
10
11
12
13
14
TT Blue/White
TR
80000 - 39A
Station Cable
Lead Designations
White/Blue
Blue/White
Mounting screws
(Customer provided)
Digital Door Box
(P/N 92246)
Figure 4-3 CONNECTING A DOOR BOX
4. Optional
Equipment
4-7
MUSIC SOURCES
Installing a Music Source (Figure 4-4)
The CPU provides connection for a customer provided music
source. Use this music source for Background Music and Music
on Hold.
To connect a music source:
1. Find an available connector in a station cable and make sure
it is correctly punched down at the 66M1-50 block.
●
Follow standard color code order. Be sure the block is
properly cross-connected.
2. For the connector chosen, locate pins 2T and 2R (see Figure
4-4) and connect the music source.
3. Plug the modular jack into the CPU modular connector.
Programming Background Music
0201: Background Music
Enter Y to enable Background Music system-wide.
●
1802: BGM
Enter Y to enable Background Music at the extension.
●
Programming Music on Hold
0201: Music on Hold
Enter Y to enable Music on Hold system-wide.
●
0201: MOH on Transfer
Enter Y to enable Music on Hold for transferred calls.
●
Be sure the connected music source is compatible with the following CPU music input specifications:
Input Impedance: 10K Ohms
Output Level:
+18 dBr (+/- 2 dBr) @ 1.0 kHz
4-8
MUSIC SOURCES
The following products should help if you make your own cables:
● Suttle SE-266-8K 8 Position Modular Plug (requires an SE-166
or SE-166-6 modular crimping tool).
● Hubbell BRFTP4P Snap-On 8 Position Modular Plug (does not
require a special crimping tool).
Check with your local supplier for other comparable products.
To 66 Block
WHT-BLU (1T)
RJ61X
Pin
To CPU
Mod Jack
Latch
faces up
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLU-WHT (1R)
Port
Designation
Page Out
WHT-ORN (2T)
4T
3T
2T
1R
1T
2R
3R
4R
ORN-WHT (2R)
Music In
WHT-GRN (3T)
GRN-WHT (3R)
80000 - 18A
Relay Contacts
WHT-BRN (4T)
Note
reversal
BRN-WHT (4R)
Figure 4-4 INSTALLING A MUSIC SOURCE
4. Optional
Equipment
No Connection
4-9
POWER FAILURE TELEPHONES
Power Failure Cut-Through (Figure 4-5)
When system AC power fails, the 8ATRU PCB automatically
cuts through the first 2 trunk circuits to 2 Power Failure
Telephone connections.
To install Power Failure Cut-Through:
1. Locate an available 8-pin jack in a trunk (A) block or station
(B) block.
●
Local codes may prevent you from using a DDK connector on the A block for optional equipment.
2. For the 8-pin jack chosen, cross-connect the associated wire
pair from the A or B block to the cross-connect block.
To test the Power Failure Telephone:
1. Connect a Power Failure Telephone per Figure 4-5.
●
2. Power down the system.
3. At the Power Failure Telephone, lift the handset.
You should hear dial tone on the trunk you connected
in Figure 4-5.
4. Place a test call.
If power is restored while a cut-through call is in
progress, the call is maintained until the user hangs up
the Power Failure Cut-Through telephone.
3. Install a modular jack for each Power Failure Telephone
within six feet of the telephone’s location.
4. For each Power Failure Telephone, run one-pair of 24 AWG
station cable from the cross-connect block to the telephone’s
modular jack.
5. Terminate the station cable WHT/BLU - BLU/WHT leads to
the RED and GRN lugs in the modular jack.
6. Install bridging clips as required.
4-10
POWER FAILURE TELEPHONES
One-Pair Cross-Connect
WHT-BLU
BLU-WHT
GRN
RED
BLK
YEL
80000 - 40
8-Pin
Connector
To Power
Failure
Telephone
connector on
ATRU PCB
Station
Block
Cross
Connect
Block
625
Modular
Jack
25 Pair
Installation Cable
Power
Failure
Telephone
Figure 4-5 CONNECTING A POWER FAILURE TELEPHONE
4. Optional
Equipment
4-11
DSS CONSOLE
Installing a DSS Console (Figures 4-6 and 4-7)
The DSS Console gives a keyset user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
and one-button access to extensions, trunks and system features.
Keep the following in mind when installing DSS Consoles:
● You can only connect DSS Consoles to Super Display or 34Button Display telephones.
●
A DSS Console does not require a separate station port – it
connects directly to the keyset.
To install a DSS Console:
1. Turn the telephone upside down and remove the plastic filler
plug from the DSS modular connector.
●
2. Plug the DSS Console’s 8-pin modular line cord into the
telephone’s DSS connector.
3. Plug the other end of the 8-pin line cord into the DSS
Console’s 8-pin jack.
Programming DSS Consoles
1801: DSS Type
For the extension to which you have connected the DSS Console,
enter 1 for 24-button, 2 for 110-button and 0 for unassigned.
●
1801: DSS Block Number
For the extension to which you have connected the DSS
Console, enter the number of the block that corresponds to the
connected console. A block is a unique DSS Console assignment. The system provides up to 4 blocks. If your system has
more than 4 DSS Consoles connected, some will have to share
DSS Console Key Assignment Programming (see below).
●
1704: DSS Console Key Assignment
Program the DSS Console's keys. Refer to the software manual
for additional programming details.
●
4. If you have a 24-Button DSS Console, attach the metal plate
to both the DSS Console and telephone as shown.
4-12
DSS CONSOLE
To 625 Modular Jack
To 625 Modular Jack
80000 - 44
Keyset
80000 - 47
DSS Console
DSS Console
Figure 4-6 INSTALLING A 110-BUTTON DSS CONSOLE
Keyset
Figure 4-7 INSTALLING A 24-BUTTON DSS CONSOLE 4-13
4. Optional
Equipment
2-OPX MODULE
Installing the 2-OPX Module (Figure 4-8)
The 2-OPX Module provides two 2500 type analog circuits for
connection to on-premise 2500 type single line devices (i.e.,
telephones, fax machines, modems, etc.) and to telco OL13B/C
OPX circuits. It uses a single digital extension circuit for the
power and signaling for both analog ports.
To install a 2-OPX Module:
1. Locate an 8-pin modular connector in a trunk (A) block or
station (B) block.
●
Local codes may prevent you from using a DDK connector on the A block for optional equipment.
2. For the connector chosen, cross-connect the associated wire
pair from the A or B block to the cross-connect block.
3. Install a modular jack for the 2 OPX Module within six feet
of the module’s location.
4. Run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect
block to the modular jack.
5. Terminate the station cable WHT/BLU - BLU/WHT leads to
the RED and GRN lugs in the modular jack.
6. Install bridging clips as required.
7. Ground the 2-OPX Module by connecting a 12 AWG ground
wire from the FG lug to a known earth ground.
8. Plug a line cord into the 2-OPX unit and the 2-OPX’s modular jack.
The DS1 LED on the 2-OPX Module lights steadily.
Programming 2-OPX Modules
1801: Extension Circuit Type
Assign the 2-OPX extension circuit type 21.
The 2-OPX Module uses a single port.
When connected to the first DSTU PCB in the system, the first
2-OPX extension number is the same as the port’s extension
number. The second 2-OPX extension number is the first port
plus 201. For example, the two extension numbers for the
2-OPX Module plugged into extension 314 are 314 and 515.
●
When connected to the second DSTU PCB in the system, the
first 2-OPX extension number is the same as the port’s extension number. The second 2-OPX extension number is the first
port plus 217. For example, the two extension numbers for the
2-OPX Module plugged into extension 316 are 316 and 533.
4-14
2-OPX MODULE
One-Pair Cross-Connect
WHT-BLU
BLU-WHT
GRN
RED
BLK
YEL
80000 - 41
8-Pin
Connector
To digital
station
circuit on
DSTU PCB
Station
Block
625
Modular
Jack
Cross
Connect
Block
25 Pair
Installation Cable
2-OPX Modular
DS1
FG
14 AWG to known
Earth Ground
Figure 4-8 CONNECTING THE 2-OPX MODULE
4. Optional
Equipment
4-15
WALL-MOUNT KIT
Installing the Wall-Mount Kit
You can use a wall-mount kit to attach any key telephone to a
wall. The wall-mount kit includes a mounting bracket, wallmount screws and a handset hanger.
Installing the Wall-Mount Handset Hanger (Figure 4-9)
1. Remove the rubber plug that covers the slots for the handset
hanger. Store the plug in a safe place.
2. Insert the handset hanger in the slot provided beneath the
telephone’s hookswitch.
80000 - 38
Figure 4-9 INSTALLING THE WALL-MOUNT HANGER
4-16
WALL-MOUNT KIT
Wall-Mounting a Key Telephone (Figures 4-10
through 4-12)
To mount the telephone on the wall (Figure 4-10):
1. Using the screws provided, attach the wall-mount bracket to
the wall in the desired location.
●
2. Plug in the telephone’s modular line cord.
3. Run the telephone’s line cord through one of the slots in the
bottom of the wall-mount bracket.
4. Plug the line cord into the telephone’s 625 modular jack.
80000 - 42
5. Place the telephone on top of the wall-mount bracket and
snap into place.
Run cord
through
slot
To wall jack
Tab on phone must snap
into cutout on wall mount bracket
Figure 4-10 INSTALLING THE WALL MOUNT BRACKET
4-17
4. Optional
Equipment
WALL-MOUNT KIT
To mount the telephone on a wall plate (Figure 4-11):
1. Snap the wall-mount bracket onto the wall plate.
●
2. Plug the telephone’s line cord into the jack in the wall plate
and into the telephone.
3. Place the telephone on top of the wall-mount bracket and
snap into place.
80000 - 43
Tab on phone must snap
into cutout on wall mount bracket
Figure 4-11 MOUNTING ON A WALL PLATE
4-18
WALL-MOUNT KIT
To remove the telephone from the wall mount kit
(Figure 4-12):
1. From the front of the phone, grab the tabs that secure the
telephone to the wall-mount kit.
●
2. While pressing in the tabs, lift up the phone until it snaps
clear of the wall-mount kit.
80000 - 45
Press down tabs
on phone and
pull bracket in
direction of arrows
Figure 4-12 REMOVING THE WALL MOUNT BRACKET
4-19
4. Optional
Equipment
— For Your Notes —
4-20
DESK STAND
Using the Desk Stand (Figure 4-13)
Each telephone has an integrated desk stand. You can extend
the desk stand in one of two positions: low and high.
To use the desk stand low position:
1. Flip up each telephone leg until it snaps into place.
●
To use the desk stand high position:
1. Flip up each telephone leg into the low position.
●
2. Push out the leg extender.
3. Slide the extender up, then down until it locks in place as
shown at right.
80000 - 46
Figure 4-13 USING THE DESK STAND
4-21
4. Optional
Equipment
REJ RECORDING JACK
Installing the REJ Recording Jack (Figure 4-14)
Use the REJ Recording Jack (P/N 80175) to connect a Super
Display or 34-Button Display Telephone to an external tape
recorder or amplifier. The REJ output is a mono sub-miniature jack
which connects directly to an AUX level input. The REJ broadcasts
both sides of your conversation (i.e., your voice and your caller’s
voice) whenever you lift your handset. The REJ does not broadcast
Paging announcements or activate for Handsfree calls.
CAUTION
Be sure the connected audio device provides a standard AUX
level input.
To install the REJ Recording Jack:
1. Unplug the telephone line cord and handset cord, and turn
the telephone face down on a non-abrasive surface.
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the telephone base.
3. Separate the telephone faceplate from the telephone base.
4. On the left side of the telephone base, remove the plastic
molding that covers the hole for the REJU connector. You
only need to remove the top half of the molding.
5. Install the REJ as shown (with the components facing down).
6. Secure with the supplied screw.
To connect the REJ Recording Jack:
1. Route the REJ wires through the guides in the telephone base.
2. Plug the REJ cable into the connector in the telephone PCB.
The connector is keyed so you can’t plug in the cable
the wrong way.
3. Reassemble the telephone, plug in the handset, and reconnect the line cord.
8. Using an audio cable, connect the REJ to the amplifier’s
mono AUX input.
To connect to a stereo AUX input, use a commercially
available mono-to-stereo splitter cable.
●
●
4-22
REJ RECORDING JACK
Red wire
80
00
0-
48
To mono AUX input on amplifier
Figure 4-14 INSTALLING THE REJ
4. Optional
Equipment
4-23
REJ RECORDING JACK
— For Your Notes —
4-24
Section 5, MAINTENANCE OPTIONS AND SMDR
In this section . . .
Page
In this section . . .
Page
Backing Up Site Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Backing Up Site Data with a PC Card . . . . . . 5-3
PC Card Backup Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Installing SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Programming SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Restoring Site Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Restoring Site Data from a PC Card . . . . . . . . 5-6
PC Card Restore Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Making your own Data Cables . . . . . . . . .5-12
Installing a Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Loading New System Software . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Loading System Software from a PC Card . . . 5-7
5-1
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
— For Your Notes —
5-2
BACKING UP SITE DATA
Backing Up Site Data with a PC Card (Figure 5-1)
You can use PC Card P/N 85880 or P/N 80050-V**.** (with
system software preloaded) to back up and restore your site data.
Mode Switch
80000 - 27
PC Card Active
LED
To use the PC Card to back up site data:
1. Insert the PC Card into the CPU.
2. Be sure the CPU mode switch is set to RUN.
3. Enter the programming mode.
ICM + #*#* + 372000 + HOLD
●
4. Dial 9906 + HOLD.
You see: START?
To quit program 9906 instead, dial N + HOLD .
5. Dial Y + HOLD.
You see: 9906: DATABASE NAME
6. Enter a name for the database you want to save (up to 10
characters long).
Refer to Keys for Entering Names on the next page if
you need help when entering names.
Skip this step if you want to save data in an address
that already has a name assigned.
5-3
Figure 5-1 USING THE PC CARD
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
BACKING UP SITE DATA
Keys for Entering Names
Press this
key . . .
Then one of these keys to enter the character in the white cell . . .
1
1
&
2
A
2
3
4
#
B
C
2
3
7. When you are done entering the name, press HOLD.
You see the name and date of the first database stored.
If no data bases are stored, you see:
9906: DB00
(empty)
1
3
D
E
F
4
G
H
I
4
5
J
K
L
5
6
M
N
O
7
P
Q
R
8
T
U
V
9
W
X
Y
0
SPACE
:
6
S
7
8
Z
9
0
*
*
#
#
To enter characters in lower case (e.g., e instead of E), press MW before pressing the key in the
first shaded column.
Figure 5-2 ENTERING NAMES
8. The system assigns the name you entered in step 7 to the
address you select below:
- Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the 12 data base
addresses (DB 00 through DB 11).
OR
- Skip this step to select the currently displayed data base.
9. Press HOLD.
Normally, you see
9906: SAVING . . . . . . . . .
The PC Card Active LED is on during backup.
If the address you choose already has data stored in it,
you see: REPLACE DB nn Y/N.
- Press N + HOLD to back up to step 5.
- Press Y + HOLD to proceed.
You automatically exit programming when the upload
completes.
5-4
BACKING UP SITE DATA
PC Card Backup Error Messages
This error message . . .
NO PCCARD
Means this . . .
The PC card is not installed.
Install the PC card and try again.
ERASE FAILED
The system could not overwrite an
existing data base on the PC card.
Repeat the procedure. If you get the
message again, try another PC card.
SAVE FAILED
The system could not save data to the
PC card.
Repeat the procedure. If you get the
message again, try another PC card.
5-5
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
RESTORING SITE DATA
Restoring Site Data from a PC Card
To use the PC Card to restore site data:
1. Insert the PC Card into the CPU (see Figure 5-1).
●
2. Be sure the CPU mode switch is set to RUN.
3. Enter the programming mode.
ICM + #*#* + 372000 + HOLD
4. Dial 9907 + HOLD.
You see: START?
5. Dial Y + HOLD.
You see the name and date of the first database stored.
If no data bases are stored, you see:
9907: DB00
(empty)
6. Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the 12 data base
addresses (DB 00 through DB 11) and select the one you
want to restore.
7. When the data base you want to restore displays, press
HOLD.
The PC Card Active LED is on during restore.
You automatically exit programming when the upload
completes.
PC Card Restore Error Messages
This error message . . .
NO PCCARD
Means this . . .
The PC card is not installed.
Install the PC card and try again.
NO DATABASE
There is not data stored in the data base
address you selected.
Select another data base address and
try again.
5-6
LOADING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE
Loading System Software from a PC Card
●
To use the PC Card to load system software
(P/N 80050-V**.** only):
Loading new system software will automatically reload
the factory installed (default) program entries.
1. Insert the PC Card into the CPU (see Figure 5-1).
2. Be sure the CPU mode switch is set to BOOT.
3. Press the reset switch on the CPU to reset the system.
The LEDs on the CPU will start to cycle.
After about 1 minute, the system will restart with the
new software loaded using the factory installed
(default) entries. The LEDs on the CPU will then flash
normally (see Figure 5-3).
4. Once the system restarts, switch the CPU mode switch to RUN.
➠ indicates the LEDs normal (i.e., system OK) status.
➠
CPU Running (Green)
Slow flash: CPU OK
On: CPU starting
Major Alarm (Red)
On: Major alarm present
➠ Off: Major alarm not present
Minor Alarm (Red)
On: Minor alarm present
➠ Off: Minor alarm not present
RS-232 Port (Yellow)
Flashing: RS-232 port active
➠ Off: RS-232 idle
PC Card (Red)
Flashing:PC card write/read active
➠ Off: PC card idle
5-3 CPU STATUS LEDS
5-7
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
SMDR
Installing SMDR (Figure 5-4)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of
the system’s outside calls. Once set up in programming, SMDR
automatically outputs from the RS-232 (serial) port on the CPU
to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection
device. When connecting SMDR, you can use one of the readymade cables or make one of your own (see page 5-12).
You can also connect a PC to the CPU serial port to
collect call history data.
To connect an SMDR device:
1. Plug the DIN end of the 8-Pin DIN to Mod-8 Cable (P/N
80893) into the CPU serial port.
●
2. Plug one end of the DB9 to Mod-8 Adaptor (P/N 85980) into
the cable.
3. Plug the other end of the adaptor into the DB9M COM connector on the back of your PC.
Programming SMDR
0301: CPU Baud Rate
Assign the baud rate for the RS-232-C port on the CPU. The
options are 2 (1200), 3 (2400), 4 (4800), 5 (9600) and 6 (19200).
You can also press Ctrl Break on a PC connected to
the CPU serial port to toggle through the available
CPU baud rates.
●
0301: SMDR Port
Enter 1 to enable SMDR output from the CPU RS-232-C port.
●
0301: Print SMDR Header
Enter Y to have the beginning of the SMDR report include the
column header data. Enter N to have the SMDR report only
include the call data (without the header).
●
1001: Print SMDR
Enter Y to have the SMDR report include calls on the trunk.
Enter N to have the SMDR report exclude calls on the trunk.
●
The default communications parameters of the CPU
serial port are 4800 8 N 1 (4800 baud, eight data bits,
no parity and 1 stop bit).
If you have a PC connected to collect history data,
press Shift 1 to turn history on and off.
5-8
SMDR
80000 - 49
P/N 80893
P/N 85980
DB9M COM PORT
CPU RS-232 Port
5-9
Figure 5-4 CONNECTING SMDR
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
MODEM INSTALLATION
Installing a Modem (Figure 5-5)
You can connect a modem to the CPU serial port to remotely
collect history data and/or SMDR.
To connect a modem:
1. Plug the DIN end of the 8-Pin DIN to Mod-8 Cable (P/N
80893) into the CPU serial port.
●
2. Plug one end of the DB25 to Mod-8 Adaptor (P/N 85981)
into the cable.
3. Plug the other end of the adaptor into the DB25F connector
on the back of your modem.
4. Following the instructions that came with your modem, connect a trunk and the modem’s power supply.
●
To call from a PC at a remote site:
The remote PC must have a modem connected. Also,
the default communications parameters of the CPU
serial port are 4800 8 N 1 (4800 baud, eight data bits,
no parity and 1 stop bit).
1. Using commercially available communications software, dial
the phone number of the trunk connected to the modem at
the telephone system site.
2. To test history, type Shift 1 on the remote PC.
If history doesn’t output correctly, press Ctrl Break on
the remote PC to toggle through the available CPU
baud rates.
5-10
MODEM INSTALLATION
80000 - 50
To trunk
P/N 80893
P/N 85981
CPU RS-232 Port
Modem Power
Supply
5-11
Figure 5-5 INSTALLING A MODEM
5. Maintenance
Options and SMDR
MAKING YOUR OWN DATA CABLES
4
5
8
8
80000 - 51
P/N 80893
6
3
1
8 x 8 JACK WIRING
Mod-8
8-Pin DIN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
13
5
1
9
6
1
Brown wire (Pin 1)
1
1
80000-53
2
80000 - 52
7
DSR
RTS
RXD
SG
TXD
CTS
DTR
DCD
1
8
5
4
6
25
14
DB25 WIRING
1
8 x 8 JACK WIRING
DB9 WIRING
PIN
COLOR
PIN
COLOR
PIN
COLOR
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLUE
ORANGE
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BROWN
SLATE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
YELLOW
GREEN
SLATE
BROWN
BLUE
RED
ORANGE
BLACK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLUE
ORANGE
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BROWN
SLATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
COLOR
JUMPER TO PIN 6
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE AND ORANGE
RED
BLACK JUMPERED TO PIN 1
BROWN
SLATE
7
3
2
Mod-8 to 25-Pin Connector
for Modem Connection
Figure 5-6 MAKING YOUR OWN DATA CABLES
Mod-8 to 9-Pin Connector
for PC/Laptop Connection
5-12
Section 6, SPECIFICATIONS AND PARTS LIST
In this section . . .
Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6-1
6. Specifications
and Parts
telemanuals.com
SPECIFICATIONS
System Capacities
Cabinets:
Talk Timeslots (Intercom/line):
Analog Trunks (CO/PBX lines):
Digital and/or Analog Telephones:
DSS Consoles:
Power Failure Telephones:
Door Boxes (digital):
External Paging Zones:
Internal Paging Zones:
1
Non-blocking
16
32
1 max. per keyset
4 (2 per 4ATRU PCB)
1 per digital station port
1 (1 per CPU)
8 (7 and All Call)
System Capacities
Conference Circuits
8ATRU Analog Trunk PCB:
16DSTU Digital Station PCB:
8ASTU Analog Station PCB:
CPU Central Processing Unit:
REJ Recording Jack Units
32 Conference circuits
dynamically allocated, with
8 parties max. per
Conference. Conference
circuits provided on CPU.
2
2
2
1
1 max. per keyset
Note: The 4-slot cabinet accepts a total of 32 stations maximum. This
total includes digital stations, analog stations and DSS consoles.
Do not exceed this maximum.
6-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Requirements
Meeting established environmental standards maximizes the
life of the system. Refer to the Standard Practices Manual for
further information. Be sure that the site is not:
1. In direct sunlight or in hot, cold or humid places.
2. In dusty areas or in areas where sulfuric gases are produced.
3. In places where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
4. In places where water or other fluids comes in contact with
the main equipment.
5. In areas near high-frequency machines or electric welders.
6. Near computers, telexes, microwaves, air conditioners, etc.
7. Near radio antennas (including shortwave).
Power Requirements
A dedicated 110 VAC 60 Hz circuit located within seven feet
of the cabinet is required. You should install a separate dedicated outlet for each cabinet.
Environmental Specifications
Cabinets and Key Telephones
Temperature: 0-45oC (32-113oF)
Humidity: 10-95% (non-condensing)
Door Box
Temperature: -20-60oC (-4-140oF)
Humidity: 10-95% (non-condensing)
Electrical Specifications
Power Supply:
4-Slot Output Power
4-Slot Input Current
4-Slot VA
4-Slot Kwh
4-Slot BTU
Grounding Requirements:
120 VAC ±- 10% @ 50-60 Hz
91 Watts @ 100% full load
1.50A @ 110 V
165
.165
563
12 AWG copper wire
6-3
6. Specifications
and Parts
SPECIFICATIONS
Mechanical Specifications
Equipment
4-Slot KSU
Non-display Keyset
Display Keyset
Super Display Keyset
DSS Console
Door Box
2-OPX Module
Width
10 3/4””
7 1/4”
7 1/4”
7 1/4”
7 7/8”
4”
9 3/8”
Depth
5 7/8””
9”
9”
9”
8 7/8”
1 1/2”
7 3/8”
Height
13 11/16”
2 7/8””
2 7/8”
2 7/8”
2 3/4”
5 3/16”
1 1/4”
ACI Module Input/Output
Weight
4 lbs 5 oz
1 lb 11 oz
1 lb 12 oz
1 lb 16 oz
1 lb 6 oz
10 oz
3 lbs
External Paging Contacts
Output Impedance:
Output Level:
Maximum Output:
Configuration:
600 Ohm
Nominal 250 mV (-10 dBm)
400 mV RMS
Normally open
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance:
47 KOhm @ 1Khz
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance:
Maximum Output:
600 Ohms @ 1 KHz
+3 dBm
Relay Contacts
Configuration:
Maximum Contact Ratings:
Minimum Application Load:
Normally Open
30 VDC @ 60 mA
90 VAC @ 10 mA
1 VDC @ 1 mA
External Paging
Output Impedance:
Output Level:
600 Ohm
0 dBr at 1.0 KHz
6-4
SPECIFICATIONS
BGM/MOH Music Source Input
Cabling Requirements
Input Impedance:
Input Level:
10K Ohms
+18 dBr (+/- 2 dBr) t 1.0
KHz
Music input is located on the CPU PCB.
FCC Registration Information
Model:
Manufacturer:
FCC Part 15 Registration:
FCC Registration Number:
Industry Canada
Certificate (DOC) Number
Reg.
Status
Original
1. Do not run station cable parallel with the AC source, telex or computer, etc. If the cables are near cable runs to those devices, use
shielded cable with grounded shields or install the cable in conduit.
2. When cables must be run on the floor, use cable protectors.
3. Cable runs for key telephones, single line telephones, Door Boxes
and 3-ACI Modules must be a dedicated, isolated cable pair.
Device
DS2000
Nitsuko
Class A
1ZDTHA27007-KF-E
1ZDTHA27044-MF-E
854 9522 A
Cable Type
Cable Run Length (ft)
2-wire 26 AWG
2-wire 24 AWG
1300
2000
3-ACI Module & 2-wire 24 AWG
3-DCI Module
2-wire 22 AWG
2000
2000
Single Line
Telephone
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
Key Telephone,
2-wire 26 AWG
2-wire 24 AWG
FIC
Mfrs. Port
Identifier
Ringer
Eq. Number
Network
Jacks
02LS2
80010
80011
0.6B
RJ11C
RJ21X
2-wire 22 AWG
Door Box
2-wire 24 AWG
2-wire 22 AWG
2000
2000
2-OPX
2-wire 24 AWG
1000
Notes
at constant 20 mA
at constant 35 mA
at constant 20 mA
at constant 35 mA
at constant 20 mA
at constant 35 mA
6-5
6. Specifications
and Parts
PARTS LIST
Station Equipment
Description
34-Button Super Display Telephone
34-Button Display Telephone
22-Button Telephone
22-Button Display Telephone
24-Button DSS Console
110-Button DSS Console
Wall Mount Kit
Analog Telephones (customer provided)
Common Equipment
Part Number
80673
80663
80570
80573
80556
80555
TBD
Description
4-Slot KSU
DS2000 Power Supply
Installation Cable
Blank PC Card
PC Card with system software preloaded
(**.** denotes the system software level)
8-Pin DIN to Mod-8 Cable
DB9 to Mod-8 Adaptor
DB25 to Mod-8 Adaptor
Spare KSU Hanger
Part Number
80000
80005
80892
85880
80050-V**.**
80893
85980
85981
80578
Peripheral Station Equipment
Description
2-OPX Module
Part Number
92177A
6-6
PARTS LIST
PCBs
Description
CPU Central Processing Unit
16DSTU Digital Station PCB
8ASTU 8 Port Analog Station PCB
4ASTU 4 Port Analog Station PCB
4ATRU 4 Port Analog Trunk PCB (loop start)
8ATRU 8 Port Analog Trunk PCB (loop start)
Replacement Parts
Part Number
80025
80021
80041
80040
80010
80011
Description
Handset and Cord Assembly
Handset Coil Cord - Black 6’
Handset Coil Cord - Black 9’
Handset Coil Cord - Black 13’
22 Btn Tel Plastic C.O. Cover
34 Btn Tel Plastic C.O. Cover
22 Btn Designation Strip
34 Btn Designation Strip
24-Button DSS Console Designation Strip
110-Button DSS Console Designation Strip
Part Number
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
6-7
6. Specifications
and Parts
— For Your Notes —
6-8
telemanuals.com
Nitsuko America, Telecom Division
4 Forest Parkway
Shelton, CT 06484
TEL: 203-926-5400
FAX: 203-929-0535
Other Important Telephone Numbers
Sales: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5450
Customer Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5444
Customer Service FAX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5454
Technical Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-925-8801
Discontinued Product Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .900-990-2541
Technical Training: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5430
Emergency Technical Service (After hours) . . . . . . . . . . .203-929-7920
(Excludes discontinued products)
Nitsuko Canada, Division of Nitsuko America
165 Matheson Blvd. E., Unit #4-6
Mississauga, Ontario Canada L4Z 3K2
TEL:
905-507-2888,
FAX:
905-507-2971
Th
6-9
co
4 Forest Parkway
Shelton, CT 06484
TEL: 203-926-5400 FAX: 203-929-0535
165 Matheson Blvd. E., Unit #4-6,
Mississauga, Ontario Canada L4Z 3K2
TEL: 905-507-2888 FAX: 905-507-2971
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement